Door and Frame - Technical Manual

Doors
and frames
Technical data manual 2016 rev. 8/15/16
Technical data manual
Main table of contents

NAVIGATE VIA: A) Rollover links in each TOC (each item below is a link), B) Bookmarks on the left,
C) Searching using Ctrl+F (PC) or Cmd+F (Mac), or D) Entering page numbers in the toolbar.
General information............................................... 3
Elevations.............................................................177
Steelcraft frame and door nomenclature......... 12
Architectural sticks...............................................183
Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Typical elevations...................................................191
Flush frames.......................................................25
Storm resistant opening.................................... 201
F Series...................................................................... 25
FN Series 1 flush face........................................... 29
MU Series multi-use.............................................. 33
FE Series double egress.........................................37
DE Series double egress........................................ 41
Drywall frames...................................................45
DW Series.................................................................. 45
K Series...................................................................... 49
Variations and options......................................53
Anchoring systems............................................79
Full flush doors.....................................................97
L Series.................................................................... 103
SL Series...................................................................107
Falcon SZ Series......................................................111
B Series......................................................................113
T Series...................................................................... 117
CE Series...................................................................121
Hurricane resistant opening............................. 203

Tornado resistant opening systems............... 225
Specialty products............................................ 239
Stainless steel doors and frames.................... 241
Sound openings................................................... 245
Thermal break frames........................................ 247
Hardware preparations...................................... 251
Doors.................................................................267
Locks........................................................................ 267
Exit devices............................................................. 272
Inactive leaves....................................................... 278
Closers.....................................................................285
Hinges..................................................................... 286
Frames............................................................. 287
Strikes...................................................................... 287
Hinges......................................................................294
A14 Series Full glass entrance doors...............125
Fire rated products.............................................297
Variations and options incl.

GRAINTECH.......................................................129
Three sided frames..............................................307
Lights and louvers.............................................. 159
Transom and side lights and/or panels.........335
Doors......................................................................... 317
Flush door glass lights.........................................163
Fire window frames..............................................341
Embossed door glass lights................................ 171
Smoke and draft control..................................... 347
A14 Series full glass entrance doors................ 172
Performance and finishes................................. 351
Louver prep.............................................................. 175
Architectural...................................................... 363
Errors and omissions

Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy and completeness of this Steelcraft Technical Manual. The information herein is subject to some
interpretation, and from time to time, the data sheets will be updated whenever it is deemed necessary as new tests are conducted, new products and
technologies are introduced and as specifications are revised. For these reasons, and because of the nature and scope of the subject, Steelcraft and its
employees can assume no responsibility or liability for the absolute accuracy of the material contained herein or its use. The information in this Technical
Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Steelcraft.
Contact information
Please contact the Steelcraft Technical Service Department for information or, if you identify an error or an omission.
Phone: (877) 671-7011
E-Mail: [email protected]
Steelcraft Technical Data Manual Book Rev. 8/15/16 Page Rev. 8/15/16
Technical data manual
This page intentionally left blank
General information
Table of contents (click below or use bookmarks)

General information...............................................5
Introduction.................................................................5
Standards....................................................................5
Dimensioning..............................................................5
Terminology.................................................................5
Literature......................................................................5
Errors and omissions................................................5
Technical publications...........................................6
SDI..................................................................................6
HMMA.......................................................................... 8
ANSI.............................................................................10
Handing procedures.............................................. 11
Frame and door nomenclature............................12
Typical hardware locations................................. 14
Doors and frames with 3 Hinges (112 Pair)....... 14
Doors and frames with 4 Hinges (2 Pair)......... 15
Doors and frames with 5 Hinges (212 Pair)...... 16
Dutch doors................................................................17
Comparative hinge and strike locations............ 18
Main TOC
Section TOC Main TOC
General information
Introduction
Introduction
After more than seven decades of quality, craftsmanship and
service leadership, Steelcraft continues to be recognized as the
worlds leading manufacturer of steel doors and frames.
Steelcraft manufactures the most complete line of steel doors and
frames. These products are produced from the highest quality of
commercial carbon steel or galvannealed steel as specified.
Steelcraft frames are designed for virtually all types of wall
construction. The flush frame is primarily intended for installation
as part of the wall framing system(s), while the Drywall Frames are
specifically designed for drywall construction.
Steelcraft also offers the broadest line of labeled (Fire Rated) doors
and frames for either Positive or Neutral fire test environments.
Steelcraft continues to be very active in assisting building code
officials in the adoption of more stringent and realistic codes for Fire
Doors and Frames.
The Steelcraft Architectural Stick System consists of standard
frame components that are pre-engineered for assembly and
fabrication by the local Steelcraft distributor. This allows for
unlimited opportunities to meet the architectural and aesthetic
needs of extensive window wall, store front and entrance units.
Steelcraft is devoted to the manufacture, service and continuous
improvement of steel doors, frames and their components. A
measure of this commitment can be found in the great number of
door and frame innovations that are now common in the industrypioneered, designed, developed, and in certain products, patented
by Steelcraft.
This Technical Manual is designed to provide Architects, Engineers,
Specification Writers, End Users and Distributors with the necessary
information to specify the correct Steelcraft product to meet
the application and functional needs of the project. In addition
to providing the industry with the highest quality of steel doors,
frames and components, Steelcraft offers the widest selection of
sizes, styles and designs to compliment virtually any architectural,
aesthetic, security or safety requirement.
supported by a clearly stated metric dimensional standard. All

critical, installation and functional tolerances will be in accordance
with the industry tolerance published in and by the Steel Door
Institute (SDI) and the Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
(HMMA).
Terminology
The terms covered in this manual are in accordance with those
published by:
SDI
HMMA
ANSI A250.7 Nomenclature for: Standard Steel
Doors and Steel Frames

HMMA 801-05 Glossary of Terms for Hollow Metal
Doors and Frames
Literature
Literature or standards referenced in this manual can be obtained
directly from the publisher of that literature. To obtain any standard
referenced in this manual, refer to the organizations listed.
Downloadable documents may be obtained by connecting to the
organizations website.
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
http://www.ansi.org
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
http://www.astm.org
CSI
Construction Specifications Institute
http://csinet.org
DHI
Door and Hardware Institute
http://www.dhi.org
HMMA

Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association

Division of NAAMM
NAAMM
http://www.naamm.org
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
Standards
http://www.naamm.org
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
Steelcraft is a long-standing and very involved member of several

training and industry organizations, which are also dedicated to
the continual improvement of the Commercial Door and Frame
Markets. Some of the major trade associations of which Steelcraft
is an active member include:
SDI
SDI
HMMA
DHI
Steel Door Institute

Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
The Door and Hardware Institute
UL
Steel Door Institute
http://www.steeldoor.org
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
http://www.ul.com
WH
Warnock Hersey (Intertek ETL SEMKO)
http://www.interteck.com
Dimensioning
All dimensions shown in this manual are based on the imperial
(feet and inches) dimensions system, with the equivalent metric
(millimeters) shown in parentheses. Steelcraft has and does supply
projects globally in both Imperial and Metric dimensioning. It is the
responsibility of the architect, specifier and purchaser of the doors
and frames to clearly indicate the dimensional system required
to be met. With the multitude of building components interfacing
with the door and frame installations, this is extremely critical and
requires a clearly stated and understood dimensioning policy.
Steelcraft Metric Policy

Jobs ordered in metric dimensions will be supplied to the actual
dimensions indicated on orders placed to Steelcraft. No dimensions
will be considered nominal, unless they are clearly indicated and
Main TOC Section TOC
http://www.nfpa.org
Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy and

completeness of this Steelcraft Technical Manual. This manual is
for use by qualified persons only. The information herein is subject
to some interpretation, and from time to time, the data sheets
will be updated whenever it is deemed necessary as new tests are
conducted, new products and technologies are introduced and
as specifications are revised. For these reasons, and because of
the nature and scope of the subject, Steelcraft and its employees
can assume no responsibility or liability for the absolute accuracy
of the material contained herein or its use. The information in this
Technical Manual is subject to change without notice and does not
represent a commitment on the part of Steelcraft.
Please contact the Steelcraft Technical Service Department if you
identify an error or omissions.
General information: Technical publications
SDI
SDI 106-99
Recommended Standard Door Type Nomenclature

This document contains Standard door type nomenclature
ranging from flush (Type F) to Dutch doors (Type D). The use
of the Standard nomenclature contained in the document
will greatly simplify architectural drawing takeoff process and
will do much to avoid confusion and errors which result from
misinterpretation of these details.
SDI Technical publications
SDI 108-04
Free downloads of these documents are available from

SDIs Website:
Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Standard Steel

Doors
This document was developed to establish guide criteria for
the selection and usage of standard steel doors in such building
types as apartment, dormitory, hotel/motel, hospital/nursing
home, industrial, office and school.
SDI 109-04
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames

This document contains a listing of hardware from various
hardware manufacturers that is compatible for use on standard
steel doors and frames. It covers various types of locks, exit
devices, closers, holders, hinges, roller latches, flush bolts, and
electric strikes.
SDI 110-84 (R2000)
Standard Steel Doors and Frames for Modular Masonry

Construction
This document contains information in respect to, as the title
indicates, the installation of standard steel doors and frames
in modular masonry construction. The basic module covered in
the document as developed by the industry is 4.
SDI 111-00
Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Standard Steel

Doors, Frames and Accessories (A through H):
SDI 111-A
Recommended Standard Steel Door Frame Details

Covers recommended steel door frame details as they are
affected by common wall conditions.
SDI 111-B
Recommended Standard Details for Dutch Doors

Standard dimensions for dutch doors.
SDI 111-C
Recommended Louver Details for Standard Steel Doors

This document discusses, explains and details a variety of
louver designs and size available for standard steel doors.
SDI 111-D
Recommended Door, Frame and Hardware Schedule for

Standard Steel Doors and Frames
Contains a suggested door, frame and hardware schedule form
and defines handing.
SDI 111-E
Recommended Guidelines for The Use of Gasketing and

Thresholds for Standard Steel Doors and Frames
Contains details which represent the recommendations of the
Listed here, and on the following page, are the current

Technical publications available from the Steel Door
Institute.
All documents in this list are part of the SDI Fact File.
SDI in respect to weather-stripping of standard steel doors and

frames.
SDI 111-F
Recommended Existing Wall Anchors for Standard Steel Doors

and Frames
A guide for architects to aid them in recognizing available
options to the traditional sub buck detail which has been widely
used in the past. It illustrates anchoring systems which are
available in regular and labeled frames.
SDI 111-G
Recommended Standard Preparation for Double Type

(Interconnected) Locks On Standard Steel Doors and Frames
Dimensions for standard door and frame preparation for double
type (interconnected) locks.
SDI 111-H
High Frequency Hinge Preparations for Frames

Specifications for steel frames used in extremely high frequency
or high use areas which need to be supplied with additional
reinforcing to eliminate potential door sag.
SDI 112-97
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors

and Frames
This document provides information regarding the galvanized
sheet used in standard steel door and frame construction when
a requirement for galvanized doors and frames is specified.
SDI 113-01
Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal

Transmittance of Steel Door and Frame Assemblies
This document establishes a minimum standard and a method
of test for thermal effectiveness of steel door and frame
assemblies under circumstances that might reasonably be
considered normal field applications and conditions.
SDI 117-00
Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames

This document is intended to furnish users and prospective
users of standard steel doors and frames with practical
information regarding mortise and manufacturing tolerances
for both doors and frames.
SDI 118-02
SDI
Basic Fire Door Requirements
This document contains rules and other information in a
condense simplified manner in respect to code requirements
for the design and use of fire doors.
SDI 122-99
Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel

Doors and Frames
This document covers field installation problems most
commonly experienced with standard steel door and frame
installations. Most problems encountered are because of
inappropriate application of the products and/or improper
installation.
Prime Painted Materials Alert

Industry Alerts - Prime Painted Materials Alert
SDI 127F-02
Butted Frames Rough Opening Sizes

Industry Alerts - Butted Frames Rough Opening Sizes
SDI 127G-02
Environmental Considerations Relating to Factory Painted Steel

Doors and Frames
Industry Alerts - Environmental Considerations Relating to
Factory Painted Steel Doors and Frames
SDI 127H-02
Water Penetration
Industry Alerts - Water Penetration
SDI 127I-04
Grouting Frames in Drywall

Industry Alerts - Grouting Frames in Drywall
SDI 127J-04
Bituminous Back-Coating of Frames

Industry Alerts - Bituminous Back-Coating of Frames
SDI 128-97
Guidelines for Acoustical Performance of Standard Steel Doors

and Frames
This document shall provide guidelines for the specifying,
designing, installing, and adjusting of standard steel doors and
frames in Sound Control applications.
SDI 124-98
Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors and Frames

This document is intended to serve as a general outline of
maintenance activities needed for hollow metal doors and
frames.
SDI 127 Series: Industry Alerts (A through J):
SDI 127A-99
End Closure Location

Industry Alerts - End Closure
SDI 127B-99
Door Edge Cutouts

Industry Alerts - Door Edge Cutouts
SDI 127C-99
Frame Cutout Limits

Industry Alerts - Frame Cutout Limits
SDI 127D-99
Electric Strikes In Stud Walls

Industry Alerts - Electric Strikes in Stud Walls
SDI 127E-01
SDI 129-04
Hinge and Strike Spacing

A reference of standard locations used in the manufacture of
steel door and frames by SDI member companies for a variety
of door sizes.
SDI 130-05
Electronic Hinge Preparations

Practical information regarding an acceptable method for
preparing frames for 4 12 electric hinges. This document will
allow frame manufacturers to provide frames prior to having
knowledge of the specific electric hinge being used.
SDI 131-04
Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel

Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors
This test procedure provides manufacturers with a method of
quickly testing the performance of doors.
Drywall Slip-On Frames
This document illustrates step by step how to install
Drywall Frames in less than 10 minutes. It also lists the many
advantages of drywall slip-on frames.
HMMA
HMMA 810-87
HMMA Technical publications

Listed here, and on the following page are the current
Technical publications available from the Hollow Metal
Manufacturers Association, a Division of the National
Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
the HMMA/NAAMM Website:
http://naamm.org/hmma/
HMMA 800-96
Introduction to Custom Hollow Metal

It is the purpose of this manual to provide authoritative and
unbiased technical information regarding the manufacture,
design and use of custom hollow metal doors and frames.
ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 801-05
Glossary of Terms for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

Defines commonly used terms in connection with Hollow
Metal Work as they specifically apply to hollow metal doors
and frames. These terms may be defined differently by other
industries.
HMMA 802-07
Manufacturing of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

This publication details the types of steel materials used and
fabrication processes, including shearing, blanking, brake
forming, limitations of break forming, welding and painting.
HMMA 803-97
Hollow Metal Doors

This document reviews basic sizes, types, designs and
construction of hollow metal doors.
HMMA 820-87
Hollow Metal Frames

This document details various elevation types, profiles,
assembly and anchoring of Knock-Down (KD) and welded
3-sided and multiple opening hollow metal frames.
HMMA 830-02
Hardware Selection for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

This publication is intended to acquaint the reader with
commonly used door hardware that provides both aesthetic
appeal and durable function.
HMMA 831-97
Hardware Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

Recommended locations for hardware on Custom Hollow Metal
doors differ from those established for Standard Hollow Metal
doors principally with respect to hinges, knobs and strikes.
HMMA 840-99
Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow

Metal Doors and Frames
A comprehensive review of the delivery, receiving, on-site
storage and installation of Knock-Down (KD) and welded
hollow metal frames and hanging of hollow metal doors.
HMMA 850-00
Fire Rated Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

Data on current practices within the industry are presented with
emphasis on the requirements of the National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA) and Model Codes. Fire testing, listing,
labeling and certification services are thoroughly covered.
Steel Tables
Values of minimum steel thicknesses taken from the
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. publication for gauge number
and equivalent thickness are shown. ASTM and ANSI do not list
gauge numbers in their standards which was the standard of
referral prior to 1970.
HMMA
Guide Specifications for Detention Security Hollow Metal Doors

and Frames
A CSI format specification intended as a guideline for the
development of, and editing of job specifications for the
application of specific job requirements related to Jails,
Prisons, Detention Centers, and Secured Areas in Hospitals or
Courthouses.
Guide Specifications for Swinging Sound Control Hollow Metal

Doors and Frames
application of specific job requirements related to Television,
Radio, Recording and Sound Studios, Theaters, and Music
Rooms.
HMMA 860-92
Guide Specifications for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

application of specific job requirements related to Apartment
Buildings, Dormitories, Military Barracks, and Motels.
HMMA 861-06
Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and

Frames
application of specific job requirements related to Schools,
Hospitals, Industrial Buildings, Office Buildings, Hotels, Nursing
Homes, Airports, and Convention Centers.
Guide Specifications for Commercial Security Hollow Metal

Doors and Frames
application of specific job requirements related to Exterior
Doors to Schools, Warehouses, Industrial Buildings, or Strip
Stores.
Guide Specifications for Stainless Steel Hollow Metal Doors

and Frames
application of specific job requirements related to the use of
Type 304 or 316 Stainless Steel for highly corrosive, moderately
corrosive or aesthetic applications.
Guide Specifications for Commercial Laminated Core Hollow

This specification presents the 2004 CSI Format (for the new
CSI location for hollow metal doors and frame products)
Master Format 2004 Section 08 11 13 and is intended
as a guideline for the development of, and editing of job
specifications for the application of specific job requirements
related to commercial, laminated core, steel doors, and
appropriate frame products
ANSI
A250.3-2007
Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for

Factory Applied Finish Coatings for Steel Doors and Frames
Prescribes the procedure to be followed in the selection of
material, chemical preparation, painting, testing, and evaluation
of factory applied finish painted steel surfaces for steel doors
and frames.
A250.4-2001
Test Procedures and Accepted Criteria for Physical

Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors and
Hardware Reinforcing
A standard method of testing the performance of a steel
door mounted in a pressed steel or channel iron frame under
condition that might be considered an accelerated field
operating conditions.
A250.6-2003
Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard

Steel Doors and Frames
Provides users of standard steel doors and frames with
practical information regarding accepted design methods
for reinforcing, and recommended practices for proper field
preparation and installation of builders hardware.
A250.7-1997 (R-2002)
Nomenclature for Standard Steel Doors and Steel Frames

Detailed definitions of terms common to the Standard Steel
Door and Steel Door Frame Industry.
A250.8-2003 (SDI-100)
Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and

Frames
This specification for swinging steel doors and frames offers a
number of choices in both regular and fire rated door and frame
constructions. The user must select from the specification
the specific grades of doors and frames that best apply to
the project. This specification covers sizes, types, materials,
general construction requirements and finishing of 1 34 extra
heavy duty steel doors, 1 34 heavy duty steel doors, 1 34 and
1 38 standard duty steel doors, together with frames and
accessories. They are intended to be standard items not subject
to variations.
A250.10-1998 (R2004)
ANSI Technical publications

Listed on this page are the current Technical
publications available from the American National
Standards Institute.
SDIs Website:
Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted

Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames
Procedures for the selection of material, chemical preparation,
painting, testing and evaluation of prime painted steel surfaces
for steel doors and frames.
A250.11-2001
Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames

This document includes information in respect to storage of
frames on the jobsite, grouting and back painting of frames
and assembly of frames. It contains instructions in respect to
bracing frames before wall construction and the installation of
frames in masonry, steel stud wall construction, wood stud wall
construction and drywall construction.
A250.13-2003
Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant

Components for Swinging Door Assemblies
This standard provides procedures for testing and establishing
load ratings (design load in pounds per square foot or pounds
force) for components of exterior swinging door assemblies. It
is the intent of this document to test the protection of openings
during severe windstorm conditions, such as a hurricane, that
produces sustained wind speeds or gusts in a range of 110 to
150 miles per hour as defined by ASCE 7-02. It is not intended to
simulate wind forces generated by tornadoes.
10
General information
Handing procedures
Handing procedures diagrams

To determine the hand of a door, view the door from the outside (the side that hinges are on is the hand of the door).
If the door swings away from the viewer, the hand is regular hand, i.e., right or left hand.
If the door swings to the viewer, the door is reverse swing, i.e., right hand reverse swing or left hand reverse swing.
All Steelcraft Doors and Frames are handed according to the following chart::
Left Hand Door (swing in)

Left Hand Frame
Right Hand Door (swing in)

Right Hand Frame
RH Lock
LH Lock
Inside
Inside
Outside
Outside
Key Side
RH Strike Jamb
RH Hinge Jamb
Right Hand Reverse Bevel Door (swing out)

Left Hand Frame
LH Strike Jamb
LH Hinge Jamb
Key Side
LH Hinge Jamb
Left Hand Reverse Bevel Door (swing out)

Right Hand Frame
RH Strike Jamb
RH Hinge Jamb
Inside
RHRB Lock
Inside
Outside
Outside
Key Side
Key Side
Outside
Inside
Inactive
Inside
Inactive
RH
Key Side Astragal
RH Hinge Jamb
LH Hinge Jamb
LH
Astragal
RH Lock
RH Active
Pair of Doors RHRB Active (swing out)

Double Door Frame LH Active
Pair of Doors LHRB Active (swing out)

Double Door Frame RH Active
Inside
LH Astragal
RH Hinge Jamb
LH Hinge Jamb
RH Hinge Jamb
Inside
RH Astragal
LH Hinge Jamb
Inactive
Inactive
Key Side
RH Hinge Jamb
Outside
Key Side
LH Lock
LH Active
Outside
LHRB Lock
Pair of Doors RH Active (swing in)

Double Door Frame RH Active
Pair of Doors LH Active (swing in)

Double Door Frame LH Active
LH Hinge Jamb
LH Strike Jamb
LHRB Lock
LHRB Active
RHRB Active
RHRB Lock
Outside
Key Side
K - indicates Key side of the active door
11
General information: Steelcraft nomenclature
Frames
Frame nomenclature
Notes:
Steelcraft frames are described and marked with easy to follow

product identification nomenclature. The markings identify the
frames by frame series, gauge (decimal and metric), fire rating,
door thickness, overall depth, door opening height/width,
hardware preps, component and handing.
The following is a brief guide to the nomenclature used by
Steelcraft: F 16 UL 4 5 3/4 70 SJ R
F 16 UL 4 5 34
1. The nomenclature designation shown on this page is for

education, example and reference only.
2. Refer to the individual Technical Data Manual sheets to
develop options related to the specific frame series.
3. Refer to the hardware section of this manual for preps and
nomenclature not covered on this sheet.
70 SJ R ASA
STRIKE PREP
ASA = 4 78 (124mm) Strike With Lip
CYL
= 2 34 (70 mm) Strike With Lip
RPD = Rim Exit Device Reinf.
VPD = Vertical Rod Exit Device Reinf.
SPCL = Special Strike Application
HANDING
R
= Right Hand
L
= Left Hand
D
= Double Door
DR
= Double Door, Right Hand Active
DL
= Double Door, Left Hand Active
COMPONENT
SJ
= Strike Jamb
HJ
= Hinge Jamb
HD
= Head
DOOR OPENING HEIGHT / WIDTH
Designated In Feet and Inches
68
= 68 (2032 mm)
70
= 70 (2134 mm)
30
= 30 (914 mm)
JAMB DEPTH
5-3/4 = In 18 (3 mm) Increments
DOOR THICKNESS
4
= 1 34 (45 mm)
8
= 1 38 (35 mm)
CO
= Cased Open Frame Profile
FIRE RATING
UL
= Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
WH
= Warnock Hersey (Intertek ETL SEMKO)
GAUGE OF STEEL
16
= 16 gauge [ 0.053 (1.3 mm)]
14
= 14 gauge [ 0.067 (1.7 mm)]
12
= 12 gauge [ 0.093 (2.3 mm)]
FRAME TYPE
DE
= Double Egress: 2 step jambs
DW
= Drywall (Adjustable Base Anchor)
F
= Flush 2 (51 mm) face
FE
= Double Egress: 3 step jambs
FN
= Flush 1 (25 mm) face
FP
= Paladin
K
= Drywall (Screw Base Anchor)
MU
= Multiple Use 2 (51 mm) face
12
General information: Steelcraft nomenclature
Doors
Door nomenclature
Notes:
Steelcraft doors are described and marked with easy to follow

product identification nomenclature. The markings identify the
doors by door series, gauge (decimal and metric), fire rating,
door thickness, width, height, glass design, hand and lock preps.
The following is a brief guide to the nomenclature used by
Steelcraft: L 18 UL 4 30 70 F R 61L
L 18 UL 4 30 70 F R 61L
1. The nomenclature designation shown on this page is for

education, example and reference only.
2. Refer to the individual Technical Data Manual sheets to
develop options related to the specific door series.
3. Refer to the hardware section of this manual for preps and
nomenclature not covered on this sheet.
4. Refer to the lights and louvers section for additional
information.
LOCK PREP
161 =
61L =
86 =
86ED =
RPD =
VRPD =
SPCL =
Cylindrical Knob (Bored) Lock Prep

Cylindrical Lever (Bored) Lock Prep
Mortise Lock Prep
Mortise Lock Edge Prep
Rim Exit Device
Vertical Rod Exit Device
Special Lock Application
HANDING
R
L
RHR
LHR
DR
DL
=
=
=
=
=
=
Right Hand
Left Hand
Right Hand Reverse
Left Hand Reverse
Double Door, Right Hand Active
Double Door, Left Hand Active
DOOR TYPE
F
G
V
N
FG
FG2
=
=
=
=
=
=
Full Flush: No Light

Half Glass Light
Vision Light
Narrow Light
Full Glass
Full Glass 2 Lights
NOMINAL DOOR OPENING: HEIGHT

68
70
= 68 (2032 mm)
= 70 (2134 mm)
NOMINAL DOOR OPENING: WIDTH

30
= 30 (914 mm)
DOOR THICKNESS
4
= 1 34 (45 mm)
FIRE RATING
UL = Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
WH = Warnock Hersey (Intertek ETL SEMKO)
GAUGE (Thickness of Metal Face Panel)

20
18
16
14
=
=
=
=
20 gauge [ 0.032 (0.8 mm)]

18 gauge [ 0.042 (1.0 mm)]
16 gauge [ 0.053 (1.3 mm)]
14 gauge [ 0.067 (1.7 mm)]
DOOR TYPE
A
= Full glass entrance door construction
B
= Steel stiffened door construction with edge seams
CE = Embossed door construction with edge seams
H
= Hurricane door with edge seams
HE = Hurricane door with embossed door panels
L
= Laminated door construction with edge seams
PW = Paladin: tornado door construction with welded hinge
and lock seams
SL = Laminated door construction with edge seams,
non-handed (square edge)
SZ = Falcon non handed (square edge) laminated door
T
= Temperature Rise Rated door construction with edge seams
TH = Temperature Rise Rated door with hurricane door construction
LF/BF/CF/TF/HF = L, B, CE, T, or H Series with filled hinge and lock edge
LW/BW/TW/HW = L, B, T, or H Series with welded hinge and lock edge
13
General information: Typical hardware locations
Doors and frames
3 Hinges (1 12 Pair)
9-5/8"
(244mm)
9-3/4"
(248mm)
Net
Door
Height
Finished
Opening
Height
39 - 9/16 for cylindrical locks

39 - 3/16 for mortise locks
40-5/16"
(1024mm)
9-5/8"
(244mm)
10-3/8"
(264mm)
3/4 (19mm) to bottom of frame
TYPICAL FRAME ELEVATION
TYPICAL DOOR ELEVATION
Typical Hardware Preps: Table 1
Notes
Door opening height
Dimension A
68 (2032mm)
29-15/16 (760mm)
1. 3 hinges (1-1/2 pair) are standard on 68, 70, 72, and 76

openings
70 (2134mm)
31-15/16 (811mm)
72 (2184mm)
32-15/16 (837mm)
76 (2286mm)
34-15/16 (887mm)
2. Steelcraft standard locations: hardware preps (hinge and lock) with

standard 3/4 undercut are located as illustrated above and as noted in
Table 1.
3. Special door undercuts: hardware locations shown from the bottom of
the door will be adjusted accordingly. Locations will be held from the top
of the door.
4. Special door heights: special door heights are available. Dimension A
will vary accordingly.
5. Refer to the Hardware section of this manual for all hardware locations
and most prep details.
14
Doors and frames
4 Hinges (2 Pair)
9-3/4"
(248mm)
9-5/8"
(244mm)
Finished
Opening B
Height
Net
Door B
Height

40-5/16"
(1024mm)
9-5/8"
(244mm)

Door opening height
Dimension B
68 (2032mm)
19-61/64 (507mm)
70 (2134mm)
21-19/64 (541mm)
72 (2184mm)
21-61/64 (558mm)
76 (2286mm)
23-19/64 (592mm)
78(2337mm)
23-61/64 (608mm)
710 (2388mm)
24-5/8 (625mm)
80 (2438mm)
25-19/64 (643mm)
82 (2489mm)
25-61/64 (659mm)
84 (2540mm)
26-5/8 (676mm)
86 (2591mm)
27-19/64 (693mm)
88 (2642mm)
27-61/64 (710mm)
810 (2692mm)
28-5/8 (727mm)
90 (2743mm)
29-19/64 (744mm)
92 (2794mm)
29-61/64 (761mm)
94 (2845m)
30-5/8 (778mm)
96 (2896mm)
31-19/64 (795mm)
98 (2946mm)
31-61/64 (812mm)
910 (2997mm)
32-5/8 (829mm)
100 (3048mm)
33-19/64 (846mm)

Notes
1. 4 hinges (2 pair) are standard on openings over 76 in height and up to and
including 100 in height.
2. Steelcraft standard locations: hardware preps (hinge and lock) with
standard 3/4 undercut are located as illustrated above and as noted in
Table 2.
3. Special door undercuts: hardware locations shown from the bottom of the
door will be adjusted accordingly. Locations will be held from the top of the
door.
4. Special door heights: special door heights are available. Dimension B will
vary accordingly.
5. Refer to the Hardware section of this manual for all hardware locations and
most prep details.
15
Doors and frames
5 Hinges (2 12 Pair)
9-3/4"
(248mm)
9-5/8"
(244mm)
C
C
C
C
Finished
Opening
Height
Net
Door
Height
C
C
40-5/16"


Door opening height
Dimension C
102 (3049mm)
25-15/32 (647mm)
104 (3154mm)
25-31/32 (660mm)
106 (3200mm)
26-15/32 (672mm)
108 (3251mm)
26-31/32 (685mm)
1010 (3302mm)
27-15/32 (698mm)
110 (3353mm)
27-31/32 (710mm)
16

Notes
1. 5 hinges (2-1/2 pair) are standard on openings over 100 in height.
2. Steelcraft standard locations: hardware preps (hinge and lock) with standard
3/4 undercut are located as illustrated above and as noted in Table 3.
3. Special door undercuts: hardware locations shown from the bottom of the
door will be adjusted accordingly. Locations will be held from the top of the
door.
4. Special door heights: special door heights are available. Dimension C will
vary accordingly.
5. Refer to the Hardware section of this manual for all hardware locations and
most prep details.
Doors
Dutch
9-3/4"
(248mm)
9-5/8"
(244mm)
9-5/8"
(244mm)
Finished
Opening
Height
Net
Door
Height
19-7/16"
(494mm)
23-7/8"
(606mm)
36-5/8"
(937mm)
3/16"
(5mm)
9-5/8"
(244mm)
23-7/8"
(606mm)
35-7/8"
(905mm)
43-1/8"
(1095mm)
10-3/8"
(264mm)
9-5/8"
(244mm)
DUTCH DOOR ELEVATION
Notes
1. 4 hinges (2 pair) are standard on dutch door openings.
Door opening height
Dimension D
Dimension E
68 (2032mm)
16-9/16 (421mm)
35-13/16 (910mm)
70 (2134mm)
20-9/16 (522mm)
39-13/16 (1011mm)
72 (2184mm)
22-9/16 (573mm)
41-13/16 (1062mm)
2. Steelcraft standard locations: hardware preps (hinge and

lock) with standard 3/4 undercut are located as illustrated
above and as noted in Table 4.
3. Special door undercuts: hardware locations shown
from the bottom of the door will be adjusted accordingly.
Locations will be held from the top of the door.
4. Special door heights: special door heights are available.
Dimensions D and E will vary accordingly.
5. Fire Rated dutch doors: additional locking hardware is
required. Refer to the Fire Rated section of this manual.
6. Refer to the Hardware section of this manual for all
hardware locations and most prep details.
17
General information: Comparative hinge and strike locations
Doors and frames
(D) Hinge Spacing
(D) Hinge Spacing
B
Strike Location
Opening Height
Comparative hinge and strike locations
3/4 (19mm) undercut
Notes
A. See page 19 for foot/inch Comparative Hinge and Strike
Locations for 1-3/4 Doors and Frames with 4-1/2 x
4-1/2Hinges.
DOOR & FRAME BACKSETS

Frame
F = Frame
Hinge
Backset
B. See page 20 for metric Comparative hinge and strike

locations for 45mm Doors and Frames with 114mm x 114mm
Hinges.
C. Dimensions for hinge and strike locations of the SDI
Manufacturers shown on pages 19 and 20 are to the
centerline of the preparation.
Hinge
J
K = Door
Hinge
Backset
Door
1-3/4 (45mm)
18
Doors and frames
Comparative hinge and strike locations for 1 34 Doors and frames

with 4 12 x 4 12 hinges
Manufacturer
A
Height
Strike
Bottom
hinge
Centerline
from floor
Centerline
from floor
Steelcraft
68
70
72
710
80
40-5/16
10-3/8
Amweld
68
70
72
710
80
40-5/16
10-3/8
10-3/8
12-3/8
8-5/16
10-5/16
Ceco
68
70
72
710
80
68
70
72
710
80
41-13/16
40
12-1/4
12-1/4
12-1/4
12-1/8
12-1/4
68
70
72
710
80
40-5/16
12-1/4
68
70
72
710
80
68
70
72
710
80
40-5/16
Republic
68
70
72
710
8 0
40-5/16
12-1/4
Security metal
products
68
70
72
710
80
40-5/16
12-1/4
Curries
Deansteel
Mesker
Pioneer
38
12-1/4
12-1/4
12-1/4
10-1/4
12-1/4
12-1/4
12-1/4
12-1/4
12-5/16
12-1/4
Frame
Hinge spacing
Top hinge
Hinge
backset
Bottom
hinge
J
Door
Top hinge Inset
(reveal)
Centerline
to door
bottom
Centerline
to top of
door
Centerline to centerline Centerline from

underside of
head
2 @ 29-15/16
2 @ 31-15/16
2 @ 32-15/16
3 @ 24-5/8
3 @ 25-19/64
2 @ 29-15/16
2 @ 31-15/16
2 @ 31-15/16
3 @ 25-15/16
3 @ 25-15/16
2 @ 31
2 @ 33
2 @ 34
3 @ 25-21/64
3 @ 26
2 @ 30-1/4
2 @ 32-1/4
2 @ 33-1/4
3 @ 24-7/8
3 @ 25-1/2
2 @ 30-1/4
2 @ 32-1/4
2 @ 33-1/4
24-7/8- 24-3/4- 24-7/8
3 @ 25-1/2
2 @ 30-1/4
2 @ 32-1/4
2 @ 33-1/4
3 @ 25-1/2
3 @ 25-1/2
2 @ 30-1/4
2 @ 32-1/4
2 @ 33-1/4
3 @ 24-13/16
3 @ 25-1/2
2 @ 30-1/4
2 @ 32-1/4
2 @ 33-1/4
3 @ 24-53/64
3 @ 25-1/2
2 @ 30-1/4
2 @ 32-1/4
2 @ 33-1/4
3 @ 24-53/64
3 @ 25-1/2
K
Hinge
backset
9-3/4
5/16
9-5/8
9-5/8
1/8
1/4
9-3/4
5/16
9-5/8
9-5/8
11-5/8
7-9/16
9-9/16
9-5/8
1/16
3/16
5/16
8-1/4
8-7/8
1/8
1/4
7-1/4
5/16
11-5/8
11-5/8
11-5/8
11-1/2
11-5/8
7-1/8
1/8
1/4
7-1/4
5/16
11-1/2
7-1/8
1/8
1/4

7-1/4
5/16
11-1/2
11-1/2
11-1/2
9-1/2
11-1/2
7-1/8
1/8
1/4
7-1/4
5/16
11-5/8
11-5/8
11-5/8
11 11/16
11-5/8
7-1/8
3/32
7/32
7-1/4
5/16
11-1/2
7-1/8
1/8
1/4
7-1/4
3/8
11-1/2
7-1/8
1/16
1/4
All dimensions are current at the time of publication. Refer to SDI-129 for updated dimensions.
19
Doors and frames
Comparative hinge and strike locations for 45mm doors and

frames with 114mm x 114mm hinges (metric dimensions)
Manufacturer
Height
B
Strike
Centerline
from floor
Bottom
hinge
Hinge spacing
Centerline
from floor
Steelcraft
2032mm 1024mm
2134mm
2184mm
2388mm
2438mm
264mm
Amweld
2032mm 1024mm
2134mm
2184mm
2388mm
2438mm
264mm
264mm
314mm
211mm
253mm
Ceco
2032mm 1062mm
2134mm
2184mm
2388mm
2438mm
229mm
Curries
2032mm 1016mm
2134mm
2184mm
2388mm
2438mm
311mm
311mm
311mm
308mm
311mm
Deansteel
2032mm 1024mm
2134mm
2184mm
2388mm
2438mm
311mm
Mesker
2032mm 1024mm
2134mm
2184mm
2388mm
2438mm
311mm
311mm
311mm
260mm
311mm
Pioneer
2032mm 965mm
2134mm
2184mm
2388mm
2438mm
311mm
311mm
311mm
313mm
311mm
Republic
2032mm 1024mm
2134mm
2184mm
2388mm
2438mm
311mm
Security metal
products
2032mm 1024mm
2134mm
2184mm
2388mm
2438mm
311mm
Frame
E
Top hinge
Centerline to centerline Centerline from

underside of
head
2 @ 760mm
2 @ 811mm
2 @ 837mm
3 @ 625mm
3 @ 643mm
2 @ 760mm
2 @ 811mm
2 @ 811mm
3 @ 643mm
3 @ 643mm
2 @ 787mm
2 @ 838mm
2 @ 864mm
3 @ 643mm
3 @ 660mm
2 @ 768mm
2 @ 819mm
2 @ 845mm
3 @ 632mm
3 @ 648mm
2 @ 768mm
2 @ 819mm
2 @ 845mm
3 @ 630mm
3 @ 648mm
2 @ 768mm
2 @ 819mm
2 @ 845mm
3 @ 631mm
3 @ 648mm
2 @ 768mm
2 @ 819mm
2 @ 845mm
3 @ 630mm
3 @ 648mm
Hinge
backset
Bottom
hinge
Top hinge
Centerline
to door
bottom
Centerlineto
top of door
248mm
8mm
244mm
248mm
8mm
244mm
244mm
295mm
192mm
243mm
229mm
8mm
210mm
184mm
8mm
295mm
295mm
295mm
292mm
295mm
8mm
292mm
184mm
8mm
292mm
292mm
292mm
241mm
292mm
184mm
8mm
295mm
295mm
295mm
297mm
295mm
184mm
8mm
292mm
184mm
10mm
292mm
2 @ 768mm
2 @ 819mm
184mm
2 @ 845mm
632mm - 629mm 632mm
3 @ 648mm
2 @ 768mm
2 @ 819mm
2 @ 845mm
3 @ 648mm
3 @ 648mm
Inset
(reveal)
Hinge
backset
3.2mm
6.4mm
1.6mm
4.7mm
3.2mm
6.4mm
3.2mm
6.4mm
3.2mm
6.4mm
3.2mm
6.4mm
2.4mm
5.6mm
3.2mm
6.4mm
1.6mm
6.4mm
Door
244mm
244mm
225mm
181mm
181mm
181mm
181mm
181mm
181mm
All dimensions are current at the time of publication. Refer to SDI-129 for updated dimensions.
20
Frames

General Information.............................................23
F and FN Series frame construction
Flush frames..........................................................25
F Series...................................................................... 25
FN Series 1 flush face........................................... 29
MU Series multi-use.............................................. 33
FE Series double egress.........................................37
Drywall frames......................................................45
DW Series.................................................................. 45
K Series...................................................................... 49
Frames: Variations and options..........................53
Frames: Anchoring systems................................79
F
FN
Double
rabbet
F
FN
F
FN
Single
rabbet
Cased
open
MU Series frame construction

MU
Double
rabbet
MU
MU
Narrow
double
Cased
open
FE and DE Series double egress frame construction

Head
Jambs
Jambs
FE Double egress
Head
DE Double egress
DW and K Series frame construction

DW
K
Double
rabbet
Main TOC
DW
K
Narrow
Double
rabbet
DW
Cased
open
Steelcraft Technical Data Manual Book Rev. 8/15/16 Section Rev. 8/15/16 Page Rev. 5/31/15
21
Frames
22
General Information
General frame information
Steel frames
Steelcraft framing systems are designed to fit virtually all

construction requirements for commercial and institutional
building applications. Their construction, durability and
flexibility have been proven throughout the world in both
operation and physical testing of all types.
Three sided steel frames are furnished in three pieces (two

jambs and a head) which are anchored to the wall systems. The
most common 3-sided frame components are:
The F, FN, FE, DE, and MU Series frames are designed for
installation as part of the wall framing sequence, and installed
in interior and exterior applications. When installed, this frame
series will either wrap or butt up against the wall construction.
Anchoring will be either into the masonry wall, or to the stud
wall framing systems.
The DW and K Series frames are designed for interior
application and for installation in rough openings after the wall
is erected and finished. They can be installed in minutes and
can be relocated without damage to the frame. When installed,
this frame series will wrap the wall construction. Anchorage will
be compression fit to the stud systems.
Sizes and performance

All framing systems are manufactured and supplied to meet the
dimensional standards and performance levels as published in
ANSI A250.8-2003 (commonly referred to as SDI 100).
Special size products are available to meet the unique
construction, performance and aesthetic requirements of
the Architectural community. Contact Steelcraft for those
requirements.
Usage and application

To help simplify the use, selection and specification of
Steelcraft framing systems, the following guidelines for base
material selection can be used:
Material gauge: the following material thicknesses are
available:
1. Hinge jamb: vertical frame member on which the door is

hinged. [For double doors (pairs), there are two hinge jambs
and no strike jamb].
2. Strike jamb: vertical frame member into which the door
latches. [For double doors (pairs), there is no strike jamb,
but there are two hinge jambs].
3. Head: horizontal frame member which connects the jambs.
How they are supplied

The connecting corners of the 3-piece frame include precision
factory die miters with interlocking tabs and corner clips. The
corner miters are specially designed to insure a tight closed
corner connection when assembled and installed properly.
There are two methods of furnishing 3-sided frames to the job
site:
Knock Down (KD): Frames are supplied in 3 pieces for

assembly prior to installation at the job site by the installing
contractor. This is an economical method of supplying the
frames, and at the job site, there is less space consumed in
staging the products, easier job site movement of material,
and, usually less damage to the frame prior to installation.
Set-Up and welded: Prior to arriving at the job site, the

3-sided frame (with factory miters) is assembled (at the
distributors fabrication location, or by Steelcraft). The
miters are welded (in accordance with ANSI A250.8-2003),
finished and supplied to the job site ready for installation.
Welded frames are shipped to the job site with temporary
shipping bars attached. The temporary shipping bars
must be removed prior to installation. When installing
frames, the temporary shipping bars must not be used as
spreader bars or installation bracing.
16 gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]: for Heavy Duty Commercial

and Institutional applications with high use.
Job site storage
14 gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]: for Extra Heavy Duty

Commercial and Institutional applications with the potential
of very high use.
12 gauge [0.093 (2.3mm)]: for Maximum Duty Commercial

and Institutional applications with extremely high use.
Frames shall be stored under cover on 4 (101.6mm) wood sills,

on the floor, in a manner to avoid contact with moisture, and
to prevent rust and damage. Only use vented plastic or canvas.
The use of no-vented materials, create a humidity chamber,
which promotes blistering and corrosion. Assembled frames
shall be stored in a vertical position, five (5) units maximum in
a stack. Provide a 1/4 (6.3mm) space between the frames to
provide air circulation.
Material selection: in addition to the thickness of base

material, the following base material types of metal are
available:
Commercial quality cold rolled steel conforming to ASTM

specifications A1008, A568, and A569 is commonly used on
interior openings.
Galvannealed Steel conforming to ASTM specification A653
is recommended for use on exterior openings or for interior
locations where high humidity is present.
Installation
Proper frame installation is critical for reliable door and
hardware functionality. To insure proper fit, function and
reliability, install all frames in accordance with ANSI A250.11
and HMMA 840.
23
Frames
General Information
Profile terminology
Typical Frame
The frame profile has specific terminology related to each

surface. Their jamb depth describes the frame size required.
It is critical that the throat opening of the frame be compatible
with the wall to which it will be attached.
Head
Double rabbet: standard profile

Jamb Depth
Stop
Face
Backbend
Rabbet
Soffit
Rabbet
Back Bend Returns Are

Provided on MU, DW, and
K Series Frames
Throat Opening
Backbend
Profile variations
Steel frames are supplied standard as double rabbet. To
accommodate various application needs, the frame profile (in
any frame series) can change. Some of the typical variations
are as follows:
Single rabbet: Jamb depths below 4-1/2
(114mm) are single rabbet due to the
dimensional limitations of the profile. Some
specifications will require single rabbet profiles
on frames over 4-1/2 (114mm) in jamb depth.
Profile as shown will vary on MU, DW, andK
Series frames, refer to the appropriatedata
sheets.
Cased open: Used for double acting doors
(swinging in both directions), sliding doors,
bi-fold doors or frames used to close-off an
opening in a wall when a door is not required.
Double egress: This is a frame specifically
designed for cross corridor applications where
traffic control is required. This frame is not
available in the Drywall Series (DW and T) or
Multi-Use Series (MU).
Hinge Jamb
Anchors
Frames must be anchored to the applicable wall construction.
Wall construction at door openings must be of sufficient
construction to support commercial or institutional grade steel
doors and frames. Refer to the appropriate frame data sheets
since anchor types will vary with frame constructions and noted
in this manual. Basic guidelines is as follows:
Flush frames:
Base anchors: one located at the bottom of each jamb
Jamb anchors: Locate anchors near each hinge location

in both hinge and strike jambs. Transom frames require
additional anchors above the top hinge.
Head anchors: For wide frame openings usually over 60 in

width, an anchor located in the center of the frame head is
recommended
Drywall frames:
Base anchors: two (2) located at the bottom ofeach jamb
24
Strike Jamb
Jamb anchors: Drywall frame includes an adjustable

compression anchor near the top of each jamb
Flush frames
F Series
Features and benefits
Steelcraft F Series flush frames offer the following unique
features, which enhance long term functionality and durability:
1. Die-mitered corner connections: Die-mitered corner
connection at the head and jamb insure an attractive, tight
and closed mitered connection. The miter includes 4 corner
tabs designed with concealed connection eliminating the
need for continuous profile welding.
2. Patented universal hinge preparations allow for easy
field conversion from standard weight .134 (3.3mm) thick
hinges to heavy weight .180 (4.7mm) hinges.
3. Adjustable base anchors allow for installation adjustment
when the floor is not level.
4. Factory prepared for field installed silencers.
5. Factory applied baked on rust inhibiting primer in
accordance with ANSI A250.10-1998 (R2004).
About the product

F Series 3-sided flush frames are designed to meet
requirements for light to maximum duty applications in both
commercial and institutional buildings. They are installed in
both interior and exterior locations, and in virtually all types
of buildings and wall constructions. These frames are to be
installed as part of the wall framing sequence. They canbe
specified and supplied as KD (knock-down) for field assembly
prior to installation or welded for installation asa complete unit.
Installation
Specification compliance
1. Overall frame construction for the Steelcraft F Series flush
frames meets the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2003
(commonly referred to as SDI-100).
2. Hardware preparations and reinforcements are in
accordance with ANSI A250.6-2003. Locations are in
accordance with ANSI/DHI A115.
Fire ratings
The F Series flush frames meet the broadest fire rating
requirements. They are listed for installations requiring
compliance to both neutral pressure testing (ASTM E152 and
UL 10B) and positive pressure standards (UL 10C). Refer to the
Fire Rated Section of this manual for particular listings.
1. Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft

installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2001 (formerly SDI
105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel
Frames and HMMA 840.

2. Fire Rated Assemblies must be in accordance with NFPA
Pamphlet 80. The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the
final authority in issues related to the installation and use of
installed Fire Rated Doors.
Applications
F Series frames are typically installed in wall construction types
as defined in the chart below:
Frame applications
Profile
Steel thickness
Wall construction
Typical wall anchors
F16
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Wood or steel stud
Lock-in stud anchor
F16
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Masonry
Wire masonry
F16
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Existing masonry
Bolted through soffit
F14
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
Wood or steel stud
Lock-in stud anchor
F14
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
Masonry
Wire masonry
F14
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
Existing masonry
F12
12 Gauge [0.093 (2.3mm)]
Wood or steel stud
Lock-in stud anchor
F12
12 Gauge [0.093 (2.3mm)]
Masonry
Wire masonry
F12
12 Gauge [0.093 (2.3mm)]
Existing masonry
25
Flush frames
F Series
Elevation
2
(50 mm)
2
(50 mm)
Standard Double Rabbet Frame

2
(50 mm)
Finished Opening Width
*1/2 (13 mm)

1-9/16
(40 mm)
Optional 14 gauge closer reinforcement
9-3/4
(248 mm)
Throat
Opening
HINGE
Jamb
Depth
Varies
1-15/16
(49 mm)
Equal
*1/2 (13 mm)
Finished
Opening
Height
5/8 (16 mm)

3/4 (19 mm)
for F12
Opening Width
2
(50 mm)
Single Rabbet Frame
STRIKE
HINGE
*1/2 (13 mm)
Varies
Equal
Jamb
Depth
Throat
Opening
40-5/16
(1024 mm)
1-15/16
(49 mm)
*1/2 (13 mm)
5/8 (16 mm)
HINGE
Opening Width
2
(50 mm)
10-3/8
(264 mm)
* 7/16 (11mm) on 5-3/4 frame depth
Frame sizing options

Series
Maximum opening size
Single
F16
F14
F12
Pair
50 x
110(1524mm x
100 x
110(2439mm x
3353mm)
3353mm)
40 x 80(1
80 x
80(2438mm x
219mm x 2438mm)
Jamb depth availability(profile)
Single rabbet
Double rabbet
Standard profile
dimensions(variations
available)
Face
Stop
Return
Minimum
Maximum
Minimum
Maximum
20
4-1/2
20
5/8
1/2*
(76mm)
(508mm)
(114mm)
(508mm)
(50mm)
(16mm)
(13mm)
N/A
N/A
4-3/4
14-3/4
3/4
1/2
(121mm)
(375mm)
(50mm)
(19mm)
(13mm)
2438mm)
Corners
Standard
DIE MITERED
with four (4)
concealed tabs
interlocking
head and jambs
Square cut
for welded
corners
* Except 5-3/4 (146mm) depth, which is 7/16 (11mm) N/A - Not Available12 gauge standard profile is equal rabbet
26
Flush frames
F Series
Universal Mortise Hinge Prep
4-7/8 Strike Prep (ASA)
4-1/2 Standard
(114mm)
5 Optional
(127mm)
KD Corner Detail
Welded Corner
4-7/8
(124mm)
7 Gauge Hinge Reinforcement
General notes
Optional 4 (102mm)
Face Head Detail
1. Variations in jamb depths available in 1/8 (3mm) increments.

2. All F Series frames are supplied standard with masonry wire or lock-in jamb anchors and
adjustable base anchors. Anchors are designed for maximum wall/frame engagement and
installation flexibility.
3. F Series frames are to be installed as part of the wall framing sequence.
4. Depending on environmental and usage conditions the steel can be either cold rolled or
galvannealed. Galvannealed steel is recommended for all exterior applications.
5. 12 gauge flush frames, F12, are standard equal rabbet profiles with 3/4 stops.
6. For KD Corner and optional 4 Head, tabs in rabbeted area should be bent outward, not
inward, during assembly (as shown).
7. F Series frames with 4 heads are mainly used in masonry applications when 2 face heads
do not match course blocking.
Frame options
4 (102mm) heads
Corner connections
Series
Frame profile
Single rabbet
F16
F14
F12
Typically for
walls less than
3-3/4 (95mm)
thick. Minimum
walls thickness
2 (51mm)
KD (Knock-down)
SUA (Set-up & weld)
Double rabbet
Single rabbet
Double rabbet
Single rabbet
Typically for
walls less
than 3-3/4
(95mm)
thickness or
greater
3 interlocking
corner tabs
per factory
die-miter.
See the KD
Corner Detail
4 interlocking
corner tabs
per factory
die-miter. See
the KD Corner
Detail
Available when specified, and in

accordance with ANSI A250.82003 (SDI 100).
Die-mitered for use with 2

(51mm) face double rabbet
jambs. Available when specified
for KD or SUA applications.
N/A
N/A
Standard Saw Cut and welded,

and in accordance with ANSI
A250.8-2003 (SDI 100)
For use with 2 (51mm) face

double rabbet jambs.
N/A
Double rabbet
N/A - Not Available
27
Flush frames
F Series
Wire Masonry Anchor
Adjustable Base Anchor
Existing Wall Anchor
Attached with S.M. screws furnished
Maximum adjustment
1-3/8 (35mm) below frame
3/16 (5mm) dia. wire
Anchor for Wood Stud Partition

Lock-in Anchor
Anchoring and installation notes

1. F16 and F14 Series commercial and Institutional frames are supplied standard
with masonry wire or lock-in jamb anchors and adjustable base anchors. Anchors
are designed for maximum wall/frame engagement and installation flexibility.
2. For anchoring applications, refer to the Frames: Anchoring systems section of
this manual.
3. Installation Caution Notice: Grouted frames:
When temperature conditions necessitate an additive to be used in the mortar

to prevent freezing, the contractor installing the frames must coat the inside of
frames in the field with a corrosion resistant coating per SDI 105.
When frames are to be grouted full, silencers must be field installed prior to
grouting.
Steel frames, including fire rated frames, do not require grouting. Grouting is not
recommended for frames in drywall.
4. All fire rated frames must be installed in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80 and
the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
Framing applications
Series
Steel type
F16
Non-Galvannealed 2
Galvannealed
F14
Non-Galvannealed 2
Galvannealed 3
F12
Galvannealed 3
KD 4
Corner
SUA 5
Corner
Building type
Opening
Usage
frequency 1
Institutional and
Commercial
Interior
Heavy to
extraheavy duty
Extra heavy
tomaximum duty
Institutional and
Commercial
Institutional and
Commercial
Mainly Exterior
Interior
Mainly Exterior
Interior and
exterior
Maximum duty
N/A
Applications
Typical building conditions
High humidity and/or weather
exposure
exposure
Maximum traffic building conditions
exposure
Usage frequency is based on ANSI A250.8-2003
2 Commercial quality cold rolled steel

3 Reinforcements for galvannealed frames are also galvannealed
4 Knock-Down for field assembly prior to installation
5 Set-up and Welded for installation as a pre-welded unit
28
Flush frames
FN Series 1 flush face

Steelcraft FN Series 1 (25mm) flush face frames offer
the following unique features, which enhance long term
functionality and durability. Features can vary depending on the
steel thickness of the frame:
1. Narrow 1 (25mm) face provides a very slim appearance to
the door opening.
2. Die-mitered corner connections Die-mitered corner
3. Patented universal hinge preparations allow for easy field
conversion from standard weight .134 (3.3mm) thick hinges
to heavy weight .180 (4.7mm) hinges.
About the product

FN Series 3-sided flush narrow 1 (25mm) face frames are

designed to meet requirements for light to extra heavy duty
applications in both commercial and institutional buildings
where a slim face profile is required. They are installed in
installed as part of the wall framing sequence. They can be
specified and supplied as KD (knock-down) for fieldassembly
prior to installation or welded for installation asa complete unit.
Installation
1. Overall frame construction for the Steelcraft FN18, FN16 and
FN14 Series flush narrow 1 (25mm) face frames meets the
requirements of ANSI A250.8-2003 (commonly referred to
as SDI-100).
accordance with ANSI/DHI A115 unless otherwise stated.
Fire ratings

The FN Series flush narrow 1 (25mm) face frames meet

the broadest fire rating requirements. They are listed for
installations requiring compliance to both neutral pressure
testing (ASTM E152 and UL 10B) and positive pressure
standards (UL 10C). Refer to the Fire Rated section of this
manual for particular listings.
Applications
FN Series 1 (25mm) flush face frames are designed to meet
the aesthetic needs of a very slender face dimension, and still
maintain the functionality of the conventional flush framing
systems. The FN Series 1 (25mm) flush face frames are
typically installed in wall construction types as defined in the
chart below:
Frame applications
Profile
Steel thickness
Wall construction
FN16
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Wood or steel stud
Lock-in stud anchor
FN16
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Masonry
Wire masonry
FN16
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Existing masonry
FN14
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
Wood or steel stud
Lock-in stud anchor
FN14
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
Masonry
Wire masonry
FN14
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
Existing masonry
29
Flush frames

Elevation
1
(25 mm)
1
(25 mm)
1
(25 mm)
*1/2 (13 mm)
1-9/16
(40 mm)
9-3/4
(248 mm)
HINGE
Varies
Throat
Opening
Jamb
Depth
1-15/16
(49 mm)
Equal
*1/2 (13 mm)
5/8 (16 mm)
Finished
Opening
Height
1
(25 mm)
STRIKE
HINGE
Opening Width
40-5/16
(1024 mm)
Equal
Note:
FN Series 3 sided flush narrow 1 (25mm) face
frames are available as double rabbet only.
HINGE
10-3/8
(264 mm)

Series
Single
FN16
FN14
40 x 80
(1219mm x 2439mm)
40 x 80
(1219mm x 2439mm)
Pair
80 x 80
(2439mm x 2439mm)
80 x 80
(2439mm x 2439mm)
Single rabbet
Minimum
Maximum
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Standard profile
available)
Double rabbet
Minimum
Maximum
Face
Stop
Corners
Returns
Standard
DIE MITERED
with four (4)
concealed tabs
interlocking
head and jambs
4-1/2
20
5/8
1/2*
(114mm)
(508mm)
(25mm)
(16mm)
(13mm)
4-1/2
20
5/8
(114mm)
(508mm)
(25mm)
(16mm)
1/2*
(13mm)
DIE MITERED
with four (4)
concealed tabs
interlocking
head and jambs
N/A = Not Available
30
Flush frames

4-7/8 (124mm)
Strike Prep (ASA)
4-7/8 Standard
(114mm)
5 Optional
(127mm)
KD Corner Detail
Welded Corner
4-7/8
(124mm)
General notes
4. Depending on environmental and usage conditions, the steel

can be either cold rolled or galvannealed. Galvannealed
steel is recommended for all exterior applications.
1. Variations in jamb depths available in 1/8 (3mm)

increments.
5. For KD Corner, tabs in rabbeted area should be bent

outward, not inward, during assembly.
2. All FN Series frames are supplied standard with masonry

wire and weld-in base anchors. Anchors are designed
for maximum wall/frame engagement and installation
flexibility.
3. FN Series frames are to be installed as part of the framing
sequence.
Frame options
Series
Frame profile
Corner connections
KD (Knock-down)
Single rabbet
Double rabbet
Single rabbet
Double rabbet
SUA (Set-up & weld)

Single rabbet
Double rabbet
FN16
N/A
Typically for walls

3-3/4 (95mm)
thickness or greater
N/A
4 interlocking corner
tabs per factory diemiter. See the KD
Corner Detail
N/A
Available when
specified, and in
accordance with
ANSI A250.8-2003
(SDI 100)
FN14
N/A
Typically for walls

3-3/4 (95mm)
thickness or greater
N/A
4 interlocking corner
tabs per factory diemiter. See the KD
Corner Detail
N/A
Available when
specified, and in
accordance with
ANSI A250.8-2003
(SDI 100)
N/A = Not Available
31
Flush frames

Wire Masonry Anchor
Weld-In Base Anchor
Existing Masonry Anchor
Used in place of typical EMA on 1" face frames

installation instructions, SDI 105 Recommended
1. FN16 Series narrow 1 (25mm) Face frames are supplied

standard with masonry wire and weld-in base anchors.
Anchors are designed for maximum wall/frame engagement
and installation flexibility.
Installation Instructions for Steel Frames.

5. All fire rated frames must be installed in accordance with
NFPA Pamphlet 80 and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
2. For anchoring applications, refer to the Frames:

Anchoring systems section of this manual.
3. Installation caution notice: Grouted frames:
When temperature conditions necessitate an additive to

be used in the mortar to prevent freezing, the contractor
installing the frames must coat the inside of the frames
in the field with a corrosion resistant coating per SDI 105.
When frames are to be grouted full, silencers must be

field installed prior to grouting
Steel frames, including fire rated frames, do not require

grouting. Grouting is not recommended for frames in
drywall.
Series
Steel type
FN16
Non-Galvannealed 2
Galvannealed
FN14
Non-Galvannealed 2
Galvannealed 3
Building type
Opening
Usage frequency 1
Institutional and
commercial
Interior
Heavy to extra
heavy duty
Institutional and
commercial
Interior
Mainly exterior
Mainly exterior
Extra heavy to
maximum duty
KD4
Corner
SUA5
Corner
Applications
exposure
exposure
2 Commercial quality cold rolled steel

32
Flush frames
MU Series multi-use
Steelcraft MU Series multi-use flush frames offer the following
unique features which enhance long-term functionality and
durability. Features can vary depending on the steel thickness
of the frame:
1. Die-mitered corner connections of the MU Series multi-use
flush frame corners lock together once the frame is installed.
The tab/lock design:
a. prevents the head from rising
b. keeps the head and jamb members in alignment
c. keeps the miter tight
d. includes wedge-lock corner clips. Screws are supplied to
secure miter.
to heavy weight 0.180 (4.7mm) hinges.
About the product

Steelcrafts MU Series multi-use flush frames are designed for
light to extra heavy duty applications in both commercial and
institutional buildings. They can be installed in both interior
and exterior locations, and in virtually all types of buildings
and wall constructions. They have a jamb profile similar to the
DW frames, but are designed to be installed as part of the wall
framing sequence. They can be specified and/or supplied as
either KD (knock-down) for field assembly prior to installation,
or welded for installation as a complete unit.
Installation
installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2001 (formerlySDI


5. Factory applied baked-on rust inhibiting primer in
1. Overall frame construction for Steelcraft MU Series multiuse flush frames meet the requirements of ANSI A250.82003 (SDI 100).
Fire ratings
MU Series multi-use flush frames meet the broadest fire
rating requirements. They are listed for installations requiring
Applications
Steelcraft MU Series multi-use flush frames are typically
installed in wall construction types as defined in thechart
below:
Frame applications
Profile
Steel thickness
Wall construction
MU16
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Wood or steel stud
Lock-in stud anchor
MU16
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Masonry
Wire masonry
MU16
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Existing Masonry
MU14
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
Wood or steel stud
Lock-in stud anchor
MU14
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
Masonry
Wire masonry
MU14
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
Existing masonry
33
Flush frames
MU Series multi-use
Elevation
2
(50 mm)
2
(50 mm)

2
(50 mm)
1/2 (13 mm)

1-9/16
(40 mm)
9-3/4
(248 mm)

Throat
Opening
HINGE
1-15/16
(49 mm)
5/16
(8mm)
Equal
Jamb
Depth
Varies
1/2 (13 mm)

5/8 (16 mm)
Finished
Opening
Height
2
(50 mm)
Opening Width
STRIKE
HINGE
Narrow Double Rabbet Frame

for frame depths 4-3/8 and narrower.
1/2 (13 mm)

Equal
9/16
40-5/16
(1024 mm)
Varies
Jamb
Depth
Throat
Opening
1-15/16
(49 mm)
HINGE
1/2 (13 mm)
10-3/8
(264 mm)
5/8 (16 mm)

Series
Single
MU16
MU14
34
40 x 90
(1219mm x 2743mm)
40 x 90
(1219mm x 2743mm)
Opening Width
2
(50 mm)
Pair
80 x 90
(2439mm x 2743mm)
80 x 90
(2439mm x 2743mm)
Narrowdouble
rabbet
Double rabbet
Standard profile
available)
Face
Stop
Returns
Standard
DIE MITERED
with
interlocking
Soffit tab
Minimum
Maximum
Minimum
Maximum
3-1/4
4-3/8
4-1/2
20
5/8
1/2
(114mm)
(508mm)
(51mm)
(16mm)
(13mm)
4-1/2
20
5/8
1/2
(114mm)
(508mm)
(51mm)
(16mm)
(13mm)
(83mm)
3-1/4
(83mm)
(111mm)
4-3/8
(111mm)
Corners
DIE MITERED
with
interlocking
Soffit tab
Flush frames
MU Series multi-use
KD Corner Detail
4-7/8 (124mm)
Strike Prep (ASA)
4-1/2 Standard
(114mm)
5 Optional
(127mm)
Optional 4 (102mm)
Head Detail
4-7/8
(124mm)
General notes
4. Depending on environmental and usage conditions the steel


increments.
2. All MU Series frames are supplied standard with masonry
wire or lock-in jamb anchors and adjustable base anchors.
Anchors are designed for maximum wall/frame engagement
and installation flexibility.
5. MU Series with 4 heads are used mainly in masonry

applications when 2 face heads do not match block
coursing, or in drywall applications when installed in close
proximity to a F Series or MU Series frame installed with a
4 head.
3. MU Series frames are to be installed as part of the wall

framing sequence.
Frame options
4 (102mm) Heads
Corner connections
Series
MU16
MU14
Frame profile
KD (Knock-down)
SUA (Set-up & weld)
Narrowdouble
rabbet
Double rabbet
Single rabbet
Double rabbet
Single rabbet
Double rabbet
Typically for
walls less than
3-3/4 (95mm)
thick. Minimum
walls thickness
= 2 (51mm)
Typically for
walls less
than 3-3/4
(95mm)
thickness or
greater
Factory DieMitered, Soffit

Tab included.
Corner clip
assembly
screws
required.

Tab included.
Corner clip
assembly
screws
required.


(51mm) face jambs. Corner Clip
assembly screws required.
N/A - Not Available
35
Flush frames
MU Series multi-use
Wire Masonry Anchor
Attached with S.M.

screws (furnished)
See Note #6
3/16 (5 mm)dia. wire
Anchor for Stud Partition
Lock-in anchor
Maximum adjustment
1-3/8 (35mm) below frame

1. MU16 Series Multi-use flush frames are supplied standard with masonry wire,
or lock-in jamb anchors and adjustable base anchors. Anchors are designed for
maximum wall/frame engagement, and installation flexibility.
2. For anchoring applications, refer to the Frames: Anchoring systems section of
this manual.
When temperature conditions necessitate an additive to be used in the mortar

to prevent freezing, the contractor installing the frames must coat the inside of
frames in the filed with a corrosion resistant coating per SDI 105.
When frames are to be grouted full, silencers must be field installed prior to
grouting.
Steel frames, including fire rated frames, do not require grouting. Grouting is not
recommended for frames in drywall.
4. Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, SDI

105 Recommended Installation Instructions for Steel Frames.
5. All fire rated frames must be installed in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80 and
theAuthority Having Jurisdiction.
6. When using Standard Exiting Wall Anchors the anchor must be field modified
(notched) to provide clearance for the backbend return.
Series
Steel type
Building type
Opening
Usage frequency 1
MU16
Non-Galvannealed 2
Institutional and
Commercial
Interior
Heavy to
extraheavy duty
Institutional and
Commercial
Interior
Extra heavy
tomaximum duty
Galvannealed 3
MU14
Non-Galvannealed 2
Galvannealed 3
Mainly Exterior
Mainly Exterior
KD 4
Corner
SUA5
Corner
Applications
exposure
exposure
2 Commercial quality carbon steel

36
Flush frames
FE Series double egress

Steelcraft FE Series double egress frames offer the following
unique features, which enhance long term functionality and
durability:
1.
Die-mitered corner connections Die-mitered corner


About the product

The FE Series double egress frames are designed to meet
requirements for heavy to extra heavy duty applications in both
commercial and institutional buildings. They are installed at
interior locations, and in virtually all types of buildings and wall
constructions. These frames can be specified and supplied
as KD (knock-down) for field assembly prior to installation
or welded for installation as a complete unit. If clear opening
width for cross corridor applications is critical, refer to the DE
Series Frame.
Installation
1.
Overall frame construction for the Steelcraft FE16 and

FE14 Series double egress frames meet and exceed the
as SDI-100).

Fire ratings
The FE Series double egress frames meet the broadest fire

Applications

final authority in issues related to the installation and
use of installed Fire Rated Doors. The Authority Having
Jurisdiction is the final authority in issues related to the
installation and use of installed Fire Rated Doors.
FE Series double egress frames are typically installed in wall

construction types as defined in the chart below:
Frame applications
Profile
Steel thickness
Wall construction
FE16
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Wood or steel stud
Weld-in stud anchor
FE16
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Masonry
Wire masonry
FE16
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Existing masonry
Bolted through door rabbet
FE14
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
Wood or steel stud
Weld-in stud anchor
FE14
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
Masonry
Wire masonry
FE14
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
Existing masonry
37
Flush frames

2
(50 mm)
2-5/8
(67mm)
Elevation
1-3/8
(35mm)
5/8 (16mm)
9-3/4 (248 mm)

HINGE
Jamb Detail

2-5/8
(67 mm)
Optional 14 gauge
[0.067 (1.7mm)]
Closer Reinforcement
2-5/8
(67mm)
*1/2 (13 mm)

Equal
Equal
Throat
Opening
1-15/16
(49 mm)
Finished
Opening
Height
Jamb
Depth
Equal
HINGE
*1/2 (13 mm)

1-3/8
(35 mm)
Equal
5/8 (16 mm)
2
(50 mm)
HINGE
10-3/8 (264 mm)
Head Detail
*1/2 (13 mm)
bottom of frame
Throat
Opening
*1/2 (13 mm)
2
(50 mm)
2-5/8
(67 mm)
5/8
(16 mm)
finished opening width
Jamb
Depth
overall frame width
Finished opening width (Door Opening Dimension) is the dimension from frame door rabbet to the opposite rabbet.Note: For FE
and DE Series double egress frames is 1/8 (3.2 mm) undersized from the standard nominal opening width.Example: 60 (1829 mm)
head = 71-7/8 net width in lieu of the standard 72.

Series
Pair
3 step jambs x 2 step heads

Minimum
FE16
80 x 100
(2439mm x 3048mm)
4-3/4 (121mm)
Non-label
14
(356mm)
80 x 100
4-3/4 (121mm)
Non-label
5-3/4 (146mm)
Labeled
Stop
Returns
Standard
1-3/8 (35mm)
on narrow side.
5/8
1/2*
(16mm)
(13mm)
DIE MITERED with four

(4)concealed tabs
interlocking head and
jambs
5/8
1/2*
(16mm)
(13mm)
2-5/8 (67mm)
on wide side.
Labeled
(2439mm x 3048mm)
Face
Corners
Maximum
5-3/4 (146mm)
FE14
Standard profile
dimensions(variations available)
14
(356mm)
1-3/8 (35mm)
on narrow side.
2-5/8 (67mm)
on wide side.
DIE MITERED with four

(4)concealed tabs
interlocking head and
jambs
*Except 5-3/4 (146mm) depth, which is 7/16(11mm)
38
Flush frames

FE Series
Double Egress KD Corner
FE Series Double Egress

Welded Corner
Optional 4 (102 mm) Face

Head Detail
4-1/2
(114 mm)
Standard
5
(127 mm)
Optional
7 Gauge [0.167 (4.2 mm)]
Hinge Reinforcement
General notes
4. Depending on environmental and usage conditions, the steel


increments.
5. Tabs in Rabbeted area should be bent outward, not

inward,during assembly (as shown).
2. All FE Series frames are supplied standard with masonry

and wire and weld-in base anchors. Anchors are designed
flexibility. Weld-in stud anchors are an optional add.
6. FE Series with 4 heads are used mainly in masonry

coursing.
3. FE Series frames are to be installed as part of the

wallframing sequence.
Frame options
Corner connections
Series
Frame profile
KD (Knock-down)
4 (102mm) Heads
SUA (Set-up & weld)
FE16
Typically for walls less than

3-3/4 (95mm) thickness or
greater
KD assembly, slots, and

tabs, must be assembled by
distributor prior to installation.
Available from Steelcraft when

specified in accordance with ANSI
A250.8-2003 (SDI100)

For KD assembly, must be
assembled by distributor prior
to installation.
FE14
Typically for walls less than

3-3/4 (95mm) thickness or
greater
KD assembly, slots, and

tabs, must be assembled by
distributor prior to installation.

A250.8-2003 (SDI100)

For KD assembly, must be
assembled by distributor prior
to installation.
N/A - Not Available
39
Flush frames

Anchor for Steel Stud Partitions
Wire Masonry Anchor

1. FE Series double egress frames are supplied standard with
masonry wire and fixed base anchors. Anchors are designed
for maximum wall/frame engagement, and installation
flexibility. Optional weld-in jamb anchors are available as an
add.
4. Special frame anchorage: Frame anchor details shown on

this sheet are applicable To Formatuble Egress frames with
2 (50mm) faces. Anchor details will vary with frame profile
changes.


installing the frames must coat the inside of frames in
the field with a corrosion resistant coating per SDI 105.

field installed prior to grouting.

drywall.
Series
Steel type
Building type
Usage frequency1
KD4
Corner
SUA5
Corner
FE16
Non-Galvannealed 2
Institutional and
Commercial
Heavy to extra
heavy duty
Institutional and
Commercial
Extra heavy to
maximum duty
Galvannealed 3
FE14
Non-Galvannealed
Galvannealed 3
Applications
High humidity and/or weather exposure

40
Flush frames
DE Series double egress

Steelcraft DE Series double egress frames offer the following
unique features, which enhance long term functionality and
durability:
1. Die-mitered corner connection insures tight fit and
assembly. Frame must be welded by prior to installation.
5. Unique design to meet clear width corridor applications.
About the product
1.
The DE Series double egress frames meet all the design

parameters of conventional double egress frames and is
specified when cross corridor openings have the additional
requirements of maximized clear opening width. The unique
design of the DE Series Frame allows for the use of swing clear
hinges. This must be considered if your local building code has
a minimum clear opening width requirement, typically 44.
Installation
final authority in issues related to the installation and
use of installed Fire Rated Doors. The Authority Having
Jurisdiction is the final authority in issues related to the
installation and use of installed Fire Rated Doors.
Overall frame construction for the Steelcraft DE16 and

DE14 Series double egress frames meet and exceed the
as SDI-100).

Fire ratings
The DE Series double egress frames meet the broadest fire
Applications
DE Series double egress frames are typically Installed in wall
Frame applications
Profile
Steel thickness
Wall construction
DE16
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Wood or steel stud
Weld-in stud anchor
DE16
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Masonry
Wire masonry
DE16
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Existing masonry
DE14
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
Wood or steel stud
Weld-in stud anchor
DE14
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
Masonry
Wire masonry
DE14
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
Existing masonry
41
Flush frames

2
(50 mm)
2
(50 mm)
2-5/8
(67mm)
Elevation
Jamb Detail
9-3/4 (248 mm)
2-5/8
(67 mm)
Optional 14 gauge
[0.067 (1.7mm)]
HINGE
2-5/8
(67mm)
* 1/2 (13mm)
Jamb
Depth
Throat
Opening
1-15/16
(49 mm)
Equal
* 1/2 (13mm)
Finished
Opening
Height
5/8 (16mm)
2
(50 mm)
HINGE
Head Detail
Equal
Throat
Opening
*1/2 (13 mm)
2 (50mm)
HINGE
*1/2
(13 mm)
2-5/8
(67 mm)
5/8 (16mm)
10-3/8 (264 mm)

Jamb
Depth
bottom of frame
Corridor Width
Finished opening width (Door Opening Dimension) is

the dimension from frame door rabbet to the opposite
rabbet.
Clear Corridor Width
Note: For FE and DE Series double egress frames is 1/8

(3.2 mm) undersized from the standard nominal opening
width. Example: 60 (1829 mm) head = 71-7/8 net width
in lieu of the standard 72.
Finished opening width

(Door Opening Dimension)

Series
Pair
2 step jambs x 2 step heads

Minimum
DE16
DE14
80 x 100
(2439mm x 3048mm)
80 x 100
(2439mm x 3048mm)
5-3/4 (146mm)
Labeled or Non-label
5-3/4 (146mm)
Labeled or Non-label
Standard profile
dimensions(variations available)
Face
Stop
Corners
Returns
Standard
Must be welded prior to

installation
Maximum
14
(356mm)
14
(356mm)
2 (50mm) on
narrow side.
2-5/8 (67mm)
on wide side.
5/8
1/2*
(16mm)
(13mm)
2 (50mm) on
narrow side.
2-5/8 (67mm)
on wide side.
5/8
1/2*
(16mm)
(13mm)
Must be welded prior to

installation
*Except 5-3/4 (146mm) depth, which is 7/16(11mm)
42
Flush frames

General notes
DE Series Double Egress

Welded Corner

increments.
2. Due to the configuration of narrow hinge jambs mating
to wider heads, DE Series frames are supplied set-up and
welded only.
3. All DE Series frames are supplied standard with masonry
wire and weld-in base anchors. Anchors are designed
add.
4-1/2
(114mm)
Standard
5
(127mm)
Optional
4. DE Series frames are to be installed as part of the wall

framing sequence.
7 Gauge [0.167 (4.2mm)]

Hinge Reinforcement
5. Depending on environmental and usage conditions,the steel

can be either cold rolled or galvannealed.
Note:
Together with the use of Swing-Clear type hinges, the DE Series
double egress 2 Step hinge jambs will provide additional crosscorridor width between jambs:
removes the thickness of the door from the opening, even

when at 90
changes the Pivot Point of the door
6. Tabs in rabbeted area should be bent outward, not inward,

during assembly (as shown).
can increase the clear opening width by 5-1/4 (133mm)
Frame options
Corner connections
Series
DE16
Frame profile
KD (Knock-down)
Typically for walls 3-3/4

(95mm) thickness or greater
NOT AVAILABLE FORKD

INSTALLATION
Die-mitered corners, must be
welded by distributor prior to
installation
DE14
Typically for walls 3-3/4

(95mm) thickness or greater
NOT AVAILABLE FORKD

INSTALLATION
Die-mitered corners, must be
welded by distributor prior to
installation
SUA (Set-up & weld)
4 (102mm) Heads

A250.8-2003 (SDI100)
Available when specified. Must

be welded prior to installation

A250.8-2003 (SDI100)
Available when specified. Must

be welded prior to installation
Note:
1.
Hinge Jambs for DE Series double egress frames are single rabbet sections and are a smaller jamb depth than the head.
2.
The jamb depth of the hinge jambs is shown in the chart below.
3.
ALWAYS ORDER DE Series frames BY THE FRAME DEPTH OF THE HEAD. Steelcraft will manufacture the jambs as required.
Head
Frame depth
Jamb
Throat opening
1
Jamb depth
Throat opening
5-3/4 (146mm)
4-7/8 (124mm )
3-27/32 (98mm)
2-31/32 (75mm)
6-3/4 (171mm)
5-3/4 (146mm)
4-11/32 (110mm)
3-11/32 (85mm)
7-3/4 (197mm)
6-3/4 (171mm)
4-27/32 (123mm)
3-27/32 (98mm)
8-3/4 (222mm)
7-3/4 (197mm)
5-11/32 (136mm)
4-11/32 (110mm)
15-3/4 (146mm) jamb depth frame has 7/16 (11mm) backbends. All others have 1/2 (13mm) backbends.
43
Flush frames

Wire Masonry Anchor
Fixed Base
Anchor for Steel Stud Partitions
4. Special frame anchorage: Frame anchor details shown on

this sheet are applicable To Formatuble Egress frames with
2 (50mm) faces. Anchor details will vary with frame profile
changes.
1. DE Series double egress frames are supplied standard with

masonry wire and fixed base anchors. Anchors are designed
add.




installing the frames must coat the inside of frames in
the field with a corrosion resistant coating per SDI 105.


drywall.
Series
Steel type
DE16
Non-Galvannealed 2
Galvannealed
DE14
Non-Galvannealed
Galvannealed
Building type
Usage frequency 1
KD 4
Corner
Institutional and
Commercial
Heavy to
extraheavy duty
N/A
Institutional and
Commercial
Extra heavy
tomaximum duty
N/A
SUA 4
Corner
Applications

N/A = Not available
44
Drywall frames
DW Series
Steelcraft DW Series Drywall frames include unique features
which enhance long-term functionality and durability:
1. Quick and flexible installation of Steelcrafts DW Series
Drywall frames facilitates their installation in minutes and
they can be relocated without damage to the frame.
2. Die-mitered corner connections of the DW Series Drywall
Frame corners lock together once the frame is installed. The
tab/lock design:
d. includes wedge-lock corner clips. Screws are included to
secure miter.
About the product

Steelcrafts DW Series Drywall frames are designed for light to
heavy duty applications in both commercial and institutional
buildings. They can be installed in rough openings after the
wall has been constructed and finished. They are installed in
virtually all types of buildings in all interior drywall partition
locations using baseboards. To accommodate the installation
of the DW Series frames on finished drywall construction,
they are supplied with a KD (knock-down) corner for quick
installation.
Installation

3. Adjustable base anchors an allow for attachment directly

to the wall sill runner, and facilitates installation adjustment
1. Overall frame construction for the Steelcraft DW Series
Drywall frames meet and exceed the requirements of ANSI
A250.8-2003 (SDI-100).
Fire ratings
The DW Series Drywall frames meet the broadest fire rating
Applications
Steelcraft DW Series Drywall frames are typically Installed in
wall construction types as defined in the chart below:
Frame applications
Profile
Steel thickness
Wall construction
DW16
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Drywall partitions with wood or steel stud
Compression jamb anchor(s) with adjustable Base

Anchor Systems
DW14
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
Compression jamb anchor(s) with adjustable Base

Anchor Systems
45
Drywall frames
DW Series
Elevation
2
(50 mm)
2
(50 mm)
9-3/4
(248 mm)

2
(50 mm)
1/2 (13 mm)

1-9/16
(40 mm)
Throat
Opening
Varies
Jamb
Depth
HINGE
1-15/16
(49 mm)
5/16
(8mm)
1/2 (13 mm)
Equal
5/8 (16 mm)

Finished
Opening
Height
Opening Width
2
(50 mm)
HINGE
STRIKE
Single Rabbet Frame

1/2 (13 mm)
Varies
40 5/16
(1024 mm)
Equal
9/16
Jamb
Depth
Throat
Opening
1-15/16
(49 mm)
5/16
(8mm)
1/2 (13 mm)
HINGE
5/8 (16 mm)
10-3/8
(264 mm)
2
(50 mm)
Opening Width

Series
Single
DW16
DW14
46
40 x 90
(1219mm x 2743mm)
40 x 90
(1219mm x 2743mm)
Pair
80 x 90
(2439mm x 2743mm)
80 x 90
(2439mm x 2743mm)
Single rabbet
Double rabbet
Standard profile
available)
Face
Returns
Standard
5/8
1/2
(16mm)
(13mm)
DIE MITERED
Wedge
Lock Corner
withinterlocking
soffit tab
5/8
1/2
(51mm)
(16mm)
(13mm)
Minimum
Maximum
Minimum
Maximum
3-1/4
4-3/8
4-1/2
14-3/4
(114mm)
(375mm)
(51mm)
4-1/2
14-3/4
(114mm)
(375mm)
(83mm)
3-1/4
(83mm)
(111mm)
4-3/8
(111mm)
Stop
Corners
DIE MITERED
Wedge
Lock Corner
withinterlocking
soffit tab
Drywall frames
DW Series
Mortise Hinge Prep
4-1/2 Standard
(114mm)
5 Optional
(127mm)
Optional 4 (102mm)
Face Head Detail
KD Corner Detail
4-7/8 (124mm)
Strike Prep (ASA)
(See Note #4)
4-7/8
(124mm)
General notes
3. Depending on environmental and usage conditions,the

steel used can be either cold rolled or galvannealed.
Galvannealed steel is recommended in areas of high
moisture.

increments.
2. All DW Series frames are supplied standard with field
adjustable compression anchors located near the top of
each jamb and adjustable base anchors with twist-in strap
base anchors in each jamb.
a. The compression anchor can be easily adjusted with a
screw driver or power driver.
4. DW Series frames are supplied standard with 4-1/2

standard duty hinge preps. Optional universal 4-1/2 or 5
hinge preps are available.
5. DW Series with 4 heads are used mainly when installed in
close proximity to a F Series or MU Series frame installed
with a 4 head.
b. The lock-in base anchor system is provided for

attachment directly to the floor runner (sill) whenusing
wall baseboards.
Frame options
Corner connections
Series
DW16
DW14
Frame profile
KD (Knock-down)
Single rabbet
Double rabbet
Single rabbet
Double rabbet
Typically for
walls less than
3-3/4 (95mm)
thick. Minimum
wall thickness =
2 (51mm)
Typically for
walls less than
3-3/4 (95mm)
thickness or
greater

Tab included.
Corner clip
assembly
screws required
on labeled
frames.

Tab included.
Corner clip
assembly
screws required
on labeled
frames.
SUA (Set-up & weld)

Single rabbet
N/A
4 (102mm)
Heads
Double rabbet
N/A
Die-mitered
for use with 2
(51mm) face
jambs. Corner
Clip assembly
screws required.
N/A - Not Available
47
Drywall frames
DW Series
Jamb/Compression Anchor
See Note #2 (below)
Located at strike height-See Note #3 (below)
See Note #2 (below)
be used in both the strike and hinge jamb. Also recommend

to be used in the head of frames for pairs.
1. DW16 Series Drywall frames are supplied standard with

field adjustable compression anchors in each jamb and
adjustable base anchors. DW Series frames are designed
especially for use in installations using wall baseboards.
4. Grouting of the DW Series frames is not recommended.
2. For anchoring applications, refer to theFrames: Anchoring

systems section of this manual
Optional Security Anchor
Masonry wall: Not recommended
3. Optional security anchor: Security anchors are

recommended in frames over 80 (2438mm) high or in
frames installed in areas where security is a priority. Locate
the security anchor immediately above or below the strike
reinforcements, and on both faces of the jamb. Anchors may
5. Installation Caution Notice: After the frame pieces are

slid over the wall, the frame is squared by adjusting the
compression anchor screws located in the soffit of the
jambs. Turning the screw clockwise will tighten the frame.
Check to insure the opening is plumb.

Series
Steel type
Building type
Opening
Usage frequency 1
DW16
Non-Galvannealed 2
Institutional and
Commercial
Interior
Heavy to
extraheavy duty
Institutional and
Commercial
Interior
Extra heavy
tomaximum duty
Galvannealed 3
DW14
Non-Galvannealed 2
Galvannealed
KD 4
Corner
SUA
Corner
Applications
N/A
Typical building conditions with base

boards
N/A
Typical building conditions with base

boards

N/A = Not available
48
Drywall frames
K Series
Steelcraft K Series Drywall frames include unique features
which enhance long-term functionality and durability:
1. Quick and flexible installation of Steelcrafts K Series
Drywall frames facilitates their installation in minutes and
they can be relocated without damage to the frame.
2. Die-mitered corner connections of the K Series Drywall
Frame corners lock together once the frame is installed. The
tab/lock design:
d. includes wedge-lock corner clips. Screws are supplied to
secure miter.
3. Sill attachment is made through the face of the frame
directly into the wall sill runner. The frame is supplied with
factory countersunk holes for the screw attachment.
About the product

Steelcrafts K Series Drywall frames are designed for light to
heavy duty applications in both commercial and institutional
buildings. They can be installed in rough openings after the
wall has been constructed and finished. They are installed in
virtually all types of buildings in all interior drywall partition
locations not using baseboards. To accommodate the
installation of the K Series Drywall frames on finished drywall
construction, they are supplied with a KD (knock-down) corner
for quick installation.
Installation
Frames.

1. Overall frame construction for Steelcraft K Series Drywall
frames meet the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2003(SDI
100).
Fire ratings
The K Series Drywall frames meet the broadest fire rating
Applications
Steelcraft K Series Drywall frames are typically Installed in wall
Frame applications
Profile
Steel thickness
Wall construction
K16
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Compression jamb anchor(s) with factory countersunk

holes for screw attachment directly to the wall sill runner
K14
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
Compression jamb anchor(s) with factory countersunk

holes for screw attachment directly to the wall sill runner
49
Drywall frames
K Series
Elevation
2
2
(50 mm) (50 mm)
9-3/4
(248 mm)
2
(50 mm)
1/2 (13 mm)

1-9/16
(40 mm)
Throat
Opening
Varies
Jamb
Depth
HINGE
1-15/16
(49 mm)
5/16
(8mm)
1/2 (13 mm)
Equal
5/8 (16 mm)

Finished
Opening
Height
Opening Width
2
(50 mm)
HINGE
STRIKE
Single Rabbet Frame
1/2 (13 mm)
Varies
40 5/16
(1024 mm)
Equal
9/16
Jamb
Depth
Throat
Opening
1-15/16
(49 mm)
5/16
(8mm)
1/2 (13 mm)
HINGE
5/8 (16 mm)
10-3/8
(264 mm)
2
(50 mm)
Opening Width

Series
Single
K16
K14
50
40 x 90
(1219mm x 2743mm)
40 x 90
(1219mm x 2743mm)
Pair
80 x 90
(2439mm x 2743mm)
80 x 90
(2439mm x 2743mm)
Single rabbet
Double rabbet
Standard profile
available)
Face
Returns
Standard
5/8
1/2
(16mm)
(13mm)
DIE MITERED
Wedge
Lock Corner
withinterlocking
soffit tab
5/8
1/2
(51mm)
(16mm)
(13mm)
Minimum
Maximum
Minimum
Maximum
3-1/4
4-3/8
4-1/2
14-3/4
(114mm)
(375mm)
(51mm)
4-1/2
14-3/4
(114mm)
(375mm)
(83mm)
3-1/4
(83mm)
(111mm)
4-3/8
(111mm)
Stop
Corners
DIE MITERED
Wedge
Lock Corner
withinterlocking
soffit tab
Drywall frames
K Series
Mortise Hinge Prep
4-1/2 Standard
(114mm)
5 Optional
(127mm)
Optional 4 (102mm)
Face Head Detail
KD Corner Detail
4-7/8 (124mm)
Strike Prep (ASA)
(See Note #4)
4-7/8
(124mm)
General notes
3. Depending on environmental and usage conditions,the

steel used can be either cold rolled or galvannealed.
Galvannealed steel is recommended in areas of high
moisture.

increments.
2. All K Series frames are supplied standard with field
adjustable compression anchors located near the top of
each jamb and factory countersunk holes for direct screw
attachment to the wall runner.
a. The compression anchor can be easily adjusted with a
screw driver or power driver.
4. K Series frames are supplied standard with 4-1/2 standard

duty hinge preps. Optional universal 4-1/2 or 5 hinge preps
are available.
5. K Series with 4 heads are used mainly when installed in
close proximity to a F Series or MU Series frame installed
with a 4 head.
b. A fastener [typically a drywall screw (by others)] is

installed through the factory countersunk hole for
attachment directly to the floor runner (sill) when not
using wall baseboards.
Frame options
Corner connections
Series
K16
K14
Frame profile
KD (Knock-down)
Single rabbet
Double rabbet
Single rabbet
Double rabbet
Typically for
walls less than
3-3/4 (95mm)
thick. Minimum
walls thickness
= 2 (51mm)
Typically for
walls less than
3-3/4 (95mm)
thickness or
greater

Tab included.
Corner clip
assembly
screws required
on labeled
frames.

Tab included.
Corner clip
assembly
screws required
on labeled
frames.
SUA (Set-up & weld)

Single rabbet
N/A
4 (102mm)
Heads
Double rabbet
N/A
Die-mitered
for use with 2
(51mm) face
jambs. Corner
Clip assembly
screws required.
N/A - Not Available
51
Drywall frames
K Series
Jamb/Compression Anchor
Optional Security Anchor
Base Anchor
#8 x 1-1/4 Phillips Flat Head Sheet

Metal Screws (2 per jamb)
See Note #2 (below)
Located at strike height

See Note #3 (below)
4. Grouting of the K Series frames is not recommended.
1. K Series Drywall frames are supplied with field adjustable

compression anchors in each jamb. The base of each jamb
is anchored to the wall by installing screws through the
factory prepared anchor holes. K Series frames are designed
especially for use in applications not using base boards.



3. Optional security anchor: Security anchors are
recommended in frames over 80 (2438mm) high or in
frames installed in areas where security is a priority. Locate
the security anchor immediately above or below the strike
reinforcements, and on both faces of the jamb. Anchors may
be used in both the strike and hinge jamb. Also recommend
to be used in the head of the frame for pairs.
Series
Steel type
Building type
Opening
Usage frequency 1
K16
Non-Galvannealed 2
Institutional and
Commercial
Interior
Heavy to
extraheavy duty
Institutional and
Commercial
Interior
Extra heavy
tomaximum duty
Galvannealed 3
K14
Non-Galvannealed 2
Galvannealed 3
KD 4
Corner
SUA
Corner
Applications
N/A
Typical building conditions where base

boards are not being used
N/A
Typical building conditions where base

boards are not being used

52
Frames: Variations and options

Profile variations..................................................55
Lead lined...............................................................71
Standard F Series double rabbeted.................. 55
Clips..............................................................................71
F Series...................................................................... 56
Rough buck............................................................ 72
4 Heads: F Series...................................................57
FE Series options.................................................... 58
FE Series double egress........................................ 59
DE Series...................................................................60
Rough buck frames.................................................72

Applied stops........................................................ 73
Applied stops............................................................73
Hardware............................................................... 74
Standard DW, K, and MU Series

double rabbeted..................................................... 62
High frequency hinge reinforcement

F and FE Series.........................................................74
DW, K, and MU Series ........................................... 63
Automatic operators..............................................74
4 Head: DW, K, and MU Series..........................64
Thick doors............................................................ 75
Silencer preparations............................................ 65
Over 134 thru 3 thick............................................75
Dutch door............................................................ 66
Weather seals........................................................76
Non-labeled.............................................................66
PS-074 Surface applied weatherstrip............ 76
Labeled ..................................................................... 67
Communicating................................................... 68
Communicating frames........................................68
Hospital stops...................................................... 69
Throat filler............................................................ 77
Rigid vinyl................................................................... 77
Kerf frames............................................................78
Integral....................................................................... 78
Terminated or sanitary steps..............................69

Head reinforcement.............................................70
12 Gauge full width channel................................ 70
Main TOC
53
54
Profile variations
Standard F Series double rabbeted

KD Corner Detail
*1/2
(13 mm)
1-9/16
(40 mm)
Throat
Opening
Varies
Jamb
Depth
1-15/16
(49 mm)
*1/2
(13 mm)
5/8 (16 mm)

2
(50 mm)
Product: F Series unequal

rabbet frames
Gauge:
16 Ga. (1.3mm), 14 Ga. (1.7mm)
Jamb depth:

4 -1/2 (121mm) min. thru 20 (508mm)

in 1/8 (3.2mm) increments
Face:

Standard 2 (50mm). Non-standard

1 (25.4mm)
thru 4 (102mm) in 1/8 (3.2mm) increments
*Backbend:
7/16 (11 mm) for 5-3/4 Frame depth
Miter:

45 die miter with 4 interlocking tabs

for welded
Welded Corner
Notes:
1. F Series (2 face) and FN Series (1 face) are available KD or
welded. All other frames with custom face dimensions must
be welded prior to installation.
2. Tabs in Rabbeted area should be bent outward, not inward,
during assembly.
55
Profile variations
F Series frames
Standard Double Equal Rabbet Frame
Jamb
Depth
1-15/16
(49 mm)
Varies
1-15/16
(49 mm)
Cased Open Frame

Jamb
Depth
5/8 (16 mm)
Face
* 1/2
(13 mm)
Throat
Opening
Face
* 1/2
* 1/2
(13 mm)
Throat
Opening
* 1/2
(13 mm)
(13 mm)
Product: F Series equal

rabbet frames
Product: F Series cased

open frames
Gauge:
16 Ga. (1.3mm), 14 Ga. (1.7mm)
Gauge:
16 Ga. (1.3mm), 14 Ga. (1.7mm)
Jamb depth:

4-7/8 (124mm) min. thru 20 (508mm)

Jamb depth:

3 (76mm) min. thru 20 (508mm)

Face:


1 (25.4mm)
Face:


1 (25.4mm)
*Backbend:
*Backbend:
Miter:


for welded
Miter:


for welded
Single Rabbet Frame
Product: F Series single

rabbet frames
Jamb
Depth
1-15/16
(49 mm)
Varies
5/8 (16 mm)
Face
*1/2
(13 mm)
Throat
Opening
*1/2
(13 mm)
Gauge:
16 Ga. (1.3mm), 14 Ga. (1.7mm)
Jamb depth:

3 (76mm) min. thru 20 (508mm)

Face:


1 (25.4mm)
*Backbend:
Miter:


for welded
Notes:
1. F Series (2 and 1-1/2 face) and FN Series (1 face) are
available KD or welded. All other frames with custom face
dimensions must be welded prior to installation.
56
Profile variations
4 Heads: F Series
No. 8 x 2-1/2 (63.5mm)

Phillips Bugle Head Screw
Throat
Opening
*1/2
(13 mm)
*1/2
(13 mm)
4 (102mm)
4
(50 mm)
5/8 (16 mm)

1-9/16
(40 mm)
Varies
1-15/16
(49 mm)
Jamb
Depth
2 (51mm)
Product: F16, F14
Notes:
1. Frames with 4 heads are used mainly in masonry
coursing.
Profile variation: Unequal, equal cased open

Jamb depth:
4-1/2 through 20 in 1/8 increments
*Backbend:
Miter:
Die mitered, tabs vary with profile variations

57
Profile variations
FE Series frames options

*1/2
(13 mm)
* 1/2
(13 mm)
Throat
Opening
Head Detail
2
(50 mm)
2-5/8
(67 mm)
KD Corner
Jamb
Depth
5/8
(16 mm)
*1/2
(13 mm)
2-5/8
(67 mm)
Jamb Detail
Equal
Jamb
Depth
Throat
Opening
1-15/16
(49 mm)
Equal
*1/2
(13 mm)
1-3/8
(35 mm)
2
(50 mm)
Face
5/8 (16 mm)
Welded Corner
Product: FE Series Conventional double egress frames

Gauge:
16 Ga. (1.3 mm), 14 Ga. (1.7 mm)
Notes:
Jamb depth:

4-3/4 (121 mm) min. thru 14 (356 mm)

in 1/8 (3.2 mm) increments
Face:


1 (25.4 mm) thru 4 (102 mm) in
1/8 (3.2 mm) increments
1. Conventional FE Series double egress heads have a

different profile from the jambs. Both heads and jambs are
considered to have a 2 face.
*Backbend:
Miter:


or welded
2. Since the door is mounted on the centerline of the jamb

depth, the 2 face of the jamb includes an 1-3/8 visible
face and a 5/8 additional stop.
3. The door opening dimension of Steelcraft FE Series double
egress frames is 1/8 undersized to insure proper door center
clearances are maintained. Door widths must be adjusted
accordingly when using wood or non-Steelcraft doors.
4. Tabs in Rabbeted area should be bent outward, not inward,
58
Profile variations
FE Series double egress frames
Dim A
Frame Depth
Dim A Frame
Depth
Head Detail
FE Series
Jamb Detail
FE Series
Dim A = Jamb depth for both head and jamb

Finished Opening Width (Door Opening Dimension)
Corridor Width
Application
Finished opening width (Door Opening Dimension)

is the dimension from the frame door rabbet to the
opposite rabbet.
Note: FE and DE Series double egress frames are 1/8 (3.2

mm) undersized from the standard nominal opening width.
Example: 60 (1829 mm) head = 71-7/8 net width in lieu
of the standard 72.
Clear Opening Width is the dimension between doors,

measured from door face to door face, when both doors are
open 90 degrees.
Note: This dimension is critical for compliance with

handicapped accessibility.
Corridor Width is the actual dimension between walls in a

corridor.
Note: This dimension is critical in sizing the finished

opening width (Door Opening Dimension) of the double
egress frame.
FE Series double egress frames are designed for use in cross

corridor application where clear opening width is not of major
concern. Conventional butt or continuous hinges are used.
For applications where clear opening width is critical the
DE Series double egress frame is recommended.
Purpose
FE Series double egress frames are used in cross corridor
application for traffic and smoke control.
Product availability
This product option is available for the following Steelcraft
frame Series:
FE16 and FE14 in depths from 4-3/4 (121mm) to

14 (356mm).
59
Profile variations
DE Series frames
1/2
(13 mm)
DE Series Double Egress

Welded Corner
2-5/8
(67 mm)
Jamb Detail
Jamb
Dimension
Throat
Opening
1-15/16
(49 mm)
1/2
(13 mm)
* 1/2
(13 mm )
2
(50 mm)
Throat
Opening
5/8 (16mm)
* 1/2
(13 mm)
Head Detail
2
(50 mm)
5/8
(16 mm)
2-5/8
(67 mm)
Frame
Depth
Dimension A head
Dimension B jamb
Frame depth
Jamb dimension
4-3/4
3-11/32
5-1/4
3-19/32
5-3/4
3-27/32
6-1/4
4-3/32
6-3/4
4-11/32
7-1/4
4-19/32
7-3/4
4-27/32
8-1/4
5-3/32
8-3/4
5-11/32
9-1/4
5-19/32
9-3/4
5-27/32
10-1/4
6-3/32
10-3/4
6-11/32
Note: When ordering DE Series frames,

Dimension A specifies the frame jamb depth.
Product: DE Series double egress

frames for clear width

corridor applications
Gauge:
6 Ga. (1.3mm), 14 Ga. (1.7mm)
Jamb depth:

4-3/4 (121mm) min. thru 14 (356mm)

Face:


1 (25.4mm) thru 4 (102mm) in
1/8 (3.2mm) increments
*Backbend:
Miter:

45 die miter be welded prior to most

installation
Notes:
1. Face dimensions on the DE Series frames are 2 faces for
on both heads and jambs.
2. Frame depth varies for head to jambs. This variation allows
for larger clear opening widths for handicapped accessibility.
Frame depth (head): This is the jamb depth of the head

and is the size specified when ordering.
Jamb dimension (jamb): This is the actual jamb depth

of the vertical frame member. This dimension is not
specified when ordering. Refer to table for additional
clarification.
3. The door opening dimension of Steelcraft DE Series double

egress frames is 1/8 undersized to insure proper door
center clearances are maintained. Door widths must be
adjusted accordingly when using wood or non-Steelcraft
doors.
60
Profile variations
DE Series double egress frames

Corridor Width

(Door Opening Dimension)
Finished opening width (Door Opening Dimension) is the

dimension from the frame door rabbet to the opposite
rabbet.
Note: FE and DE Series double egress frames are

1/8 (3.2 mm) undersized from the standard nominal
opening width. Example: 60 (1829 mm) head = 71-7/8
net width in lieu of the standard 72.
Clear Opening Width is the dimension between doors,

measured from door face to door face, when both doors are
open 90 degrees.
Note: this dimension is critical for compliance with

handicapped accessibility.
Application
DE Series double egress frames are designed for use in cross
corridor application where clear opening width is of major
concern. Swing clear hinges or pocket pivot hinges are used.
For applications where clear opening width is not critical the
FE Series double egress frame is recommended.
Purpose
DE Series double egress frames are used in cross corridor
application for traffic and smoke control.
Corridor Width is the actual dimension between walls in

a corridor.

frame Series:
Note: this dimension is critical in sizing the finished

opening width (Door Opening Dimension) of the double
egress frame.
DE16 and DE14 in depths from 4-3/4 (121mm) to

14 (356mm)
61
Profile variations
Standard DW, K, and MU Series double rabbeted frames

1/2
(13 mm)
1-9/16
(40 mm)
Throat
Opening
1/2
(13 mm)
KD Corner Detail
Varies
5/16
(8mm)
Jamb
Depth
1-15/16
(49 mm)
5/8 (16 mm)

2
(50 mm)
Product: DW, K, and MU Series

Gauge:
6 Ga. (1.3mm), 14 Ga. (1.7mm)
Jamb depth:

DW and K = 4-1/2 (114mm) thru

14-3/4 (375mm)
in 1/8 increments MU = 4-3/4 (114mm)
thru 20 (508mm) in 1/8 increments
Face:
Standard 2 (50mm)
Miter:

45 die miter with soffit tab and interlocking

corner clip.
62
Notes:
1. DW and K Series are installed KD.
2. MU Series can be installed KD or welded.
3. Equal rabbet frames are supplied when specified or in
communicating frame applications (refer to page 68).
4. Cased open frames are used for double acting door or
applied stop applications (refer to page 73).
5. Narrow double rabbet frames are used for jamb depths
below 4-1/2.
6. KD Corner includes wedge-lock corner clips. Screws are
supplied to secure miter. Screws are supplied for all MU
Series label and non-label, and for DW and K Series label
only.
Profile variations
DW, K, and MU Series frames

Standard Double Equal Rabbet Frame
Jamb
Depth
1-15/16
(49 mm)
Cased Open Frame

5/8
(16 mm)
1-15/16
(49 mm)
Varies
Jamb
Depth
5/16
(8mm)
1/2
(13 mm)
Throat
Opening
1/2
(13 mm)
Face
2
(50 mm)
5/16
(8mm)
Throat
Opening
1/2
(13 mm)
1/2
(13 mm)

equal rabbet frames

cased open frames
Gauge:
16 Ga. (1.3mm), 14 Ga. (1.7mm)
Gauge:
6 Ga. (1.3mm), 14 Ga. (1.7mm)
Jamb depth:

4-7/8 (124mm) min. thru 14-3/4 (375mm)

Jamb depth:

3-1/4 (133mm) min. thru 14-3/4 (375mm)

Face:
Standard 2 (50mm)
Face:
Standard 2 (50mm)
Miter:


corner clip.
Miter:


corner clip.
Single Rabbet Frame

single rabbet frames
Jamb
Depth
9/16
Varies
1-15/16
(49 mm)
5/8
(16 mm)
5/16
(8mm)
1/2
(13 mm)
Throat
Opening
2
(50 mm)
Gauge:
6 Ga. (1.3mm), 14 Ga. (1.7mm)
Jamb depth:

3-1/4 (133mm) min. thru 4-3/8 (111mm)

Face:
Standard 2 (50mm)
Miter:


corner clip.
Notes:
1/2
(13 mm)
1. DW and K Series are installed KD

2. MU Series can be installed KD or welded.
3. Equal rabbet frames are supplied when specified or in
communicating frame applications (refer to page 68).
4. Cased open frames are used double acting door or applied
stop applications (refer to page 73).
5. Single rabbet frames are used for jamb depths
below 4 -1/2.
63
Profile variations
4 Head: DW, K, and MU Series frames
Apply
No. 8 x 2-1/2 (63.5mm)
Phillips Bugle Head Screw
Throat
Opening
1/2
(13 mm)
1/2
(13 mm)
4
(50 mm)
5/8 (16 mm)
1-9/16
(40 mm)
Varies
1-15/16
(49 mm)
4 (102mm)
Jamb
Depth
2
(51mm)
Product: DW16, DW14, K16, K14,

MU16, and MU14
Profile variation: Unequal, equal or single

rabbet, cased open
Jamb depth:
3-1/4 through 14-3/4 in 1/8 increments
Notes:
1. MU Series frames with 4 heads are used mainly in
masonry applications when 2 face heads do not match
block coursing.
2. DW and K Series with 4 heads are used mainly, when
installed in close proximity to a F Series or MU Series frame
installed with a 4 head.
3. DW, KD, and MU corners includes wedge-lock corner clips.
Screws are supplied to secure miter.
64
Profile variations
Silencer preparations
Silencer Prep
9/32 (7mm)
dia. hole for
field installed
silencer
Product
Caution
F, FN, FE, DE, MU, DW, and K Series frames both open and
closed sections.
When frames are to be grout filled, it is the responsibility of the

installing contractor to guard off the silencer holes.
Description:
Exceptions
Frames are supplied factory prepared for field installed

silencers (3 per strike jamb and/or 2 per double door head).
Field applied self adhesive silencers are used on all mullions.
65
Dutch doors
Non-labeled
9-3/4
(248mm)
Door opening height
Dimension D
68 (2032mm)
16-9/16 (421mm)
70 (2134mm)
20-9/16 (522mm)
72 (2184mm)
22-9/16 (573mm)
Finished
Opening
Height
19-7/16
(494mm)
23-7/8
(606mm)
36-5/8
(937mm)
10-3/8
(264mm)
Application
Purpose
Single Swing applications only: no double door

configurations.
Standard Dutch Door Frame Openings are prepared for:
Together with the use of a dutch door shelf, dutch doors can
be viewed as an extension of nearby counter tops as well as
allowing the passage of materials without opening the entire
door leaf.
4-1/2 (114mm) x 4-1/2 (114mm) universal hinge

reinforcements, 1 pair per leaf.
High Frequency Hinge Reinforcements are installed at

the top hinge for each door leaf.
One (1) ASA 4-7/8 (124mm) high ANSI A115.1 or 2 strike

aligned for top and bottom leaf.
Optional Strike Preparations for the Top Leaf include:
One (1) ASA 2-3/4 (70mm) high ANSI A115.3 strike

aligned for top and bottom leaf, or
One (1) CYL 4-7/8 (124mm) high ANSI A115.1 or 2 strike

or one (1) ASA 2-3/4 (70mm).
frame Series:
F16, F14, FN16, FN14, MU16, and MU14 in depths from

3-1/4 (83mm) to 20 (508mm).
DW16, DW14, K16, and K14 in depths from 3-1/4 (83mm) to

14-3/4 (372mm).
Refer to pages 136-140 in the Door Section of this manual for

information of applicable dutch doors.
Sizes available from 20 (610mm) x 68 (2032mm)

thru 40 (1219mm) x 80 (2438mm).
66
Dutch doors
Labeled
9-3/4
(248mm)
Door opening height
Dimension D
68 (2032mm)
16-9/16 (421mm)
70 (2134mm)
20-9/16 (522mm)
72 (2184mm)
22-9/16 (573mm)
Finished
Opening
Height
Application
19-7/16
(494mm)
23-7/8
(606mm)
14-11/16

configurations.
Hinge preparations for standard dutch door frame openings

include:
36-5/8
(937mm)

10-3/8
(264mm)
Labeled application

Refer to pages 136-140 in the Door Section of this manual

for information of applicable dutch doors.
Maximum 3 hour approval in sizes up to 40 x 72.

Refer to the Fire Rated section of this manual for
fire rated approvals.
4-1/2 (114mm) x 4-1/2 (114mm) universal hinge

reinforcements, 1 pair per leaf.
High Frequency Hinge Reinforcements are installed at

the top hinge for each door leaf.
Optional Strike Preparations for the Top Leaf include:

One (1) CYL 2-3/4 (70mm) high ANSI A115.3 strike


or one (1) CYL 2-3/4 (70mm) high ANSI A115.3 strike
aligned for the bottom leaf due to the latch bolt from
the top leaf projecting into the strike preparation in the
bottom leaf (see pages 138-140).
Frame head is equipped with a closer reinforcement.

Sizes available from 20 (610mm) x 68 (2032mm)
thru 40 (1219mm) x 72 (2184mm).
Purpose
Together with the use of a dutch door shelf, dutch doors can
be viewed as an extension of nearby counter tops as well as
allowing the passage of materials without opening the entire
door leaf.
labeled frame Series:
F16 and F14 in depths from 3 (76mm) to 14 (356mm).

MU16 and MU14 in depths from 3-1/4 (83mm) to
14 (356mm).
67
Communicating
Communicating frames
1-9/16 (40mm)
or
1-15/16 (49mm)
Rabbet
1-9/16 (40mm)
or
1-15/16 (49mm)
Rabbet
Labeled application
Purpose
Maximum 3 hour approval in sizes up to 40 x 80 single

doors or 80 x 80 pairs. Refer to the Fire Rated section of
this manual for fire rated approvals.
Communicating frames provide security for both adjoining

rooms: each door is locked from the occupied side of
each room.
Application
These Frames are prepared for hanging a door in each rabbet.
1. 1-15/16 (49mm) rabbets are prepared for
1-3/4 (45mm) doors.
2. The 1-9/16 (40mm) rabbets are prepared for
1-3/8 (35mm) doors.
3. 1-3/8 (35mm) x 1-3/4 (45mm) doors can be
accommodated.
These communicating frames are primarily used in the
Hospitality Segment of building types to separate
two (2) adjoining rooms.
68
This frame option is available for the following Steelcraft Series
of Frames:
FN16, FN14, F16, F14, MU16, and MU 14 for Singles and Pairs.
DW16, DW14, K16, and K14 for Single Swing only.
Note:
1. When using DW and K Series Frames, doors are to be hinged
on opposite jambs.
Communicating
Terminated or sanitary steps
One-piece
base anchor/
filler plate
Single Rabbet
Double Rabbet
45 Hospital Stops
90 Hospital Stops
Single
Rabbet
Double
Rabbet
Double
Rabbet
Only
4, 5-1/2, or 6
4, 5-1/2, or 6
Note:
1. 45 Hospital stops are measured from the bottom of the
frame to the bottom of the 45 stop miter.
Application
This frame option is available for the following Steelcraft Series
Frames:
Single Rabbet 45 only: F16 and F14
Frames with optional hospital stop preparations include

stops which do not run the full height of the frame.
Double Rabbet 90: FN16, FN14, F16, F14, DW16, DW14, K16,
K14, MU16, and MU14
The stop terminates above the floor line and is closed with a
45 or 90 angle.
Weld-in base anchors are included as standard and not

available without.
Frames with Hospital stops are primarily used in the health

care segment where cleanliness is required.
Double Rabbet 45: FN16, FN14, F16, F14, DW16, DW14, K16,
K14, MU16, and MU14
Purpose
The stop terminating above the floor line allows for easier
cleaning and minimizes the build-up of germs, bacteria and
residue at the floor level of the door opening.
F and MU Series frames come standard with weld-in

one-piece base anchor/filler plates, which are not
available as omit.
Standard base anchors for DW and K Series will

remain available
Labeled application
Maximum 3 hour approval in sizes up to 40 x 80 single

doors or 80 x 80 pairs. Refer to the Fire Rated section
of this manual for fire rated approvals
Frames with hospital stop are available for smoke and

draft applications.
Only 4 Hospital stops with EMA anchored frames may

be labeled.
69
Head reinforcement
12 Gauge full width channel
16
(407mm)
2-1/2
(64mm)
Continuous 12 Gauge (2.5mm)

Reinforcement
Application
Note:
Continuous head reinforcement channels are used at the

specifiers discretion to safe guard against head sag in door
opening usually over 60 in width. The 12 gauge continuous
head reinforcement is 1 (25mm) less in length than the
nominal head size, i.e., a head for a 60 (1829mm) pair of
doors would require a 71 (1803mm) long continuous head
reinforcement:
Welded into frame head

Minimum 2 (50mm) face dimension
Length, other than standard, must be specified
Hollow metal frames, with or without the optional continuous

head reinforcement, are not designed as or intended to be a
load bearing member of wall construction.
This optional frame component is available for the following

Steelcraft standard double rabbet profile Series frames: F16,
F14, MU16, MU14, DW16, DW14, K16, and K14.
Also available on standard FE or DE Series

double egress frames
Purpose
When there is concern for the weight of overhead wall
construction, or, when multiple surface applied hardware
components are being used, this continuous steel channel has
the ability to spread and transfer the load to the floor through
the jambs while also providing the necessary strength and
thickness for thread engaugement.
70
Lead lined
Clips (all lead lining supplied by owners)
7/8
(22mm)
Clip Closed
7/8
(22mm)
Insert lead under clips

and hammer clips closed
1-15/16
(49mm)
1-15/16
(49mm)
Form lead, as shown, to fit over

guards. Open clips are provided
for the installation of the lead
Base Anchor Strap
Hammer flat
Cut lead to fit
around base
anchor strap
9/16
(14mm)
Heads of screws used in

dimples holes may be filled
and ground smooth.
Tackwelds
Floor to ceiling
structural angle
by others
Fit lead around these anchor

strap an flatten for the
installation of the base anchor.
Attach frame directly

to wood (or metal)
studs with screws
Weld frame to
structural angles
Standard Wire
Masonry Anchor
Application
Purpose
Lead lined frames are intended for use in the X-ray Room
locations in Health Care facilities.
Attachment clips are furnished for the installation of lead lining

in frames used in X-Ray rooms.
Frames are supplied knock-down (KD). Frame preparation

and installation of lead lining by others.
Thickness of lead varies as required or specified for the type

of equipment being used.
This product option is available for Steelcraft labeled or

non-labeled F and MU Series Frames.
Lead is located on the door side of the frame, covering the

inside surfaces of the face, rabbet, stop and part, or all, of
the soffit. Lead linings are to be overlapped at the miters of
the frame.
Notes:
It is recommended that the installation of the lead be done

by a local lead contractor who may also be installing lead in
the walls, floor and ceiling of the room where the lead lined
frame is being used.
For masonry wire anchoring applications only with all others
being subject to the authority having jurisdiction.
1. Lead supplied by others.

2. CAUTION: Any cutting of lead to fit around hardware
reinforcements can cause leakage of X-Rays through the
frame.
3. The doors, walls and other perimeter construction must also
include integral lead lining.
4. Wire masonry anchors only (labeled and non-labeled)
71
Rough buck
Rough buck frames
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]

Rough Buck
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]

Rough Buck
Holes field drilled in

channel and wall.
Fasteners by others.
16 Gauge
[0.053 (1.3mm)]
Frame
Existing Wall
Holes field drilled in Cabinet
Frame and Rough Buck after
Rough Buck installation.
16 Gauge
[0.053 (1.3mm)]
Frame
Typical Wall Detail
Fasteners by others.
Frame must be welded.
Application
Rough Buck (Cabinet) frames are specialty frames that include

a sub-channel (Rough Buck). The sub-channel is attached to an
existing wall condition. The exposed steel (Cabinet Frame) is
then attached to the sub-channel with fasteners provided
by others.
This frame option is available on special order only. It is a

Non-Stock item. It is available as a non-labeled frame only.
Rough Buck (Cabinet) frames are rarely used. They are usually
installed in pre-cast existing masonry wall applications.
Purpose
Using this frame application allows contractors to install the
Rough Buck relatively early in the construction cycle. The
finished frame (Cabinet Frame) is then installed at a later date.
72
Applied stops
Applied stops
Cased Open
Frame Section
Standard Template
Hinge Preparation
(at standard Steelcraft locations)
Application
Purpose
Frames with applied stops are used in commercial and/

or institutional applications where sound control is a
consideration. Frames configured as Cased Open sections
can be prepared for standard template hinges at standard
Steelcraft vertical locations. Applied stops, manufactured
by others, can be attached to the center portion of the frame
either as a hardware item, for safeguarding acoustical control,
weatherstripping or for spring adjustable sealing. The field
applied stop must provide a 1-9/16 (40mm) rabbet to
accommodate a 1-3/8 (35mm) thick door, or a 1-15/16
(49mm) rabbet accommodating a 1-3/4 (45mm) thick door.
Frames for applied stops provide versatility for the building

owner to accommodate security, sound attenuation or weather
protection using integrated sealing hardware.
This frame option is available as non-labeled only for the
following Steelcraft Series of frames: FN16, FN14, F16, F14,
MU16 and MU 14, DW16, DW14, K16, and K14.
73
Hardware
High frequency hinge reinforcement F and FE Series

10 Gauge
Auxiliary Hinge
Reinforcement
Plaster
Guard
Arc Weld
10 Gauge
3 Places
Auxiliary Hinge
Each
Reinforcement
Reinforcement
Standard or
Universal
Hinge
Reinforcement
Plaster
Guard
Standard or
Universal
Hinge
Reinforcement
Arc Weld
3 Places
Each
Reinforcement
Auxiliary Hinge
Reinforcement
3HR0103P002-GL
Auxiliary Hinge
Reinforcement
3HR0102P001-GL
Application
Purpose
High frequency hinge reinforcements are installed in frames

located in high abuse areas of commercial and/or institutional
facilities formed to match the contour of the frame, the 10
gauge (3mm) auxiliary hinge reinforcement is arc welded in 3
locations of the frame:
The optional high frequency hinge reinforcement provides

additional strength to the 4-1/2 (114mm) or 5 (127mm)
hinge reinforcement specified for use in high abuse openings,
including dutch doors, and doors with automatic operators.
The frame face
The soffit section The auxiliary reinforcement is primarily

applicable to the top hinge reinforcement of 4-1/2 (114mm)
or 5 (127mm) hinge reinforcements, but may be used on
other hinge locations when specified.
The 7 gauge (4.7mm) hinge reinforcement (projection

welded to the frame at the factory)
High frequency hinge reinforcements are available factory
installed, or, may be installed in the local Steelcraft distributors
fabrication shop and is applicable to all series of Steelcraft
labeled and non-labeled steel frames.
Automatic operators

Automatic Operators, such as those from LCN

http://us.allegion.com/IRSTDocs/Catalog/109510.pdf or
any manufacturer, place a great deal of stress on the hinges
of a frame and can cause failure. When using automatic
operators with butt hinging systems any frame used must
include all of the following:
High frequency hinge reinforcing installed

14 gauge steel
5 heavy weight hinges
74
Thick doors
Over 1 34 thru 3 thick
* 1/2
(13mm)
* 1/2
(13mm)
Throat Opening
2
(50mm)
5/8
(16mm)
Door Thickness
plus (3/16 (5mm)
Varies
1-9/16
(40mm)
Jamb Depth
*Backbend:
Application

Door rabbet to be equal to the door thickness plus

3/16 (5mm) for clearances
Backset on Hinge preparation must be specified:
Regular Weight
Purpose
To accommodate the varying thickness of Specialty doors
requiring a standard frame profile.
This special frame option is available for Labeled and Nonlabeled 16 gauge (1.3mm) and 14 gauge (1.7mm) Steelcraft
F and FN Series frames.
Heavy Weight
Backset on Strike preparation must be specified

Frame must be welded
75
Weather seals
PS-074 Surface applied weatherstrip
SECTION OF
WEATHERSTRIP
Approximately
1/16 lap
Rigid
Leg
Flexible
Leg
Strike Jamb/Head Corner
HEAD
HINGE JAMB
STRIKE JAMB
ASTRAGAL
Application
Purpose
The Weatherstrip is manufactured from a flexible, black plastic

material (TPE) that is resistant to paint migration, impervious
to fatigue and capable of withstanding extreme temperatures:
Steelcraft PS074 Weatherstrip, when applied to frames and

overlapping astragals, will perform as an effective seal against
adverse weather conditions.
Ideal temperature range to apply PS-074 Weatherstrip is

70 to 90F (21 to 32C).
PS-074 should not be applied when the temperature is

below 50F (10C) or above 100F (38C).
Warranted shelf life of adhesive is 12 months when stored at

70F (21C) and 50% relative humidity.
This product is available from factory inventory and can be

applied to the full line of Steelcraft frames. Application to label
frames is subject to the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
When tested in accordance with ASTM E-283

(air infiltration) and ASTM E-331 (water resistance) PS-074
Weatherstrip had an air infiltration rate of .074 cubic feet per
minute, per lineal foot of crack, and, no water leakage.
76
Throat fillers
Rigid vinyl
1/2
(13mm)
Head Filler
1/2
(13mm)
Typical Frame Section

with 1 Throat Filler
Throat Reduced
by 1/8 (3mm)
Jamb Filler
Jamb Filler
Thick Leg Toward Inside

of Throat Opening
Double Face
Tape
Typical Frame Section

with 2 Throat Fillers
Throat Reduced
by 1/4 (6mm)
Application
Purpose
The Steelcraft Throat filler is made of extruded rigid vinyl:
When wall thickness is between 1/8 (3mm) to 1/4 (6mm)

less than the frame throat dimension, Throat filler section(s)
can be used to fill the gap, assuring the proper amount of grip
required to complete the installation.
Sections supplied with double faced tape applied to the

inside lip for installation on frame backbends.
Standard length of Throat filler sections is 87 (2210mm)

to ensure continuous sections that accommodate heights
up to 72 (2184mm).
To be applied to the backbend(s) of frames after they have

been installed on the wall:
Jamb filler(s) are to be equal to the overall length of the

jamb backbend.
Head filler(s) are to be 1 (25mm) less than the overall

length of the head backbend.
This optional frame component is available from factory
inventory and is applicable to Steelcraft non-labeled
DW and K Series frames.
77
Kerf frames
Integral
* 1/2
(13mm)
* 1/2
(13mm)
* 1/2
(13mm)
Throat Opening
Throat Opening
Throat Opening
5/16 (8mm)
F Series
2-1/8
(54mm)
Varies
MU, DW, and K Series
Face
1-9/16
(40mm)
Jamb Depth
5/8
(16mm)
2-1/8
(54mm)
Jamb Depth: 5 14-3/4
Varies
1-9/16
(40mm)
Jamb Depth
5/8
(16mm)
5/8
(16mm)
Jamb Depth: 5 14-3/4
Gauge:
16 Ga. (1.3mm)
Jamb Depth:
F, MU, DW, and K Series: 5 (127mm) min. through

14-3/4 (375mm) for standard profile.
F Series: 4-1/8 (105mm) min. through 14-3/4 (375mm)

for single rabbet
Note: EMA anchors require minimum jamb depth of 5-5/8

for standard profile frames.
Face:
Standard 2 (51mm) face head and jamb dimensions with
4 (102mm) face head optional on equal and unequal
rabbet only.
Miter:
45 die miter with soffit tab and interlocking corner clip.
Opening Size:
80 x 80 (2439mm x 2439mm) maximum.
Profile Options:
1-15/16 (49mm) or 1-9/16 (40mm) equal rabbet profiles or
single rabbet profiles.
*Backbend:
F Series
Face
2-1/8
(54mm)
Varies
Jamb Depth
Jamb Depth: 4-1/8 14-3/4
Application
The Integral Kerf frame is intended for use in areas, interior
or exterior, which require a further reduction in air flow from
the door and frame. The kerf material is manufactured from
a durable, UV-resistant, polyethylene cladding covering the
urethane foam. The gasket material complies with UL 10C.
They have also passed the water penetration test up to
34 mph per ASTM E-331.
Frames are supplied knock-down as standard with gasket

material shipped loose for insertion into frame by others.
Replacement gasket material can be found in the Parts

section of the price manual.
This optional frame feature is available for the following
Steelcraft frame series:
Equal and unequal rabbet F16, MU16, DW16 and K16

Single rabbet F16
Labeled application
Maximum 3 hour fire rating approval up to an 80 x 80
opening size.
7/16 (11mm) for 5-3/4 frame jamb depth on F Series only.
78
Frames: Anchoring systems

Flush Frames......................................................... 81
F, FN, MU, FE, and DE Series................................. 81
Drywall Frames.................................................... 83
DW and K Series..................................................... 83
Anchor Details...................................................... 85
Wire masonry........................................................... 85
Closed steel
stud anchor
Wood stud
anchor
Masonry T................................................................. 85
Yoke & strap masonry...........................................86
Butterfly existing wall............................................ 87
Hat spacer existing wall .......................................88
Tube & strap existing wall....................................88
Universal stud..........................................................89
Wood stud................................................................89
Wood stud................................................................90
Closed steel stud....................................................90
Adjustable
base
anchor
Open steel
stud anchor
Flush steel stud........................................................ 91

Recessed steel stud................................................ 91
Field adjustable base............................................ 92
Fixed base ................................................................ 92
Compression jamb................................................. 93
Adjustable
masonry
anchor
Security (optional) for DW and K Series......... 93

Adjustable for DW Series.....................................94
Base for K Series.....................................................94
Mullion base............................................................. 95
Sill section base...................................................... 95
Corner post base.....................................................96
Adjustable base
anchor (DW Series)
Base anchor
(K Series)
Main TOC
Compression
anchor
Optional security anchor

(DW & K Series)
79
80
Flush frames
F, FN, MU, FE, and DE Series

3. Adjustable Base Anchors:
Field attached (16 Ga.) base anchors provides direct

attachment and adjustability for out of level base
surface conditions.
If frame is NOT to be set directly on the floor (slab)

adjust base anchor UPWARD as required.
4. Special Frame Anchors: Anchor details and availability of

lock-in anchors will vary with the following frame profile
changes:

1. All Frames in this category are supplied standard with
masonry wire or lock-in jamb anchors and adjustable base
anchors. Anchors are designed for maximum wall/frame
engagement and installation flexibility.
Single Rabbet: all details will vary.
FE and DE Series Double Egress Frames: Anchor details

will vary due to frame and application conditions.

installation instructions, ANSI A250.11 Recommended
Erection Instructions for Steel Frames, and HMMA 84.

6. Installation Caution Notice: Grouted Frames:
2. Anchoring Applications:
Masonry Wall: Masonry wire anchors (3/16 [5mm]

diameter) provide maximum engagements in mortar
joints, and allow for full internal grouting during
installation. The anchor is to be spread wider than the
jamb depth and twisted into position. Adjustable base
anchors are attached directly to the floor and adjusted.
The wall is built around the anchored frame.
Existing Masonry Walls: Specifically designed (18 Ga.)

jamb anchors are used to add support for bolting the
frame into the rough opening of an existing wall.
Wood Stud Walls: Lock-in (18 Ga.) jamb anchors are

designed to be attached to the wood studs of a rough
opening.
Steel Stud Walls: Lock-in (18 Ga.) jamb anchors are

designed to be attached to the webbing of the closed
steel studs which are built around the frame.
Universal Stud Wall Anchors: Universal lock-in

(18 Ga.) jamb anchors are designed for use in either
wood or steel stud wall applications. Maximum jamb
depth is 9-1/2.
Double Rabbet: weld-in anchors required over

9-1/2 jamb depth.

be used in the plaster or mortar to prevent freezing, the
contractor installing the frames must coat the inside of
the frames in the field with a corrosion resistant coating
per ANSI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions
for
Steel Frames.

Steel frames, including fire rated frames, do not

require grouting. Grouting is not recommended for
frames in drywall.
7. All Fire Rated frames must be installed in accordance with

81
Flush frames
F, FN, MU, FE, and DE Series

Masonry Wall Applications
Standard Lock-In Jamb Anchors are supplied

on standard F Series frames having 2 faces
Wire Masonry Anchor
Masonry T Anchor
Existing Wall Anchor
HINGE
Stud Wall Applications

HINGE
STRIKE
Universal Stud Anchor

Lock-In Anchor
Anchor for Steel Stud

Partition
Lock-In Anchor
Anchor for Wood Stud

Partition
Lock-In Anchor
HINGE
Adjustable Sill Anchors are provided as standard
Attached with S.M.

screws furnished
Anchor Quantities:
3 per jamb through 76 height

4 per jamb over 76 to 120 height
1 adjustable base anchor per jamb
Anchor Locations:
Locate all anchors on hinge jamb as close to top of hinge reinforcement as

possible.
Locate anchors on strike jamb in the corresponding position as the hinge jamb.
Maximum adjustment
1-3/8 (35mm)
below bottom of frame
Specialty Weld-In Jamb Anchors are supplied for custom frames and special wall applications when specified.
Masonry Wall Application
Existing
Weld-In Tube & Strap
Wall Anchor Anchor for Special
Profile Frames
82
Stud Wall Anchors
Weld-In Yoke
Strap &
Masonry Anchor
Z Steel Stud WeldIn Anchor for Special

Profile Frames
Sill Anchors
Weld-In Wood
Stud Anchor
Weld-In
Floor Anchor
Weld-In Wood
Stud Base Anchor
Drywall frames
DW and K Series
1. Drywall Frames are supplied standard with field adjustable
compression anchors in each jamb and adjustable base
anchors. DW Series Frames are designed especially for use
in installations using wall baseboards.
2. Anchoring Applications:
Masonry Wall: Not recommended.
Optional Security Anchor: Security Stud Anchors are

recommended in frames over 80 (2438mm) high or
in frames installed in areas where security is a priority.
Locate the Security Stud Anchor immediately above
or below the strike reinforcements, and on both faces
(secure and entrance sides) of the jamb. Security Stud
Anchors may be used in both the strike and hinge jambs.
They are also recommended to be used in the head of
frames for pairs of doors.
Wood and Steel Stud Walls: Adjustable compression

anchors are factory located near the top of each jamb.
These anchors can be easily adjusted with either a screw
driver or power driver. Adjustable lock-in base anchors
are provided for attachment directly to the wall floor
(sill) runner.
3. Grouting of the DW and K Series Frames is not

recommended.
installation instructions, ANSI A250.11 Recommended
Erection Instructions for Steel Frames, and HMMA 840.

5. Installation Caution Notice:
After the frame pieces have been installed over the

wallboard, the frame is squared by adjusting the
compression anchor screws located in the soffit of the
jambs. Turning the screw in a clockwise direction will
tighten the frame.
DO NOT over tighten the compression anchors.

Check to insure the opening is plumb.
6. All Fire Rated frames must be installed in accordance with

83
Drywall frames
DW and K Series
Standard Field Adjustable Compression Jamb Anchors are
supplied as standard for DW & K Series frames having 2 faces
HINGE
Stud Wall Applications (refer to page 93)
Jamb/Compression
Anchor (refer to page 93)
HINGE
STRIKE
Optional Security Applications (refer to page 93)
HINGE
Anchor Quantities:
1 compression anchor per jamb through 9depth

2 compression anchors per jamb for 9depth and greater
2 twist-in strap base anchors per jamb
Either Adjustable Sill Anchors or Counter Sunk Sill

Anchor Holes are provided as standard
Anchor Locations:
Compression anchors are factory installed near the top of

each jamb.
The twist-in anchors are installed into the Base Anchor

Attaching Strap that is factory installed at the bottom of
each jamb.
Anchor Options:
Security Jamb Anchor
84
See description on the previous page

See details on Page 93
DW Series
Adjustable Lock-in
Base Anchor
(refer to page 94)
K Series
Base Anchor
(refer to page 94)
Anchor details
Wire masonry
1. Material:
2. Supplied:
Shipped loose for field installation
3. Applicable Frame Series:
F, FN, MU, FE, and DE
4. Profile variations:

SR: Single Rabbet

DR: Double Rabbet
(equal & unequal)
CO: Cased Open NOTE: profile
must have back bends
5. Frame depths:
3 through 14-3/4
6. Face variations:
Fits all face variations
7. Frame attachment: Lock-in

8. Application:
Ship loose to jobsite, field installed
9. Wall construction:
Masonry block or brick
10. Fire label applications:
UL/WH 3 hour max.
11. Base anchor:

See page 92 for base anchor
details
Masonry T
1. Material:
18 Ga. Galvannealed Steel
2. Supplied:
F, FN, MU, FE, DE
SR: Single Rabbet

DR: Double Rabbet

(equal & unequal)

CO: Cased Open

NOTE: profile must have
backbends
5. Frame depths:

All frame depths Ordered

specifically to fit frame depths
6. Face variations:
7. Frame attachment:
Lock-in
8. Application:
UL/WH 3 hour max.
11. Base anchor:

details
85
Anchor details
Yoke & strap masonry

1. Material:
2. Supplied:
shipment
Factory welded in prior to
F, FN, MU, FE, DE

SR: Single Rabbet

DR: Double Rabbet
(equal & unequal)
CO: Cased Open
5. Frame depths:

All frame depths For frame depths

over 12-3/4 2 anchors welded at
each anchor location
6. Face variations:
specifically to fit face
Fits all face variations Ordered

Arrives to jobsite welded

into frame
8. Application:
Factory welded
UL/WH 3 hour max.
11. Base anchor:

details
86
Anchor details
Butterfly existing wall

1. Material:
2. Supplied:
3. Applicable Frame Series: F

SR: Single Rabbet

DR: Double Rabbet

(equal & unequal)

CO: Cased Open

NOTE: profile must have a
backbend
5. Frame depths:

4-3/4 through 9-1/8 Adjustable

Fits all depths up to 9-1/8
Single Rabbet up to 3-3/4"
6. Face variations:
2 face only.
Lock-in or factory welded
8. Application:

Ship loose to jobsite, field

installed. When specified
welded, arrives to jobsite
welded into frame.

Masonry block, brick, existing

or pre-cast
UL/WH 3 hour max.
11. Base anchor:

Additional butterfly anchor

used as the base anchor
87
Anchor details
Hat spacer existing wall

1. Material:
2. Supplied:
Welded in prior to shipment
F, FN, MU, FE, DE

SR: Single Rabbet

DR: Double Rabbet
(equal & unequal)
CO: Cased Open
a backbend
5. Frame depths:

All frame depths

For frame depths over
9-1/4 2 anchors welded at
6. Face variations:
Factory welded
8. Application:

Arrives at jobsite welded

into frame


or pre-cast
UL/WH 3 hour max.
11. Base anchor:

Additional Hat Spacer anchor

1. Material:
2. Supplied:
F, FN, MU, FE, DE

SR: Single Rabbet

DR: Double Rabbet
(equal & unequal)
CO: Cased Open
a backbend
5. Frame depths:

All frame depths

9-1/4 2 anchors welded at
6. Face variations:
Factory welded
8. Application:


into frame


or pre-cast
UL/WH 3 hour max.
11. Base anchor:

Additional Tube & Strap anchor

Tube & strap existing wall
88
Anchor details
Universal stud
Lock-In Anchor
1. Material:
2. Supplied:
F, MU

DR: Double Rabbet

(equal & unequal)
CO: Cased Open
a backbend
5. Frame depths:

4-3/4, through
9-1/2 Ordered specifically
to fit frame depths
6. Face variations:
2 only

8. Application:
Wood stud or steel stud walls
UL/WH 3 hour max.
11. Base anchor:

Additional wood stud anchor

1. Material:
2. Supplied:
Wood stud
Lock-In Anchor


DR: Double Rabbet

(equal & unequal)
CO: Cased Open
a backbend
5. Frame depths:

4-3/4, 5-3/4, 6-3/4, 7-3/4,

8-3/4 -non-adjustable
6. Face variations:
2 only
8. Application:
Wood stud walls
UL/WH 3 hour max.
11. Base anchor:

Additional wood stud anchor used

as the base anchor
89
Anchor details
Wood stud
1. Material:
2. Supplied:
F, FN, MU, FE, DE

DR: Double Rabbet

(equal & unequal)
CO: Cased Open
NOTE: profile must have a return
5. Frame depths:
All frame depths
6. Face variations:


Ordered specifically to fit face
Must be welded to frame
8. Application:


into frame
Wood stud walls
UL/WH 3 hour max.
11. Base anchor:

Additional wood stud anchor

1. Material:
2. Supplied:
Closed steel stud

Lock-In Anchor

DR: Double Rabbet

(equal & unequal)
CO: Cased Open
5. Frame depths:
4-3/4, 5-3/4, 6-3/4, 7-3/4,
8-3/4-non-adjustable
6. Face variations:
2 only

8. Application:
Closed steel stud walls
UL/WH 3 hour max.
11. Base anchor:

details
90
Anchor details
Flush steel stud

1. Material:
2. Supplied:
F, FN, MU, FE, DE

SR: Single Rabbet

DR: Double Rabbet
(equal & unequal)
CO: Cased Open
5. Frame depths:
All frame depths
6. Face variations:


8. Application:


into frame
UL/WH 3 hour max.
11. Base anchor:

details
Recessed steel stud

1. Material:
2. Supplied:
F, FN, MU, FE, DE

SR: Single Rabbet

DR: Double Rabbet
(equal & unequal)
CO: Cased Open
5. Frame depths:
All frame depths
6. Face variations:


8. Application:


into frame
UL/WH 3 hour max.
11. Base anchor:

details
91
Anchor details
Field adjustable base
Attached with S.M. screws furnished
Maximum adjustment 1-3/8 (35mm)

below bottom of frame
1. Material:
2. Supplied:
F, MU

DR: Double Rabbet

(equal & unequal)
5. Frame depths:

All frame depths

Ordered to specifically fit
frame depths
6. Face variations:

Retaining clip is factory

welded into each jamb.
Adjustable anchor is field
attached and adjusted
during installation.
8. Application:

Anchor angle ship loose to jobsite,

field attached and adjusted.
Adjustable base anchors are
manufactured to fit the frame
profile, depth and profile
variations which must be specified
when ordering this anchor.
Masonry block or brick, steel stud
UL/WH 3 hour max.
1. Material:
2. Supplied:
F, FN, MU, FE, DE

SR: Single Rabbet

DR: Double Rabbet
(equal & unequal)
CO: Cased Open
5. Frame depths:

All frame depths

Ordered to specifically fit
frame depths
6. Face variations:
8. Application:


into frame
Masonry block or brick, steel stud
UL/WH 3 hour max.
Fixed base
92
Anchor details
Compression jamb
Security anchor (optional)

for DW and K Series
1. Material:
2. Supplied:

Factory welded in prior

to shipment
DW, K

SR: Single Rabbet

DR: Double Rabbet
(equal & unequal)
CO: Cased Open
a backbend
5. Frame depths:

All DW & K frame depths

9, 2 anchors welded at each
anchor location
6. Face variations:
2 face only
8. Application:


into frame
Wood or steel stud walls
UL/WH 1-1/2 hour max.
11. Base anchor:
See page 94 for sill anchor details
1. Material:
2. Supplied:
DW, K

SR: Single Rabbet

DR: Double Rabbet
(equal & unequal)
CO: Cased Open
a backbend
5. Frame depths:
All frame depths
6. Face variations:
2 face only

Security anchor is field installed in the strike jamb
directly above or below the strike preparation.
8. Application:
93
Anchor details
Adjustable base for DW Series

1. Material:
2. Supplied:
3. Applicable Frame Series: DW


SR: Single Rabbet

DR: Double Rabbet
(equal & unequal)
CO: Cased Open
a backbend
5. Frame depths:
All frame depths
6. Face variations:
2 face only

Retaining clip is factory welded

into each jamb. Adjustable anchor
is field attached and adjusted
during installation.
8. Application:

Anchor angle ship loose to jobsite,

field attached and adjusted.
1. Material:

#8 Phillips Flat Head Sheet Metal

Screws (2 per jamb).
Supplied by others.
2. Supplied:

Base of each jamb is factory

prepared with a countersunk
hole to accept a #8 Phillips Flat
Head Screw. Supplied by others.
Base for K Series

Factory prepared holes: screws by others
3. Applicable Frame Series: K
94

SR: Single Rabbet

DR: Double Rabbet
(equal & unequal)
CO: Cased Open
a backbend
5. Frame depths:
All frame depths
6. Face variations:



Counter sunk holes pierced

onto the face at the factory
8. Application:
Field attached
Anchor details
Mullion base
1. Material:
2. Supplied:
F Series Hollow Metal Mullions

SR: Single Rabbet

DR: Double Rabbet
(equal & unequal)
5. Frame depths:
All frame depths
6. Face variations:
Anchor to floor, mullion slides over
8. Application:
9. Floor construction: All

UL/WH 3 hour max.
1. Material:
2. Supplied:
F, FN,

SR: Single Rabbet

DR: Double Rabbet
(equal & unequal)
5. Frame depths:
All frame depths
6. Face variations:
Fits all pace variations
Anchor to floor, sill snaps on top
8. Application:
Sill section base

UL/WH 3 hour max.
95
Anchor details
Corner post base
Corner Post Anchor

(2- and 3-way posts)
1. Material:
12 Ga. Galvanized Steel
2. Supplied:
Corner posts

DR: Double Rabbet

(equal & unequal)
5. Frame depths:
All frame depths
6. Face variations:

Attached to floor, corner post

slides over
8. Application:

UL/WH Approved
Mullion base
anchor
Space equal to
jamb depth minus
1/8 (3mm)
96
Anchor
dimension
Full flush doors

General information............................................ 99
Full flush doors................................................... 103
L Series.................................................................... 103
SL Series...................................................................107
Falcon SZ Series......................................................111
B Series......................................................................113
T Series...................................................................... 117
CE Series...................................................................121
A14 Series Full glass entrance doors................ 125
Variations and options....................................... 129
Main TOC
97
Full flush doors
98
Full flush doors
General information
General door information
Steelcraft full flush doors are designed for virtually all

construction requirements in commercial building applications.
Their construction, durability and flexibility have been proven
throughout the world in both operation and physical testing of
all types.

Steelcraft door products, the following guidelines for base
Full flush door construction
Material Gauge: the following base material thickness values

were taken from the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. publication
for gauge number and equivalent thickness and describe the
sheet steel products available from Steelcraft:
Laminated (L and SL Series): Honeycomb core doors are

designed for installation in all types of building construction,
for both interior and exterior applications. The continuously
bonded cores and full height mechanically interlocked
edge seams provide attractive, flat and very durable doors
to the commercial construction industry. Many options are
available in this product Series including edge construction,
GRAINTECH woodgrain embossment, core variations.
20 Gauge [0.032 (0.8mm)]: for Light Commercial

applications with minimal use and abuse.
18 Gauge [0.042 (1.0mm)]: for Heavy Commercial and

Institutional applications with high use.
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]: for Extra Heavy Commercial

and Institutional applications having the potential of very
high use.
Steel Stiffened (B Series): These internally steel stiffened

core doors are designed for installation in all types
of building construction, for both interior and exterior
applications. The internal steel stiffeners are welded to
the face sheets. The full height mechanically interlocked
edge seams provide attractive and very durable doors to
the commercial construction industry. Edge construction
options are available.
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]: for Extra Heavy Commercial

Embossed (CE Series): The 6 and 8 panel embossed

doors, with a polystyrene core, are designed for installation
in all types of building construction for both interior and
exterior applications. The crisp and deeply embossed
panels create the appearance of hand carved doors. The
continuously bonded cores and full height mechanically
interlocked edge seams provide attractive, flat and very
durable doors to the commercial construction industry.
Temperature Rise (T Series): T Series doors are
equipped with a mineral core and are designed for use in
locations requiring a temperature rise rating. The use of
this door series is usually dictated by the local building
code. Steelcraft T Series doors carry a 250 F (121 C)
temperature rise Listing. Edge construction options
are available.
Full glass entrance door

construction
Material Selection: in addition to the thickness of base

available from Steelcraft:
Cold Rolled Steel (CRS): conforming to ASTM A1008 and

ASTM A568 recommended for interior opening with normal
humidity exposure.
Hot-Dip Galvannealed Steel: conforming to ASTM A924

and ASTM A653 recommended for exterior opening or
interior openings with high humidity.
Note: For recommendations on material and door types,

refer to the product specification tables on pages 366372 of this manual.
Installation
Installation of all Steelcraft frames and doors shall conform to
the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.112001 (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions
for Steel Frames and HMMA 840.
All Fire Rated doors must be installed and maintained in
accordance with the National Fire Protection Association
Pamphlet 80, and/or the local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
The A14 Series doors are specifically designed for entrances and
applications requiring full glass designs. They are an attractive
and very durable alternative to aluminum entrance doors.

All doors are manufactured and supplied to meet the
dimensional standards and performance levels as published
in ANSI A250.8-2003 (SDI 100).
the architectural community. Contact Steelcraft for those
requirements.
99
Full flush doors
General information
Job site storage
Store doors under cover, in a dry area and in an upright position.
All ferrous metal products should be stored where they will
not be exposed to, or come in contact with water. This is
particularly true of products such as doors, which have large
flat surfaces on which water may collect if they are stacked
horizontally. Only use vented plastic or canvas. The use of novented materials, create a humidity chamber, which promotes
blistering and corrosion.
1/8"
(3mm)
Place no more than 5 doors in a group, with all material on

planking or blocking at least 4 in. (100 mm) off the ground, 2 in.
(50 mm) off a paved area or the floor slab. Provide a least 1/4
in. (6.4 mm) space (wood strip) between all units to permit air
circulation.
Nominal
Door
Height
Construction notes
3/32"
(2mm)
Nominal Door Width

Net Door Width
3/32"
(2mm)
Net
Door
Height
1. Doors are 1-3/4 (45mm) thick.

2. Hardware Preparations: to meet specifications, doors
can be prepared for all commercial mortised hardware,
and can be factory reinforced for surface applied hardware
applications.
3. Top and bottom edges of all doors are closed with 14 gauge
[0.067 (1.7mm)] welded channels. Exterior applications
require the addition of top caps to protect against weather
infiltration.
4. Optional edge seams are prepared prior to the application
of factory, baked-on primer paint.
5. Standard hardware preparations, mortised and reinforced
for the following:
Universal Hinge Preps: 4-1/2 (114mm) patented

preparation which allows for easy and quick field
conversion from standard weight .134 (3.3mm) to
heavy weight .180 (4.5mm) hinges.
Locks: a multitude of standard lock preps are available.
The most commonly used with a 4-7/8 (124mm) strike
are 161, 61L and 86.
3/4" (19mm) To Bottom Of Frame
Single door application

Standard Operating Clearances (Installed in frame)
Top (at the Head) = 1/8 (3mm) to bottom of head or

transom panel;
Hinge Side = 3/32 (2mm) to rabbet or jamb;
Lock Side = 3/32 (2mm) to rabbet or jamb;
Bottom (at the Floor) = 3/4 (19mm) to bottom of frame.
6. Glass Lights with Dezigner Trim: for doors with glazed

cutouts, see the Lights and Louvers section of this Manual.
7. Louvers: for doors with attached louvers, see the Lights and
Louvers section of this Manual.
100
Full flush doors
General information
Double door application
Both leaves of double door elevations employ the same
construction features as single swing and could include an
optional overlapping astragal.
Nominal Door Width

Active
Inactive
3/32" (2mm)
1/8"
(3mm)
3/32"
(2mm)
Meeting Edges
A 14 gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)] Z astragal is furnished loose

for installation in the field by others.
Overlapping astragal kits are available to convert an active

leaf to an inactive leaf.
When an astragal is not used, the width of the inactive leaf

is increased 3/32 (2mm) when specified.
Nominal
Door
Height
Refer to pages 148-155 for all standard astragal applications
Net
Door
Height
Hardware Preparations: the inactive leaf can be prepared for

hardware as specified.
3/4" (19mm)
See Meeting Edge

Details Below
Standard Operating Clearances (installed in frame)
Head = 1/8 (3mm) to bottom of head or transom panel.
Meeting Edges = 3/32 (2mm) with or without astragal.
For openings without an astragal, a wide inactive leaf

is used.
Bottom = 3/4 (19mm) to bottom of frame.
Hinge Side = 3/32 (2mm) to rabbet on jamb.
Meeting edge details

Refer to pages 148-155 for all standard astragal applications
Inactive
Active
3/32 (2mm)
3/16 (2mm)
With Z Astragal (Typical)
Wide Inactive
Active
3/32 (2mm)
Without Astragal (Wide Inactive Leaf)
101
Full flush doors
102
Full flush doors
L Series
Steelcrafts L Series doors offer the following standard unique
features, which enhance long term performance and durability:
1. Core Systems that enhance the structural integrity of
the door:
Honeycomb (standard): 1 (25mm) cell kraft

honeycomb configuration that increases structural
integrity while reducing overall weight
Polystyrene (optional): enhanced thermal performance

Polyurethane (optional): extreme thermal performance
2. Full Height, Epoxy Filled Mechanical Interlock Edges

provide structural support and stability the full height of the
door edges. Available edge options:
About the product
Visible Edge Seam (standard): full height, epoxy filled

mechanical Interlocked edges
Filled Seam: optional edge seam epoxy filled and

finished smooth. Includes tack welds above and below
edge cutouts for hinges, locks, etc.
Welded Edge Seam: optional edge seam welded with

1 (25mm) long weld, 6 (51mm) on center, epoxy filled
between welds and finished smooth; available on L18,
L16 and L14 doors.
The L20, L18, and L16 Series flush doors are designed to meet
the architectural requirements for full flush doors. The
L14 Series flush doors are designed to meet the architectural
requirements for maximum duty full flush doors. Refer to the
Architectural section for specifications and the selection and
usage guide of the appropriate door constructions.
3. Universal Hinge Preparations (patented) allow for easy

field conversion from standard weight .134 (3.3mm) hinges
This premium door construction combines the strength and

dimensional stability of steel with the structural integrity of the
laminate core. The continuous bonding of core to steel face
sheets provides an attractive, flat door, free of face welding
marks. Tests have proven that the L Series door has high
resistance to impact damage, low thermal conductivity and
high STC ratings.
5. Beveled Hinge and Lock Edges allow for tighter installation

tolerances, ensure easier operation and eliminate binding
and sticking.
To meet application, specification and performance

requirements, the L Series door offers a wide range of
specifiable options including sizes, glass light designs and
hardware (mechanical, pneumatic, electrical) preparations.
L Series doors are 1-3/4 (45mm) thick.
6. Recessed Dezigner Glass Trim provides a clean, neat and

flush finish with the door surface.
7. Factory Applied Baked-On Rust Inhibiting Primer paint in
accordance with ANSI A250.10-1998.
1. Door construction for Steelcraft L Series full flush doors
meets the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2003 (SDI 100).
Installation
Frames and HMMA 840s.
Pamphlet 80. The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final
authority on issues related to the installation and use of
4. 14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)] Inverted Top and Bottom

Channels provide stability and protection for the top and
bottom edges from abuse.
Fire ratings
L Series doors meet the broadest fire rating requirements. They
are listed for installations requiring compliance to both neutral
pressure testing (ASTM E152 and UL-10B) and positive pressure
standards (UL-10C).
103
Full flush doors
L Series
Rigid Honeycomb
Standard Laminated Honeycomb Core

1 (25mm) cell, 99 pound Kraft honeycomb
Honeycomb surfaces sanded for maximum adhesion
Impregnated with phenolic resin (resists mildew and
vermin)
Laminated to both face sheets with contact adhesive
Assembled door is run through high pressure pinch rollers,
achieving ultimate bond
Optional cores are polystyrene or polyurethane
Optional Polystyrene Core
1 pound (453.6g) per ft3 density slab

Labeled applications
Optional Polyurethane Core

1.8 pound (816.5g) per ft3 density slab
Non-Labeled applications
3/4
(19mm)
Standard Premium Edge Construction
Beveled hinge & lock edges

Full height mechanical interlock with epoxy adhesive
Visible edge seam standard
Seamless edge optional
Standard Rigid 14 Gauge End Channel Construction

14 gauge inverted galvannealed top & bottom channels
Projection welded to both face sheets
For optional caps, see "Top & bottom caps" on page 156.
Door application and usage

Series

Steel
Thickness
Opening
Usage Frequency
Standard Duty
L20
20 Ga (0.8mm)
Interior - Cold Rolled Steel
L20
20 Ga (0.8mm)
Exterior - Galvannealed Steel
L18
18 Ga (1.0mm)
L18
18 Ga (1.0mm)
L16
16 Ga (1.3mm)
L16
16 Ga (1.3mm)
L14
14 Ga (1.7mm)
L14
14 Ga (1.7mm)
104
Light Commercial applications with minimal use and abuse
Heavy Duty
Heavy Commercial & Institutional applications with high use
Extra Heavy Duty
Extra Heavy Commercial applications with potential of very high use
Maximum Duty
Extra Heavy Commercial applications with extremely high use
Full flush doors
L Series
Standard hardware preparations

Typical hardware applications shown. Refer to Hardware section for more details.
61L Lock
86 Lock
7 Gauge Universal hinge reinforcement
Inactive Leaf ASA

Strike Prep with
Astragal attached
Optional 14 Gauge
Standard: mortised and reinforced for:
Patented Universal hinge preparations allow for easy field conversion from standard 4-1/2 (114mm) x .134 (3.3mm) standard
weight hinges to 4-1/2 (114mm) x .180 (4.7mm) heavy weight hinges. Optional hinge preparation for 5 (127mm) x .146
(3.7mm) standard weight hinges or for 5 (127mm) x .190 (4.8mm) heavy weight hinges is also available.
A multitude of standard lock preparations are available. The cylindrical 161, 61L and mortise 86 lock preps are the most commonly
used active leaf preparations. The 4 7/8 (124mm) strike prep is the most commonly used inactive leaf preparation.
Optional reinforcements for surface and concealed Closers are available.

Special hardware applications are available.
Door Sizes and ANSI A250.8 Conversions

Steelcraft product selection for L Series doors has been matched to ANSI/SDI Level and Model designations.
In accordance with ANSI A250.8, core material is not specific to the level or model designations. Core material selection is
specified based on preference and application.
Recommended minimum frame gauge also applies to the frequency of operation of the opening.

ANSI A250.8 - SDI 100 Edge

Construction
Maximum Sizes
Series
Level
Model Description
Options
Single
Pair
Recommended Gauge of Frame
6-0 x 8-0
1829mm x 2438mm
18 Gauge [0.042 (1.0mm)]
Level 1: Light Commercial
L20
Full Flush
Visible
LF20
Seamless
Epoxy Filled
L18
LF18
2
1
2
LW18
2 Seamless Welded
L16
LF16
3
1
2
LW16
2 Seamless Welded
3-0 x 8-0
914mm x 2438mm
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Level 2: Heavy Duty Commercial & Institutional
Full Flush
Seamless
Visible
Epoxy Filled
4-0 x 10-0
1219mm x 3048mm
8-0 x 10-0
2438mm x 3048mm
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Level 3: Extra Heavy Duty Commercial & Institutional

Full Flush
Seamless
Visible
Epoxy Filled
4-0 x 10-0
1219mm x 3048mm
8-0 x 10-0
2438mm x 3048mm
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]

14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
Level 4: Maximum Duty Commercial & Institutional

L14
Full Flush
Visible
LF14
Seamless
Epoxy Filled
LW14
4-0 x 10-0
1219mm x 3048mm
8-0 x 10-0
2438mm x 3048mm
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
2 Seamless Welded
105
Full flush doors
L Series
Door edge construction

Optional Edge Seams available in the L Series doors:
L: Standard feature includes visible edge seams with full height interlocked edges.
LF: the mechanical edge seam is filled and finished prior to applying the factory primer.
LW: the mechanical edge seam is welded and finished prior to applying the factory primer.
Standard Visible
Seamless
Optional Seamless Edge
L Series visible seam features
LF Series Seam Filled Features
Full height mechanical interlock

Interlock filled with epoxy adhesive
Visible edge seam

Edge seam is epoxy filled and finished
No visible edge seam
LW Series Seam Welded Features
Edge seam is welded 1 (25mm) long,

6 (152mm) on center.
Glass light options (Refer to the Lights and Louvers section for further details and options)
Dezigner Trim
Standard for 1/4 Thick Glass

Optional for 1/2 Thick Glass
1-1/4"
(32 mm)
3/4"
(19 mm)
3/8"
(9 mm)
Note: Glazing type and thickness vary per

job requirements.
Flush Mounted Steel Trim
For 1 Thick Glass
Note: Louver size and type vary per

requirements.
1-1/4"
(32 mm)
3/4"
(19 mm)
1"
(25 mm)
Divider Muntins Are Not Available
106
Full flush doors
SL Series
Steelcrafts SL Series doors offer the following standard
features, which enhance performance and durability:
1. Core Systems that enhance the structural integrity of the
door:
Honeycomb (standard): 1 (25mm) cell kraft


door edges.
3. Standard Hinge Preparations for 4-1/2 (114mm) x .134
(3.3mm) standard weight or .180 (4.7mm) heavy weight
hinges.
5. Square Hinge and Lock Edges allow for non-handed
inventory control for local distribution.
About the product

The SL20 and SL18 Series Square Edge flush doors are
designed to meet the architectural requirements for full flush
doors. Refer to Section 11 (Architectural) for specifications
and the selection and usage guide of the appropriate door
constructions.
This door construction combines the strength and dimensional
stability of steel with the structural integrity of the laminate
core. The continuous bonding of core to steel face sheets
provides an attractive, flat door, free of face welding marks.
Tests have proven that the construction employed has integral
high resistance to impact damage, low thermal conductivity
and high STC ratings.
requirements, the SL Series door offers options including sizes,
glass light designs and hardware preparations.

1. Door construction for Steelcraft SL Series doors meets the
requirements of ANSI A250.8-2003 (SDI 100).
Fire ratings
SL Series doors meet the broadest fire rating requirements.
They are listed for installations requiring compliance to both
neutral pressure testing (ASTM E152 and UL-10B) and positive
pressure standards (UL-10C).
SL Series doors are 1-3/4 (45mm) thick, with Square Edges.
Installation
107
Full flush doors
SL Series
Rigid Honeycomb
Standard Laminated Honeycomb Core

vermin)


3/4
(19mm)



Series

Steel
Thickness
Opening
Usage Frequency
SL20 20 Ga (0.8mm)
Interior: Cold Rolled Steel
Standard Duty
SL20 20 Ga (0.8mm)
Exterior: Galvannealed Steel
SL18
18 Ga (1.0mm)
SL18
18 Ga (1.0mm)
108
Heavy Duty
Full flush doors
SL Series

Mortise Hinge
7 Gauge hinge reinforcement,
reversible hinge fillers supplied
161 Lock
61L Available
Inactive Leaf ASA

Strike Prep with
Astragal attached
Optional 14 Gauge
Standard: mortised and reinforced for
Template hinge preparations for 4-1/2 x .134 standard weight hinges or for 4-1/2 x .180 heavy weight hinges. Butt hinge
preparations are cut through for non-handed function; spacer plates are furnished for field installation and handing.
The cylindrical 161, 61L and mortise 86 lock preps are the most commonly used active leaf preparations. The 4 7/8 (124mm) strike
prep is the most commonly used inactive leaf preparation.
Optional reinforcements for surface Closers are available.

Limited hardware applications are available.

Steelcraft product selection for SL Series doors has been matched to ANSI/SDI Level and Model designations.

ANSI A250.8 - SDI 100

Series
Level
Model Description
Construction
Options
Edge
Maximum Sizes
Single
Pair
SL20
1
1
Full Flush
Visible

30 x 80
914mm x 2438mm
60 x 80
1829mm x 2438mm
18 Gauge [0.042 (1.0mm)]

16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
SL18
2
1
Full Flush
Visible

40 x 80
1219mm x 2438mm
80 x 80
2438mm x 2438mm
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)
109
Full flush doors
SL Series

Optional Edge Seams available in the SL Series doors:
SL: Standard feature includes visible edge seams with full height interlocked edges.
Standard Visible
Seamless
SL Series visible seam features

Visible edge seam
Glass light options (Refer to the Lights and Louvers section for further details)
Dezigner Trim

1-1/4"
(32 mm)
3/4"
(19 mm)

job requirements.
3/8"
(9 mm)

requirements.
110
Full flush doors
Falcon SZ Series
Steelcrafts SZ Series doors offer the following standard
features:
1. Core Systems that enhance the performance of the door:
Honeycomb (standard): 1 (25mm) cell

Kraft honeycomb.
Polystyrene (optional): enhanced thermal

performance.
2. 18 gauge Face Sheets

3. Full Height, Visible Mechanical Interlock Edges provide
support and stability the full height of the door edges.
4. Non-Handed for 4-1/2(114mm) Hinge Preparations
(.134) weight hinges (includes spacer plates which can be
modified at install to accommodate heavyweight hinges).
5. 14 Gauge Inverted Top and Bottom Channels provide
stability and protection for the top and bottom edges
from abuse.
6. Closer Reinforcement 14 Gauge minimum on all doors.
About the product

The SZ Series Square Edge flush doors are designed to meet
requirements for commercial quality full flush steel doors.
This commercial door construction combines both the rigid
construction and dimensional stability of steel with the integrity
of the laminate core. The continuous bonding of the core to
steel face sheets provides an attractive, flat door, free of face
welding marks.
Recommended area for use:
The SZ Series flush doors are recommended for commercial
applications which are not required to comply with architectural
specifications. This product is targeted at Distributor over the
counter sales with walk-in Contractor trades requiring stock
opening sizes and basic hardware configurations.
Typically, the SZ Series door is applicable to the following
commercial applications:
7. Square Hinge and Lock Edges for non-handed inventory

control for local distribution.
8. Factory Applied Rust Inhibiting Primer
1. Door construction for Steelcrafts Falcon SZ Series doors
Fire ratings
Falcon SZ Series doors are listed for installations requiring
compliance to negative pressure testing (ASTM E152 and
UL-10B) and positive pressure standards (UL-10C).
Storage Room & closets.
Options
Retail entrance and back doors.

Economy Hotel and Motel unit entrances.
The Falcon SZ Series door sizing and option configurations are

available only as noted in this TD Sheet or on the related Price
Book pages. Commonly available configuration options are not
available on the Falcon SZ Series doors including the options
listed below.
Falcon SZ Series doors are 1-3/4 (45mm) thick, with

Square Edges.
Installation
1. Installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2001 (formerly SDI
Doors are factory labeled with a Warnock Hersey 1-1/2 Hour

(90 min) Mylar label.
Factory installed glass lights.
If configuration options are required, refer to the SL or

L Series products.
Factory cutouts for louver or glass lights.

Hardware preparations or reinforcements other than those
outlined in this TD Sheet or the related Price Pages.
111
Full flush doors
SL Series
Door construction
Available Core:
Rigid Honeycomb
1. Vertical edges (both hinge and lock) are

square with a visible, epoxy filled mechanically
interlocked, edge seam.
2. Top and bottom edges are closed with inverted
14 gauge top and bottom channels (top cap not
included, see Parts).
3. Doors are 1-3/4 (45mm) thick.
No Bevel
(Square)
Square
Available:
Mortised and reinforced:
Rigid Honeycomb
Available Core:
Polystyrene Core
1lb (433.6g) per ft3 density slab.
Laminated to both face sheets with
contact adhesive.
Assembled door is run through high pressure
pinch rollers, achieving ultimate bond.
Square (Non-Handed) Edge

Honeycomb surfaces sanded for
maximum adhesion
Impregnated with phenolic resin
(resists mildew and vermin)
contact adhesive
Assembled door is run through high pressure
pinch rollers, achieving ultimate bond
Polystyrene Core
Template hinge preparations for 4-1/2 (114mm) x .134 (3.3mm) standard weight hinges. Butt hinge preparations are cut through
for non-handed function; spacer plates are furnished for field installation and handing.
Lock preparations for mortise and cylindrical locks follow ANSI A115.1 for mortise preparations and A115.2 for cylindrical.
Rim Exit Device preparation is reinforced on both hinge and lock side and located at 39-9/16 from bottom of door to center
line of reinforcing.
61L Lock
161 Lock
86ED Lock
RPD
Non-Handed Mortise Hinge Prep
Closer Reinf. 14 Ga.

Series
Steel Thickness
Opening
Usage Frequency
SZ18
18 Ga (1.0mm)
Heavy Duty
SZ18
18 Ga (1.0mm)

Steelcraft product selection for Falcon SZ Series doors has been matched to ANSI/SDI Level and Model designations.

ANSI A250.8 - SDI 100
Series
Level
Model
Description
Edge
Construction
Maximum Sizes
Single
Recommended Gauge
Pair
of Frame
Level 2: Heavy Duty Commercial

SZ18
2
1
Full Flush
Visible

40 x 70
80 x 70
(1219mm x 2134mm)
(2438mm x 2134mm)
16 gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Note: 1. The Falcon SZ Series must be ordered in single leaf configurations. An 86ED lock prep allows a distributor to supply a pair of
doors with the appropriate Z Astragal.
112
Full flush doors
B Series
Steelcrafts B Series doors offer the following standard unique
1. Steel Stiffened core construction with welded 20 gauge
hat section stiffeners.


edge cutouts for hinges, locks, etc

between welds and finished smooth; available on B18,
B16, and B14 doors.

14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)] Inverted Top and Bottom
About the product

Steelcraft B18, B16, and B14 Series flush doors are designed
to meet the architectural requirements for full flush, steel
stiffened doors. The door face sheets are supported by the
internal steel stiffeners, which extend the full door width.
The stiffeners are welded to (1) face sheet and bonded to the
opposite panel.
The B Series Door offers a wide range of specifiable options
including sizes, glass light designs, optional edge constructions
and hardware (mechanical, pneumatic, electrical) preparations.
B Series doors are 1-3/4 (45mm) thick.
THE USE OF HIGH GLOSS PAINT IS NOT RECOMMENDED.
High gloss paint accentuates the visibility of all welds.
Installation


and sticking.
1. Door construction for Steelcraft B Series full flush doors
Fire ratings
B Series doors meet the broadest fire rating requirements. They
standards (UL-10C).
3. See Sound Openings section on page 243 for optional

B-Door construction.
Note 1: For optional B-Door construction with STC-Stiffened
Core, see SPECIALTY PRODUCTS: SOUND OPENINGS section
page 243.
113
Full flush doors
B Series
Core construction
Steel Stiffeners with Fiberglass Insulation
Steel Stiffeners with Fiberglass Insulation
20 Ga. Stiffener
Standard B Series Core

20 gauge stiffeners
Stiffeners welded to inside of (1) face sheet and bonded to the opposite face
Vertical interior webs located 6 (152mm) apart
Weld spacing 5 (152mm) on center along the full height of each stiffener
Stiffener height extends full height of door thickness
Areas between stiffeners filled with nominal 1 pound (453.6g) per ft3 density fiberglass batt insulation
For optional B-Door construction with STC-Stiffened Core, see SPECIALTY PRODUCTS: SOUND OPENINGS on page 245.
3/4
(19mm)



Series

Steel
Thickness
Opening
Usage Frequency
B18
18 Ga (1.0mm)
Heavy Duty
B18
18 Ga (1.0mm)
B16
16 Ga (1.3mm)
Extra Heavy Duty
Maximum Duty
B16
16 Ga (1.3mm)
B14
14 Ga (1.7mm)
B14
14 Ga (1.7mm)
114
Full flush doors
B Series

61L Lock
86 Lock
Inactive Leaf ASA

Strike Prep with
Astragal attached
Optional 14 Gauge
Standard: mortised and reinforced for:
Patented Universal hinge preparations allow for easy field conversion from standard 4-1/2 x .134 standard weight hinges to
4-1/2 x .180 heavy weight hinges. Optional hinge preparation for 5 x .146 standard weight hinges or for 5 (127mm) x .190
(4.8mm) heavy weight hinges is also available.
The cylindrical 161, 61L and mortise 86 lock preps are the most commonly used active leaf preparations. The 4-7/8 (124mm)
strike prep is the most commonly used inactive leaf preparation.


Steelcraft product selection for B Series doors has been matched to ANSI/SDI Level and Model designations.

ANSI A250.8 - SDI 100

Series
Level
Model Description
Construction
Options
Edge
Maximum Sizes
Single
Pair

B18
BF18
2
1
2
BW18
2 Seamless Welded
Full Flush
Seamless
Visible
Epoxy Filled
40 x 100
1219mm x 3048mm
80 x 100
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
2438mm x 3048mm

B16
BF16
3
1
2
BW16
2 Seamless Welded
Full Flush
Seamless
Visible
Epoxy Filled
40 x 100
1219mm x 3048mm
80 x 100
2438mm x 3048mm
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]

14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]

B14
BF14
4
1
2
BW14
2 Seamless Welded
Full Flush
Seamless
Visible
Epoxy Filled
40 x 100
1219mm x 3048mm
80 x 100
2438mm x 3048mm

14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
115
Full flush doors
B Series

Vertical edges (both hinge and lock) are beveled 1/8 (3.2mm) in 2 (51mm) with a visible seam.
Optional Edge Seams available in the B Series doors:
Top and bottom edges are closed with inverted 14 gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)] welded channels. Exterior applications require the
addition of top caps to protect against the weather
BF: the mechanical edge seam is filled and finished prior to applying the factory primer.
BW: the mechanical edge seam is welded and finished prior to applying the factory primer.
Full flush
Seamless
B Series Visible Seam Features
BF Series Seam Filled Features
Visible edge seam
Interlock filled with epoxy

adhesive
Interlock is tack welded and filled

with epoxy adhesive
BW Series Seam Welded Features
Edge is seam welded 1 (25mm) long,

2-2.5 (51-64mm) O.C.
Glass light options (Refer to the Lights and Louvers section for further details)
Dezigner Trim
1-1/4"
(32 mm)
3/4"
(19 mm)
3/8"
(9 mm)

job requirements.
For 1 Thick Glass

requirements.
1-1/4"
(32 mm)
3/4"
(19 mm)
1"
(25 mm)
116
Full flush doors
T Series
Steelcrafts T Series doors offer the following standard unique
1. Mineral board core provides a 250F (121C) Temperature
Rise rating or 450C (232C) at 30 minutes of test
exposure, depending on hardware application.

mechanical Interlocked edges with tack welds


between welds and finished smooth; available on T18,
T16 and T14 doors.

About the product

Steelcraft T20, T18, T16, and T14 Series flush doors are
designed to meet the architectural requirements for
Temperature Rise rated full flush doors. Refer to the
usage guide of the appropriate door constructions. To meet
application, specification and performance requirements, the
T Series door offers a wide range of specifiable options
including sizes, glass light designs, optional edge constructions
and hardware (mechanical, pneumatic, electrical) preparations.

and sticking.
T Series doors are 1-3/4 (45mm) thick.
Installation
1. Door construction for Steelcraft T Series full flush doors




Fire ratings
T Series doors meet the broadest fire rating requirements. They
standards (UL-10C).
117
Full flush doors
T Series
Core construction
Mineral Board
Standard T Series Core
Mineral Fiber board core
250F (121C) Temperature Rise rating
exit hardware

Visible edge seam standard, with tack welds
450F (218C) Temperature Rise rating
single point locks
3/4
(19mm)
single point locks

exit hardware
doors prepared for INPACT exit devices
pairs of doors with two (2) vertical rod exit devices
(without astragal)
Fire label ratings up to 3 hours

Laminated to inside faces of both door panels with
contact adhesive


Series

Steel
Thickness
T20
T20
Opening
Usage Frequency
20 Ga (0.8mm)
Standard Duty
20 Ga (0.8mm)
T18
18 Ga (1.0mm)
T18
18 Ga (1.0mm)
T18
16 Ga (1.3mm)
T18
16 Ga (1.3mm)
T14
14 Ga (1.7mm)
T14
14 Ga (1.7mm)
118
Heavy Duty
Extra Heavy Duty
Maximum Duty
Full flush doors
T Series

Universal Mortise Hinge
61L Lock
86 Lock
Inactive Leaf:
ASA Strike
Optional 14 Gauge
4-1/2 x .180 heavy weight hinges. Optional hinge preparation for 5 x .146 standard weight hinges or for 5 x .190 heavy weight
hinge are also available.
prep is the most commonly used inactive leaf preparation.


Steelcraft product selection for T Series doors has been matched to ANS/SDI Level and Model designations.

ANSI A250.8 - SDI 100

Series
Level
Model Description
Construction
Options
Edge
Maximum Sizes
Single
Pair
30 x 80
914mm x 2438mm
60 x 80
1829mm x 2438mm
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
T20
Full Flush
Visible
TF20
Seamless
Epoxy Filled

T18
Full Flush
Visible
TF18
Seamless
Epoxy Filled
TW18
40 x 90
1219mm x 2743mm
80 x 90
2438mm x 2743mm
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
2 Seamless Welded

T16
Full Flush
Visible
TF16
Seamless
Epoxy Filled
TW16
40 x 90
1219mm x 2743mm
80 x 90
2438mm x 2743mm
2 Seamless Welded
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]

14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]

T14
Full Flush
Visible
TF14
Seamless
Epoxy Filled
TW14
40 x 90
1219mm x 2743mm
80 x 90
2438mm x 2743mm
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
2 Seamless Welded
119
Full flush doors
T Series

Optional Edge Seams available in the T Series doors:
TF: the mechanical edge seam is tack welded filled and finished prior to applying the factory primer.
TW: the mechanical edge seam is welded and finished prior to applying the factory primer.
Full Flush
Seamless
T Series Visible Seam Features
TF Series Seam Filled Features
Visible edge seam with

tack welds
Edge seam is epoxy filled

and finished

with epoxy adhesive

with epoxy adhesive
TW Series Seam Welded Features
Edge seam is welded 1 (25mm) long,

6 (152mm) O.C.
Glass light options (Refer to the Lights and Louvers section for further details and options
maximum 100 square inch of exposed glass)

Dezigner Trim
1-1/4"
(32 mm)
3/4"
(19 mm)

job requirements. Max. 100 square inch
exposed.
3/8"
(9 mm)
120
Section
Section TOC
TOC Main
Main TOC
TOC
Full flush doors
CE Series
Steelcrafts CE Series embossed panel doors offer the
following standard unique features, which enhance long term
performance and durability:
1. A-40 Galvannealed steel face sheets
2. Polystyrene Core provides enhanced thermal performance



About the product

The CE, HD2, and HD2A Series embossed panel doors are
designed to meet the architectural requirements for embossed
panel doors. The door construction combines the features and
benefits of polystyrene core laminated construction. Refer
usage guide of the appropriate door constructions.
This premium door construction combines the strength and
dimensional stability of steel with the structural integrity of the
laminate core. The continuous bonding of core to steel face
sheets provides an attractive, flat door, free of face welding
marks.
requirements, the CE Series embossed panel doors offers a
wide range of specifiable options including sizes, glass light
designs and hardware (mechanical, pneumatic, electrical)
preparations.
CE Series doors are 1-3/4 (45mm) thick.
Installation

and sticking.
1. Door construction for Steelcraft CE Series embossed panel
doors meets the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2003 (SDI
100).
3. Door construction for the CE Series embossed panel doors
meets ANSI A117.1-1998 (ADA) requirements for minimum
10 (254mm) bottom rail height measured from the floor.
Fire ratings
CE Series embossed panel doors meet the broadest fire
UL-10B) and positive pressure standards (UL-10C).
121
Full flush doors
CE Series
Laminated core
Standard CE Series Core
1 pound (453.6g) per ft3 density polystyrene slab

3/4
(19mm)


DOOR APPLICATION
Door
application AND
andUSAGE
usage
Series
Steel
Thickness
CE20
20 Ga
(0.8mm)
CE18, HD18, HD2A18
18 Ga (1.0mm)
CE16, HD16, HD2A16
16 Ga (1.3mm)
122
Opening
Usage Frequency
Standard Duty Light Commercial applications with minimal use and abuse
Interior or Exterior Galvannealed Steel
Heavy Duty H
eavy Commercial & Institutional applications with high use
Extra Heavy Duty Extra Heavy Commercial applications with potential of very high use
Full flush doors
CE Series

Universal Mortise Hinge
61L Lock
86 Lock
Inactive Leaf ASA

Strike Prep with
Astragal attached
Optional 14 Gauge
4-1/2 (114mm) x .180 heavy weight hinges. Optional hinge preparation for 5 x .146 standard weight hinges or for 5
(127mm) x .190 heavy weight hinges is also available.
prep is the most commonly used inactive leaf preparation
Optional reinforcements for surface Closers are available.


Steelcraft product selection for CE Series doors has been matched to ANSI/ISD Level and Model designations.

ANSI A250.8 - SDI 100

Construction
Series
Level
Model Description
Options
Edge
Door Design
6 Panel

Single
Pair
Maximum Sizes
8 Panel Door Design
Single
Pair
CE20
Full Flush
Visible
CE20
Seamless
Epoxy Filled
30 x 80
60 x 80
30 x 70
60 x 70
914mm x 2438mm 1829mm x 2438mm 914mm x 2134mm 1829mm x 2134mm
CE18
HD218
Full Flush
Visible
Seamless
Epoxy Filled
38 x 70
74 x 70
1118mm x 2134mm 2235mm x 2134mm
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
HD2A18
CE16
HD216
HD2A16
Full Flush
Visible
Seamless
Epoxy Filled
30 x 80
60 x 80
914mm x 2438mm 1829mm x 2438mm
38 x 70
74 x 70
1118mm x 2134mm 2235mm x 2134mm
123
Full flush doors
CE Series

Optional Edge Seams available in the CE Series doors:
CF: the mechanical edge seam is filled and finished prior to applying the factory primer.
Beveled Edge with Full Height

Mechanical Interlock
Full Flush
Seamless
CE Series Visible Seam Features
CF Series Seam Filled Features

Visible edge seam

Seam epoxy filled and finished
Embossed Pattern Designs

Notes:
1. Standard door sizes are available
as follows:
Pattern
Design
Door Width
6 Panel
26, 28
68, 70
210, 30
32, 34
36, 38
68, 610
70, 80

8 Panel
210, 30
28, 30
Door Height
68, 70
2. Refer to pages 131-135 of this manual for

all panel dimensions.
8 Panel
6 Panel
HD2
HD2A
3. Availability of non standard door sizes

is limited.
Glass light options (Refer to the Lights and Louvers section for further details and options)
Dezigner Trim
For 1 Thick Glass

1-1/4"
(32 mm)
1-1/4"
(32 mm)
3/4"
(19 mm)
3/4"
(19 mm)
Note: Glazing
type and
thickness
vary per job
requirements.
1"
(25 mm)
3/8"
(9 mm)
124
Full glass entrance doors
A14 Series
A14 Series full glass

entrance doors

Steelcrafts A14 Series doors offer the following standard
unique features, which enhance long term performance and
durability:
1. Honeycomb Core Systems that enhance the structural
integrity of the door:
1 (25mm) cell kraft honeycomb configuration with

internal corner gussets to provide added strength and
rigidity.
2. Seamless edges with full height, epoxy filled with

interlocked edges, provide structural support and stability
the full height of the door edges.
About the product

The A14 Series full glass entrance doors are designed to
meet the architectural requirements for exterior entrance
applications. Refer to Section 11 (Architectural) for
specifications and the selection and usage guide of the
appropriate door constructions.
A14 Series doors are available for high frequency openings
and entrances where large full glass (FG, FG2, and FG3) lights
are required. This premium door construction combines the
strength and dimensional stability of steel with the structural
integrity of the laminate core with internal corner gussets to
provide added strength and rigidity.
requirements for entrance door applications, the A14 Series
Door offers a wide range of specifiable options including sizes,
glass light designs and hardware (mechanical, pneumatic,
electrical) preparations.
A14 Series doors are 1-3/4 (45mm) thick.
Installation

and sticking.
1. Door construction for Steelcraft A14 Series doors meets the
requirements of ANSI A250.8-2003 (SDI 100).
Fire ratings
A14 Series doors meet fire rating requirements. They are listed
for installations requiring compliance to NFPA252-1999
and UL-10C.

Steelcraft Technical Data Manual Page Rev. 8/20/14
125
A14 Series
Standard Laminated Honeycomb Core with internal corner

gussets

vermin)
A14 Series Seam Filled Features


3/4
(19mm)

Door APPLICATION
applicationAND
andUSAGE
usage
DOOR
Series

Steel
Thickness
Opening
Usage Frequency
Maximum Duty
A14
14 Ga (1.7mm)
A14
14 Ga (1.7mm)
126
A14 Series

61L Lock
Inactive Leaf ASA

Strike Prep with
Astragal attached
86 Lock
14 Gauge Closer
Reinforcement
A multitude of standard lock preparations are available. The cylindrical 161, 61L and mortise 86 lock preps are the most commonly
used active leaf preparations. The 4 7/8 (124mm) strike prep is the most commonly used inactive leaf preparation.


Steelcraft product selection for A Series Stile and Rail Doors has been matched to ANSI/SDI designations for Level and Model.

ANSI A250.8 - SDI 100

Series
Level
Model Description
Construction
Options
Edge
Maximum Sizes
Single
Pair
A14
4
2
Seamless
Epoxy Filled

40 x 80
1219mm x 2438mm
80 x 80
2438mm x 2438mm
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
127
A14 Series
Standard glass design options

6-13/16"
(173mm)
6-13/16"
(173mm)
6-13/16"
(173mm)
6-13/16"
(173mm)
6-13/16"
(173mm)
6-13/16"
(173mm)
6-1/4"
(159mm)
6-1/4"
(159mm)
6-1/4"
(159mm)
6-1/2"
(164mm)
6-1/2"
(164mm)
6-1/2"
(164mm)
39-1/4"
(996mm)
11-1/4"
(285mm)
FG
11-1/4"
(285mm)
FG2
11-1/4"
(285mm)
FG3
1. Dimensions shown are to the exposed glass sizes. Refer to the Lights section for cutout and glass sizes.
2. Standard Vertical Stiles (both hinge and lock) are 6-13/16 (173mm) wide to the finished edge opening of the glass light trim
(6-1/64 from the door edge to the cutout of the glass light) and are beveled 1/8 (3.2mm) in 2 (51mm) with
no visible seams.
3. Standard Top Rails are 6-1/4 (159mm) high and are closed with inverted 14 gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)] welded channels.
Exterior applications require the addition of top caps to protect against the weather.
4. Standard Bottom Rails are 11-1/4 (285mm) high and are closed with inverted 14 gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)] welded channels.
5. Standard Intermediate Rails are 6-1/2 (164mm) high and are used to create the FG2 and FG3 designs.
6. Special glass sizes are available; however, the vertical stiles are always fixed at 6-13/16 wide regardless of the glass size.
Glass light options (Refer to the Lights and Louvers section for further details and options
Flush Mounted Steel Trim not available on 14GA doors)
Dezigner Trim
1-1/4"
(32 mm)
3/4"
(19 mm)
3/8"
(9 mm)
128
Doors: Variations and options

Embossed CE Series............................................ 131
Z Astragal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
8 panels.....................................................................131
Applications........................................................... 148
6 panels (26 thru 28 widths).................... 132
Inactive leaf mounting........................................ 149
6 panels (210 thru 38 widths)..................133
Double egress mounting.................................... 150
HD2 panels (28 thru 38 widths)..............134
Active leaf mounting.............................................151
HD2A panels (28 thru 34 widths)...........135
Hardware preparations........................................152
Dutch doors......................................................... 136
Flat plate astragal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Non-labeled............................................................136
Full shelf (non-labeled)...................................... 137
Labeled.....................................................................138
Exposed fastening.................................................153
2 piece astragal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Applications............................................................154
Half shelf (labeled)...............................................139
Hardware preparations........................................155
Optional lock preparation.................................. 140
Weather seals...................................................... 156
Monorail preparation.......................................... 141
Top & bottom caps.............................................. 156
GRAINTECH Steel doors.................................. 142
FAS-SEAL door bottom sweep........................ 157
Hardware............................................................. 143
High frequency hinge preparation....................143
Aluminum door edge nosing............................. 144
Interviewer prep.....................................................145
Peep slot with trim............................................... 146
Mail slot preparation............................................ 147
Astragal............................................................... 148
Main TOC
129
130
Embossed CE Series
8 panels
4-1/8"
(105mm)
A
9-1/2" (241mm)
B
E (TYP.)
4-1/2" (114mm) TYP.
Door widths
28
3-27/32
4-27/32
30
6-11/32
6-11/32
Door heights
68
* 3-7/8
9-3/4
13
70
5-7/8
11-3/4
13
Note: Due to the 3-7/8 top rail dimension, the use of

closers should be either avoided or be mounted with
drop brackets on all 68 high embossed 8 Panel doors.
Purpose
Embossed doors are specified when decorative door face

sheets are architecturally required. The 8 panel embossed
door design is a less popular design.
This door option is available in the CE Series in either fire

labeled or and non-labeled applications:
Application
Hotel, apartment or office entrance doors.
20 Gauge [0.032 (0.8mm) A-40 galvannealed steel] only

Available in 1/16 (1.5mm) increments in width and height
subject to the following:
28 (813mm) thru 30 (914mm) widths

68 (2032mm) thru 70 (2134mm) heights
8 Panel design (lights or louvers are not available).
131
Embossed CE Series
6 panels (26 thru 28 door widths)
2-15/16"
(75mm)
9-1/16" (230mm)
B
C
7-1/16"
(179mm)
4-9/16" (116mm)
Door widths
26
3-3/4
28
5-3/8
5-3/8
Note: The rail dimension A is narrower on the hinge

side of doors narrower than 28 in nominal door width.
6-1/2"
(165mm)
21-9/16" (548mm)
Door heights
68
* 4-1/4
9-3/4
25-7/16
70
6-1/4
11-3/4
25-7/16
* Note:
Due to the 4-1/4 top rail dimension, the use of

closers should be either avoided or be mounted with
drop brackets on all 68 high embossed 6 Panel doors.
D
2'-6" (762mm) thru
2'-8" (813mm) widths
Purpose

sheets are architecturally required. The 6 panel embossed door
design is the most popular design.
This door option is available in the CE Series in either

fire labeled or and non-labeled applications.
Application
Hotel, apartment, office entrance doors or other applications

as specified.
Available in 1/16 (1.5mm) increments in width and height

subject to the following:
132
20, 18, or 16 Gauge. A-40 galvannealed steel.
26 thru 28 widths
6 Panel design has limited lights available. Louvers are

not available.
Embossed CE Series
6 panels (210 thru 38 door widths)

4-15/16"(125mm)
(5" (127mm) for 8'0" Doors)
9-1/16" (230mm)
(5" (127mm) for 8'0" Doors)
B
C
7-1/16" Typ.
(13" for 8'0" Doors)
Door widths
210
5-3/8
5-3/8
30
6-3/8
6-3/8
32
7-3/8
7-3/8
34
8-3/8
8-3/8
36
9-3/8
9-3/8
10-3/8
10-3/8
4-9/16" Typ. (6-9/16" for 8'0" Doors) 38
Note: On all door widths 210 and wider, both

rail dimensions A and B are equal unless
specified differently.
6-1/2" Typ.
(8-9/16" for 8'0" Doors)
Door heights
68
* 4-1/4
9-3/4
25-7/16 21-9/16
610
5-1/4
10-3/4
25-7/16 21-9/16
70
6-1/4
11-3/4
25-7/16 21-9/16
80
4-1/4
9-3/4
27-1/2
25-1/2
* Notes:
1.
Due to the 4-1/4 top rail dimension, the use of closers

should be either avoided or be mounted with drop
brackets on all 68 high embossed 8 Panel doors.
2. 80 high 6 panel doors are available in only 210

and 30 door widths.
2'-10" (864mm) thru

3'-0" (914mm) widths
Purpose

sheets are architecturally required.

labeled or non-labeled applications:
The 6 panel embossed door design is the most popular design.
Application
Hotel, apartment, office entrance doors or other applications as
specified.
18 Gauge: 34 thru 38 door widths

Available in 1/16 increments in width and height subject to
the following:
20, 18 or 16 Gauge: up to and including 30 door widths
210 thru 38 widths

68 thru 70 heights: all door widths noted above
80 available in 210 or 30 door widths

6 Panel design has limited lights available. Louvers are not
available.
133
Embossed CE Series
HD2 panels (28 thru 38 door widths)
23
B
C
37
Door widths
28
3-13/16
30
6-13/32
6-13/32
34
8-13/32
8-13/32
36
9-13/32
9-13/32
38
10-13/32
10-13/32
Note: On all doors widths 30 and wider,

both rail dimensions D and E are equal
unless specified differently.
6-1/2
21-1/2
Door heights
68
* 4-3/8
9-3/4
610
5-3/8
10-3/4
70
6-3/8
11-3/4
* Note:
Due to the 4-3/8 top rail dimension,

the use of closers should be either avoided or
be mounted with drop brackets on all 68
high embossed Panel doors.
Purpose


labeled or non-labeled applications:
Application

as specified.

the following:
134
18 or 16 Gauge: Up to and including 38 door widths
28 (813mm) thru 30 (914mm) widths

All door widths noted above
HD2 panel designs do not have louver or light options

available.
Embossed CE Series
HD2A panels (28 thru 34 door widths)
23
B
C
Door widths
28
3-13/16
30
6-13/32
6-13/32
34
8-13/32
8-13/32
Note: On all doors widths 30 and wider,

both rail dimensions D and E are equal
unless specified differently.
37
6-1/2
Door heights
68
* 4-3/8
9-3/4
610
5-3/8
10-3/4
70
6-3/8
11-3/4
* Note:
Due to the 4-3/8 top rail dimension,

be mounted with drop brackets on all 68
high embossed Panel doors.
21-1/2
Purpose


labeled or non-labeled applications.
Application

as specified

the following:
18 or 16 Gauge: Up to and including 34 door widths
28 thru 34 widths
68 thru 70 heights: all door widths noted above
HD2A panel designs do not have louver or light

options available.
135
Dutch doors
Non-labeled
Nominal Door Size
Next Door Width
Nominal door
Dim. A
Dim. B
Dim. C
68
79-1/8
35-13/16
16-9/16
70
83-1/8
39-13/16
20-9/16
72
85-1/8
41-13/16
22-9/16
Dim. C
Hinge Spacing
Dim. B = Top Door Height
Dim. A = Net Door Height
Nominal Door Size
9-5/8
3/16
9-5/8
43-1/8
Dim. D
61L, 161
35-7/8
86
35-1/2
7-1/4
For shelf detail,
* see pp. 137, 139
9-5/8
23-7/8
Lock prep
Dim. D Lock
Location *
9-5/8
Finished floor surface
Purpose
The dutch door design incorporates two separate door leaves,
hung one over the other, and mounted into a single swing
opening. Both leaves can operate separately. The bottom leaf
latches into the strike jamb of the frame.
When specified, the lower leaf can include a dutch door shelf
(see Dutch doors full shelf (non-labeled door) detail
on page 137).
Application

Usually installed in storage room applications

Bottom leafprepared for one (1) Government 161, 61L
or Government 86 lock.
Top leaf locking option:
Standard: Surface applied bolt engaging bottom leaf

Option: Government 161 lock preparation latching into
strike jamb
Option: Government 161 lock preparation latching into

top of bottom leaf (see Dutch doors (labeled) on
page 138).
Top door leaf may be equipped with a 14 gauge closer

reinforcement as an option
Sizes available from 20 (610mm) x 68 (2032mm) thru

40 (1219mm) x 72 (2184mm)

configurations
Glass lights are limited to one 100 square inch light in

top leaf
High Frequency Hinge Reinforcements are installed at the

top hinge of each door leaf

136
Notes
Hardware applications:
(application cont.)
This product option is available on L and B Series doors.
Dutch doors
Full shelf (non-labeled)
12 (305mm)
1 (25mm)
Top Door Leaf

Attached to door in field
Bottom Door Leaf
1-29/32 (48mm)
Door Width
Shelf
1-29/32 (48mm)
Shelf to be filed
to fit bevel of
door field
Bottom Door Leaf
Application
Non-labeled dutch doors applications.
The full and half shelf can be used on Steelcraft L and B Series
non-labeled doors. Shelves are furnished factory prime painted.
The 12 (305mm) wide 16 gauge full shelf and brackets for nonlabeled doors, or the 7 (178mm) wide half shelf and brackets
(see Dutch doors (labeled) on page 138) is shipped loose
from the factory and is to be field attached to the bottom door
leaf with the supplied No. 10 x 3/4 (19mm) Bugle Head Sheet
Metal Screws.
Purpose
Dutch door shelves are not supplied with dutch doors unless
specified. When the top leaf is opened, the bottom leaf and
shelf act as a counter that can be used for multiple uses. If the
dutch door shelf (full or half shelf) is not used, the top of the
bottom leaf specify a steel top cap installed.
137
Dutch doors
Labeled
Nominal Door Size
Next Door Width
Nominal door
Dim. A
Dim. B
Dim. C
68
79-1/8
35-13/16
16-9/16
70
83-1/8
39-13/16
20-9/16
72
85-1/8
41-13/16
22-9/16
Closer
Reinforcement
Dim. C
Hinge Spacing
Nominal Door Size
9-5/8
3/16
9-5/8
23-7/8
43-1/8
Dim. D
61L, 161
35-7/8
86
35-1/2
Note: Top leaf must have a listed 161or 61L

lock latching into either the strike jamb or the
bottom leaf. Deadbolts, flushbolts, surface bolts
or mortise 86 locks are not approved.
7-1/4
9-5/8
Lock prep
7-1/4
Dim. D Lock
Location *
For shelf detail,

* see page 137
Note: Bottom leaf must have A listed 161,

61L, or 86 Lock latching into the strike jamb
*Note: Astragal required on top leaf
9-5/8
Purpose
Fire labeled dutch door design incorporates two separate door
leaves, hung one over the other, and mounted into a single
swing opening. Both leaves can operate separately. The bottom
leaf must latch into the strike jamb of the frame. The top leaf
must latch into either the strike jamb or into the top leaf.
(application cont.)
When specified, the lower leaf can include a dutch door half
shelf (see Dutch Door Full Shelf, detail on page 137).
Application


configurations
High Frequency Hinge Reinforcements are installed at the

top hinge of each door leaf
Labeled dutch door openings must have two (2) locks:
Top door leaf must be equipped with a

closer reinforcement
Maximum size for 3 Hour Fire Rating:

40 (1219mm) x 72 (2184mm)
Limited to one 100 square inch light in top leaf only for
1-1/2 hour fire rating

This product option is available for Steelcraft L and B Series

steel stiffened doors. See the Fire rated products section for
additional information.
Standard: Both locks latching into jambs

Optional:
1. Top lock latching into top of bottom leaf
2. Bottom lock latching into jamb
3. See Dutch Door: Optional Lock Preparation
on page 140
138
Dutch doors
Half shelf (labeled)
7 (178mm)
Top Door Leaf
1 (25mm)
2-1/8 (54mm)
1 (25mm)
Attached to door in field

Bottom Door Leaf
* Note
Astragal is welded to the
Top Door Leaf, or, as an
alternate, can be field
attached with
Sheet Metal Screws.
1-29/32 (48mm)
*
Door Width
Half Shelf
1-29/32 (48mm)
Shelf to be filed
to fit bevel of
door field
Bottom Door Leaf
Purpose
Dutch door shelves are not supplied with dutch doors unless
specified. When the top leaf is opened, the bottom leaf and
shelf act as a counter. If the dutch door shelf (half shelf) is not
used, it is recommended that the bottom leaf includes a steel
top cap installed.
The half shelf can be used on Steelcraft L and B Series

labeled or non-labeled doors. The shelf is furnished factory
prime painted.
Application
Labeled and non-labled fire rated dutch door assemblies
The 7 wide (178mm) 16 gauge (1.3mm) half shelf and brackets
for Labeled doors is shipped loose from the factory and is to be
field attached to the bottom door leaf with the supplied No. 10
x 3/4 (19mm) Bugle Head Sheet Metal Screws. The astragal is
factory welded to the top door leaf.
139
Dutch doors
Optional lock preparation
Nominal Door Size

Next Door Width
Nominal door Dim. A
Dim. B
Dim. C
68
79-1/8
35-13/16
16-9/16
70
83-1/8
39-13/16
20-9/16
72
85-1/8
41-13/16
22-9/16
Closer
Reinforcement
Dim. C
Hinge Spacing
Nominal Door Size
9-5/8
3/16
2-3/4
9-5/8
7-1/4
9-5/8
23-7/8
See note 3 for

knob to knob
dimensions
43-1/8
Dim. D Lock
Location *
Lock prep
Dim. D
61L, 161
35-7/8
86
35-1/2
* Notes:
1. Top leaf must have a listed 161 for latching
into bottom leaf
2. Bottom leaf must have 161, 61L or 86 lock
latching into the strike jamb
3. Knob to knob location will vary depending
on latching devices used.
- 10 3/16" if 161 top leaf X 161 or 61L
in bottom leaf
- 12 1/16" approx. if 161 in top leaf X
86 in bottom leaf
4. Astragal required on top leaf.
5. See Dutch doors full shelf (non-labeled door)
detail on page 137.
9-5/8
Purpose
In the interest of expedient transition through the path of the

means of egress, a single lock operation of latch bolt retraction
becomes paramount. By choosing this preparation, the only
lock operation required to retract the latch bolt is found at the
standard lock location on the bottom leaf.
This lock preparation is available on Steelcraft L and B Series

Steel Stiffened doors for non-label, or for labeled openings up
to 3 hour Fire Ratings. See the Fire Rated products section for
additional information.
Application
Labeled and non-labeld fire rated dutch door assemblies.
This alternative lock preparation combination is Fire Rated
up to 3 hours. The top leaf is limited to a Government 161
lock preparation. The bottom leaf may be prepared for a
Government 86, 61L or 161 lock. The latch bolt of the lock in the
top leaf projects into a cylindrical strike attached to the strike
preparation in the top of the bottom leaf, eliminating one strike
preparation in the jamb. This optional lock preparation must be
specified when ordering.
140
Monorail
Preparation
Optional Top
Cap
8 (203mm) Maximum Width

L and B Series Doors
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]

Galvannealed
MonoRail Closure Channel
24 9610mm)
Maximum Height
1/16
(25.4mm)
Purpose
When the movement of heavy equipment or material is required

between separated work areas of an industrial buildings,
overhead monorails are employed to support and transport
mechanically operated cranes. When specified, doors with
monorail preparations are designed to accommodate the
transfer equipment and perform as closures between these
spaces.
This door option is available for the following Steelcraft

door Series:
L and B Series full flush doors
Application
Industrial non-fire rated applications
When specified preparation includes:
14 gauge (1.7mm) galvannealed Mono Rail Closure Channel

is installed along cutout perimeter
tack welded to the door faces

projects 1/16 (1.6mm) beyond edge of vertical cutout of
the L and B Series doors
Optional top caps are positioned in the top of the door

as required
141
GRAINTECH
Steel doors
Dezigner Trim
flush light kits,
stained to match
the door
Clear Coat baked

on for the ultimate
in UV and graffiti
resistance
Multiple Finishes
provide options
for a variety of
applications
Purpose
When a premium wood finish is desired, and the features

and benefits of steel are required, Steelcrafts GRAINTECH
products provide the flexibility your specification demands.
This product option is available in the following door

constructions:
CE Series
E6 design only (18 and 16 gauge)
HD2 and HD2A (18 and 16 gauge)
H16 and HE16 Series
L Series (18 and 16 gauge)
T Series (18 and 16 gauge)
Glass light options:
GRAINTECH glass light options for L Series doors are V, N3,
N4, N5, NL, G, FG, FG2 and FG3
GRAINTECH glass light options for CE Series doors E2G
and E4TL
See the Fire Rated Products section for application to
Fire Rated doors.
Application
The exclusive engraining and staining process employed
simulates a wide variety of wood finishes, from the standards
of Birch, Ash, Oak, Maple, Mahogany and Walnut to custom
finish matching or primed only. GRAINTECH is ideal to use
in Schools, Hospitals, Offices, Nursing Homes, Apartment
Buildings, Dormitories, etc. Unlike veneered or solid wood doors,
GRAINTECH is fully warranted for use on exterior openings, is
less susceptible to damage, and will never warp, crack, peel or
bow. Dezigner Trim Glass Lights used for glass light openings is
likewise supplied in the finish matching the door.
GRAINTECH colors chart.

Colors may vary based on your monitor, printer,
and settings. Request a physical GRAINTECH
swatch for color matching.
Custom colors are available.
Birch
142
Ash
Oak
Maple
Mahogany
Walnut
Hardware
High frequency hinge preparation

Projection Welded to
Door A Panel
10 Gauge Auxiliary Hinge

Reinforcement
(Top Hinge Preparation Only)
Spot Welded 10 Door

Panel and 7 Gauge Hinge
Reinforcement
10 Gauge Auxiliary Hinge

Reinforcement
Purpose
The optional high frequency hinge reinforcement provides

additional strength to the 4-1/2 (114mm) or 5 (127mm) hinge
reinforcement specified for use in high abuse openings.
High frequency hinge reinforcements are available factory

installed only, and are applicable to all Series of Steelcraft
labeled and non-labeled steel doors.
Application
The 10 gauge (3mm) auxiliary hinge reinforcement is spot
welded to the top and bottom of the top hinge reinforcement in
2 locations of the door:
The face of the door panel

The 7 gauge (4.7mm) hinge reinforcement (projection
welded to the door at the factory)
Primarily applicable to the top hinge reinforcement of 4-1/2

(114mm) or 5 (127mm) hinge reinforcements the auxiliary
reinforcement may be used on other hinge locations when
specified.
143
Hardware
Aluminum door edge nosing

Net Door Width + 7/16
Net Door Width
7/16
Lock edge
nosing optional
Pivot or
hinge edge
2 (51mm)
20
(508mm)
O.C.
2 (51mm)
Purpose
Optional aluminum door edge nosing is recommended for use
on double acting doors to minimize the operating clearance,
between the door edge(s) and the jamb(s) of the frame.
Application

Door edge nosing, manufactured from extruded aluminum,

is prime painted.
Recommended application to hinge edge of doors equipped

with Double Acting Center Hung Pivots, Double Acting
Spring Hinges, Double Acting Floor Closers and Rescue
Hardware to reduce the additional vertical edge clearances
required.
Some applications may require nosing to be applied to both

the pivot/hinge and lock edges of the door. Door size and/or
pivot/hinge location must be adjusted accordingly.
144
(application cont.)
The door edge nosing is placed over the door edge.

A No. 4 x 1 oval head sheet metal screw is installed through
a 3/16 (5mm) diameter hole to attach the unit to the door.
Double acting doors are normally installed in cased open

frames (frames that have no stops). However, smoke and
fire can penetrate the clearance gap, creating a failure.
No labeled applications.
This door option is available for the L, B, CE, and
A14 Series doors.
Hardware
Interviewer prep
Equal
Equal
60
(1524mm)
48
(1219mm)
Finish Floor
Purpose
Interviewer preps are specified when vision through a door

without the use of a window is required.
This door option is available for the L, SL, B, T, CE, and

non-labeled H Series doors.
Application
Hotel room or apartment entrance doors.
The Interviewer preparation (Peep Hole) has a normal location
centered on the door with various heights that depend on
application. Two of the standard vertical locations are shown
above. The maximum size preparation is a 3 diameter
(76.2mm) hole. For fire rated applications, the viewer must also
be fire rated. Maximum 34 diameter hole unless otherwise
listed and by UL or ITS/WHI.
145
Hardware
Peep slot with trim
View Slot
12
(304.8mm)
3/8
(9.5mm)
60
(1270mm)
Finish Floor
Purpose
Certain building segments require functional, inconspicuous

observation positions to enforce the safety and security
regulations prescribed by the facility operating procedures.
This optional viewing unit is factory installed.
This preparation is available on Steelcraft L and B Series doors.
Application
The Peep Slot with trim preparation has a recommended
vertical location of 60 (1270mm) and is centered on the door.
Customer specified heights that depend on application, are
available. The cutout dimension is 13-1/2 (343mm) wide x
1-7/8 (48mm) high. The perimeter of the cutout is reinforced
with a 18 gauge channel. The U-Channel trim finishes the
viewing area dimension to 3/8 (9.5mm) high x 12
(304.8mm) wide.
146
Hardware
Mail slot preparation
6 min.
From Either Edge
12 min.
Finished Floor Surface
Typical Door Elevation
Purpose
Optional mail slots allow for the pass through of mail. They are
usually located in the bottom of the door and are prepared in
the bottom of the door when specified.
This preparation is available on Steelcraft

L and CE Series doors.
Application
The preparation must be placed within the minimum edge
dimensions shown above. Customer must indicate the
manufacturer, template number and model number of the unit
to be installed in order to prepare the proper size opening.
147
Z Astragal
Applications
Inactive Leaf Mounting
Inactive
Leaf
9/64 (3mm)
3/16 (5mm)
Active Leaf Mounting

Astragal application type
and location as specified
Active
Leaf
9/64 (3mm)
3/16 (5mm)
Double Egress Mounting
Mounting
Leaf
Finished Floor
Surface
Typical Double Door Elevation
Z Astragal Applications
Purpose
Astragals are used to close the gap between pairs of doors.
The astragal seals the opening from weather, light, and in
some cases, sound. Security requirements dictate the
appropriate application.
Application

This astragal is normally supplied with pairs of

Steelcraft doors.
This is a handed product.
Shipped loose for field attachment.
148
(application cont.)
This astragal can be used on both rated fire doors and

non-rated doors.
This product option is available for Steelcraft L, SL, B, T, CE,
H, HE, PW, and A14 Series doors. See the Fire Rated products
section for application to Fire Rated doors.
Attachment is made to the inactive door leaf, with the

sheet metal screws supplied.
Z Astragal
Inactive leaf mounting
EXTERIOR SIDE
Inactive
Leaf
9/64 (3mm)
3/16 (5mm)
7/8
(22mm)
86-30
INACTIVE LEAF
Purpose
The astragal seals the opening from weather, light, and in some
cases, sound. Security requirements dictate the appropriate
application.
(application cont.)
Application

This astragal is normally supplied with pairs of Steelcraft

doors.
This is a handed product; it has the same hand as the

inactive door leaf.
Attachment is made to the inactive door leaf, with the sheet

metal screws supplied.
Shipped loose for field attachment.

Active Leaf Mounting or Double Egress Mounting, must
be called-out separately on the order.
The astragal is formed to match the bevel of the door.

When mounted to an active leaf or double egress leaf,
the astragal forming is reversed.
This astragal can be used on both fire rated and non-rated

doors.
This product option is available for Steelcraft L, SL, B, T, H, HE,
PW, and A14 Series doors. See the Fire Rated Products section
for application to Fire Rated doors.
149
Z Astragal
Double egress mounting
Mounting
Leaf
Mounting
Leaf
7/8
(22mm)
93-30
DOUBLE EGRESS
Purpose
(application cont.)
Application
Required on all three (3) Hour Rated Double Egress

openings. Astragal must be ordered separately.

active leaf.
The astragal is blank, with no hardware cutouts.
The astragal can be attached to either leaf as shown, as it

does not impede operation.
Shipped loose for field attachment, with the sheet metal

screws supplied.
150
This astragal can also be used on 1-1/2 and 3/4 hour

rated Double Egress openings although it is not required
to meet the label requirements.
This astragal can not be used on the active door leaf or

inactive door leaf of a conventional pair of doors due to
reverse forming and no hardware cutouts.
This product option is available for Steelcraft L, SL, B, T,
and CE Series doors. See the Fire Rated Products section for
application to Fire Rated doors.
Can be used on pairs of doors with Vertical Rod Exit

devices on both leaves.
Z Astragal
Active leaf mounting

EXTERIOR SIDE
Active
Leaf
9/64 (3mm)
3/16 (5mm)
7/8
(22mm)
93-30
ACTIVE LEAF
Purpose

This product option is available for Steelcraft L, SL, B, T, CE, and

A14 Series doors. See the Fire Rated Products Section for
Application

This astragal requires a special call-out when ordered.
Shipped loose for field attachment, with the sheet metal

screws supplied
This astragal can not be attached to an inactive door leaf or

a double egress door because of the hardware cutouts
This is a handed product; it has the same hand as the active

door leaf
The lock and strike type being used affects the astragal
since cutouts are required for the lock front and strike lip.
The notching for an ASA strike lip notch is provided.
The lock front must be shimmed to insure that the lock

front seats flush with the astragal.
This astragal can be used on both fire rated and

non-rated doors.
151
Z Astragal
Hardware preparations
Strike Preparation
INACTIVE LEAF
Lock Front & Strike Preparation

ACTIVE LEAF
Flush Bolt Preparation

INACTIVE LEAF
Purpose

application. Hardware applications determine the appropriate
preparation(s).
These hardware preparations are available in all Steelcraft

Z type astragals.
Application

Strike Preparations: This is the conventional strike

preparation in an astragal mounted to the inactive leaf. The
astragal has mounting tabs pierced from the base metal.
The tabs are drilled and tapped for the screws supplied by
the hardware manufacturer (with the strike). The type of
strike being used must be specified.
Lock Front & Strike Preparations: This is the type of cutout

required for an astragal that is mounted to the active leaf.
The cutouts are clearance holes for the lock front. The
notching for an ASA strike lip is provided as shown in the
detail above.
Flush Bolt Preparations: When mounted to the inactive

leaf, the astragal is prepared at the top and the bottom for
flush bolts (manual or automatic) when they are specified
as the locking device for the inactive leaf. The preparation
consists of tabs stamped out of the base metal. The tabs
are drilled and tapped for the screws supplied by the flush
bolt manufacturer. If surface bolts are used, this preparation
is not required.
152
Flat plate astragal
Exposed fastening
Active
Leaf
INSWING
3/4 (19mm)
1-1/2 (38mm)
Notch by
Others
OUTSWING
Active
Leaf
3/4 (19mm)
1-1/2 (38mm)
Purpose

application.
This product option is available for Steelcraft L, SL, B, T, CE,

and A14 Series doors. See the Fire Rated Products Section for
Application

Attached to the outside of the active leaf on

swing-out doors
Attached to the outside of the inactive leaf on

swing-in doors
The astragal is a 14 gauge (1.7mm) steel part; attached by

using screws or by welding to the proper door leaf
For this type of astragal, a wide inactive leaf is

recommended
When a conventional lock and strike are used, notching for

the strike lip is performed in the field by others
See Hardware Preparations section for strike, lock front and

flush bolt preparation
153
2 piece astragal
Applications
Inactive Leaf
Channel
Active
Leaf
Active Leaf
Astragal
87.5
1-25/32 (45mm)
92.5
15/16
(24mm) TYP.
Application
The 2 piece astragal is an alternate active leaf astragal.
It allows for using the flushbolt and strike clearance holes
on standard inactive leafs and providing an exterior
bar type astragal.
(application cont.)
The 14 gauge galvanized channel section is mounted

to the inactive leaf with the sheet metal screws supplied
The 12 gauge (2.5mm) galvanized flat bar section is

mounted to the pull side face of the door with the sheet
metal screws provided

The astragal seals the opening from weather, light, and
in some cases, sound. Security requirements dictate the
This astragal can be used on both rated and

non-rated doors.
Application
This product option is available for Steelcraft L, B, T, CE, and

A14 Series doors. See the Fire Rated Products Section for
Purpose

inactive door leaf
For this type of astragal, standard width inactive leaf

is recommended
Shipped loose for field attachment
154
2 piece astragal
Flushbolt Preparation
Inactive Leaf Channel
Strike Preparation
Inactive Leaf Channel
Purpose
Astragals are used to close the gap between pairs of doors. The
astragal seals the opening from weather, light, and in some
application. Hardware applications determine the appropriate
preparation(s).
Application

Flush Bolt Preparations: When mounted to the inactive

leaf, the astragal is prepared at the top and the bottom for
flush bolts (manual or automatic) when they are specified
as the locking device for the inactive leaf. The preparation
consists of tabs stamped out of the base metal. The tabs
are drilled and tapped for the screws supplied by the flush
bolt manufacturer. If surface bolts are used, this preparation
is not required.
Strike Lip Preparation

Active Leaf Astragal
Strike Preparations: This is the conventional strike preparation

in an astragal mounted to the inactive leaf. The astragal has
mounting tabs pierced from the base metal.
The tabs are drilled and tapped for the screws supplied by
the hardware manufacturer (with the strike). The type of
strike being used must be specified.
Strike Lip Preparations: This is the type of cutout required

for an astragal that is mounted to the active leaf. The
notching for an ASA strike lip is provided as shown in the
detail above.
These hardware preparations are available in all Steelcraft 2
piece astragals.
155
Weather seals
Top & bottom caps
No. 8 x 1- 1/2" flat head

sheet metal screws
Steel Top Cap (Screwed-in)

(bottom cap also available)
24 ga. top cap sits on top edge of door, flush with exterior
surface of door and adds 0.020 (0.5mm) to the height of

the door
Attached to 14 ga. top channel
Flush/Filled Top Cap

18 ga. top channel sits flush with top of door and is seam
filled
Recessed Top Cap (Screwed-in)

18 ga. top channel is recessed ~1/8 from top of door

Equal
Equal
Purpose
Top and/or Bottom Caps provide security shields from

unwanted objects placed in the 14 gauge (1.7 mm) top and
bottom closure channels. Steel and Flush/Filled caps shield
from unwanted moisture penetration when installed on exterior
outswing doors. If required, top caps may be sealed with caulk
in the field by others. To prevent the build-up of moisture on the
interior of the door, bottom caps should never be caulked. All
caps and the 14 gauge closure channels they attach to are
galvannealed.
Top and/or bottom caps are available in the 3 versions -- Steel

screwed-in, Flush/filled, and Recessed. All are available on any
available Steelcraft door series for non-label, or for labeled
openings up to 3 hour Fire Ratings, except for the following:
Application
All top and bottom caps can be ordered and installed at the
factory. Only the Steel Top Cap with Screws can be installed by
others and is also available in Parts from our Price book.
Certification Label Locations with continuous hinge preps or
pocket pivots:
SZ Series doors cannot be ordered with top caps, but the
Steel top cap version can be ordered through Parts and

installed by others for non-labeled openings or for 1-1/2 hour
Fire Ratings.
Recessed caps are not available on Hurricane H Series doors

Paladin PW series doors have a 12 gauge top channel
installed as standard, not filled.
The Stainless Steel LS series doors are available with 18
gauge stainless caps either screwed in or tack welded 3 from

each end and 12 OC. Seams can be filled (sealed top) with
silicone as an option.
Steel Top Cap (screwed-in): Label located on top channel

underneath cap
Supplemental label attached to top cap indicating

certification label is attached underneath
Flush/filled: Label attached to top of cap

Recessed Top Cap (screwed-in): Label attached to top of cap
156
Weather seals
FAS-SEAL door bottom sweep
The combination of Steelcraft door, frame,

PS074 Weatherstripping, and the FAS-SEAL
door bottom meets the requirements of NFPA 105,
Smoke Control Standard, for both warm, and ambient
room temperatures.
FAS-SEAL
Door Bottom
The ASTM E283 Air Infiltration Test was conducted on

doors with and without a FAS-SEAL door bottom.
A Non-weatherstripped frame with a 5/8 (16 mm) high
threshold was used. The results of these tests were:
1-1/4
(32mm)
3/4
(19mm)
Without FAS-SEAL 8.77 CFM/FT

With FAS-SEAL 4.71 CFM/FT
#10 Sheet
Metal Screw
CFM/FT = Cubic Feet Per Minute Per Lineal Foot

of Crack
Tests were conducted by a nationally recognized test

and research laboratory.
Purpose
The concealed double sealing sweep conforms to sill variances,
providing an effective seal. The FAS-SEAL door bottom
is made from a synthetic material that is impervious to the
elements, is capable of withstanding extreme temperatures
and is Fire Rated.
Application
FAS-SEAL door bottoms are installed to the bottom channel
with No. 10 x 3/4 Pan Head SMS
Doors sized from 20 (610 mm) wide to 30 (914 mm)

wide: apply 3 screws furnished through the 3 holes provided
in the FAS-SEAL door bottom into the holes provided in
the door bottom channel
(application cont.)
Doors sized from 34 (106 mm) wide to 40 (1219 mm)

wide:
Apply 4 screws furnished through the 4 holes provided

in the FAS-SEAL door bottom into holes field drilled by
others, or
Apply 4 No. 10 x 3/4 self-drill and tap screws

(by others) through the four holes provided in the
FAS-SEAL door bottom into holes field drilled by others
or by self-drill and tap screws
Sweeps for doors 20 through 40 in width are available
from factory inventory and are used on Steelcraft L, SL, B, T, TH,
CE, H, HE, PW, and A14 Series doors.
157
158
Lights and Louvers

Glass lights general information....................... 161
Flush door glass lights....................................... 163
Vision light: V................................................... 163
L, SL, B, H, and T Series doors............................163
Narrow light: Variable sizes N and LNL......... 164
L, SL, B, and H Series doors............................... 164
Narrow light: Fixed sizes N3, N4, and N5...... 165
L, SL, B, H, and T Series doors............................165
Half glass light: G............................................166
L, SL, B, and H Series doors............................... 166
Full glass light: FG, FG2, FG3.......................... 167
L and H Series doors............................................. 167
Special glass lights............................................ 170
Von Duprin INPACT glass lights.................170
Embossed door glass lights............................... 171
CE and HE Series doors........................................ 171
A14 Series full glass entrance doors.................172
Louver prep ..........................................................175
L, SL, B, A14, and H Series doors........................ 175
Main TOC
159
Lights and Louvers
160
Lights and Louvers: Glass lights
General information
Full Flush Doors (L, SL, B, and T Series)
Glass LIGHTS and

LOUVERS:
Steelcraft doors can be
specified and supplied
with various glass
options and louver
cutouts depending on
the architectural and
applications needs.
N4
N3
Full Flush Doors (L and A14 Series)
Door designs for full flush doors
FG
The glass configuration is referred to as the door design. Letter

designations describe the glass light designs. A brief description of
the standard glass light available:
FG2
LNL
N5
Embossed Panel Doors
FG3
(CE Series)
E2G
E4TL
Door (light) designs for CE embossed

doors
F: Flush door: designation for a door without any glass light

installed.
G: Half Glass door: designation for a door with a glass light

located in the top half of the door face. The glass size will vary
with the size of the door. However, for special sized doors, the
next smaller glass size will be supplied.
V: Vision Light door: designation for a door with a small square

window located in the top of the door. The glass size will remain
constant regardless of the door size.
N: Narrow Light door: designation for a door with a long narrow

light located along the lock edge of the door. The following
variations in the Narrow light designs are available as standard:
Door designs for full glass

entrance doors
N Light: door prepared for a 7-38 (187mm) wide glass

light (exposed glass size) which varies in height depending
on the door height.
N3 Light: door prepared for a 3 (76mm) wide and 33

(838mm) high glass light (exposed glass size).
The glass configuration is referred to as the door design. Letter

designations describe the glass light designs. Refer to page 125
for unique A14 Series door construction. A brief description of
the standard glass light available:


LNL Light: door prepared for an 7-38 (187mm) wide glass

light (exposed glass size) which extends the majority of
the door height, and varies in height depending on the door
height.
FG: Full Glass L Series doors: designation for L Series doors

with a full view window, glass extending nearly the full door
width and height. The following variations in Full Glass Light
designs are available:
FG Light: door prepared for a full view window extending

nearly the full width and height of the door.
FG2 Light: variation of the FG Light which includes a

stationary horizontal mid-rail dividing the window into two
(2) individual lights.
FG3 Light: variation of the FG Light which includes

two (2) stationary horizontal mid-rails, dividing the window
into three (3) equal individual lights.
Doors with glass cutouts specifically sized to fit into the CE Series
embossed door.
E2G: designation for a door with a half glass light located in the
top half of the door and two embossed patterns in the bottom
half.
E4TL: designation for a door with dual vision lights located in

the top section of the door and four embossed patterns in the
lower section
FG: Full Glass A14 Series doors: designation for A14 Series
doors with a full view window, glass extending nearly the full
door width and height. The following variations in Full Glass
Light designs are available:
FG Light: door prepared for a full view window extending

nearly the full width and height of the door.
FG2 Light: variation of the FG Light which includes a

stationary horizontal mid-rail dividing the window into
two (2) individual lights.
FG3 Light: variation of the FG Light which includes two (2)

stationary horizontal mid-rails, dividing the window into
three (3) equal individual lights.
Note on Window Sizes and Designs:
All door lights covered in this section are Steelcraft standards.

Special light sizes and configurations are available when specified.
For special size lights using Steelcraft trims, the glass cutting
size is the Exposed Glass Size (EGS) plus 1-1/8. Refer to the
following pages for specific details and dimensions of the various
glass designs.
161
Lights and Louvers: Glass lights
General information
Glazing kit options
Flush door glass kits include the following glass trim systems:
Dezigner Trim is a unique and patented steel trim, recessed
into the door face at the factory, providing a neat flush door
surface designed to accommodate Standard 1/4 (6mm) thick
glass and Optional 1/2 (13mm) thick insulated glass.
Dezigner Trim for Distributor Prep & Install is shipped

assembled with flush clips (no recess in the door face). This
trim is the same as the factory installed Dezigner trim, but it
rests on the surface of the door face, like conventional hollow
metal doors.
Dezigner Trim (recessed) for 1/4 Glass (standard)
Dezigner Trim (for Distributor Prep) for 1/4 Glass (standard)
Flat Panel so
Trim overlaps
Door Surface
Recessed Panel
so Trim is Flush
with Door Surface
1/4 Glass
1/4 Glass
Reinforcement
Channel
Dezigner Trim (recessed) for 1/2 Insulated Glass
Dezigner Trim (for Distributor Prep) for 1/2 Insulated Glass

Flat Panel so
Trim overlaps
Door Surface
Recessed Panel
so Trim is Flush
with Door Surface
1/2 Glass
1/2 Glass
Reinforcement
Channel
Flush Mounted Steel Trim sits in the recessed door face

and is flush with the door surface. It is available for Standard
1/4 (6mm) thick glass as well as Optional 1 (25mm) thick
insulated glass. Glazing beads are screw attached.
Overlapping Steel Trim sits tight on the door face and overlaps
the door surface. This trim accommodates a wide range of sizes
from 1/4 thru 1 thick insulated glass. Glass thickness must be
specified. Glazing beads are screw attached.
Not available on 14GA doors.

Flush Mounted Steel Trim for 1/4 Glass
Overlapping Steel Trim for 1/4 THRU 5/8 Glass
Recessed Panel
so Trim is Flush
with Door Surface
Flat Panel so
Trim overlaps
Door Surface
1/4-5/8 Glass
1/4 Glass
Reinforcement
Channel
Reinforcement
Channel
Glazing bead mounting

location determined by
glass thickness
Flush Mounted Steel Trim for 1 Insulated Glass
Recessed Panel
so Trim is Flush
with Door Surface
Reinforcement
Channel
1 Glass
Overlapping Steel Trim for 3/4 THRU 1 Insulated Glass
Flat Panel so
Trim overlaps
Door Surface
Reinforcement
Channel
Note: Reinforcement Channels shown are used with labeled doors and all Full glass & H Series doors.
162
3/4-1 Glass
Glazing bead mounting

location determined by
glass thickness
Lights and Louvers: Flush door glass lights
L, SL, B, H, and T Series doors
Vision light: V
9-3/8 *
(238mm)
9-3/8 *
(238mm)
CL
62-1/4"
(1581mm)
3/4 Undercut
* Dimensions shown are to the Exposed Glass Size
Vision light door design
Glass light sizes
The V Light designation is for a door with a small square

window located in the top of the door. The glass size will remain
constant regardless of the door size, and the light location is
held constant from the bottom of the door.
The following critical dimensions apply to the standard

Steelcraft V Light (vision light) window designs:
Glazing bead system
Exposed Glass Size = 9-38 (238mm) square
Glass Cutting Size = 10-58 (270mm) square
Door Cutout Size
= 11 (279mm) square
14 (6mm) thick glass lights are available as standard with the

Steelcraft Dezigner trim system for L, SL, B and T Series doors.
12 (13mm) thick insulated glass lights, are available as
an option with the Steelcraft Dezigner trim system for
insulated glass. 1/2 is standard on H Series doors.
Glazing details
Insulated glass light thicker than 12 (13mm) are available as

an option with specially designed overlapping steel trim.
Ordering nomenclature
The door ordering nomenclature is suffixed with the letter: V.
Door series available

Vision Light kits are available for the following door series in all
of their standard options and gauges: L, SL, B, H, and T Series.
3/8
(9 mm)
*Exposed Glass
Glass Cutting Size
Door Cutout Size
Note: For fire rated applications using ceramic type glazing,
consult the glass manufacturers glazing instructions for glass,
caulking and/or glazing tape requirements. Details will vary as
required by glazing selections.
163
L, SL, B, and H Series doors
Narrow light: Variable sizes

6-13/16"
(173mm)
7-3/8"*
(187mm)
7-3/8"*
(187mm)
8-7/32"
(209mm)
6-13/16"
(173mm)
Variable narrow light door design
8-7/32"
(209mm)
Designation for a door with a long narrow light located along

the lock edge of the door. The following variations in the
Narrow Light designs are available as standard:
N Light: door prepared for a 7-38 (191mm) wide glass

light (exposed glass size) which varies in height with the
door height. However, for special sized doors, the next
smaller glass size will be supplied.
LNL Light: door prepared for a 7-38 (191mm) wide glass

light (exposed glass size) which extends the majority of the
door height, and varies in height with the door height.
Glazing bead system

Steelcraft Dezigner trim system for L, SL, and B Series doors.
40-5/16"
(1024mm)
12-3/4"
(324mm)
LNL
3/4" Undercut
3/4" Undercut

Insulated glass lights thicker than 12 (13mm) are available as
*Dimensions are to Exposed Glass Size
The door ordering nomenclature is suffixed with the letter:
Glass light sizes

Steelcraft N and LNL Light window designs:
Window widths N and LNL
Exposed Glass Size = 7-38 (191mm)
Glass Cutting Size = 8-58 (219mm)
Door Cutout Size = 9 (229mm)
N: 7-38 (191mm) wide glass light (which varies in height

with the door height).
LNL: 7-38 (191mm) wide glass light (which extends the

majority of the door height).

Narrow Light kits are available for the following door series in all
of their standard options and gauges: L, SL, B, and H Series.
Window
heights Door heights (Dim A)
N
EGS =
30-12
32-1/2
34-12
36-12
44-1/2
46-12
GCS =
31-34
33-3/4
35-34
37-34
45-3/4
47-34
DCS =
Glazing details
68 610 70 72 710 80
3/8
(9 mm)
32-332 34-3/32 36-332 38-332 46-3/32 48-332
*Exposed Glass
Glass Cutting Size
Door Cutout Size
Window
heights Door heights (Dim B)
LNL
68 60 70 72 710 80
EGS =
58
60
62
64
72
74
GCS =
59-1/4
61-1/4
63-1/4
65-1/4
73-1/4
75-1/4
DCS =
59-21/32 61-21/32 63-21/32 65-21/32 73-21/32 75-21/32

Note: For special size doors, the next smaller glass size will be used. The glass light location will be held from the bottom of the door.
164
L, SL, B, H, and T Series doors
Narrow light: Fixed sizes

6-13/16"
(173mm)
5"*
(127mm)
6-13/16"
(173mm)
4"*
(102mm)
Varies
Varies
20"*
(508mm)
Varies
33"*
(838mm)
25"*
(635mm)
6'8" = 50-5/16"
7'0" & over = 52-5/16"
N5
6-13/16"
(173mm)
3"*
(76mm)
6'8" = 45-5/16"
7'0" & over = 47-5/16"
6'8" = 37-5/16"
7'0" = 41-5/16"
7'2" & over = 43-5/16"
N4
N3
3/4" Undercut
3/4" Undercut
3/4" Undercut
*Dimensions are to Exposed Glass Size
Fixed narrow light door design
Designation for a door with a long narrow light located along

the lock edge of the door. The following variations in the
Narrow Light designs are covered on this sheet, and are
available as standard:
Narrow Light kits are available for the following door series in all
of their standard options and gauges: L, SL, B, H, and T Series.


Steelcraft N3, N4, and N5 Light window designs:

(635 mm) high glass light (exposed glass size).

Glazing bead system

Steelcraft Dezigner trim system for L, SL, B and T Series doors.
an option with the Steelcraft Dezigner Trim System for
The door ordering nomenclature is suffixed with the letter:
N3: 3 (76mm) wide and 33 (838mm) high glass light

(exposed glass size).


Glass light sizes

Glass designs
N5
N4
N3
Window widths
Exposed glass size
Glass cutting size
6-14
5-14
4-14
Door cutout size
6-1932
5-1932
4-1932
Window widths
Exposed glass size
20
25
33
Glass cutting size
21-14
26-14
34-14
Door cutout size
21-1932
26-1932
34-1932
Glazing details
3/8
(9 mm)
Exposed Glass
Glass Cutting Size
Door Cutout Size
165
L, SL, B, and H Series doors
Half glass light: G
Half glass door lights
Dimension A
6-13/16"
(173mm)
Designation for a door with a glass light located in the top

half of the door face. The glass size will vary with the size
of the door. However, for special sized doors, the next
smaller glass size will be supplied.
6-13/16"
(173mm)
8-7/32"
(209mm)
Glazing bead system

14 (6mm) thick glass lights are available as standard
with the Steelcraft Dezigner trim system for L, SL, and
B Series doors.
Dimension B

Insulated glass lights thicker than 12 (13mm) are available
as an option with specially designed overlapping steel trim.
40-5/16" (1024mm)
to Bottom of Light
The door ordering nomenclature is suffixed with the letter: G.
*Dimensions are shown

to the Exposed Glass Size
Half Glass kits are available for the following door series
in all of their standard options and gauges:
L, SL, B, and H Series.
3/4" Undercut
Glass light sizes

The following critical dimensions apply to the standard Steelcraft G Light window designs:
Window
widths Door widths (Dim A)
20 24 26 28 210 30 34 36 38 310 40
EGS =
10-3/16
14-3/16
16-3/16
18-3/16
20-3/16
22-3/16
26-3/16
28-3/16
30-3/16
32-3/16
34-3/16
GCS =
11-7/16
15-7/16
17-7/16
19-7/16
21-7/16
23-7/16
27-7/16
29-7/16
31-7/16
33-7/16
35-7/16
DCS =
11-25/32 15-25/32
17-25/32 19-25/32
21-25/32 23-25/32 27-25/32 29-25/32 31-25/32 33-25/32 35-25/32
Window
68
610
7 0
72
710
80
EGS =
30-1/2
32-1/2
34-1/2
36-1/2
44-1/2
46-1/2
GCS =
31-3/4
33-3/4
35-3/4
37-3/4
45-3/4
47-3/4
DCS =
32-3/32
34-3/32
36-3/32
38-3/32
46-3/32
48-3/32
Note: EGS = Exposed Glass Size

GCS = Glass Cutting Size
DCS = Door Cutout Size
Glazing details
3/8
(9 mm)
*Exposed Glass
Glass Cutting Size
Door Cutout Size
166
L and H Series doors
Full glass light: FG

Dimension A
6-13/16"
(173mm)
Full glass (FG) door lights

Designation for a door with a full vision glass light. The glass
size will vary with the size of the door.
6-13/16"
(173mm)
8-7/32"
(209mm)
Glazing bead system

Steelcraft Dezigner trim system for L Series doors.
Dimension B

Flush mounted steel trim not available on 14GA doors.
Reinforcement Channels are used in all Full glass applications.
The door ordering nomenclature is suffixed with the letter: FG.
12-3/4" (1024mm)
to Bottom of Light
FG
Full Glass kits are available for the following door series in all of
their standard options and gauges: L and H Series.
3/4" Undercut
Special size doors
*Dimensions are shown to the Exposed Glass Size
Standard policy for special size doors is the next smaller glass
size will be supplied unless noted differently on the order.
The following critical dimensions apply to the standard Steelcraft G Light window designs:
The following critical dimensions apply to the standard Steelcraft FG Light window designs
Window
20 24 26 28 210 30 34 36 38 310 40
EGS =
GCS =
DCS =
10-3/16
14-3/16
11-7/16
15-7/16
11-25/32 15-25/32
16-3/16
18-3/16
17-7/16
19-7/16
17-25/32 19-25/32
20-3/16
22-3/16
26-3/16
28-3/16
30-3/16
32-3/16
34-3/16
21-7/16
23-7/16
27-7/16
29-7/16
31-7/16
33-7/16
35-7/16
21-25/32 23-25/32 27-25/32 29-25/32 31-25/32 33-25/32 35-25/32
Window
68 610 70 72 710 80
EGS =
58
60
62
64
72
74
GCS =
59-1/4
61-1/4
63-1/4
65-1/4
73-1/4
75-1/4
DCS =
59-21/32 61-21/32
63-21/32 65-21/32

73-21/32 75-21/32
Glazing details
3/8
(9 mm)
*Exposed Glass
Glass Cutting Size
Door Cutout Size
167
Full glass with multiple lights: FG2

Dimension A
6-13/16"
(173mm)
Full glass (FG2) door lights
6-13/16"
(173mm)
Designation for a door with two (2) glass lights each separated by an
integral rail. Glass sizes will vary with the size of the door.
8-7/32"
(209mm)
Glazing bead system

Dimension B
12 (13mm) thick insulated glass lights, are available as an option

with the Steelcraft Dezigner trim system for insulated glass.
1/2 is standard on H Series doors.
Insulated glass lights thicker than 12 (13mm) are available as an
option with specially designed overlapping steel trim.
7-1/2"
(190mm)

Dimension C
See Note
#1 Below
12-3/4" (1024mm)
to Bottom of Light
FG2
The door ordering nomenclature is suffixed with the letter: FG2.

Full Glass FG2 kits are available for the following door series in all of
3/4" Undercut
Special size doors

Standard policy for special size doors is the next smaller glass size
will be supplied unless noted differently on the order.
The following critical dimensions apply to the standard Steelcraft FG2 designs with multiple glass lights
Window
20
24
26
28
210
30
34
36
38
310
40
EGS =
10-3/16
14-3/16
16-3/16
18-3/16
20-3/16
22-3/16
26-3/16
28-3/16
30-3/16
32-3/16
34-3/16
GCS =
11-7/16
15-7/16
17-7/16
19-7/16
21-7/16
23-7/16
27-7/16
29-7/16
31-7/16
33-7/16
35-7/16
DCS =
11-25/32 15-25/32
17-25/32 19-25/32
21-25/32 23-25/32 27-25/32 29-25/32 31-25/32 33-25/32 35-25/32
Window
68
610
70
72
710
(Dim C)
80
All Doors
EGS =
27-13/16 29-13/16
31-13/16
33-13/16
41-13/16
43-13/16
22-21/32
GCS =
29-1/16
33-1/16
35-1/16
43-1/16
45-1/16
23-7/8
DCS =
31-1/16
29-13/32 31-13/32
33-13/32 35-13/32
43-13/32 45-13/32
Notes:
1. For Flush door construction, the center rail of the FG2 glass
lights vary with the door height.
2. If consistent rail heights are required, refer to page 173 and
the A14 Series full glass entrance door construction.
required by glazing selections
168
24-1/4
Glazing details
3/8
(9 mm)
*Exposed Glass
Glass Cutting Size
Door Cutout Size

6-13/16"
(173mm)
Dimension A
6-13/16"
(173mm)
Designation for a door with three (3) glass lights each separated by
an integral rail. Glass sizes will vary with the size of the door.
8-7/32"
(209mm)
Glazing bead system
Dimension D

7-1/2"
(190mm)
12 (13mm) thick insulated glass lights, are available as an option

with the Steelcraft Dezigner trim system for insulated glass.
1/2 is standard on H Series doors.
Dimension D
Insulated glass lights thicker than 12 (13mm) are available as an

option with specially designed overlapping steel trim.
7-1/2"
(190mm)

Dimension D
12-3/4" (1024mm)
to Bottom of Light
FG3
3/4" Undercut
Full Glass FG3 kits are available for the following door series in all of
Special size doors

Standard policy for special size doors is the next smaller glass size
will be supplied unless noted differently on the order.
The following critical dimensions apply to the standard Steelcraft FG3 designs with multiple glass lights
Window
20 24 26 28 210 30 34 36 38 310 40
EGS =
10-3/16
14-3/16
16-3/16
18-3/16
20-3/16
22-3/16
26-3/16
28-3/16
30-3/16
32-3/16
34-3/16
GCS =
11-7/16
15-7/16
17-7/16
19-7/16
21-7/16
23-7/16
27-7/16
29-7/16
31-7/16
33-7/16
35-7/16
DCS =
11-25/32 15-25/32
17-25/32 19-25/32
21-25/32 23-25/32 27-25/32 29-25/32 31-25/32 33-25/32 35-25/32
Window
heights Door heights (Dim D)
68 70 72 710 80
EGS =
14-5/16
15-5/8
16-5/16
16-15/16
19-5/8
GCS =
15-1/2
16-13/16
17-1/2
18-3/16
20-13/16
DCS =
15-7/8
17-3/16
17-7/8
18-9/16
21-3/16

Glazing details
3/8
(9 mm)
*Exposed Glass
Glass Cutting Size
Door Cutout Size
169
Lights and Louvers
Special glass lights
Von Duprin INPACT glass lights (mortise and concealed vertical rod)
6-13/16"
(173mm)
6-13/16"
(173mm)
Varies*
Optional details
8-7/32"
(209mm)
Varies*
V
4-1/4"
(108mm)
45-3/4"
(1162mm)
41"
(1041mm)
N5
N4
Glass lights
Glass light cutouts are available in N4, N5 and V Light designs
without modification. Other lights are available but have limited
height due to the exit device preparation.
Glazing bead system

G (Modified)
3/4" Undercut

Steelcraft Dezigner Series trim system.
12(13mm) thick insulated glass lights, are available as an
option with the Steelcraft Dezigner Series trim system for
insulated glass.
Glass light sizes

The following dimensions outline the maximum glass heights
available with the INPACT door preparation:
Glazing details
3/8
(9 mm)
*Exposed Glass
Glass Cutting Size
Door Cutout Size
Door heights*
(Nominal)
Maximum Exposed
Glass Height

68
70
72
80
25-1/8 29-1/8 31-1/8 41-1/8
*To determine maximum glass light height for other sized doors,
for exposed glass, subtract 54 (1372mm) from net door size.
The following critical dimension applies to the standard
Steelcraft light designs with INPACT preparation:
Glass Cutting Size = exposed glass size + 1-1/8
Door Cutout Size = exposed glass size + 1-12
Notes:

170
1. Consult code for ADA requirements on glass cutouts.

2. Refer to pages 270-271 for specific INPACT device
preparation requirements.
Lights and Louvers: Embossed door glass lights
CE and HE Series doors
Half glass light: Fixed sizes

Varies
See Chart
Varies
6-5/8" 6-5/8"
(143mm) (143mm)
Varies*
Varies*
See
Chart
4-5/8""
(118mm)
*Note: Due to the narrow top rail dimension,

be mounted with drop brackets on all 6 8 high
embossed 6 Panel doors.
Varies
E2G
Half Glass Light
3/4" Undercut
E4TL
Glass light sizes (for E2G)
Glass light sizes (for E4TL)

CE Half Glass and 9 Light window designs:

E6 (individual) dual vision light window design:
Window
widths
Window
Widths 26 thru 38
EGS
GCS
DCS
Window Door heights

heights 68, 70, & 80
EGS
GCS
DCS
EGS
GCS
DCS
= 18-5/8
= 19-3/4
=
20-7/32

Window
heights
Door widths
26 thru 28 210 thru 38
20-5/8
21-3/4
22-7/32
Door heights
68 & 70
80
EGS = 34-5/8 46-1/4

GCS = 35-3/4
47-3/8
DCS =
36-7/32
48-7/32


=
=
=
6-58
7-34
8 -732
4-58
5-34
6-732


Glazing bead system

Steelcraft Dezigner trim system on CE Series doors.
12 (13mm) thick insulated glass lights, are available as an
option with the trim system for insulated glass. 1/2 is standard
on HE Series doors.
The door ordering nomenclature is suffixed with the letters
E2G or E4TL.

Light kits are available for the following door series in all of their
standard options and gauges: CE, CF, and HE Series.
=
=
=
Door widths
Glazing details
3/8
(9 mm)
*Exposed Glass
Glass Cutting Size
Door Cutout Size
171
Lights and Louvers
A14 Series full glass entrance doors
Full glass light: FG

Full glass (FG) door lights
Dimension A
6-13/16"
(173mm)
Designation for a door with a full vision glass light. The glass
size will vary with the size of the door.
6-13/16"
(173mm)
6-1/4"
(159mm)
Glazing bead system

Steelcraft Dezigner trim system.
option with the Steelcraft Dezigner trim system for insulated
glass.
Dimension B

The door ordering nomenclature is suffixed with the letter: FG.
11-1/4" (284mm)
to Bottom of Light
Full Glass kits are available for the following door series in all of
their standard options and gauges: A14 Series.
FG
3/4" Undercut
Special size doors
Special glass sizes are available; however, A14 vertical stiles are
always fixed at 6-13/16 wide regardless of the glass size.
The following critical dimension apply to A14 Series FG Light window designs and are based on typical door sizes
(special sizes available). *Check your acknowledgement for the recommended GCS (glass cutting size) as certain hinges and other
hardware options can affect sizes.
Window
20 24 26 28 210 30 34 36 38 310 40
EGS =
GCS =
DCS =
10-3/16
14-3/16
11-7/16
15-7/16
11-25/32 15-25/32
16-3/16
18-3/16
17-7/16
19-7/16
17-25/32 19-25/32
20-3/16
22-3/16
26-3/16
28-3/16
30-3/16
32-3/16
34-3/16
21-7/16
23-7/16
27-7/16
29-7/16
31-7/16
33-7/16
35-7/16
21-25/32 23-25/32 27-25/32 29-25/32 31-25/32 33-25/32 35-25/32
Window
68 610 70 72 710 80
EGS =
GCS =
DCS =
61-1/2
63-1/2
65-1/2
67-1/2
75-1/2
62-23/32 64-23/32 66-23/32 68-23/32 76-23/32

63-1/8
65-1/8
67-1/8
69-1/8
77-1/8
77-1/2
78-3/4
79-1/8
Note: For fire rated applications using ceramic type glazing, consult
the glass manufacturers glazing instructions for glass, caulking
and/or glazing tape requirements. Details will vary as required by
glazing selections.
Glazing details
3/8
(9 mm)
*Exposed Glass
Glass Cutting Size
Door Cutout Size
172
Lights and Louvers

6-13/16"
(173mm)
Designation for a door with two (2) glass lights each separated
by an integral rail. Glass sizes will vary with the size of the door.
Dimension A
6-13/16"
(173mm)
6-1/4"
(159mm)
Glazing bead system

option with the Steelcraft Dezigner trim system for insulated
glass.
Dimension B

6-1/2"
(164mm)

Dimension C
39 -1/4
See Note
#1 Below
11-1/4" (284mm)
to Bottom of Light
Full Glass FG2 kits are available for the following door series in
all of their standard options and gauges: A14 Series.
FG2
Special size doors
3/4" Undercut
The following critical dimension apply to A14 Series FG2 designs with multiple lights, based on typical door sizes (special sizes
available). *Check your acknowledgement for the recommended GCS (glass cutting size) as certain hinges and other hardware
options can affect sizes.
Window

EGS =
GCS =
DCS =
20 24 26 28 210 30 34 36 38 310 40
10-3/16
14-3/16
11-7/16
15-7/16
11-25/32 15-25/32
16-3/16
18-3/16
17-7/16
19-7/16
17-25/32 19-25/32
20-3/16
22-3/16
26-3/16
28-3/16
30-3/16
32-3/16
34-3/16
21-7/16
23-7/16
27-7/16
29-7/16
31-7/16
33-7/16
35-7/16
21-25/32 23-25/32 27-25/32 29-25/32 31-25/32 33-25/32 35-25/32
Window
(Dim C)
68
610
70
72
710
80
All Doors
EGS =
30-9/32
32-9/32
34-9/32
36-9/32
44-9/32
46-9/32
24-21/32
GCS =
31-7/16
33-7/16
35-7/16
37-7/16
45-7/16
47-7/16
25-7/8
DCS =
31-7/8
33-7/8
35-7/8
37-7/8
45-13/16
47-7/8
26-1/4
Note #1: The center rail of the FG2 door is located 40 above the bottom of the frame
(with a 3/4 door undercut).
glazing selections.
Glazing details
3/8
(9 mm)
*Exposed Glass
Glass Cutting Size
Door Cutout Size
173
Lights and Louvers

Dimension A
6-13/16"
(173mm)
6-13/16"
(173mm)
Designation for a door with three (3) glass lights each

separated by an integral rail. Glass sizes will vary with the size
of the door.
6-1/4"
(159mm)
Glazing bead system
Dimension B

6-1/2"
(164mm)

insulated glass.
Dimension B

6-1/2"
(164mm)

Dimension B
11-1/4" (284mm)
to Bottom of Light
FG3
Full Glass FG3 kits are available for the following door series in
all of their standard options and gauges: A14 Series.
3/4" Undercut
Special size doors

The following critical dimension apply to A14 Series FG3 designs with multiple lights, based on typical door sizes (special
sizes available). *Check your acknowledgement for the recommended GCS (glass cutting size) as certain hinges and other
hardware options can affect sizes.
The following critical dimensions apply to the A14 Series FG3 designs with multiple glass lights

Window
20 24 26 28 210 30 34 36 38 310 40
EGS =
10-3/16
14-3/16
16-3/16
18-3/16
20-3/16
22-3/16
26-3/16
28-3/16
30-3/16
32-3/16
34-3/16
GCS =
11-7/16
15-7/16
17-7/16
19-7/16
21-7/16
23-7/16
27-7/16
29-7/16
31-7/16
33-7/16
35-7/16
DCS =
11-25/32 15-25/32
17-25/32 19-25/32
Window

68
70
72
80
EGS =
16-3/32
17-7/16
18-3/32
21-7/16
GCS =
17-5/16
18-11/16
19-5/16
22-11/16
DCS =
17-11/16
19-1/32
19-11/16
23-1/32
21-25/32 23-25/32 27-25/32 29-25/32 31-25/32 33-25/32 35-25/32

glazing selections.
Glazing details
3/8
(9 mm)
*Exposed Glass
Glass Cutting Size
Door Cutout Size
174
Lights and Louvers: Louver prep
L, SL, B, A14, and H Series doors
Louver prep: -L
Optional details
Varies
7-1/2"
(159mm)
(Cut out only.

Louver
supplied
by others.)
F-L Bottom
F-L Top
F-L2
Varies
FG-L
(Cut out only.

Louver
supplied
by others.)
Louver (-L) door prep

Designation for a door with one (1) or two (2) louver cutouts
with or without installed reinforcement channels.
Varies
Welded-in reinforcement channels are used on labeled

applications or when specified on an order.
12" (305mm)
to Bottom of Cutout
Louver provided by others.
3/4" Undercut
The door ordering nomenclature is suffixed with the letter: -L.
Special size doors
Louver cutouts are available for the following door series in all
of their standard options and gauges: L, SL, B, A14, and H Series.
Standard policy for special size doors is the next smaller.
Full louver cutouts with channels available in A14 Series doors

only. Louvers are not available on CE, T, or PW Series.
Cutouts available
Standard policy for special size doors is the
next smaller.
Reinforcement
channels
Labeled louvers
See Fire rated section for approvals. Channels are
used on all labeled door.
Door panel
Reinforcement flush
with edge of cut out
Reinforcement
Channel
Cutout
opening
consult the louver manufacturers glazing instructions for
louver, caulking and/or glazing tape requirements. Details
will vary as required by glazing selections.
175
Lights and Louvers: Louver prep
176
Elevations

General Information........................................... 179
Architectural sticks......................................... 183
TSF parts list...........................................................183
Screw-in glazing beads....................................... 190
Typical elevations................................................ 191
Field joint/splice details......................................193
Transom panels without transom bars.......... 195
Removable mullion and mullion splicing....... 197
Jamb anchor applications.................................199
Base anchor applications.................................200
Main TOC
177
Elevations
178
Elevations
General information
General frame information
The Steelcraft Architectural Stick Systems are designed to

fit virtually all construction requirements for commercial
building applications. These frame assemblies are fabricated
(cut and welded) from various framing components, to
meet a wide range of architectural requirements based on
aesthetics, functionality, and durability. These frames and their
components are specifically designed to meet the high usage
levels of all commercial and institutional buildings.

Steelcraft framing systems, the following guidelines for base
This section of the manual is designed to give an overview

of the flexibility available in the Steelcraft Architectural
Stick Systems. For maximum flexibility and functionality, the
perimeter framing (open sections which attach to the wall
systems) is available in several frame series. Anchorage to the
wall and floor may vary from the details shown in the applicable
frame Specification Sheets.
The Steelcraft Architectural Stick Systems are available in the
following frame series:
Flush Frames (F and FN Series): Available as transom

light/panel, side light/panel, transom and side light/panel,
borrowed lights and frames with corner enclosures.
Drywall Frame (DW and K Series): Available only as

borrowed lights. These frames are KD (knock down).
Multi-Use Frames (MU Series): Available as transom

light/panel, side light/panel, transom and side light/panel,
borrowed lights and entrance frames with corner enclosures.
Material gauge: the following base material thickness are

available:
16 gauge (1.3 mm): for Heavy Commercial and Institutional

applications with high usage.
14 gauge (1.7 mm): for Extra-heavy Commercial and

Institutional applications with potential of extremely high
usage.
Material selection: in addition to the thickness of base

available:
Cold Rolled Steel (CRS) conforming to ASTM A1008 and

ASTM A568 recommended for interior opening with normal
humidity exposure.
Hot-Dip Galvannealed Steel conforming to ASTM A924

and ASTM A653 recommended for exterior opening or
interior openings with high humidity.
Installation
Installation of all Steelcraft Framing Systems shall conform
to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, SDI 105
Recommended Installation Instructions for Steel Frames.

All fire rated frames must be installed in accordance with NFPA
Pamphlet 80, and/or the local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
Glaze and seal all exterior elevations, or interior elevations
subjected to high humidity exposure, in accordance with
HMMAs Tech Note (HMMA820-TN03-07). Guidelines for
Glazing Hollow Metal Transoms, Sidelights, and Windows.
179
Elevations
General information
Introduction
General elevations information
Stick Sections, which are lengths of component frame

material, are used to produce transom, transom & sidelight,
sidelight and borrowed lights. The components are cut to
length, notched and/or mitered, assembled and welded into an
assembly to meet the requirements and specifications of the
opening. The individual sections and the welded assembly
can be fabricated at the factory or at the distributors
fabrication shop.
1. Standard components are either open (anchoring into the

wall), or closed (mullions and dividers) sections.
This publication is designed to show the assembly flexibility,

and the components along with general cutting and assembly
details. Other details include methods of splicing (for a frame
when it exceeds shipping limitations), and other miscellaneous
details.

2. Components are available in 16 and 14 gauge nongalvannealed or optional galvannealed steel (except as
noted otherwise).
3. Components are available as either single or double rabbet.
For the purpose of simplicity, all details are shown as double
rabbeted.
5. All sill sections (members attached to the floor) are

recommended to be galvannealed steel.
6. Closed sections are shown for 3-34 (95mm) jamb depth.
3 (76mm) jamb depth section has two-piece.
7. All frame open sections have standard 1/2 returns except
MU Series and 5-3/4 jamb depth which have 7/16 returns.
OPEN SECTIONS
Double Rabbet
Single Rabbet
Jamb Depth
Jamb Depth
1-9/16"
(40mm)
1-15/16"
(49mm)
1-15/16"
(49mm )
*Varies
Multi-Use frames only*
Glazing Bead
*Varies
5/8" (16mm)
1", 2" or 4"

(25, 50 or 102mm)
1", 2" or 4"

(25, 50 or 102mm)
Throat Opening
1/2" (13mm)
(See Note 7)
CLOSED SECTIONS
Jamb Depth
1-9/16"
(40mm)
Single Rabbet
Jamb Depth
1-15/16"
(49mm)
1-15/16"
(49mm)
5/8" (16mm)
1", 2" or 4"

(25, 50 or 102mm)
5/8" (16mm)
180
1/2" (13mm)
(See Note 7)
1/2" (13mm)
(See Note 7)
*Varies with glass thickness
Double Rabbet
Glazing Bead
5/8" (16mm)
Throat Opening
1/2" (13mm)
(See Note 7)
5/8" (16mm)
1", 2" or 4"

(25, 50 or 102mm)
5/8" (16mm)
Elevations
General information
Typical elevations
Transom frames
Door frame having a transom bar and glass, panel or louver
above the door opening. The transom bar separates the door
opening from the transom opening. The frame height will vary
but normally extends to the ceiling above.
Ceiling height frame

Door frame without a transom bar and a panel mounted above
the door. The panel is normally the same thickness and material
as the door. The frame height will vary but normally extends to
the ceiling.
Transom sidelight frame

Door frame with transom bars and mullions dividing the entire
frame into door and glass or panel openings. The frame height
will vary but normally extends to the ceiling above.
Sidelight frame
Door frame with glass openings attached to one or both sides
of the door opening. The sidelight portion can be partial height
of the door opening or extend the entire height of the door. The
frame is only the door height. If the frame is greater than the
door height the frame is defined as a transom sidelight frame.
Borrowed light
Four-sided frame without a door opening, prepared for glass
installation in the field. The borrowed light can be designed
for one or multiple pieces of glass. The frame can be located in
the wall off the floor or sit on the floor and extend to the
ceiling above.
181
Elevations
182
Elevations: Standard components
Architectural sticks
TSF parts list

Sticks are frame components used by the distributor to produce transom, transom/sidelight, sidelight and borrowed light frames.
The components are cut to length, notched or mitered, assembled and welded into an assembly by the distributor to meet the
requirements of the opening.
Sticks are commonly identified as TSF (Transom Sidelight Frame) sections. Each component has a unique TSF number that identifies
it from another section. The frame jamb depth and gauge of steel are also used in the identification and ordering since the TSF
number is only a basic identification number.
Stick components are available in 121 (open sections), 106 (closed sections) lengths and pre-sized lengths for 68, 70, 72
and 80 door heights. Sections can be blank (no cutouts), have strike or hinge preps to match doors and other three sided frames.
See the exact TSF number for the hardware prep that is included.
Single
rabbet
Double
rabbet
Part
number
Description
Page
Part
number
Description
Page
TSF-6
6'8" Double Hinge Mullion
186
TSF-33
7'2" Double Strike Mullion
186
TSF-7
186
TSF-34 R/L
7'2" Hinge & Strike Mullion
186
TSF-8 R/L
186
TSF-35 R/L
7'2" Single Hinge Mullion
186
TSF-9 R/L
186
TSF-36 R/L
7'2" Single Strike Mullion
186
TSF-10 R/L
186
TSF-39 R/L
7'2" End Hinge Jamb 12'1"
185
TSF-11
186
TSF-40
Cased Open Section 12'1"
188
TSF-12
186
TSF-41 R/L
Single Strike Mullion 10'6"

(All heights)
185
TSF-13 R/L
186
TSF-42 R/L
6'8" Single Hinge Mullion 10'6"
185
TSF-14 R/L
186
TSF-43 R/L
185
TSF-15 R/L
186
TSF-44 R/L
185
TSF-16
Blank Mullion 2" Face 10'6"
188
TSF-44 R/L
6'8" Hinge & Strike Mullion 10'6"
185
TSF-20
7'0" Blank Mullion
186
TSF-46 R/L
185
TSF-21
Head or Sill 2" Face 12'1"
186
TSF-47 R/L
185
TSF-22
Filler with 5/8" Stop 12'1"
187
TSF-51
2 Way Corner Post

Outside 10'6"
187
TSF-52
2 Way Corner Post

Outside 10'6"
187
TSF-53
3 Way Corner Post

Outside 10'6"
187
TSF-54
3 Way Corner Post

Outside 10'6"
187
TSF-23
Head or Sill 4" Face 12'1"
188
TSF-24 R/L
185
TSF-25 R/L
185
TSF-26 R/L
End Strike Jamb 12'1"

(All heights)
185
TSF-27 R/L
Filler without Stop 12'1"
187
TSF-32 R/L
Single
rabbet
Double
rabbet
186
183
TSF parts list

Single
rabbet
Double
rabbet
Description
Page
Single
rabbet
Double
rabbet
Description
Page
See TSF 93
TSF-56
6'8" Removable Mullion

Double Strike
186
N/A
TSF-102
Un-assembled Transom Bar

Side A 19/16" 10'6"
188
See TSF 94
TSF-57

Double Strike
186
N/A
TSF-103
Un-assembled Transom Bar

Side B 115/16" 10'6"
188
See TSF 96
TSF-58

Double Strike
186
186
Flush Sill Section Galvannealed

81/8" High 12'1"
188
TSF-59

Double Strike
TSF-104
See TSF 98
TSF-80
186
TSF-105
188
186

61/8" High 12'1"
TSF-81
TSF-82 R/L
186
TSF-106
188
186

161/8" High 12'1"
TSF-83 R/L
TSF-84 R/L
186
TSF-107
185
Recessed Sill Galvannealed

81/8" Face x 19/16" Deep 12'1"
188
TSF-85 R/L
TSF-86
8'0" Blank Mullion
186
N/A
TSF-108
Recessed Sill Galvannealed

81/8" Face x 115/16" Deep 12'1"
188
N/A
N/A
See
TSF-56
See
TSF-5
TSF-87 R/L
185
TSF-88 R/L
185
N/A
TSF-132 R/L
Blank Partial Sidelite Mullion

40" Notch 10'6"
189
SF-89
T
Snap-in Filler with 5/8" Stop 12'1"
187
N/A
TSF-133 R/L
Single Strike Partial Sidelite

Mullion with 40" Notch 10'6"
189
TSF-93

Double Strike
186
N/A
TSF-134 R/L
Blank Partial Sidelite Mullion

40" Notch 7'0"
189
TSF-135 R/L
Single Strike Partial

Sidelite Mullion
40" Notch 7'0"
189
3GB0080P012
Screw-in Glazing Bead

5/8" x 10'0"
190
TSF-94

Double Strike
186
SF-95
T
MU Filler Plate
5/8" Stop 12'1"
187
See
TSF-58
TSF-96

Double Strike
186
See
TSF-59
TSF-98

Double Strike
186
TSF-99
Blank Mullion 4" Face 10'6"
188
N/A
184
Part
number
N/A
End jambs and intermediate mullions: Right or left hand

End jambs = 12 1 Length
End Hinge Jamb shown
Mullions = 10 6 length
End Jambs: Right or left hand

A. Description: 121 open frame section with
square end cutoff.
B. Nomenclature:
Nominal
Description

Door Size
TSF No.

68 TSF-24

70
TSF-25
End Hinge Jamb 121

72
TSF-39

80
TSF-85
End Strike Jamb 121
ASA

Not shown
68
70
72
80
TSF-26
Notes:
Double Rabbet
1. Specify right or left hand when ordering.
Single Rabbet
2. Not available with transom bar notch.
Intermediate mullions: Right or left hand

A. Description: 106 closed frame section with square
end cutoff.
Single Strike Mullion shown
B. Nomenclature:

Description
Nominal
Door Size
TSF No.
Single Strike Mullion.

ASA Strike prepped

on one (1) rabbet.

Opposite rabbet blank
68
70
72
80
Single Hinge Mullion.
Hinges prepped on one

(1) rabbet. Opposite

rabbet blank.

68 TSF-42
70
TSF-43
72
TSF-44
80
TSF-87

(1) rabbet. ASA Strike

prepped on opposite

rabbet.

68
70
72
80
Notes:
TSF-41
10 6
10 6
TSF-45
TSF-46
TSF-47
TSF-88
Double Rabbet
Single Rabbet
Specify right or left hand when ordering.
185
Intermediate mullions: Right or left hand and removable mullion

Intermediate mullions are sized to the specified nominal door height and notched for the frame head stop.
Intermediate mullions: Right or left hand
A. Description: Closed frame section with
notched end cutoff, cut to door height shown.
B. Nomenclature:
Description
Size
TSF No.
Strike Mullion.
Double

ASA Strikes prepped

on both rabbet.

68 TSF-6
70
TSF-11
72
TSF-32
80
TSF-80
Hinge Mullion.
Double

Hinges prepped on

both rabbet.

68 TSF-7
70
TSF-12
72
TSF-33
80
TSF-81
Hinge Mullion.
Single


(1) rabbet. Opposite

rabbet blank.

68 TSF-9
70
TSF-14
72
TSF-35
80
TSF-83
Strike Mullion.
Single

ASA Strike prepped

on one (1) rabbet.

Opposite rabbet blank.

68 TSF-10
70
TSF-15
72
TSF-36
80
TSF-84

(1) rabbet. ASA Strike

prepped on opposite

rabbet.

68
70
72
80
Mullion.
Blank

No hardware preps.

70 TSF-20
80
TSF-86
Double Strike Mullion shown
Door
Height
Door
Height
Double Rabbet
Single Rabbet
TSF-8
TSF-13
TSF-34
TSF-82
Notes: Specify right or left hand when ordering.
Removable mullion
A. Description: Closed frame section with double
strike and with ends notched for installation into
frame with mounting clips.
B. Nomenclature:
Description
Size
Double Rabbet Mullion

ASA
68 TSF-56
70
TSF-57
72
TSF-58
80
TSF-59
Single Rabbet Mullion

ASA
68 TSF-93
70
TSF-94
72
TSF-96
80
TSF-98
TSF No.
Door
Height
Double Rabbet
Notes:
Door
Height
Single Rabbet
1. See Parts Price List to order mounting clips.

2. Single rabbet mullions can be used with double
rabbet frames.
3. Refer to page 197 for installation details.
186
106 Square end cut corner post and

121 Weld-in and snap-in filler plates
Corner post
A. Description: Corner post with square end cutoff
B. Nomenclature:
Description
Size
TSF No.
2 Way Corner Post

1-9/16 Outside Rabbet
106
106
TSF-51
TSF-52
3 Way Corner Post

106
106
TSF-53
TSF-54
121
121
2-Way Corner Closure
3-Way Corner Closure
Filler plates: Weld-in and snap-in

A. Description: filler plate for use in open sections
with square end cutoff.
B. Nomenclature:
Double Rabbet with Stop

TSF-22
Description
Size
TSF No.
For use in F Series

frames with 5/8 Stop
121
Without Stop
121
Snap-in with 5/8 Stop
121
TSF-22
TSF-27
TSF-89
For use in MU Series

frames with 5/8 Stop
121
121
TSF-95
Single Rabbet with Stop

TSF-22
Notes:
121
1. TSF-22, 27 and 95 are designed to be welded into

throat opening of frame section.
2. TSF-89 snaps into the throat opening of the
F Series frame.
3. See Parts Price List for additional
snap-in filler clips.
121
Filler Plate without Stop

TSF-27
121
Snap-in Filler Plate with Stop

TSF-89
121
Multi-use Filler Plate with Stop

TSF-95
187
121 Head or sill sections and Flush and recessed sill sections
Head or sill sections
A. Description: open frame section with square
end cutoff.
B. Nomenclature:
Description
Size
TSF No.
Rabbetted F section
2 Face
Rabbetted F section
4 Face
Cased Open F section
2 Face
Rabbetted MU section
2 Face
121
TSF-21
121
TSF-23
121
TSF-40
121
TSF-21
Notes: F Series rabbetted and cased open sections

are available with 1 face.
Cased Opening
With 2 Face
With 2 Face
Multi-use
With 2 Face
With 4 Face
Sill sections
A. Description: open frame section with square end
cutoff.
Description
6 1/8
8 1/8 or
16 1/8
Double Rabbet
B. Nomenclature:
Size
Double Rabbet
6 1/8 Face
121
8 1/8 Face
121
16 1/8 Face
121

Single Rabbet Sill
8 1/8 Face x 1 15/16 Deep 121
TSF No.
TSF-105
TSF-104
TSF-106
12 1
TSF-108
6 1/8
8 1/8 or
16 1/8
Single Rabbet
Notes:
1. Sill sections are galvanized as standard.
2. Sill sections anchors are recommended for flush
sill when length exceeds 50.
188
12 1
Partial sidelight mullion

Partial sidelight mullion: Right and left hand
A. Description: Closed frame section with a 40 notch in the
bottom, forming an open section with the proper throat
opening. End cutoff as noted below. See chart for lengths
available.
B. Nomenclature:
Description
TSF No.

Overall
Length
Blank mullions
Stick length
TSF-132
126
70 mullion
TSF-134
84
Strike mullions
Stick length w / ASA
TSF-133
126
70 mullion w / ASA
TSF-135
84
Hinge mullions
68 Hinge mullion
TSF-138
80
70 Hinge mullion
TSF-139
84
Stick length w/ 68
TSF-140
126
spacing
Stick length w/ 70
TSF-141
126
spacing
End cutoff
Overall
Length
Square
Notched
Square
Notched
40
Notched
Notched
Square
Square
189
Screw-in glazing beads

Screw-in Bead
A. Description: 1 wide x 5/8 high x 100 long. 18 gauge
galvannealed glazing bead with square end cutoff. Beads
are dimpled for, and supplied with #8 x 1-1/4 oval head self
drilling screws.
B. Nomenclature: 3GB0080P012
Bead
Standard Bead Installation

1. Cut glazing bead to length required (Note: horizontal glazing
beads run the full width of the openings and vertical glazing
beads stop when they meet the horizontal beads).
2. Locate the bead from the stop as required. The normal
location for 1/4 glass is 3/8.
Glazing Bead
(3GB0080P012)
Self-drilling Screw
(Q-198)
3. Using the glazing bead as a template, install screws through

the pre-punched holes as required.
a. If an automatic screw gun driver is being used, the
screws will drill the necessary hole in the frame section.
b. If an automatic screw gun driver is not being used, drill
a .149 diameter hole (number 25 drill) in the frame and
install the screws.
190
Glazing Groove
3/8 (standard)
Elevations
Typical elevations
Elevation 1: Transom and side panel or light assemblies

Typical Miter Joint
(See Detail 1)
Saw Miter (Shown)

(Die Miter similar)
Optional
Butt Joint
(See Note 7)
See Detail 2
Detail 1
Typical Corner Assembly
See Detail 2
Weld along face seams

and grind smooth
See Detail 3
Weld along inside of miter and grind

smooth on outside face. Tack weld the
rabbets and soffit on inside at jambs.
For saw-mitered tack weld rabbets
and soffit on inside of jamb
For die-miter, bend interlocking
miter tabs
Detail 2
Mullion Connection
Notes:
Weld at joint
along face
and grind smooth
Transom and Side Panel/Light Assemblies are supplied in a multitude

of elevation designs and sizes. The elevation and related details shown
above are for reference.
1. The most common elevations used are with lights (windows).
Glass can be of varying thickness which must be specified.
2. Perimeter jambs and head can be supplied either factory
die mitered or saw mitered. Corner connections are usually supplied
as welded (SUA).
3. Removable transom bars (above the door opening) can be supplied
(when specified), to allow for passage of large equipment or objects
through the door opening. If required, this feature must be specified,
and the unit above the door would be a panel and not a light (glass).
4. Transom panels (above the door) are the same thickness as the
door, and can be supplied (when specified) as:
Detail 3
Sill Connection
With Transom Bar (fixed or removable) as shown above.
Without the Transom Bar (fixed or removable) for aesthetics or

functionality.
5. Removable mullions (separating double doors) can be supplied
(when specified), to allow for passage of large equipment or objects
through the door opening.
6. All joints between meeting frame members are to be welded and
finished in accordance with ANSI A250.8-1998.
7. If end jambs are specified as butt welded, frame must be installed in
butted wall applications. Additional field notching by others will be
required if the frame is installed in wrap wall applications.
Weld along seam

and grind smooth
191
Elevations
Typical elevations
Elevation 2: Partial side panel or light assemblies

Detail 4 Closed Section
(with partial side light option)
Available in F & FN-Series only.
As required
Equal to jamb depth

throat opening
Detail 4
See Note 3
Detail 5 Throat Filler Option

1 or 2 (25 or 50mm)
Tack weld along the seam
approximately 8 (203mm)
on center and grind smooth.
Fill seam as required with
filler and grind smooth.
Notes:
Partial Side Light Assemblies are supplied in a multitude of
elevation designs and sizes. The elevation and related details
shown above are for reference.
1. All notes shown on the previous page also apply to this type
of elevation.
2. Since the side lights do not extend the full height of the
mullion (which separate the door and transom area), care
must be taken in fabricating the assembly.
3. Vertical mullions (separating the door and transom areas)
must include provisions for glazing the sidelight unit, and
can be accomplished in different ways:
Closed section: this section offers the best appearance,

but must be supplied with an open frame throat to
accommodate the wall construction below the side light.
Available in F and FN Series only. See detail 4.
Throat opening filler plate: can be installed, welded

and finished to provide a closed section in the partial
sidelight area of the elevation. See detail 5.
Double frame sections: can be utilized. For these

elevations, the door frame and sidelight are one unit, but
there is a visible seam separating the units. See detail 6.
192
Detail 6 Double Frame Section Option

Tack weld along the seam
approximately 8 (203mm)
on center and grind smooth.
Fill seam as required with
filler and grind smooth.
2 or 4 (50 or 102mm)
Elevations
Typical elevations
Field joint/splice details: Typical details
Detail 7
Detail 7
Splice plate
Detail 7
Detail 8
Detail 8
Detail 8
Detail 3
Detail 3
Notes:
Field joint/splices of elevations are required when the assembly
is to large to be fabricated in one piece. Some of the reasons for
this practice are as follows:
FIELD JOINT/SPLICE DETAILS

Detail 8
Mullion Connection
Detail 7
End Jamb Connection
1. Transportation limitations
2. Handling issues related to either the jobsite or during
fabrication
3. Installation limitations
Splice sleeve
Splice
clips
193
Elevations
Typical elevations
Field joint/splice details: Corridor and room enclosures

Detail 9
Corridor and Room Enclosures
Detail 9
Detail 9
Detail 10
Detail 9
Notes:
Corridor and room enclosures are accomplished with the use
of corner posts (a frame stick component), and field joint/
splices. The following notes apply.
1. All notes shown on the previous pages also apply to this
type of elevation.
Detail 10
2. Corner posts are specially designed stick sections that allow

for the connection of two Transom and Sidelight Elevations
to be field joined to make a corner.
3. At this time, corner connections are not Fire Rated
applications.
Detail 9
Corner Post Connection
Detail 10
Sill Connection
Splice clips
Splice clips
194
Elevations
Typical elevations
Transom panels without transom bars

Notes:
1. Transom panels are shipped loose for
installation by others. Screws for attachment
are supplied by Steelcraft.
2. Transom panels are phosphatized and
finished with one coat of baked-on primer.
3. Transom panels are individually wrapped in
corrugated cardboard with wood stripping on
vertical edges of package together with metal
banding.
4. Labeled panels are available in L18 door type
only. For fire ratings and size limitations, see
the section of this manual.
16 Ga. Reinforcing
Channel spotwelded
to jamb.
3/16 Support
Angle spotwelded
to jamb.
Nominal Door
Opening
Plus 5/16
TYPICAL NON-LABEL FRAME
16 Ga. Reinforcing
Channel spotwelded
to head.
A
16 Ga. Reinforcing
spotwelded to jamb.
B
3/16 Support
Angle spotwelded
to jamb.
Nominal Door
Opening
Plus 5/16
TYPICAL LABEL FRAME
TYPICAL ELEVATION
16 Ga. Reinforcing
Channel spotwelded
to jamb.
16 Ga. Reinforcing
Channel spotwelded
to panel.
Honeycomb Core
A TYPICAL JAMB SECTION
16 Ga. Reinforcing
Channel spotwelded
to panel.
16 Ga. Reinforcing
Channel spotwelded
to head.
Honeycomb Core
Honeycomb Core
14 Ga. Flat Astragal

spotwelded to
Transom Panel.

spotwelded to
Transom Panel.
B TYPICAL NON-LABEL
SECTION
C TYPICAL LABEL
SECTION
195
Elevations
Typical elevations
Transom panels without transom bars

Installation:
16 Ga.
Reinforcing
Channel
1. Place panel in frame below channels and support angle.

2. Slide panel toward top of frame over channels until panel
bottoms are on support angle.
3. Center punch thru holes on bottom edge of panel of each
corner.
3/16
4. Drill .199 diameter hole (No. 8 drill) at center punches in

support angle.
TYPICAL CHANNEL LOCATION
5. Install No. 12-24 flat head thread cutting machine screws

to secure panel in place.
NON-LABELED TRANSOM PANEL

16 Ga. Reinforcing
Channel spotwelded
to jamb.
16 Ga. Reinforcing
Channel spotwelded
to panel.
LABELED TRANSOM PANEL

16 Ga. Channel
spotwelded to
jamb and Head.
16 Ga. Reinforcing
Channel spotwelded
to panel.
Transom Panel
Closer Reinf.
(not shown)
installed in
all label panels
Transom Panel

spotwelded to
Transom Panel.

spotwelded to
Transom Panel.
14 Ga. Plate
spotwelded to
Panel.
3/16 Support
Angle spotwelded
to jamb.
14 Ga. Plate
spotwelded to
Panel.
1/8
Panel Height
(Nom. Opening
Minus 1/8)
3/16 Support
Angle spotwelded
to jamb.
Jamb
(1) No. 12-24 Flat
Head Thread Cutting
Machine Screws.
(2) No. 12-24 Flat

Head Thread Cutting
Machine Screws.
1/8

welded on.
(1-1/2 wide)
1/8
Door
Height
196
Head
and/or
Jamb
Panel Height
(Nom. Opening
Minus 1/8)

welded on.
(1-1/2 wide)
1/8
Door
Height
Elevations
Typical elevations: Splicing head and jamb sections
Removable mullion: Cutting, notching, and installation

Sometimes it is necessary to splice jambs and/or heads to
make a long section. Steelcraft recommends the following
method of splicing. It is recommended that the splice always be
located over the center of a vertical member.
Double Rabbet
Single Rabbet
1. Install splice channel into end of one section. Allow half of

the splice channel to extend out of the section.
2. Weld the ends of the splice channel to the frame section.
3. Slide other frame section over the splice channel and weld
to the channel.
Splice Channel
4. Weld the face joint and grind smooth.
Splice Channel
Removable mullions:
Double rabbet removable mullions can be made from TSF-16 or
any intermediate strike mullion. The details shown illustrate the
cutting and notching required to make the removable mullion.
REMOVABLE MULLION INSTALLATION

Double Rabbet
Notch mullion as shown

The mullion stiffener channel must
be notched 13/16 deep at the
bottom. See detail below.
1-7/8
1-15/16
rabbet
5/8 +1/32
-0
Drill holes as shown. All other

mounting holes will be match
drilled at installation.
3/8
Sleeve
3AN0702P001
Angle Clip
3AN0703P001
Attach anchors to head and floor.
.201 dia. hole

No. 7 drill,
2 places
Attach mullions to
anchors (6 places)
3/8
13/16
15/64
5/8
5/8
Bottom Notch Detail

Detail is shown reversed
for clarity.
Single Rabbet
13/16
notch depth
Sleeve
3AN0704P001
Attach anchors to
head and floor.
Attach mullions to
anchors (8 places)
Note:
Frame must be
2 wider than a
standard frame
for a pair of
doors.
197
Elevations
198
Elevations
Installation details
Jamb anchor applications
Wire Anchor - Masonry Wall
Existing Masonry Wall Anchor

Frame is dimpled for a 3/8 - 16 flat head
machine screw in the center of the soffit.
Dimples are located approximately 30 on
center.
Wire anchor can

be used for jamb
depths from 3
thru 14-3/4.
Double Rabbet
The anchor is locked into position with the

sleeve of the anchor fitting into the soffit area
around the dimple.
Single rabbet installation similar.
Single Rabbet
Wood or Steel Stud Anchor
Lock anchor into place as shown. Locate anchors
at the top of each hinge reinforcement and the
corresponding locations of the strike side.
Steel Stud
Wood Stud
Notes:
Frames. Fire Rated Assemblies must be in accordance
with NFPA Pamphlet 80. The AHJ is the final authority
in issues related to the installation and use of installed
Fire Rated Doors.
2. Wall anchors are in accordance with the Specification
Sheets applicable to the frame series used.
3. Base (for vertical members) and Sill Anchors (for
members along the floor), must be fastened to the floor
with expansion shell, or rawl plugs and machine screws
(ram-setting, shells, plugs and ram setting is by others).
Adjust frame so the head is level, vertical members are
plumb, and tighten the adjustable base anchors.
199
Elevations
Installation details
Base anchor applications

Jamb Base Anchor
Mullion Base Anchor
Sheet Metal
Screws
Sheet Metal
Screws
1/2
Spot or tack weld the attaching plate to and flush with the
bottom of the jamb. Attach the adjustable base anchor to
the attaching plate with sheet metal screws supplied with
the anchor.
The anchor is fastened to the floor with expansion shields or
rawl plugs and machine screws or by Ram-setting (shields,
plugs and ram setting by others). Adjust frame so head is level
and tighten the adjustable base anchor screws.
Sill Section Base Anchor
Base anchors are attached to the floor at the locations required

for the mullion. Be sure anchors are located at the exact
locations of the vertical mullions. The frame is raised above the
anchor and then lowered down on to the floor over the anchor.
Corner Post Anchor (2 and 3 Way Posts)

Fastening procedure same as
mullion base anchor.
Mullion base
anchors
Anchors are recommended for sills that exceed 50 in length.

Attach the anchor to the floor following directions shown for
mullion base anchors.
Space equal to jamb

depth minus 1/8
Anchor dim.
Notes:
1. Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2001 (formerly SDI 105)
Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. Fire Rated Assemblies must be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80.
The AHJ is the final authority in issues related to the installation and use of installed Fire Rated Doors.
2. Wall anchors are in accordance with the Specification Sheets applicable to the frame series used.
3. Base (for vertical members) and Sill Anchors (for members along the floor), must be fastened to the floor with expansion shell, or
rawl plugs and machine screws (ram-setting, shells, plugs and ram setting is by others). Adjust frame so the head is level, vertical
members are plumb, and tighten the adjustable base anchors.
200
Storm resistant opening

Hurricane resistant opening............................. 203
General information.............................................203
H16 and H14 Series flush doors....................... 205
HE16 Series embossed doors........................... 209
H16 and HEF16 Series embossed doors...........211
Hurricane resistant approvals............................ 213
Tornado resistant opening systems................ 225
General information............................................. 225
PW Series flush doors......................................... 227
FP14 Series flush frames..................................... 231
Tornado resistant approvals............................. 235
Main TOC
201
Storm resistant opening
202
Storm resistant opening: Hurricane resistant opening
General information

Enhanced Hurricane Protection Area (EHPA): typically

found in educational facilities, constructed in accordance
with the State Requirements for Educational Facilities
(SREF) and Florida Building Code. EHPA requirements
include resistance to higher windload pressures and
windborne debris impacts.
Steelcraft H Series door assemblies have been tested and

meet the requirements for EHPA.
Refer to the Hurricane Resistant Approval pages of this

manual for applicable products.

All doors and frames are manufactured and supplied to
meet the dimensional standards and performance levels as
published in ANSI A250.8-2003 (SDI 100).
General information
Steelcraft doors and frames are designed for virtually all
construction requirements in commercial building applications.
Their construction, durability and flexibility have been proven in
both operation and physical testing of all types.
Storm Resistance H and HE Series

The Hurricane (H and HE Series) exterior doors are suitable
for installation in all types of building construction, but are
specifically designed to resist cyclic and static wind pressures,
and windborne debris impact loads, as prescribed by the Florida
Building Code. The continuously bonded cores and full height
mechanically interlocked edge seams provide attractive, flat
and very durable doors to the commercial construction industry.
Many options are available in this product series including edge
construction, core variations and finishes.
Approvals and Geographic applications

For up to date online Approvals and instructions to access,
go to Steelcraft.com > Support > Steelcraft > Selection, Usage,
and Approvals.

requirements.

Steelcraft storm resistant door products, the following
guidelines for base material selection can be used:
H and HE Series doors: 16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)] for

Extra Heavy Commercial and Institutional applications
having the potential of very high use.
H Series doors: 14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)] for Extra Heavy

Commercial and Institutional applications with extremely
high use.
Material Selection:
The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority in issues

related to the installation and use of any building products.
Steelcraft has conducted extensive testing on various product

configurations to meet the severe storm applications related
to coastal areas ex posed to the ravages of extreme high
windstorm systems. Inland and Coastal storm regions are
designated by FEMA and local codes. Products and approvals
fall into the following categories:
Installation
Inland Regions with less severe exposure to windstorm

damage. Tests and approvals are based on structural
uniform load methods. Several standard frame and door
constructions have been successfully tested to meet the
requirements for Inland Regions.
Wind-Borne Debris (Coastal) Regions with severe

exposure to storm damage. Tests and approvals are based
on the Florida Building Code Test Protocols for High Velocity
Hurricane Zone (HVHZ) TAS 201, TAS 202 & TAS 203.
Steelcraft H Series door constructions have been tested and
meet the requirements for Coastal Regions.
Galvannealed Steel: conforming to ASTM A924 and ASTM

A653 is standard on all H and HE Series doors.

Installation of all H and HE Series doors must conform to
corresponding Miami-Dade County Notice of Acceptance
(NOA) and/or the Florida Building Code (FBC) statewide
approval.
All Fire Rated doors must be installed in accordance with the
National Fire Protection Association Pamphlet 80 (NFPA 80),
and/or the local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
See page 205 under Design pressure ratings and hardware
configurations for online resource links to the most current
approvals.
203
204
H16 and H14 Series flush doors


Polyurethane (optional): extreme thermal performance
Mineral Board (optional): rigid, temperature rise control
Steel Stiffened (optional): welded hat section stiffeners

door edges.
4. Full Height Lock Side Reinforcement Channel ensures
structural stability and locking hardware functionality under
extreme pressure conditions.
6. 14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)] Top and Bottom Channels
provide stability and protection for the top and bottom
edges from abuse.
7. 3/8 undercut is standard on all H Series doors, to
accommodate hurricane code requirements.
About the product

The H16 and H14 Series doors have been specifically designed
and tested to meet the performance-based provisions of
the Florida Building Code (FBC) while providing architects,
designers and building owners with the broadest choices for
their specific applications.
Specifiable options include glass lights, transom and sidelights,
louvers, exit hardware, cylindrical or mortise single point locks,
as well as a variety of door core and edge construction options.
All H Series doors have been tested to protocols TAS 201, 202
and 203, indicating their ability to withstand the missile impact,
structural load and cyclic wind pressure tests prescribed by the
Codes.
Approvals, design pressure ratings

and hardware configurations
Design Pressure Ratings are based on ongoing testing for door,
frame and hardware configurations. Applications are limited to
the configurations tested.
and Approvals.

and sticking.
10. Screwed-in top caps provide additional weather protection
to exclude water and debris from exterior outswing doors.
1. Door construction for Steelcraft H Series full flush doors
3. Florida Building Code test protocols TAS 201, TAS 202 &
TAS 203.
Florida building code label

A Florida Building Code Label is applied to all H Series doors.
An optional Miami-Dade County label is also available.
Fire ratings
Steelcraft H Series doors meet fire rating requirements. They
pressure testing UL-10B and positive pressure standard UL-10C.
Steelcrafts H Series doors offer the following standard unique

1. A-60 Galvannealed steel face sheets
2. Core Systems that enhance structural integrity:
Honeycomb (Standard): 1 (25mm) cell kraft

205
H16 and H14 Series flush doors

Rigid Honeycomb Core
Standard H Series Core
Optional Steel Stiffened Core
1 (25mm) cell, 99 pound Kraft

honeycomb

contact adhesive
Honeycomb surfaces sanded for

maximum adhesion
Impregnated with phenolic resin

(resists mildew and vermin)

contact adhesive
1.8 pound (816.5g) per ft3 density slab
Assembled door is run through high

pressure pinch rollers, achieving
ultimate bond
Non-Labeled applications
Optional Polyurethane Core

contact adhesive
Stiffeners welded to inside of face

sheets
Located 6 (152.4mm) on center

Weld spacing 6 (152mm)
maximum along the full height of
each stiffener
Areas between stiffeners filled with

1 pound (453.6g) per ft3 density
fiberglass batt
Optional Mineral Fiber Board Core
TH Series 250F (121C) or

450F (232C) Temperature Rise
Hurricane door
STANDARD Edge Construction
STANDARD Rigid 14 gauge End Channel Construction

Full height mechanical interlock with adhesive

For optional caps, see Top & bottom caps on page 156
DoorApplication
application
and
usage
Door
and
Usage
Series
Steel Thickness
Opening
Usage Frequency1

H16
16 Ga (1.3 mm)
Extra Heavy Duty

H14
14 Ga (1.7 mm)
Maximum Duty

206
Extra Heavy Commercial & Institutional

applications with potential of very high use
applications with extremely high use
H16, HF16, HW16, H14, HF14, and HW14 Series doors
61L Lock Preparation
Inactive Leaf: ASA Strike

Preparation
Optional 14 Gauge Closer

Reinforcement
Optional reinforcements for surface closers are available.

Steelcraft product selection for H Series doors has been matched to SDI designations for Level and Model. Recommended minimum
frame gauge also applies to the frequency of operation of the opening.
Door
Sizes
and
ANSI
A250.8
Conversions
Door Sizes
and
ANSI
A250.8
Conversions

ANSI A250.8 - SDI 100
Series

Level
Model
Description

Edge
Construction
Options
Maximum Sizes
Single
Pair
Level 3 - Extra Heavy Duty Commercial & Institutional

H16
Full Flush
HF16 3

2 Seamless
HW16
Visible
Epoxy Filled
Welded
40 x 80 80 x 80 14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]

1219mm x 2438mm
2438mm x 2438mm
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Level 4 - Maximum Duty Commercial & Institutional

H14
Full Flush
HF14 4

2
Seamless
HW14
Visible
Epoxy Filled
Welded
40 x 80
1219mm x 2438mm
80 x 80 14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]

2438mm x 2438mm
12 Gauge [0.093 (2.3mm)]
Code Compliance
Florida Building Code test protocols TAS 201, TAS 202 & TAS 203.
A mylar Florida Building Code label is included as standard

Optional mylar Miami-Dade County label
207
H, HF, and HW Series doors

H: Standard feature includes visible edge seams with full height interlocked edges.
HF: The mechanical edge seam is filled and finished prior to applying the factory primer.
HW: The mechanical edge seam is welded and finished prior to applying the factory primer.
Standard visible seam
Optional seamless edges
H Series Visible Seam Features
HF Series Seam Filled Features

Visible edge seam

HW Series Seam Welded Features
Edge seam welded 1 (25mm) long,

2 (51mm)on center.
Glass light options (Refer to the Lights section for further details and options)
Dezigner Trim
1-1/4"
(32 mm)
Note: Glazing type and thickness

vary per job requirements.
3/4"
(19 mm)
5/8"
(16 mm)
Typical Optional Overlapping Steel Trim for Glass Over 14

to 58 or 34 to 1 Thick
Varies
*Exposed
Glass
Glass Cutting Size
Door Cutout Size
208
Note:
1. Glazing material and methods of glazing are subject
to approval by applicable authorities and may
change without notice. Refer to the applicable
product approvals.
2. Doors used in elevations must use 1/2 or 9/16
glass only per NOA.
HE16 Series embossed doors

Steelcrafts HE16 Series doors offer the following standard
unique features, which enhance long term performance and
durability:
1. A-40 Galvannealed Steel face sheets.
2. Polystyrene Core (Standard): enhances the structural
integrity of the door with enhanced thermal capabilities
door edges.
4. Full Height Lock Side Reinforcement Channel ensures
structural stability and locking hardware functionality under
extreme pressure conditions.
7. 3/8 undercut is standard on all H Series doors, to
accommodate hurricane code requirements.
About the product

The HE16 Series embossed panel doors have been specifically
designed and tested to meet the performance-based provisions
of the Florida Building Code (FBC) while providing architects,
designers and building owners with the broadest choices for
their specific applications.

and sticking.
9. Screwed-in top caps provide additional weather protection
to exclude water and debris from exterior outswing doors.
Specifiable options to meet application, specification and

performance requirements include mechanical and electrical
hardware preparations for exit hardware, cylindrical or
mortise single point locks and double locks. No glass lights are
allowable.
All HE16 Series doors have been tested to protocols TAS

201, 202 and 203, indicating their ability to withstand the
missile impact, structural load and cyclic wind pressure tests
prescribed by the Codes.

Design pressure ratings

and hardware configurations
Design Pressure Ratings are based on ongoing testing for door,
frame and hardware configurations. Applications are limited
to the configurations tested. For up to date information, please
reference the Steelcraft website at http://www.steelcraft.com
Online resources to access the most current hurricane resistant
approvals:
Miami-Dade: http://www.miamidade.gov/building/
pc-search_app.asp
Florida Building Code: https://floridabuilding.org/pr/

pr_app_srch.aspx
3. Door construction for the HE16 Series embossed panel

doors meets ANSI A117.1-1998 (ADA) requirements for
minimum 10 (254mm) bottom rail height measured from
the floor.
4. Florida Building Code test protocols TAS 201, TAS 202 &
TAS 203.
Florida building code label

A Florida Building Code Label is applied to all H Series doors.
An optional Miami-Dade County label is also available.
Fire ratings
Steelcraft HE16 Series doors meet fire rating requirements.

1. Door construction for Steelcraft HE16 Series embossed

panel doors meets the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2003
(SDI 100).
They are listed for installations requiring compliance to both

neutral pressure testing UL-10B and positive pressure standard
UL-10C.
209
HE16 Series embossed doors
Insulated Core

Preferred for extreme temperature variations
Assembled door is run through high pressure pinch rollers
Standard Edge Construction
Standard Rigid 14 gauge End Channel Construction


For optional caps, see Top & bottom caps on page 156
DoorApplication
application
and
usage
Door
and
Usage
Series
Steel Thickness
Opening
Usage Frequency1

HE16
16 Ga (1.3 mm)
Extra Heavy Duty

210

applications with potential of very high use
HE16 and HEF16 Series embossed doors
Standard Mortise Hinge Prep

4-1/2 x .134 or 4-1/2 x .180
61L Lock Preparation
Inactive Leaf:
ASA Strike Preparation
and Astragal
Optional 14 Gauge
[0.067 (1.7mm)]
weight hinges to 4-1/2 (114mm) x .180 (4.7mm) heavy weight hinges. Optional hinge preparation for
5 (127mm) x .146 (3.7mm) standard weight hinges or for 5 (127mm) x .190 (4.8mm) heavy weight hinges is also available.
Optional reinforcements for surface closers are available.
SDI Conversion Chart

Steelcraft product selection for HE Series doors has been matched to SDI designations for Level and Model. Recommended minimum
frame gauge also applies to the frequency of operation of the opening.
Door
sizesand
and
ANSI
A250.8
conversions
Door Sizes
ANSI
A250.8
Conversions

Series
ANSI A250.8 - SDI 100

Level
Model
Description

Edge
Construction
Options
Maximum Sizes
Single
Pair
Level 3 - Extra Heavy Duty Commercial & Institutional
HE16
HEF16
Full Flush
Visible
Seamless
Epoxy Filled
30 x 80 60 x 80 14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]

914mm x 2438mm
1829mm x 2438mm
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Code Compliance
Florida Building Code test protocols TAS 201, TAS 202 & TAS 203.
A mylar Florida Building Code label is included as standard

Optional mylar Miami-Dade County label
211
HE16 and HEF16 Series embossed doors

H: Standard feature includes visible edge seams with full height interlocked edges.
HF: the mechanical edge seam is filled and finished prior to applying the factory primer.
Standard visible seam
Optional seamless edges
HE Series Visible Seam Features
HEF Series Seam Filled Features

Visible edge seam
212

Hurricane resistant approvals
Inland regions: Tested in accordance with ASTM E-330

Flush doors: Locking applications
Maximum Door Size:
Hardware Application:
Singles: 40 x 80
Pairs:
80 x 80
Door Design: Flush doors only
Single Door

Active: Cylindrical or Mortise locks

Inactive: IVES Surface or
Flush Bolts
Double Door
LOCK Series
LOCK
Schlage
TYPE
Mechanical
Electronic
Falcon
Cylindrical
Florida
Approval
Design
Pressure
Door
Series
(Bored)
ND, AL,
A, S
5100
T, B, X,
Z, S, H

FL10356-R4
+/- 50 PSF
L, B, CE, SL, T
Mortise

L9000
L9400
5500
T, B, X,
Z, S, H

FL10356-R4
+/- 50 PSF
L, B, CE, SL, T
Flush doors: Exit alarm applications
EMERGENCY EXIT ONLY
Maximum Door Size:
Singles: 40 x 80
2670 GUARD-X Alarm Lock
Pairs are not available
ALARMWILLSOUND
Single Door Only

EXIT
TYPE
Alarm
EXIT Series
Monarch
Von Duprin
2670 GUARD-X
No
Florida
Approval
Design
Pressure
FL10356-R4
+ 55 PSF
L, B,
- 40 PSF
CE, SL, T
Alarm Lock
Door
Series
Doors with glass lights: Exit alarm applications
EMERGENCY EXIT ONLY

ALARMWILLSOUND
EMERGENCY EXIT ONLY
Maximum Door Size:
Singles: 40 x 80
2670 GUARD-X Alarm LockV
Door Design: V or N3, N4 and N5 glass designs only
ALARMWILLSOUND
Single Door Only

EXIT
TYPE
Alarm
EXIT Series
Monarch
Von Duprin
2670 GUARD-X
No
Florida
Approval
Design
Pressure
FL10356-R4
+ 55 PSF
L, B,
- 40 PSF
CE, SL, T
Alarm Lock
Door
Series
Note: See page 205 or page 209 for online resource links to access the most current approvals.
213
Flush doors: Exit device applications (tested in accordance

with ASTM E-330)
Maximum Door Size:
Singles: 40 x 80
Pairs:
Exit Device As Noted Below
80 x 80
Single Door

EXIT
TYPE
Double Door
Von Duprin
RIM

33A,
55, 88
22,
99/98
XIT Series
E
Monarch

Falcon
Florida
Approval
Design
Pressure
Door
Series
17-R, 18-R

+/- 50 PSF
19-R, XX-R

No
FL10356-R4 L, B, CE, SL, T
No
+50/-40 PSF
SVR
2227, 3327A,

+50/-40 PSF
No No
3527A, 8827

8827, 9927
L, B, CE, SL, T
FL10356-R4

No

17-V, 18-V,

24-V, 25-V
+/- 50 PSF

19-V, XX-V
3347A, 3547A,
No No

9447, 9847, 9947

CVR

No

5547
+/- 50 PSF
17-C, 18-C,

FL10356-R4 L, B, CE, SL, T
24-C, 25-C
+/- 60 PSF
19-C, XX-C
No No

3 POINT
9957
No
+50/-40 PSF

L, B, CE, SL, T
FL10356-R4
No

17-TPL,
No

+/- 50 PSF

XX-TPL

Mortise
Single Door
Only

8875, 9475
No
No
+ 50/ -45 PSF
9575, 9875, 9975

L, B, CE, SL, T
FL10356-R4
No
17M, 18M, XX-M
24-M, 25-M +/- 50 PSF

214
Inland regions: Tested in accordance with ASTM E-330

Doors with glass lights: Locking applications
Maximum Door Size:
Singles: 40 x 80

Pairs: 80 x 80
Flush Bolts
Door Design: FG, FG2, FG3, G,V, N, N3, N4, LNL glass designs only
Single Door
Approved Glass: Refer to the appropriate Florida Approval for glass and
glazing types
Double Door

LOCK Series

LOCK
Schlage

TYPE
Mechanical
Electronic
Falcon
Cylindrical
(Bored)
Mortise

ND, AL,
A, S
No
T, B, X,
Z, S, H
Florida
Approval
Design
Pressure
Door
Series

FL10356-R4
+50 / -40 PSF
L, B, CE, SL, T
+50 / -40 PSF
L, B, CE, SL, T
L9000/9400

No M
FL10356-R4
LV9000/9400
Doors with glass lights: Exit device applications

Maximum Door Size:
Singles: 40 x 80
Pairs:
RIM Exit Devices as noted below
80 x 80
Approved Glass: Refer to the appropriate Florida Approval for glass and
glazing types
Single Door

EXIT
TYPE

RIM
Double Door
EXIT Series

Monarch
Falcon
Von Duprin
33A,
55, 88
22,
99/98
Florida
Approval
17-R, 18-R
19-R, XX-R
No
Design
Pressure
Door
Series
+/- 50 PSF
FL10356-R4 L, B, CE, SL, T
No
+50/-40 PSF
SVR
2227, 3327A,

No No
+50/-40 PSF
3527A, 8827

8827, 9927
L, B, CE, SL, T
FL10356-R4

No
17-V, 18-V,
24-V, 25-V

+/- 50 PSF

19-V, XX-V

CVR

3347A, 3547A,
No No

9447, 9847, 9947

No

5547
+/- 50 PSF
17-C, 18-C,
24-C, 25-C
FL10356-R4 L, B, CE, SL, T
+/- 60 PSF
19-C, XX-C
No No

3 POINT
9957
No
+50/-40 PSF

FL10356-R4 L, B, CE, SL, T
No

17-TPL,
No

+/- 50 PSF

XX-TPL

Mortise
Single Door
Only

8875, 9475
No
No
+ 50/-45 PSF
9575, 9875, 9975

L, B, CE, SL, T
FL10356-R4
No
17M, 18M, XX-M
24-M, 25-M
+/- 50 PSF
215
Wind-born debris (coastal) regions

Tested in accordance with Florida Building Code test:
Protocols (TAS 201, TAS 202 & TAS 203)

Large missile impact and ASTM E-330 applications
Flush doors: Locking applications

Maximum Door Size:
Singles: 40 x 80
Pairs:
80 x 80

Inactive: IVES Surface (360)
Single Door
LOCK TYPE
Double Door
LOCK Series
Schlage*
Cylindrical
(Bored)
Mortise
*
Falcon
Mechanical
Electronic
ND*
5100
ND
No
No
AL
No
No
L9400
5500
Miami-Dade
Florida
NOA
Approval
Single Door
Single Door
15-0826.23
FL12400.3
Double Door
Double Door
15-0930.05
FL12400.1
Design Pressure
Door Series
+/- 75 PSF
H, HE
+/- 65 PSF
+/- 55 PSF
+/- 75 PSF
Exp. 05/05/17
requires a 3/4 projection latch
Flush doors: Exit alarm applications

Maximum Door Size:
Singles: 40 x 80
2670 GUARD-X Alarm Lock
EMERGENCY EXIT ONLY

ALARMWILLSOUND
Single Door Only

EXIT TYPE
Alarm
EXIT Series
Von Duprin
Monarch
2670 GUARD-X
No
Alarm Lock
Miami-Dade NOA
Florida Approval
Design Pressure
Door Series
15-0826.23
FL12400.3
+/- 55 PSF
H, HE
05/05/17
216


Flush doors: Exit device applications

Maximum Door Size:
Singles: 40 x 80
Pairs:
Exit device as noted below
80 x 80
Single Door
EXIT TYPE
RIM
Double Door
EXIT Series
NOA
Von Duprin
Monarch
Falcon
99, 98
DL 18-R
No
RIM
No
SVR
9927
25-V
CVR
9947-F
25-C
3-POINT
9957
No
Mortise Single
8875 & 98/9975
No
18M
25R
Miami-Dade
Flroida Pressure
Approval
Single Door
Single Door
15-0826.23
FL12400.3
Double Door
Double Door
15-0930.05
FL12400.1
Exp. 05/05/2017
Design Door
Series
+/- 70 PSF
H, HE
+70 /- 55 PSF
+/- 70 PSF
+/- 70 PSF
+/- 70 PSF
25-M
+/- 70 PSF
Door Only
Enhanced Wind-Born Debris (Coastal) Regions
RIM
XP98/99
No
No
+/- 100 PSF
Single Door
Single Door
15-0826.23
FL12400.3
Double Door
Double Door
Infiltration
15-0930.05
FL12400.1
+/- 75 PSF
Single and
Single and
+/- 150 PSF
Double Door
Double Door
15-0930.03
FL124022-R3
H, HE
With Water
Exp. 05/05/17
SVR
WS98/9927
No
No
Exp. 05/05/20
With Water
Infiltration
+/- 75 PSF
217

Maximum Door Size:
Singles: 30 x 70
Cylindrical or Mortise locks
Approved Glass: Refer to the appropriate Florida Approval for glass and glazing types
Single Door
LOCK TYPE
Cylindrical (Bored)
Mortise
LOCK Series
Schlage*
Mechanical
Electronic
D/ND/AD
5100, CO
L9000/9400
Falcon
T
5500, AD
Florida
Design
NOA
Approval
Pressure
Single Door
FL12400.4
+/- 75 PSF
Door Series
H, HE
15-0826.22
Exp. 05/05/17
LV9000/9400
*
Miami-Dade
Doors with glass lights: Locking applications

Maximum Door Size:
Singles: 40 x 80
Pairs:
80 x 80

Inactive: IVES Surface Bolts (360)
Door Design: FG, FG2, FG3, G, V, N, N3, N4, LNL glass designs only
Single Door
Double Door
LOCK TYPE
LOCK Series
Schlage*
Mechanical
Miami-Dade NOA
Electronic
Falcon
Cylindrical (Bored)
D/ND/AD
5100, CO
Mortise
L9000/9400
5500, AD
Single Door 15-0826.22

Double Door 15-0930.04
Design
Approval
Pressure
Single Door
+/- 75 PSF
Door Series
H, HE
FL12400.4
Double Door
Exp. 05/05/17
LV9000/9400
Florida
FL12400.2
Doors with glass lights: Exit alarm applications

Maximum Door Size:
Singles: 40 x 80
2670 Guard-X Alarm Lock
Door Design: V, N3, N4, N5 glass designs only

Single Door
EXIT TYPE
Alarm
EXIT Series
Miami-Dade NOA
Von Duprin
Monarch
2670 GUARD-X
No
Alarm Lock
Florida
Design
Approval
Pressure
Door Series
Single Door 15-0826.22
Single Door
+/- 55 PSF
Exp. 05/05/17
FL12400.4
H, HE
218


Maximum Door Size:
Singles: 40 x 80
Pairs:
80 x 80
Door Design: V, N3, N4, N5 Glass Designs only

Single Door
EXIT TYPE
RIM
Double Door
EXIT Series
Von Duprin
Falcon
XP98/99(F)
No
Miami-Dade NOA
Florida Approval
Design Pressure
Door Series
Single Door
Single Door
+/- 100 PSF
H, HE
15-0826.22
FL12400.4
Exp. 05/05/17
RIM
XP98/99(F)
No
Double Door
Double Door
FL12400.2
+/- 90 PSF
15-0930.04
Exp. 05/05/17

Maximum Door Size:
Singles: 30 x 70
Pairs:
60 x 70
Door Design: FG, FG2, FG3, G, V, N, N3, N4, LNL

Single Door
Double Door
EXIT TYPE
EXIT Series
RIM
Von Duprin
Falcon
98/99(F)
No
88-F
SVR
98/9927(F)
(F)25-V
CVR
98/9947(F)
F-25-C
Miami-Dade NOA
Florida Approval
Design Pressure
Door Series
Single Door
Single Door
+/- 60 PSF
H, HE
15-0826.22
FL12400.4
Double Door
Double Door
15-0930.04
FL12400.2
Exp. 05/05/17
33/3547(F)
3-Point
98/9957(F)
No
219


Maximum Door Size:

Singles: 40 x 80
Pairs:
80 x 80
Door Design: FG, FG2, FG3, G, V, N, N3, N4, LNL

Single Door
EXIT TYPE
Double Door
EXIT Series
Von Duprin
Falcon
RIM
98/99(F)
No
3-Point
98/9927(F)
No
Miami-Dade NOA
Florida Approval
Design Pressure
Door Series
Single Door
Single Door
+/- 50 PSF
H, HE
15-0826.22
FL12400.4
Double Door
Double Door
15-0930.04
FL12400.2
Exp. 05/05/17
220

Doors with louvers: Locking applications

Maximum Door Size:
Singles: 40 x 80
Pairs:
80 x 80

Flush Bolts
Door Design: Louvered Doors Only
Single Door
Single Door
LOCK TYPE
Double Door
Double Door
LOCK Series
Miami-Dade
Florida
Design
Schlage*
Mechanical
NOA
Approval
Pressure
Electronic
Cylindrical (Bored)
D/ND
No
Single and
Single and
+/- 60 PSF
Mortise
L9000/9400
Double Door
Double Door
15-0427.03
FL1591-R5
Falcon
T
M
LV9000/9400
Door Series
H, HE
Exp. 11/13/18
* Fire louver, max opening is 24 x 24 for 60 psf rating.
Doors with louvers: Deadlocking applications

Maximum Door Size:
Singles: 40 x 80
Active: Deadlock
Door Design: Louvered Doors Only
Single Door
Single Door
LOCK TYPE
Deadlock
LOCK Series
Schlage*
Mechanical
Electronic
B600, B700,
No
B800
Falcon
D100, D200
Miami-Dade
Florida
Design
NOA
Approval
Pressure
15-0427.03
FL1591-R5
+/- 60 PSF
Door Series
H, HE
Exp. 11/13/18
221

Transom and side lights: Glass doors: Exit device applications

Maximum Overall Frame
Size:

108 x 96
Maximum Door Size:

Doubles: 60 x 70

Von Duprin Exit Devices as Noted

Below
Singles: 30 x 70
Door Design: Glass doors only FG, FG2, FG3

Approved Glass: Refer to the appropriate Florida Approval for glass and glazing
types
Single or Double Door

Single or Double Door
EXIT TYPE
RIM
EXIT Series
Von Duprin
Monarch
99, 88
No
SVR
9927
CVR
9947-F, 3347F
Miami-Dade NOA
Florida Approval
Design Pressure
Door Series
15-0930.06
FL1592-R5
+/- 60 PSF
H, HE
Exp. 05/05/17
Borrowed light elevations

Maximum Door Size:

148 x 102
Door Design: FG, FG2, FG3, G, V, N, N3, N4, LNL glass designs only
Approved Glass: Refer to the appropriate NOA or Florida Approval for glass and
glazing types
Miami-Dade NOA
Florida Approval
Design Pressure
Missile Impact
15-1102.13
FL4622-R6
+/- 60 PSF
YES
Exp. 06/30/17
* When max height of 102 is designed the max width can not exceed 98. If width exceeds 98 then height cannot exceed 82.
222
Extreme exposure: Wind-born debris regions


Flush doors: locking applications

Maximum Door Size:
Singles: 30 x 70
Mortise locks
Single Door
LOCK TYPE
Mortise
LOCK Series
Schlage*
Mechanical
Electronic
L9400
No
Falcon
M
Miami-Dade
Florida
Design
NOA
Approval
Pressure
In-Swing
In-Swing and
+/- 170 PSF
15-0427.04
Out-Swing
Stainless Steel
FL-3905-R6
Strike
Out-Swing
15-0427.05
+/- 120 PSF
Exp. 02/24/17
Standard
Door Series
H, HE
Strike
223
224
Storm resistant opening: Tornado resistant opening systems
General information

Set-Up and Welded (SUA): Prior to arriving at the jobsite,

the 3-sided frame (with factory miters) is assembled
(at the distributors fabrication location, or by Steelcraft).
The miters are welded (in accordance with
ANSI A250.8-2003), finished and supplied to the jobsite
ready for installation. SUA frames are shipped to the jobsite
with temporary shipping bars attached.

All doors and frames are manufactured and supplied to
meet the dimensional standards and performance levels as
published in ANSI A250.8-2003 (SDI 100).
requirements.
General information
The Paladin Series door systems are specifically designed
and tested to conform to the Federal Emergency Management
Agency (FEMA) 320 and 361 guidelines and ANSI ICC500
standards providing security and safety for tornado shelters
and severe storm areas of refuge.
The PW14 Paladin Series doors include unique internal steel
stiffeners which are welded to the face sheets. The full height
mechanically interlocked edge seams and rigid end closures are
welded and provide attractive and very durable doors.
The FP14 Paladin Series frames are designed for installation
in either interior or exterior locations as a part of the wall
framing process. Three sided steel frames are furnished in three
pieces (two jambs and a head) which are anchored to the wall
systems.
Approvals
and Approvals.
How are frames supplied

The connecting corners of the 3-piece frame include precision
factory die miters and interlocking tabs and corner clips.
The corner miters are specially designed to insure a tight closed
corner connection when installed properly. There are two
methods of furnishing 3-sided frames to the jobsite:
Knock Down (KD): Frames are supplied in 3 pieces for

assembly prior to installation at the jobsite by the installing
contractor.

Steelcraft Storm Resistance door and frame products, the
following guidelines for base material selection can be used:
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)] for Extra Heavy Commercial

Material Selection: in addition to the thickness of base

available from Steelcraft:
Galvannealed Steel: conforming to ASTM A924 and ASTM

A653 recommended for exterior opening or interior openings
with high humidity.
Installation
Installation of Paladin Systems must conform to
corresponding UL opening requirements, in compliance with
FEMA 361 and ANSI ICC500.
All Fire Rated doors must be installed in accordance with the
National Fire Protection Association Pamphlet 80 (NFPA 80),
and/or the local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
Note: The Paladin PW14 Series flush doors and FP14 Frame
must be installed as a system.
See page 225 under Design criteria and hardware
configurations for online resource links to the most current
approvals.
225
226
PW Series flush doors

System features and benefits
DOOR: PW14 Paladin Series Flush Door:
About the product
1.
Steel Stiffened core construction with 18 Gauge (0.042)

stiffeners welded to each face sheet.
2.
Full Height, Epoxy Filled Mechanical Interlock Edges at

lock and hinge edges with edge seams welded, filled and
ground smooth provide structural support and stability the
full height of the door.
3.
Full Height Lock Side Reinforcement Channel ensures

structural stability under extreme pressure conditions.
4.
Universal Hinge Preparations (patented) allow for easy

field conversion from standard weight .134 (3.3mm)
5.
14 Gauge (0.067) Inverted Top and Bottom Channels

with additional 12 Gauge (0.093) flush channel top cap.
6.
3/4 undercut is standard on all PW Series doors to

accommodate a typical 1/2 ADA threshold resulting in a
required 1/8-1/4 gap between door bottom and threshold.
A weather seal must be used in the door undercut where
exposed to weather. Bottom bolt must be adjusted for 5/8
engagement into the bottom latch which must be
mortared into the slab.
The Paladin PW14 Series Flush doors and FP14 Frame have
been specifically designed, tested and approved to withstand
extreme wind-load and flying missile impact. Unique
engineered designs combined with the durability of superior
corrosive resistant steel make Steelcraft PW14 Paladin Series
Flush doors an excellent solution for added building protection
from severe weather.
Specifiable options to meet application, specification and
performance requirements include mechanical and electrical
hardware preparations for exit hardware. No glass lights
are allowed.
The PW14 Paladin Door and FP14 Frame System has been
designed and tested to address the requirements of FEMA
361/320 guidelines and ANSI ICC500 standards to protect the
general public from the extreme effects of tornados.
For compliance with the standards, the PW14 Paladin Door
and FP14 Frame must be supplied as a system.
Approvals, design criteria and

hardware configurations
Paladin Systems offer a range of hardware applications based
on ongoing testing for door, frame and hardware configurations.
Applications are limited to the configurations tested.
and Approvals.
The Authority Having Jurisdiction is the final authority in
issues related to the installation and use of any building
products.
Provide a different door undercut if using other than 1/2

threshold or added flooring.
7.
Beveled Hinge and Lock Edges allow for tighter

installation tolerances, ensure easier operation and
eliminate binding and sticking.
8.
Factory Applied Baked-On Rust Inhibiting Primer paint in

9.
Standard A-60 Galvannealed Steel face sheets for

superior corrosion resistance on exterior openings
1.
Door construction for Steelcraft PW14 Paladin Series

Flush doors meets the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2003
(SDI 100).
2.
Hardware preparations and reinforcements are in

FEMA compliance label

Factory Label is applied to all PW14 Paladin Series Flush doors
and FP14 Frame System.
Fire ratings
Steelcraft PW14 Paladin Series Flush doors meet the broadest
fire rating requirements. They are listed for installations
requiring compliance to both neutral pressure testing UL-10B
and positive pressure standard UL-10C.
227

Lock Side
Reinforcement Channel
12 gauge [0.093 (2.3 mm)]
Steel Stiffener
18 gauge [0.042 (1.0 mm)]
Polystyrene
Batting
Standard PW14 Paladin series core
18 gauge (0.042) Galvannealed Steel Stiffeners welded to

each face sheet
1 pound per ft3 density insulation inserted between the steel

stiffeners
12 gauge (0.093) reinforcement channel at the lock edge

Standard 12 gauge [0.093 (2.3 mm)]
Galvannealed Top Channel
Welded to inverted
14 gauge [0.067 (1.7 mm)]
Door Top Channel
Premium edge construction: STANDARD
Rigid End Channel Construction: STANDARD
Top and bottom edges are closed with inverted 14 gauge (0.067)
welded channels.
Top channel includes an additional 12 gauge (0.093) flush top channel.

Seamless welded edge seam standard
Lock edge with 12 gauge (0.093) channel
Door
application
and
usage
Door Application
and
Usage
Series
PW14
Steel Thickness
14 Ga (1.7 mm)
Opening
Usage Frequency
Interior - Galvannealed Steel
Maximum Duty
Tornado resistance in accordance with
FEMA 361 and ANSI ICC500 standards
Door
sizesand
and
ANSI
A250.8
conversions
Door Sizes
ANSI
A250.8
Conversions

Series

ANSI A250.8 - SDI 100
Edge
Construction
Level
Model
Description

Options
PW14
Not Applicable
Welded
Maximum Sizes
Single
Pair
40 x 90
80 x 90
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7 mm)]
1219 mm x 3150 mm 2438 mm x 3150 mm
228

4-1/2 (14mm) x .134 (3.3mm)
or x .180 (4.7mm) or Optional
5 (127mm) x .146 (3.7mm)
or x .190 (4.8mm)
Inactive Leaf:
ASA Strike Preparation and Astragal
Standard 14 Gauge
[0.067 (1.7mm)]
Hardware configurations that are compliant with FEMA 361 are acceptable for use with the Paladin System. Mounting tabs for
the ASA 4-7/8 (124mm) mortise strike are attached to the door edge for direct mounting; the astragal is cut-out only for the flush
mounting of the strike to the door. There are no tabs attached to the astragal.
Reinforcements for surface Closers are furnished as standard. Reinforcements for Surface Bolts are available.
Meeting Edge Details for Pairs of PW14 Paladin Series doors

Hardware
Backset
Inactive Leaf
with ASA Strike
3/32 (2.4mm)
Without Astragal
Active Leaf
9/64 (3.6mm)
3/16 (4.8mm)
Z Astragal
Code Compliance
FEMA 361/320 guidelines and ANSI ICC500 standards
To protect the general public from extreme effects of tornados

A mylar Paladin label is included as standard
229
230
FP14 Series flush frames

Steelcraft FP14 Paladin Series flush frames offer the following
unique features which enhance long term functionality and
durability:
1. 14 Gauge A60 galvannealed steel for superior corrosion
resistance on exterior openings.
2. Die-mitered corner connections at the head and jamb.
Standard corners insure attractive, tight and closed miters.
About the product
6. Factory applied baked on rust inhibiting
The FP14 Paladin Series 3 Sided flush frames are designed

to meet requirements of FEMA 361/320 guidelines and
ANSI ICC500 standards to protect the general public from
the extreme effects of tornados. These frames are available
in 14 gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)] only. They are installed in
prior to installation or SUA (set-up and welded) for installation
as a pre-welded unit. All FP14 Paladin Series frames include
the ICC500 / FEMA 361/320 Label.
Approvals, design criteria and

hardware configurations
Paladin Systems offer a range of hardware applications based
on ongoing testing for door, frame and hardware configurations.
Applications are limited to the configurations tested.
and Approvals.
1. Overall frame construction for the Steelcraft FP14 Paladin
Series flush frames meets the requirements of ANSI
A250.8-2003 (SDI -100).
Fire ratings
The FP14 Paladin Series flush frames meet fire rating
compliance to both neutral pressure testing UL 10B and positive
pressure standard UL 10C. Refer to the Fire Rated Section of
this manual for particular listings.
Applications
FP14 Paladin Series flush frames are typically installed in wall

FrameApplications
applications
Frame
Profile
Steel Thickness
Wall Construction
Typical Wall Anchors
FP14
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
Masonry
Wire Masonry
Existing Masonry *
Bolted Through Soffit
* Note: Frames in existing masonry wall constructions are not required to be grouted.
231

Elevation
2
(50 mm)
2
(50 mm)

2
(50 mm)
*1/2 (13 mm)

1-9/16
(40 mm)
Standard 14 gauge
[0.067 (1.7mm)]
closer reinforcement
9-3/4
(248 mm)
Throat
Opening
HINGE
Varies
Jamb
Depth
1-15/16
(49 mm)
Equal
*1/2 (13 mm)
5/8 (16 mm)

Finished
Opening
Height
2
(50 mm)
HINGE
Opening Width
STRIKE
3 4-5/16
(1024 mm)
Equal
Note: FP14 Paladin Series Frame are available

as double rabbet only.
HINGE
10-3/8
(264 mm)
Frame
sizing
options
Frame Sizing
Options

Maximum Opening Size

Series
Single
Pair

Jamb Depth Availability
(Profile)
Single Rabbet
Double Rabbet
Min Max Min Max
Standard Profile Dimensions

(Variations Available)
Face
Stop
Returns
Corners
Standard

Die

Mitered

with four (4)
FP14
40 x 90 80 x 90
N/A
5-3/4 10-3/4 2
5/8 1/2 *
concealed
(1219mm x 3150mm) (2438mm x 3150mm)
(146mm) (274mm) (51mm) (16mm)
(13mm)
tabs
interlocking

head and

jambs
n/a = not available
232
* except 5-3/4 (146mm) depth, which is 7/16 (11mm)

4-1/2 Standard
(114mm)
5 Optional
(127mm)
KD Corner Detail
Welded Corner
Optional 4 (102mm)
Face Head Detail
Silencer Prep
4-7/8
(124mm)
General notes

increments.
2. All FP Paladin Series Frames are supplied standard with
masonry wire or lock-in jamb anchors and adjustable base
anchors. Anchors are designed for maximum wall/frame
engaugement and installation flexibility.
3. FP Paladin Series Frames are to be installed as part of the
framing sequence.
4. All frames are supplied with a factory applied baked-on
primer for ultimate field paint adhesion.
5. Steelcraft provides Galvannealed steel for both interior
and exterior applications.
Adhesive
bumper
available
for field
installed
Door Sizes
and ANSI A250.8 conversions
Frame
Options

Series

Frame Profile

Single
Rabbet
Double
Rabbet
Corner Connections
HD
SUA
(Set)
(Knock-Down)
(Up and Welded)
Single
Double
Single
Double
Rabbet
Rabbet
Rabbet
Rabbet
Available when
Typically for walls

FP14
N/A
4-3/4 (121mm)
specified, and in
4 tabs
N/A
per factory
thick or greater
N/A
accordance with
ANSI A250.8-2003
die-miter
(SDI 100).
Anchoring systems
See Anchoring systems section
in this manual for:
Removable Mullion for use

with 3-Point Exit Device or
Multi-Point Deadlock
Top Sleeve
(Attached to the
Frame Head)
4 (182mm) Heads
Die-mitered for use
with 2 (51mm) face
double rabbet jambs.
Available when
specified for KD or
SUA applications.
Top Attaching Bracket

(Attached to the
Frame Head)
Wire masonry anchors

Existing wall anchors
Adjustable base anchors
Floor Sleeve
Floor Bracket
Series
FP14
Steel Type
Building Type
Non-Galvanneal
Institutional and
Galvannealed
Commercial
Opening
KD4 Corner
SUA Corner
Mainly Interior
Exterior if
Specified
Applications
Tornado Shelters in accordance with
FEMA 361 or Safe Room
233
234
Tornado resistant approvals
Openings with Von Duprin and Schlage hardware
The Paladin Series door system (PW14 Series doors and

FP14 Series frames) are available in compliance with
FEMA 361 and ANSI ICC500 with factory attached UL listed or
approved opening labels in the configurations shown below.
Notes:
1. Steelcrafts Paladin Series door system is tested as a
complete door frame and hardware system.
Single Door Applications:

1. Maximum Door Opening Size = 40 wide x 80 high
2. Von Duprin 237 & WS98/9927 (two point latch)
Door, frame and anchors must be ordered

from Steelcraft
Latching hardware must be Von Duprin or Schlage
2. When specified, UL fire door labels are factory attached

stating listings in accordance with UL10C Fire Resistance
Ratings in the configurations shown below:
3. Schlage LM9300 (three point latch)
4. Von Duprin WS98/9957 (three point latch)
Double Door Applications:

Double out swing
2. Von Duprin 237 & WS98/9927 (two point latch)
3. Schlage LM9300 (three point latch)
Inactive must use IVES SB360 surface bolts
Single out swing
Von Duprin Surface WS98/9927

2 point locking active and inactive

Von Duprin Surface WS98/9927
2 point locking
4080 max opening
Not fire rated
8080 max. opening

Rating 90 min.
Not shown 237, 2 point locking
active and inactive (Lever by lever)
Pair in swing or outswing
Not shown 237 (Lever)
Single in swing or outswing

Inactive
Active
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Active
Active
Active
Concealed: Schlage LM9300
Concealed: Schlage LM9300

Rating 3 hours
3 point locking
4080 max opening
3 point locking
Rating 3 hours
8080 max opening

Inactive leaf must use IVES SB360 surface
bolts with or without astragal
235
Openings with Securitech hardware

FEMA 361 and ANSI ICC500 with factory attached labels
in the configurations shown below.
Notes:
Single Door Applications:

2. Hardware: 5300, 7300 or 8300 Series devices
Single in swing or out swing
Concealed:
Securitech: #5300
or #7300
3 point locking
Not fire rated
Door, frame and anchors must be ordered from

Steelcraft
Exit device hardware must be Securitech, see hardware

options below.

Concealed:
Securitech: #5300
or #7300
3 point locking
Not fire rated
Single out swing
Surface:
Securitech: #5300
3 point locking
Not fire rated
Surface:
Securitech:
#8300
3 point locking
Fire rated: 3 hour:
4080 Max.
Single out swing only
Surface:
Securitech:
#8200SH
2 point locking
Not fire rated
236
Concealed:
Securitech: #5300
or #7300
with 3 point locking
Not fire rated
Securitech: #8300
3 point locking
Fire rated: 3 hour:
4080 Max.
Concealed:
Securitech:
#7300
3 point locking
Not fire rated
Notes:



2. Hardware: 5300, 7300 or 8300 Series devices with
IVES model # 360 surface bolt

Steelcraft

options below.

Double out swing: 3 point locks with astragal
Inactive
Active
Inactive
Concealed:
Active: Securitech # 5300, 7300
or 8300
3 point locking
Inactive: IVES # SB360
Not fire rated
Inactive
Active
Surface:
Active: Securitech
# 8200
2 point locking
Not fire rated
Active
Surface:
Active: Securitech # 5300,
or 8300
3 point locking
Not fire rated
Inactive
Active
Surface:
Active: Securitech # 8300
2 point locking
Not fire rated
Fire rated: 3 hour: 8080 Max
Inactive
Active
Surface:
Active: Securitech # 8200
2 point locking
Not fire rated
237

Notes:

2. Hardware: 5300, 7300 or 8300 Series devices IVES
model # 360 surface bolt.

Steelcraft

options below.

Double out swing: with center mullion
Active
Active
Concealed:
Active & inactive:
Securitech # 7300 or 8300
3 point locking
Not fire rated
Active
Active
Surface:
Active & inactive:
Securitech # 7300 or 8300
3 point locking
Fire rated: 1-1/2 hour: 8080 Max
Active
Active
Surface:
Active: Securitech # 8200SH
2 point locking
Fire rated: 1-1/2 hour: 8080 Max
238
Specialty products

Stainless steel doors and frames..................... 241
General information..............................................241
Typical hardware locations............................... 242
Standard hardware preparations....................243
Sizes and performance.......................................244
Sound openings................................................. 245
Thermal break frames........................................247
FT Series.................................................................. 247
Main TOC
239
Specialty products
240
Specialty products: Stainless steel doors and frames
General information
All Steelcraft's LS Series doors and FS, MS & KS Series
frames are fabricated from 100% stainless steel both external
and internal. Offered in two stainless steel alloys, 304 or
316, these Doors and frames provide excellent corrosion
resistance, durability, performance, as well as a sleek aesthetic
appearance.
Performance
Door: LS18 and LS16 Series:
1. Door Cores to suit various applications:
Polystyrene, Honeycomb or Polyurethane

Steel Stiffened available on quote basis
2. Gauge:
18 gauge and 16 gauge (standard)

Heavier gauge available on a quote basis
3. Vertical Edge Seams: Seamless and Interlocking Edge.

4. Beveled Hinge and Lock Edges
5. Component Parts and Hardware Reinforcements
About the product
1. Gauge:
Steelcraft Stainless Steel Doors (LS Series) and Frames

(FS, KS & MS Series) are engineered to meet the architectural
requirements for stainless steel doors and frames in building
applications requiring exceptional corrosion resistance and/or
high design appearance.
This LS Series 1-3/4 door construction combine unique
product features to withstand harsh environments while
providing exceptional design.
To meet application requirements, the door is available in single
and double door sizes, with optional visions, louvers, fire ratings
and a wide range of hardware preparations.
Steelcraft Stainless steel doors and frames are Hurricane
approved and models have been acoustically tested up to
STC 51 (addition of vision light and/or doors swinging in pairs
reduce the STC performance).
Installation

Made of 100% Stainless Steel
Frame: FS16, MS16, KS16 Series:
Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft

installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2001 (formerly
SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel
Frames and NAAMM-HMMA 840-07.
1. Stainless steel astm a666 and astm a167; type 304 or
type 316
2. NAAMM-HMMA 866-12 Guide Specifications for Stainless
Steel Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
3. NAAMM-HMMA 860-92 Guide Specifications for Hollow
Installation shall conform to the published Steelcraft
installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2001 (formerly SDI 105)
16 gauge (standard)
Heavier gauge available on a quote basis
2. Component Parts, Reinforcements and Anchors: all made

of 100% Stainless Steel.
3. Machine Mitered corners factory welded and refinished to
match face trim with no visible seam.
4. Knock-Down (KD) frame options available.
5. Anchors: masonry T, wire anchors, metal stud, existing wall
anchors.
Ratings: actual tests conducted on stainless steel assemblies.
1. Fire-rated up to Class A (3 hour)
2. Sound-rated Door and Frame Assemblies up to STC 51
Seals not included
3. Hurricane approved (NOA Dade County Florida)
Durability
1. Exceptional corrosion resistance: conforming to
ASTM A666:
Type 304 Alloy: typical corrosion resistance.

Type 316 Alloy: heavy duty corrosion resistance.
Fire ratings
Steelcraft Stainless Steel Series doors and frames meet
the broadest fire rating requirements. They are listed for
installations requiring compliance to both neutral pressure
testing (ASTM E152 and UL -10B) and positive pressure
standards (UL-10C).
Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames and

NAAMM-HMMA 840-07.
241
Typical hardware locations
Doors and frames with 3 hinges (1 12 pair)

1/8" (3 mm)
Nominal Door Width

Net Door Width
1/8" (3 mm)
9-5/8"
(244 mm)
9-3/4"
(248 mm)
Table 1
Net
Door
Height
Finished
Opening
Height
Door opening
height
Dimension A
68 (2032mm)
29-15/16 (760mm)
70 (2134mm)
31-15/16 (811mm)
72 (2184mm)
32-15/16 (837mm)
76 (2286mm)
34-15/16 (887mm)

40-5/16"
(1024 mm)
9-5/8"
(244 mm)
10-3/8"
(264 mm)
3/4 (19 mm) to bottom of frame
Standard door frame details
CLOSER REINFORCEMENT
JAMB DETAIL
CORNER PROFILE
*1/2 (13 mm)

1-9/16
(40 mm)
Throat
Opening
Varies
Jamb
Depth
1-15/16
(49 mm)
*1/2 (13 mm)
5/8 (16 mm)
2
(50 mm)
STANDARD
HINGE PREPARATION
STANDARD
STANDARD - FACE WELDED
4-7/8" STRIKE PREP (ASA)
HEAD DETAIL
DUST BOX
1/2 (13 mm)

1-9/16
(40 mm)
Jamb
Varies Depth
Throat
Opening
4-7/8
(124mm)
1-15/16
(49 mm)
1/2 (13 mm)
5/8 (16 mm)
2
(50 mm)
STANDARD
242
STANDARD
2" HEAD
STANDARD
STANDARD
Typical hardware applications shown

CYLINDRICAL LOCK
PREP - #161
HINGE PREPARATION
EXPOSED VERTICAL
SEAM ALONG EDGE
16 GA. St. Steel

Top Reinf. Channel
Optional 18 ga.
flush top caps
MORTISE LOCK
PREP - #86
14 GA. St. Steel

Closer Reinf.
1/8" in 2" Bevel
Polystyrene
Core
16 GA. St. Steel

Bottom Reinf.
Channel
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
Hinges:
Closers:
Template hinge preparations for 4-1/2 or 5 standard

weight or heavy weight butt hinge preparations.
Surface applied closer reinforcements standard in both

doors and frames.
Continuous hinge preparations are full mortise reinforced.
Concealed closer preparations available as specified.
Locks:
Strikes:
Cylindrical 161, 61 L and Mortise 86 lock preps are available

for single door and active leaves.
Templated hardware preps
Electric hardware:
Exit devices preps are available as follows:
Single/Active doors = Rim or Mortise

Inactive leaves = Surface Vertical Rods
Glass light options
Strike preparations will accommodate specified locking

hardware.
Electric Hinge preparations are available as specified.
EPT (Electric Power Transfer) preps are available

as specified.
Electric lock preparations with conduit are available

as specified.
Astragals:
Surface mounted: flat for active or inactive leaf
Notes:
1. V-Light: Exposed glass size is true 10 x 10 located at
Steelcraft standard location.
2. N3, N4 and N5 light: Exposed glass size and locations at
Steelcraft standard dimensions.
BL
3. NOT AVAILABLE WITH DEZIGNER TRIM.

4. Light kits are Anemostat LoPro design.
5. Vision lites on pairs must match.
6. Louvers can be installed upon request
7. Standard 1/4 glass, other available upon request.
Vision Size
(O-S minus 2-1/4")
Order size plus 3/4"

Order size
Glass size = Order size minus 1-1/4"
Glass Option
Exposed Glass Size
Glass Cutting Size
10 x 10
11 x 11
N3
3 x 33
4 x 34
N4
4 x 25
5 x 26
N5
5 x 20
6 x 21
243
Polyurethane
U - 0.10
R - 9.72
Honeycomb
Polystyrene
U - 0.15
R - 6.73
General information
On-site storage
Steelcraft Stainless Steel doors and frames are designed

to fit virtually all construction requirements for commercial
and institutional building applications. Doors and Frames are
shipped separately. All stainless steel product is packaged
with protective pad and crated in heavy wood containers.
Proper installation of Door and Frame Systems is critical to
insure proper performance. It is imperative that materials
are inspected thoroughly for shipping damage. If damage
has occurred en route, please note it on the bill of lading and
shipping documents.
Store doors under cover, in a dry area and in an upright position.

All ferrous metal products should be stored where they will
not be exposed to, or come in contact with water. This is
particularly true of products such as doors, which have large
flat surfaces on which water may collect if they are stacked
horizontally. Do not use non-vented plastic or canvas. These
materials create a humidity chamber, which promotes blistering
and corrosion. Place no more than 5 doors in a group, with all
material on planking or blocking at least 4 in. (100 mm) off the
ground, 2 in. (50 mm) off a paved area or the floor slab. Provide
a least 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) space (wood strip).

All stainless steel doors and frames are manufactured and
supplied to meet the dimensional standards and performance
levels as published in ANSI A250.8- 2003 (SDI 100).
Custom options
construction, performance and aesthetic requirements of the
architectural community. Contact Customer Care for these
requirements at: 1-877-671-7011 (ask for estimating)
or email [email protected]
244
Installation
for Steel Frames and HMMA 840. All Fire Rated doors must
be installed and maintained in accordance with the National
Fire Protection Association Pamphlet 80, and/or the local
Authority Having Jurisdiction.
Specialty products: Sound openings
Sound openings
General information
STC Tested doors
Doors are often used to block the passage of sound from one
area to another. The sound rating of a door is expressed as
Sound Transmission Class (STC). The higher the STC ratings,
the better the performance.
STC (Sound Transmission

Classification)
The Sound Transmission Class (STC) is a single-number rating
of a materials or an assemblys ability to resist airborne sound
transfer at the frequencies 50-5000 Hz. In general, a higher
STC rating blocks more noise from transmitting through a door
opening.
The sound transmission loss performance is measured
using ASTM E 90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory
Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building
Partitions and Elements and calculated according to ASTM E
413 Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.
The ASTM E90 test is conducted on a 3070 door and frame
assembly in a laboratory. The assembly is built into a wall,
dividing the sound-proof acoustical test room in to two
sections. Sound is introduced into the source section of the
room at different frequencies and the amount of sound,
transmitted through the unit is recorded in decibels.
A door assembly is given an STC rating per ASTM E413 by
measuring its Transmission Loss over a range of 21 different
frequencies between 50 and 5000 Hz. Measured Transmission
Loss (number of blocked dB) at each frequency gets rounded
and adjusted with standardized coefficients. The STC rating is
than calculated based on formula, when certain conditions of
sound deficiencies have been met.
The following STC ratings have been achieved with standard

Steelcraft door and frame products with the inclusion of
gasket seals.
Door Series
Core
STC Rating
Gasket Notes
B Series B14
STC - Steel
Stiffened
44
1, 2, 3 & 4
B Series B18, 16
STC - Steel
Stiffened
40
1, 2, & 3
L Series L18, 16, 14
Honeycomb
35
1&3
L Series L18, 16, 14
Polystyrene
25
1&3
H Series H16, 14
Honeycomb
36
1&3
H Series H16, 14
Polystyrene
28
1&3
CE Series CE18, 16
Polystyrene
30
1&3
Gasket Notes (supplied by others):

1. Perimeter Seals: Zero #475 applies to the stop of the head
and jambs.
2. Door bottom: Zero #367, surface applied.
3. Threshold: Zero #560 (non-ADA). Zero #566 (ADA
compliant).
4. Cushion Spring: Zero #119W.
B Series STC - Stiffened Core Construction
Products
Steelcraft offers different types of door, frame and gaskets
for the various STC ratings. The standard Steelcraft door
(honeycomb, styrene or STC stiffened core) will provide a
range of STC ratings. The gauge of the door does not normally
affect the STC rating. The core and the gaskets used are the
determining factors.
The installation is also a critical factor in the performance. The
gaskets must meet the face of the door and sill (floor), making
a good seal. In addition any construction that passes from one
area to another will also carry sound. As an example, heating
and air conditioning ducts will carry sound from one area to
another.
Standard B Series core:
Stiffeners welded to inside of face sheets
20 gauge stiffeners
Vertical interior webs located 6 (152mm) apart
Welded to face sheet 5 (127.6mm) on center
Stiffeners welded to each other at the top and bottom

Areas between stiffeners filled with nominal 1 pound
(453.6g) per ft3 density fiberglass batt insulation
245
Specialty products: Sound openings
Sound openings
Hardware options
Application details
Note: Hardware preps and internal reinforcements will vary due
The following door, frame and gasket details represent the

standard products tested.
to acoustical requirements.
Hinges:
Template hinge preparations for 4-1/2 or 5 heavy weight

butt hinges
Continuous hinge preparations available when specified.
Locks:
Cylindrical 161, 61L and Mortise 86 (sectional or escutcheon

trim) lock preps are available for single door and active
leaves.
Exit devices preps are available as follows:
Single doors = Rim or Mortise exit devices

Inactive leaves = Surface Vertical Rods
Closers:
Surface applied closer reinforcements are available in both

doors and frames.
Concealed closer preparations are not available.
Zero #566
for ADA
applications
- door
requires
special
undercut.
14-3/4 Max
frame depth
F16, F14, MU16 or
MU14 Series Frames
Zero #475 surface
applied seal perimeter
Zero #367 surface

applied door bottom
Threshold
Sound measurements
The following is a quick reference to the decibel ratings and
hazardous time exposures of common sounds:
Strikes:
Zero #560
for non-ADA
applications.
Used with
standard
3/4
undercut.
Strikes preparations will accommodate specified locking

hardware.
Electric hardware:
Typical Decibel
Example
Lowest sound audible to the human ear
30
Lowest sound audible to the human ear
Electric Hinge preparations are available as specified.
40
Electric lock preparations with conduit are available as

specified.
Living room, quiet office, bedroom away

from traffic
50
EPT (Electric Power Transfer) preps are not available.
Light traffic at a distance, refrigerator,

gentle breeze
60
Air conditioner at 20 feet (6 meters),

conversation,sewing machine
70
Busy traffic, office calculator, noisy restaurant.
Sound transmission ratings

Sound transmission classification (STC) ratings are a
measurement of the amount of sound passing through
a building product. To help understand the STC ratings,
the following table compares the ratings of various
building products:
At the 70 decibel level, noise may begin to affect

your hearing if youre exposed to it constantly.
Product Description
STC
Doors
Hollow core wood door
19
Doors
Solid core wood door
26
Doors
Solid core wood door (perfect seal)
28
Doors
(2) Solid core wood doors
33
Doors
Steel door with urethane core (perfect seal)
26
Doors
L18 Honeycomb door (perfect seal)
35
Doors
L18 Honeycomb door (PS074 Weatherstrip)
35
Glass (Glazed)
1/4 plate glass
26
Glass (Glazed)
1/8 insulated plate glass, 1/2 air space
32
Wall
6 concrete block
43
Wall
2 x 4 wood stud with 1/2 gypsum board
34
Wall
2 1/2 steel stud with (2) layers of 1/2

gypsum board each side
46
246
Typical Decibel
Hazardous Zone
80
Subway, heavy city traffic, alarm clock at two feet,

factory noise. These noises are dangerous if you are
exposed to them for more than eight hours.
90
Truck traffic, noisy home appliances, shop tools,

lawn mower. As loudness increases, the safe time
exposure decreased; damage can occur in less than
eight hours.
100
Chain saw, stereo headphone, pneumatic drill.

Even two hours of exposure can be dangerous at
100dB; and with each 5 dB increase, the safe time
is cut in half.
120
Rock band concert in front of speakers,

sandblasting, thunderclap. The danger is
immediate; at 120 dB exposure can injure your ears.
140
Gunshot blast, jet plane. Any length of exposure

time is dangerous; noise at 140 dB may cause actual
pain in the ear.
180
Rocket launching pad. Without ear protection,

noise at this level causes irreversible damage;
hearing loss hearing is inevitable.
Specialty products: Thermal break frames
FT Series
Steelcraft FT (Frame Thermal) Series frames offer the
following unique features, which enhance long term
functionality and durability:
1. Thermal Break: By separating the frame along the stop, the
transfer of exterior heat or cold into your building is reduced.
FT frames provide 95% better resistance to thermal
conductivity over non-thermal break frames.
Lower thermal costs and improved comfort
Uses Galvannealed A-60 steel
Jamb and Head components are each factory

assembled, with 3-sided frames supplied KD or
Face welded
Frame and weld-in anchors are specially designed to
achieve a true thermal break
2. FT thermal separator: This durable polymer extrusion

provides a more secure barrier over time and is more
durable in freezing conditions compared to traditional vinyl
separators.
About the product

FT frames are separated at the stop by a durable polymer
extrusion that serves as a thermal break.
FT Series 3-sided frames are designed to meet requirements
for light to maximum duty applications in both commercial
and institutional buildings. Although the most common use
is exterior masonry opening, these frames are installed in
prior to installation or welded for installation as a complete unit.
Installation
installation instructions, ANSI A250.11-2012 Recommended
Erection Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA 840.

2. Care should be taken throughout the installation process
to maintain the thermal break designed into anchors and
reinforcements.
Application
FT Series frames are best used for energy cost savings on
exterior openings or interiors where temperature control is
desired between locations. They are typically installed in wall
construction types as defined in the table below:
3. Die-mitered corner connections: Die-mitered corner

4. Patented universal hinge preparations allow for easy
field conversion from standard weight .134 (3.3mm) thick
1. Frames tested to ASTM C1363 for Thermal Performance,
with a U-factor of 0.45. Zero 525 Rabbetted Aluminum
Thermal Break Threshold was used in this test. See
Anchoring and installation notes for options.
2. Overall frame construction for the Steelcraft FT Series
frames meets the requirements of ANSI A250.8-2014.
accordance with ANSI/BHMA.
4. FT frames are not fire-rated.
Frame applications
Profile
Steel thickness
Wall construction
FT16
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Wood or steel stud
Weld-in nailing strap anchors
FT16
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Masonry
Wire masonry
FT16
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Existing masonry
Weld-in FT EMAs bolted through both rabbets
FT14
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
Wood or steel stud
Weld-in nailing strap anchors
FT14
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
Masonry
Wire masonry
FT14
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)]
Existing masonry
Weld-in FT EMAs bolted through both rabbets
247
FT Series
Elevation
2
(50 mm)
2
(50 mm)

(factory assembled components)
2
(50 mm)
1/2 (13 mm) all JD

1-9/16
(40 mm)
Separator section
is consistent across
various jamb depths
9-3/4
(248 mm)
Throat
Opening
HINGE
Factory installed using

#6-20 STS, ~10 O.C.
Jamb
Depth
Varies
13/16 (21 mm)
FT Thermal Separator
2-3/4
(70 mm)
1-15/16
(49 mm)
Equal
1/2 (13 mm) all JD
5/8 (16 mm)

2
(50 mm)
Finished
Opening
Height
Opening Width
FT Thermal separator
Separates the door side and the non-door side
of the frame. The 3-pieces are joined with screws
as shown.
STRIKE
HINGE
40-5/16
(1024 mm)
Equal
While our separator is durable, care should be

taken in transporting and handling until frame is
installed, especially with longer components and
wider jamb depths.
Do not stack welded frames in storage or in transport

Do not weld on or near separator
Separator material is not paintable
Hardware interference
Specific hardware preps can be reviewed by
Steelcraft Engineering upon request. Installation
may be limited; it is best to avoid attaching to
the soffits. If unavoidable, review the drawing and
dimensions above and become familiar, taking
special care when drilling or attaching to this area.
Steelcraft is not responsible for issues caused by
modification, reinforcement or hardware installation
outside of the factory.
HINGE
10-3/8
(264 mm)
FT Thermal Break frames must maintain the thermal

separation between the door side and the non-door
side of the frame.

Series
Opening size ranges

Single
Pair
Jamb depth availability

(profile)
Equal or unequal double rabbet
Minimum
FT16
FT14
248
16x 68 thru
40x 80
40x 68 thru
80x 80
(457mm x 2032mm thru

1219mm x 2438mm)
(1219mm x 2032mm thru

2438mm x 2438mm)
5-3/4 (146mm)
Standard profile dimensions

(variations available)
Corners
Face
Standard
Stop
Return
Maximum
12-3/4 (324mm)
2 (50mm)
5/8
1/2
(16mm)
(13mm)
DIE MITERED with

four (4)concealed
tabs interlocking
head and jambs
FT Series
4-1/2
Standard
(114mm)
5
Optional
(127mm)
KD Corner Detail
Welded Corner
4-7/8
(124mm)
General notes
Optional 4 (102mm)
Face Head Detail
1. Variations in jamb depths available in 1/8 (3mm) increments.

2. FT Series frames are to be installed as part of the wall framing sequence.
3. Available in Galvannealed A-60 steel only.
4. For KD Corners, tabs in rabbeted area should be bent outward, not inward, during assembly.
5. FT frames are face welded only (backwelding and full profile can damage separator).
6. FT Series frames with optional 4 heads are mainly used in masonry applications when
2 face heads do not match course blocking. Note separator is not shown (hidden) in this
illustration of the 4 head.
Frame options
4 (102mm) heads
Corner connections
Series
Frame profile
Double rabbet
FT16
Typical for walls 4-3/4 (121mm)

thick or greater (single rabbet not
available)
FT14
KD (Knock-down)
Double rabbet
4 interlocking corner tabs
per factory die-miter. See the
KD Corner Detail
SUA (Set-up & weld)

Double rabbet
Die-mitered for use with

2 (51mm) face double rabbet
249
FT Series
Wire Masonry Anchor
FT Weld-in Base Anchor
FT Weld-in Existing Masonry Anchor
3/16 " (5mm) dia. wire
Weld-in Nailing Strap Anchor

for Stud Walls
1. FT Series commercial and Institutional frames are specially designed to maintain

thermal break functionality as well as for maximum wall/frame engagement and
installation flexibility.
FT frames supplied standard with weld-in base anchors (n/a when using EMA)
Any jamb anchors needed for FT Series frames must be specified in the order
All except wire are weld-in only
Anchor options:
New masonry (wire anchors)
Existing masonry wall (FT EMA anchors)
Stud wall (nailing strap jamb anchors)
Any additional field anchoring must take care to maintain the thermal break or
use non-metallic materials with low thermal conductivity (e.g. wood)
FT anchors unique and not shown in the typical Frames: Anchoring systems
section of manual.
2. To achieve rating provided, use with Zero 525 Rabbetted Aluminum Thermal Break
Threshold or similar.
3. For additional thermal benefits, use with Steelcraft Polystyrene or Polyurethane
insulated doors, insulate frame, and add Zero products:
Zero Thermal break threshold options: 624, 625, 626, 724, 8724, 726, or 8726
For recessed applications use 722, 723, 729, 8729, or 8730
Zero PSA self-adhesive gasketing: 188, 488, or other
Apply to separator stop above 50F (70-100F ideal). Allow 72 hrs to set prior
to use or conditions (min 24hrs, depending on application temperature).
1/2 backbends on all JD including 5-3/4
Refer to Zero International Catalog for additional options at

http://www.zerointernational.com/catalogcadlibrary.aspx
4. Installation Caution Notice: Grouted frames: Grouted frames are not recommended
as this increases thermal transmission.
Series
FT16
Steel type
Building type
Opening
Usage frequency 1
Galvannealed 2
Commercial
Interior
Heavy to extra
heavy duty
Extra heavy to
maximum duty
Mainly Exterior
FT14
Galvannealed 2
Commercial
Interior
Mainly Exterior
250
KD 3
Corner
SUA 4
Corner
Applications
exposure
exposure


General information.......................................... 253
Frame Preps....................................................... 287
Locations Hinging, locking and closing.......... 254
Strikes.............................................................. 287
Hardware prep nomenclature.......................... 258

Doors........................................................................258
Frames.....................................................................262
ASA Strike prep..................................................... 287

CYL Strike prep..................................................... 288
Dead lock strike prep.......................................... 289
RPD Rim panic strike prep................................ 290
Door preps...........................................................267
Surface vertical rod strike prep..........................291
Locks.................................................................267
Universal flush bolt strike prep.........................292
161 Lock prep.......................................................... 267
Surface closer prep..............................................293
160 & 160-4 Lock prep....................................... 268
Hinges.............................................................. 294
61L Lock prep........................................................ 269
Continuous hinge prep........................................295
86 Lock prep..........................................................270
86 Lock prep commercial
& institutional......................................................... 271
Miscellaneous.................................................... 296
EPT Power transfer prep................................... 296
Exit devices..................................................... 272

Push/Pull prep..................................................... 272
Rim panic prep...................................................... 273
Vertical rod prep................................................... 274
Special: Concealed vertical rod exit
device prep............................................................. 275
Von Duprin INPACT....................................... 276
Inactive leaves................................................ 278
ASA Preps............................................................... 278
Flush bolts............................................................. 280
Surface bolts without astragal........................ 284
Closers............................................................. 285
Hinges.............................................................. 286
Main TOC
251
252
General information
General information
Continuous hinges: surface applied and reinforced to the

door edge and hinge jamb
All Steelcraft frames, doors and stick systems are routinely

prepared for various types and grades of architectural
hardware. The preparations for the specified hardware are in
accordance with the hardware manufacturers registered and/
or published template information.
Pivots: mortised to both door edge and hinge jamb.
This section of the Steelcraft TD Manual is designed to help

educate users of how Steelcraft products interface and
function with the major architectural hardware products.
It is also intended to be a frame and door supplement to the
information published by the hardware manufacturer being
used and/or specified.
Hardware
Architectural hardware items are any device, sensor or auxiliary
item attached to a frame or door, which is either specified
and/or required for the operation and functionality of the door
assembly. The hardware attached to the frame and/or door
can be purely mechanical, electrical (wired into the alarm and
monitoring systems of the building) or pneumatic.
The architect, specification writer and/or the purchaser of the

door assembly specifies these hardware items.
Hardware preparation types
There are three (3) major types of hardware preparations to be

considered.
Mortised hardware: Any hardware device or item (including

sensors) attached to the frame or door that requires a
cutout and reinforcement be made prior to attaching the
hardware item to the door and/or frame.
Surface applied and reinforced hardware: Any hardware
device or item (including sensors) attached to the frame
or door which do not require a cutout be made prior to
attaching the hardware item to the frame and/or door,
however, the hardware manufacturer or specifier requires a
reinforcement be built into the frame or door to support the
attached piece of hardware or its function.
Surface applied hardware: Any hardware device or item
(including sensors) attached to the frame or door which
does not require either a cutout or reinforcement to be
made prior to attaching the hardware item to the frame
and/or door.
Hardware categories
The architectural hardware attached to a door assembly,
usually falls into one of the following device categories:
Hinging: These devices perform the functions of suspending

and swinging the door in the frame. Hinging systems are
usually attached to the door edge and hinge jamb. The most
commonly used hinging devices are:
Butt hinges: mortised to both the door edge and

hinge jamb
Locking: These devices perform the functions of holding the

door in a closed position by the means of a latch or lock bolt
projecting from the door into a strike. The strike is located
in either the frame or inactive leaf of a pair of doors. All of
these devices are mortised into the door edge and the strike
jamb. The most commonly used locking devices are:
Latches and locks

Deadlocks
Exit devices (some are surface applied on the door face)
Auxiliary locks
Closing: These devices perform the functions of

mechanically closing the door once it is opened, and are
mainly categorized as:
Surface closers: surface applied and reinforced on the

door face and head of the frame.
Concealed closers: mortised to both door top channel

and head of the frame.
Floor closers: mortised into the door bottom channel

and attached into the floor.
Protecting: These devices are designed to protect the

frame and door against foreseen damage from abuse and
function. They are mainly surface applied and internally
reinforced only when specified. The most commonly used
devices in this category are:
Kick plates
Stops: may be concealed and reinforced when specified
Push pull plates

Coordinators
Holders: may be concealed and reinforced when
specified
Weather Sealing: These devices perform the functions of

limiting weather, smoke and sound penetration through
the operating clearances around the installed and operable
door, frame and hardware assembly. These devices are
mainly surface applied. The most commonly used devices in
this category are:
Perimeter weather seals: usually surface attached to the

rabbet of the jambs and head
Door bottoms: mortised into the bottom of the door, or

surface applied to the bottom of the door face.
Astragals: used in double door applications and surface

attached to the edge of one of the doors.
ANSI compliance
Steelcraft hardware preparations and reinforcements are
in accordance with ANSI A250.6-1997. Locations are in
253
Hardware preparations: Locations
Hinging, locking, closing
General information
Steelcrafts hardware locations are the same from product

to product.
Steelcrafts hardware locations follow the standards

established by the Steel Door Institute (SDI) and the Door
and Hardware Institute (DHI).
The ANSI A115.1 or ANSI A115.2 (4-78 [124mm] high) strike

preparation is normally supplied on all frames prepared for
1-34 (45mm) thick doors. The strike is located at
40-516centerline (1024mm) from the bottom of the frame.
This strike locations allows the use of either the Mortise
(ANSI A115.1) or Cylindrical (ANSI A115.2) locks. The 4-78
(124mm) strike also allows the use of mortise exit devices.
Fire ratings
Fire ratings are not affected by hardware locations. The proper
hardware must be used. Refer to the Fire Rated Section of the
Steelcraft Spec Manual for hardware requirements.
The ANSI A115.3 (2-34 [70mm] high) strike preparation is

normally supplied on frames for 1-38 (35mm) thick doors.
The strike preparation is also located at 40-516 centerline
(1024mm) from the bottom of the frame.
Locations
Steelcrafts hinge locations are listed on the elevations shown
on pages 255-257. All openings for 1-34 (45mm) doors up
to and including 76 (2286mm) in height have 1-12 pair
of hinges. Openings over 76 (2286mm) through 100
(3048mm) in height have 2 pair of hinges. Openings over 100
(3048mm) have 2-1 2 pair of hinges.
Other hardware locations are shown on the table below:
Location on Frame
Location on Door
Hardware
to centerline of prep
to centerline of prep
ANSI 115.1 mortise lock
40-516 (1024mm)
39-316 (995mm)
ANSI115.2 cylindrical (bored in) locks
40-516 (1024mm)
39-916 (1005mm)
ANSI A115.6 preassembled locks
40-516 (1024mm)
39-916 (1005mm)
Mortise exit devices
See Note 1
See Note 1
Rim/vertical rod exit devices
See Note 2
See Note 2
Deadlock
48 (1219mm)
To accommodate strike
Push plate
Not available
44-14 (1124mm)
Pull plate
Not available
41-14 (1048mm)
Combinations push & pull bars
Not available
41-14 (1048mm)
40-516 (1024mm)
39-916 (1005mm)
Not available
44-14 (1124mm)
See elevations
See elevations
Hospital latches
Hospital arm pulls
Hinges
Notes:
1. Standard location for single doors is to match the ANSI
A115.1 strike location of 40-516 (1024mm) from the
bottom of the frame. Pairs of doors are located per template
to insure the devices on both leaves align.
4. Locations on door are from bottom of door (with the

standard 34 undercut).
5. Locations are for openings over 50. Consult factory
for under 50.
2. Rim and vertical rod exit devices are located per template.
3. Locations on frame are from bottom of frame.
254
Doors and frames with 1 12 pair of hinges

Table 1
9-5/8"
(244mm)
9-3/4"
(248mm)
Net
Door
Height
Finished
Opening
Height
48"
(1219mm)
Door opening
height
Dimension A
68
(2032mm)
29-15/16
(760mm)
70
(2134mm)
31-15/16
(811mm)
72
(2184mm)
32-15/16
(837mm)
76
(2286mm)
34-15/16
(887mm)
40-5/16"
(1024mm)
9-5/8"
(244mm)
10-3/8"
(264mm)
Doors and frames with 2 pairs of hinges

9-3/4"
(248mm)
Finished
Opening B
Height
10-3/8"
(264mm)
9-5/8"
(244mm)
Net
Door B
Height
Table 2
Door opening height
Dimension B
68 (2032mm)
19-61/64 (507mm)
70 (2134mm)
21-19/64 (541mm)
72 (2184mm)
21-61/64 (558mm)
76 (2286mm)
23-19/64 (592mm)
710 (2388mm)
24-5/8 (625mm)
80 (2438mm)
25-19/64 (643mm)
86 (2591mm)
27-19/64 (693mm)
810 (2692mm)
28-5/8 (727mm)
90 (2743mm)
29-19/64 (744mm)
96 (2896mm)
31-19/64 (795mm)
910 (2997mm)
32-5/8 (829mm)
100 (3048mm)
33-19/64 (846mm)
9-5/8"
(244mm)
Notes:
1. Steelcraft standard hinge spacing for doors up to and
including 76 (2286mm) high is 1-12 pairs (3 hinges)
as shown in Chart 1. Information shown in Table 2 is for
reference when 4 hinges are specified for those
door heights.
2. Steelcraft standard for doors over 100 (3048mm) is 2-12

pairs (5 hinges). See Table 3.
3. For special door heights, dimensions A and B will vary
accordingly unless specified differently.
255
Doors and frames with 2 12 pairs of hinges

Table 3
9-3/4"
(248mm)
9-5/8"
(244mm)
Door opening height
Dimension C
102 (3049mm)
25-15/32 (647mm)
104 (3154mm)
25-31/32 (660mm)
106 (3200mm)
26-15/32 (672mm)
108 (3251mm)
26-31/32 (685mm)
1010 (3302mm)
27-15/32 (698mm)
110 (3353mm)
27-31/32 (710mm)
Net
Door
Height
Finished
Opening
Height
C
10-3/8"
(264mm)
9-5/8"
(244mm)
Note: Door diagram is for reference only -- max door height is 10 (varies with series).
256
Dutch doors and frame
9-3/4"
(248mm)
9-5/8"
(244mm)
9-5/8"
(244mm)
Finished
Opening
Height
Net
Door
Height
19-7/16"
(494mm)
23-7/8"
(606mm)
36-5/8"
(937mm)
3/16"
(5mm)
9-5/8"
(244mm)
23-7/8"
(606mm)
35-7/8"
(905mm)
43-1/8"
(1095mm)
10-3/8"
(264mm)
9-5/8"
(244mm)

Table 4
Door opening height
Dimension D
Dimension E
68 (2032mm)
16-9/16 (421mm)
35-13/16 (910mm)
70 (2134mm)
20-9/16 (522mm)
39-13/16 (1011mm)
72 (2184mm)
22-9/16 (573mm)
41-13/16 (1062mm)
Note: For Fire Rated Hardware requirements, refer to the

Fire Rated Section. An additional listed latch is required in
the top leaf.
257
Hardware preparations: Nomenclature
Doors
Door hardware prep nomenclature options

Steelcraft ordering nomenclature is described in the General Section of this manual on page 12-13. The following information
deals only with the nomenclature for ordering hardware preparations in Steelcraft doors. In addition to the guide shown on
page 12-13, the following is a detailed list of hardware ordering codes which will be additional suffixes to the top line Steelcraft
ordering nomenclature.

Example:
Top line door ordering nomenclature example: L 18 UL 4 30 70 F R

Door lock prep: 61L (see below for other hardware code options)
Complete ordering nomenclature: L 18 UL 4 30 70 F R 61L
Door lock preparation designations

Code
Preparation description
160
Bored/Cyl Knobset: (1 x 2-1/4 front with 2-3/8 backset) per ANSI A115.2
160-4
Bored/Cyl Knobset: (1 x 2-1/4 front with 2-3/4 backset) per ANSI A115.2
160ED
Edge cutout only: (1 x 2-1/4 front) per ANSI A115.2
161
Bored/Cyl Knobset: (1-1/8 x 2-1/4 front with 2-3/4 backset) per ANSI A115.2
161ED
Edge cutout only: (1-1/8 x 2-1/4 front): per ANSI A115.2
161EDR
Edge cutout only: (1-1/8 x 2-1/4 front): per ANSI A115.2 with RPD reinforcements
161EDV
Edge cutout only: (1-1/8 x 2-1/4 front): per ANSI A115.2 with VRPD reinforcements
161R
Bored/Cyl Knobset: (1-1/8 x 2-1/4 front with 2-3/4 backset) per ANSI A115.2 with RPD reinforcements
161V
Bored/Cyl Knobset: (1 -/8 x 2-1/4 front with 2-3/4 backset) per ANSI A115.2 with VRPD reinforcements
61L

Bored/Cyl 2-3/4 backset for universal Leverset: (1-1/8 x 2-1/4 front with 2-3/4 backset) per ANSI A115.2
(3 1/2 minimum rose)
86
Mortise lock: (1-1/4 x 8 front with 2-3/4 backset) per ANSI A115.1
86ED
Edge cutout only: (1-1/4 x 8 front) Mortise lock per ANSI A115.1
86EDR
Edge cutout only: (1-1/4 x 8 front) Mortise lock per ANSI A115.1 with RPD reinforcements
86EDV
Edge cutout only: (1-1/4 x 8 front) Mortise lock per ANSI A115.1) with VRPD reinforcements
86R
Mortise lock for escutcheon trim: (1-1/4 x 8 front with 2-3/4 backset) per ANSI A115.1 with RPD reinforcements
86V
Mortise lock for escutcheon trim: (1-1/4 x 8 front with 2-3/4 backset) per ANSI A115.1 with VRPD reinforcements
RPD
Internal Reinforced for surface Rim Panic Device
VRPD
Internal Reinforced for surface Vertical Rod Device
BLANK
Blank without prep or reinforcement. Must also be used to designate devices like deadlock only. Active lock is BLANK
PP
Internal Reinforcements for Push / Pull plates
SPCL

Special active lock prep per hardware manufacturers template. Must also be used to designate devices like
Concealed Vertical Rods, Mag Locks, etc.
UNIT
Unit lock prep
Door lock preparation designations using catalog codes

Code
L7F
Schlage mortise lock: Refer to Steelcraft lock ordering catalog # 652
R7A
Von Duprin Rim exit device: Refer to Steelcraft lock ordering catalog # 541
M4R
Von Duprin Mortise exit device: Refer to Steelcraft lock ordering catalog # 556
SV2EW
Von Duprin Vertical Rod exit device: Refer to Steelcraft lock ordering catalog # 705
Note: Refer to Steelcraft ordering nomenclature description on pp 12-13.
258
Doors
Deadlock options

Example:

Door lock prep: 61L
Door deadlock prep: 161-60 (see below for other hardware code options)
Complete ordering nomenclature: L 18 UL 4 30 70 F R 61L 161-60
Door deadlock preparation

Code
160-48
Bored/Cyl: (1 x 2-1/4 front with 2-3/8 backset per ANSI A115.2) @ 48 above bottom of frame
160-60
Bored/Cyl: (1 x 2-1/4 front with 2-3/8 backset per ANSI A115.2t) @ 60 above bottom of frame
160-SP
Bored/Cyl: (1 x 2-1/4 front with 2-3/8 backset per ANSI A115.2) @ special location
160-4-48
160-4-60
160-4-SP
Bored/Cyl: (1 x 2-1/4 front with 2-3/4 backset per ANSI A115.2) @ special location
161-48
Bored/Cyl: (1-1/8 x 2-1/4 front with 2-3/4 backset per ANSI A115.2) @ 48 above bottom of frame
161-60
Bored/Cyl: (1-1/8 x 2-1/4 front with 2-3/4 backset per ANSI A115.2) @ 60 above bottom of frame
161-SP
Bored/Cyl: (1-1/8 x 2-1/4 front with 2-3/4 backset per ANSI A115.2) @ special location
161ED-48
Edge cutout only: (1-1/8 x 2-1/4 front per ANSI A115.2): @ 48 above bottom of frame
161ED-60
Edge cutout only: (1-1/8 x 2-1/4 front per ANSI A115.2): @ 60 above bottom of frame
161ED-SP
Edge cutout only: (1-1/8 x 2-1/4 front per ANSI A115.2): @ special location
86-48
Mortise lock: (1-1/4 x 8 front with 2-3/4 backset) per ANSI A115.1 @ 48 above bottom of frame
86-60
Mortise lock: (1-1/4 x 8 front with 2-3/4 backset) per ANSI A115.1 @ 60 above bottom of frame
86-SP
Mortise lock: (1-1/4 x 8 front with 2-3/4 backset) per ANSI A115.1 @ special location
86ED-48
Edge cutout only: (1-1/4 x 8 front) Mortise lock per ANSI A115.1 @ 48 above bottom of frame
86ED-60
Edge cutout only: (1-1/4 x 8 front) Mortise lock per ANSI A115.1 @ 60 above bottom of frame
86ED-SPL
Edge cutout only: (1-1/4 x 8 front) Mortise lock per ANSI A115.13 @ special location
PP
Additional push/pull reinforcements
SPCL

Special Deadlock prep per hardware manufacturers template. Must also be used to designate deadlocks
not conforming to ANSI A115.1 or 2.
Door lock preparation designations using catalog codes

Code
D7J
Schlage Deadlock: Refer to Steelcraft Deadlock ordering catalog # 535
259
Doors
Inactive leaf options

Example:

Door lock prep: 61L
Door deadlock prep: 161-60
Door inactive leaf strike prep: ASA (see below for other hardware code options)
Complete ordering nomenclature: L 18 UL 4 30 70 F R 61L 161-60 ASA
Door inactive leaf strike preparation

Code
ASA
4-7/8 ASA with lip @ standard location per ANSI A115.2
ASA-48
4-7/8 ASA with lip per ANSI A115.2 @ 48 above bottom of frame
ASA-60
4-7/8 ASA with lip per ANSI A115.2 @ 60 above bottom of frame
ASAR
4-7/8 ASA with lip per ANSI A115.2and RPD reinforcements
ASA-SP
4-7/8 ASA with lip per ANSI A115.2@ special location
ASAV
4-7/8 ASA with lip per ANSI A115.2 and VRPD reinforcements
BLANK
No preparation or reinforcement
CYL
2-3/4 with lip per ANSI A115.2@ standard location
CYL-48
2-3/4 with lip per AaNSI A115.2 located @ 48 above bottom of frame
CYL-60
2-3/4 with lip per ANSI A115.2located @ 60 above bottom of frame
CYLR
2-3/4 with lip per ANSI A115.2and RPD reinforcements
CYL-SP
2-3/4 with lip per ANSI A115.2@ special location
CYLV
2-3/4 with lip per ANSI A115.2 and VRPD reinforcements
RPD
Internal reinforced for surface Rim Panic Device
SPCL
Strike prep per template
VRPD
Internal Reinforced for surface Vertical Rod Device
Door lock strike preparation designations using catalog codes

Example: Schlage #10-055 strike in inactive leaf
CodePreparation description
DA3 (60 location)
Refer to Steelcraft Deadlock ordering catalog # 535(page 15)
NA3 (48 location)
Refer to Steelcraft Deadlock ordering catalog # 535 (page 15)
Note: Refer to Steelcraft ordering nomenclature description on pp 12-13
260
Doors
Closer and hinge options

Example:

Door lock prep: 61L
Door deadlock prep: 161-60
Door inactive leaf strike prep: ASA
Door closer prep: CLOSER (see below for other hardware code options)
Complete ordering nomenclature: L 18 UL 4 30 70 F R 61L 161-60 ASA CLOSER
Door closer preparations

Code
CLOSER
Closer reinforced @ hinge side on both faces
OMIT CLOSER
No closer reinforcement (labeled doors with spring hinges)
FULL WIDTH
Closer reinforced. full width both faces
FULL WIDTH T/B
Closer reinforced full width both faces top & bottom of door
TOP / BOTTOM
Closer reinforced @ hinge side both faces and at top and bottom of door
12 Gauge CLOSER
Closer reinforced @ hinge side both faces
SPCL
Special or concealed prep per template
Door hinge preparations

Code
4-1/2 STD HINGE
4-1/2 template hinge prep for standard duty (.134 wt) hinge
4-1/2 UNIVERSAL
4-1/2 universal hinge prep for standard/heavy duty (.134/.180 wt) hinge field converted
4-1/2 OMIT HOLES
4-1/2 hinge prep without attaching holes
4 HINGES
4 template hinge prep for standard duty (.134 wt) hinge
5 UNIVERSAL
BLANK HINGE
No prep or reinforcement
BLANK HINGE W/EDGE

REINF FOR CONTINUOUS HINGE
With internal edge reinforcement no edge preparations: Steelcrafts standard door width
(WITH STANDARD 3/16 UNDERSIZE) Note: When ordering, downsize nominal door width
accordingly.
BLANK HINGE W/FACE

REINF FOR CONTINUOUS HINGE
With internal face reinforcement no edge preparations: Steelcrafts standard door width
(WITH CONTINUOUS HINGESTANDARD 3/16 UNDERSIZE). Note: when ordering,
downsize nominal door width accordingly. SPCL Prep per template.
SURFACE BUTT HINGE REINF
Internally reinforced for surface hinge per template
CONTINUOUS HINGE PER

Reinforcement and door sizing per hinge manufacturers templates
MANUFACTURERSPART NUMBER
(UNDERSIZED PER TEMPLATE)
261
Frames
Strikes in strike jambs

Example:
Top line frame ordering nomenclature example: F16 UL 4 5-3/4 70 SJ R

Frame strike prep in strike jamb: ASA (see below for other hardware code options)
Complete ordering nomenclature: F16 UL 4 5-3/4 70 SJ R ASA
Frame strike preparation

Code
ASA
4-7/8 ASA with lip located @ standard location per ANSI A115.2
ASA-48
4-7/8 ASA with lip per ANSI A115.2 located @ 48 above bottom of frame
ASA-60
4-7/8 ASA with lip per ANSI A115.2 located @ 60 above bottom of frame
ASA-SP
4-7/8 ASA with lip per ANSI A115.2 located @ special location above bottom of frame
BLANK
CYL
2-3/4 with lip per ANSI A115.2 located @ standard location
CYL-48
2-3/4 CYL with lip per ANSI A115.2 located @ 48 above bottom of frame
CYL-60
2-3/4 CYL with lip per ANSI A115.2 located @ 60 above bottom of frame
CYL-SP
2-3/4 CYL with lip per ANSI A115.2 located @ special location above bottom of frame
RPD
Reinforced in the soffit for surface Rim Panic Device
SPCL
Strike prep per template
SB FACE
Internally reinforced for surface bolt on face
SB SOFFIT
Internally reinforced for surface bolt in soffit
SPCL
Special flush bolt reinforcement per manufacturers template (pairs or double doors)
UNIVERSAL Universal Flush bolt strike per ANSI A115.4
Common frame strike preparation using catalog codes

Code
S27
3 -/2 Deadlock strike located @ 60 above bottom of frame
S38
2-3/4 Deadlock strike located @ 60 above bottom of frame
S40
S41
3 Deadlock strike located @ 48 above bottom of frame
S43
S91
3 Deadlock strike located @ 60 above bottom of frame
262
Frames
Closer preps in single door frames

Example:
Top line frame ordering nomenclature example: F16 UL 4 5-3/4 30 HD

Frame closer prep in single door frame head: PA/RA (see below for other hardware code options)
Complete ordering nomenclature: F16 UL 4 5-3/4 30 HD PA/RA
Frame closer preparations

Code
CB
Corner bracket reinforced: Single door frame
CS
Closer sleeve reinforced: Single door frame
CS C/L IN HEAD
Closer sleeve reinforced located @ center of the double door opening
CS FULL WIDTH
Closer sleeve reinforced full width of head
OMIT CLOSER
No closer reinforcement: used on labeled frames with spring hinges
PA
Reinforced in soffit for parallel arm application: Single door frame
PA C/L IN HEAD
Reinforced in soffit for coordinator application: located @ center of the double door opening
PA FULL WIDTH
Reinforced in soffit for coordinator application: reinforced full width of head
PA/RA
Reinforced in soffit and face for both parallel and regular arm application: Single door frame
PA/RA FULL
Reinforced in soffit and face for both parallel and regular arm application: reinforced full width of head
RA
Reinforced in face for regular arm application: Single door frame
RA C/L IN HEAD
Reinforced in face for regular arm application: located @ center of the double door opening
RA FULL WIDTH
Reinforced in face for regular arm application: reinforced full width of head
SPCL

Special closer reinforcement per manufacturers templates. Designation also used for Concealed Closers,
Holders & Stops
TJ
Reinforced for top jamb closer application: Single door frame
TJ C/L IN HEAD
Reinforced for top jamb closer application: located @ center of the double door opening
TJ FULL WIDTH
Reinforced for top jamb closer application: reinforced full width of head
TJ/PA
Reinforced for both top jamb and parallel arm closer application: Single door frame
TJ/PA C/L HEAD
Reinforced for both top jamb and parallel arm closer application: located @ center of the double door opening
TJ/PA FULL
Reinforced for both top jamb and parallel arm closer application: reinforced full width of head
TJ/RA
Reinforced for both top jamb and regular arm closer application: Single door frame
TJ/RA C/L HEAD
Reinforced for both top jamb and regular arm closer application: located @ center of the double door opening
TJ/RA FULL
Reinforced for both top jamb and regular arm closer application: reinforced full width of head
263
Frames
Closer preps in double door frames

Example:

Frame closer prep in double door frame head: PA/RA BOTH ENDS (see below for other hardware code options)
Complete ordering nomenclature: F16 UL 4 5-3/4 60 HD PA/RA BOTH ENDS
Frame closer preparation

Code
CB ACTIVE SIDE
Corner bracket reinforced: Double door opening, reinforce active only
CB BOTH ENDS
Corner bracket reinforced: Double door opening, reinforce both openings
CS ACTIVE SIDE
Closer sleeve reinforced: Double door opening, reinforce active only
CS BOTH ENDS
Closer sleeve reinforced: Double door opening, reinforce both openings
PA ACTIVE SIDE
Reinforced in soffit for parallel arm application: Double door opening, reinforce active only
PA BOTH ENDS
Reinforced in soffit for parallel arm application: Double door opening, reinforce both openings
PA/RA ACTIVE

Reinforced in soffit and face for both parallel and regular arm application: Double door opening,
reinforce active only
PA/RA BOTH ENDS

Reinforced in soffit and face for both parallel and regular arm application: Double door opening, reinforce
both openings
PA/RA C/L HEAD

Reinforced in soffit and face for both parallel and regular arm application: located @ center of the
double door opening
RA ACTIVE SIDE
Reinforced in face for regular arm application: Double door opening, reinforce active only
RA BOTH ENDS
Reinforced in face for regular arm application: Double door opening, reinforce both openings
TJ ACTIVE SIDE
Reinforced for top jamb closer application: Double door opening, reinforce active only
TJ BOTH ENDS
Reinforced for top jamb closer application: Double door opening, reinforce both openings
TJ/PA ACTIVE
Reinforced for both top jamb and parallel arm closer application: Double door opening, reinforce active only
TJ/PA BOTH ENDS

Reinforced for both top jamb and parallel arm closer application: Double door opening, reinforce
both openings
TJ/RA ACTIVE
Reinforced for both top jamb and regular arm closer application: Double door opening, reinforce active only
TJ/RA BOTH ENDS
Reinforced for both top jamb and regular arm closer application: Double door opening, reinforce both openings
264
Frames
Hinge preps in door frames

Example:
Top line frame ordering nomenclature example: F16 UL 4 5-3/4 70 HJ

Frame hinge prep in hinge jamb: 5 UNIVERSAL (see below for other hardware code options)
Complete ordering nomenclature: F16 UL 4 5-3/4 70 HJ 5 UNIVERSAL
Frame hinge preparations

Code
3-1/2 STD WT
3-1/2 template hinge prep for standard duty (.123 wt) hinge for 1-3/8 door frames
4-1/2 HVY WT
4-1/2 template hinge prep for heavy duty (.180 wt) hinge
4-1/2 STD WT
4-1/2 template hinge prep for standard duty (.134 wt) hinge
4-1/2 UNIV FULL
4-1/2 universal hinge prep for standard/heavy duty (.134 /.180 wt) hinge: field converted.
Reinforced full width of jamb.
4-1/2 UNIVERSAL
4-1/2 universal hinge prep for standard/heavy duty (.134 /.180 wt) hinge: field converted
4 STD WT
5 UNIV FULL
5 universal hinge prep for standard/heavy duty (.145 /.190 wt) hinge: field converted.
Reinforced full width of jamb
5 UNIVERSAL
5 universal hinge prep for standard/heavy duty (.145 /.190 wt) hinge: field converted
5 HVY WT
5 hinge prep for heavy duty (.190 wt) hinge
5 STD WT
5 hinge prep for standard duty (.145 wt) hinge
BLANK HINGE
CONT FACE REINF
Continuous Hinge, surface mounted to the frame face: internally reinforced on face
CONT FACE W/O
Continuous Hinge, surface mounted to the frame face: not internally reinforced
CONT RABT REINF
Continuous Hinge, mounted to the frame rabbet: internally reinforced on rabbet
CONT RABT W/O
Continuous Hinge, surface mounted to the frame rabbet: not internally reinforced
CONT SPECIAL
Continuous Hinge, located and reinforced per manufacturers template
FULL SURFACE
Reinforced for butt type hinge per size and template specified
SPCL
Hinge prep per template
265
Frames
Miscellaneous preps in door frames

Example:

Frame closer prep in single door frame head: PA/RA
Frame coodinator prep in head: FACE MOUNTED (see below for other hardware code options)
Complete ordering nomenclature: F16 UL 4 5-3/4 60 HD PA/RA FACE MOUNTED
Frame coordinator preparation

Code
FACE MOUNTED
Coordinator (Cam action) reinforcement: face reinforced at center of frame head
SOFFIT MOUNTED
Coordinator (Soffit mounted) reinforcement: soffit reinforced full frame width
SPCL
Coordinator: reinforced per template
Frame removable mullion preparations

Code
DBL RABBET HM MULL PREP
Removable mullion preparation for double rabbeted hollow metal mullion
REM HDWE MULL REINF ONLY
Removable mullion reinforcement for double rabbeted hollow metal mullion
SGL RABBET HM MULL PREP
Removable mullion preparation for single rabbeted hollow metal mullion
266
Hardware preparations: Door preps
Locks
161 Lock prep

For Bored/Cylindrical locksets conforming to ANSI A115.2

KNOB trim or deadlock applications
2-3/4
Backset
2-1/4
2-1/8
Dia.
2-1/4
1-1/8
1-1/8
161 for full lock prep
161ED for edge prep only
Prep options:
Prep options:
161-48 = 48 above bottom of frame
161ED-48 = 48 above bottom of frame
161-SPL = special location
161ED-SPL = special location
161R = with RPD reinforcements
161EDR = with RPD reinforcements
161V = with VRPD reinforcement
161EDV = with VRPD reinforcement
4-5/8
Lock reinforcement detail

16 gauge
Projection welded Format Textor edge
3-1/2
Extruded and tapped holes for lock front attachment
6-1/2
267
Locks
160 & 160-4 Lock prep


KNOB trim or deadlock applications
Backset
2-1/8
Dia.
160 for 2-3/8 backset
2-1/4
2-1/4
Prep options:
Prep options:
160-4 for 2-3/4 backset

Prep options:
160-4-48 = 48 above bottom of frame
4-5/8
160-4-60 = 60 above bottom of frame

3-1/2
6-1/2

268
16 gauge
Projection welded Format Text or edge
Locks
61L Lock prep


LEVER trim or deadlock applications
2-3/4
Backset
4-5/8
3-1/2
2-1/4
6-1/2
1-1/8
61L for full lock prep

Prep options:
61L-48 = 48 above bottom of frame
61L-60 = 60 above bottom of frame
16 gauge
61L-SPL = special location

61LR = with RPD reinforcements
61LV = with VRPD reinforcement
Note: for locks installed in this prep must include Rose (trim
with minimum 3-7/16 diameters.
3-1/4
2-1/8
269
Locks
86 Lock prep

For Mortise locksets conforming to ANSI A115.1

Preparation for full escutcheon trim
1-1/2
7-3/16
8
86 for full lock prep
1-1/4
Front
2-3/4
Backset
1-1/4
Front
Prep options:
Prep options:
86R = with RPD reinforcements
86DR = with RPD reinforcements
86RV = with VRPD reinforcement
86EDV = with VRPD reinforcement
4-3/4
9-1/2
11

270
14 gauge
Extruded and tapped holes for lock front
attachment
Locks
86 Lock prep for commercial and institutional applications

7C6 Lock prep
Special lock prep
For Mortise locksets conforming to ANSI A115.1
Nomenclature varies with lock catalogue requirements
Preparation for sectional trim per Steelcraft hardware

catalogs
Nomenclature SPECIAL designates templated hardware

prep is required. Lock number and template number must
be specified
Varies as
specified
4-3/4
Varies as
specified
9-1/2
11
2-3/4
Backset
1-1/4
Front
7C6 for Schlage L9050, L9453, L9456, L9473,

L9485 (RH/LH)

7C6 = Refer to Steelcraft Hardware Catalogs for all prep

designations

14 gauge
Special

Designation for sectional trim when ordered by

manufacturers template numbers
271
Exit devices
Push/Pull Prep

For Push/Pull plate trim
Hinge Side
4
(101mm)
17
(432mm)
42
(1068mm)
Notes:
1. Push Pull reinforcements are 14 gauge steel.
2. Both faces are reinforced as shown.
272
Exit devices
Rim panic prep

For surface Rim Panic Devices
Door Reinforcements
Hinge Side
Hinge Side
4-7/8
(124mm)
17
(432mm)
4-7/8
(124mm)
10 Typ.
(254mm)
10
(254mm)
4-7/8
(124mm)
10
(254mm)
Note #1
Note #2
RPD
RPD variations
For Rim Panic Reinforcements only
Rim Panic reinforcements on hinge side with Standard lock prep

and reinforcement
Full lock prep options:
86R = 86 lock prep for full escutcheon trim
61LR = 61L lock prep for lever trim
160R = 160 lock prep for knob trim
161R = 161 lock prep for knob trim
Edge only lock prep options:
86EDR = 86 lock prep with edge prep only
Notes:
1. RPD variation preps include the primary (standard) lock
prep as specifiedAv
2. Primary lock ordering codes suffixed with the letter R
(i.e. 86R, 86EDR) include additional exit reinforcements
above and below the primary reinforcements
3. Reinforcement is made of 14 gauge material
273
Exit devices
Vertical rod prep

For surface Vertical Rod Panic Devices
1-1/4
(32 mm)
Hinge Side
Hinge Side
1-1/4
(32 mm)
4-7/8
(124 mm)
4-7/8
(124 mm)
Note #1
17
(432 mm)
10
(254 mm)
10
(254 mm)
Note #2
40-3/4
(1035 mm)
39-9/16 (1005 mm)

for cylindrical locks (160, 161, 61L)
39-3/16 (995 mm)
for mortise locks (86)
3/4 Undercut
3/4 Undercut
VRPD
VRPD variations
For Vertical Rod Panic Reinforcements only.
Vertical Rod Panic reinforcements on hinge side with standard
Prep options are not available.
lock prep and reinforcement

Full lock prep options:
86V = 86 lock prep for full escutcheon trim
61LV = 61L lock prep for lever trim
160V = 160 lock prep for knob trim
161V = 161 lock prep for knob trim
Edge only lock prep options:
86EDV = 86 lock prep with edge prep only
Notes:
1. VRPD variation preps include the primary (standard) lock
prep as specified.
2. Primary lock ordering codes suffixed with the letter V
(i.e. 86V, 86EDV) include additional exit reinforcements
above and below the primary reinforcements
3. Prep is located to accommodate Steelcrafts standard
3/4 undercut. If special undercuts are required, it must be
specified and prep location will be adjusted accordingly.
4. Reinforcement is made of 14 gauge material
274
Exit devices
Special: Concealed vertical rod exit device prep

Preparation concealed vertical rod devices
Hinge Side
1-1/4
(32mm)
4-7/8
(124mm)
10
(254mm)
3/4 Undercut
See note #4
Notes:
1. Concealed vertical rod preps are always ordered as
SPECIAL, per manufacturers templates.
2. Illustrated above are the typical internal reinforcing channels
for L, B, CE, and T Series doors.
3. Top and bottom channel preparations vary per
manufacturers templates.
275
Exit devices
Special: Von Duprin inpact (94/9547) concealed vertical rod

integral exit device
2-3/4 (70mm) backset
Hinge Side
1-1/4
(32mm)
See Note #2
Mounting channel
(16 Gauge)
38-7/8
(987mm)
Mounting bracket
(8 Gauge)
Opening for vertical rod
3/4 Undercut
See note #4
Notes:
1. Minimum nominal door width is 26
2. Cross bar (prep) width:
24-1/16 for doors under 210 in nominal door width.

30-1/16 for doors 210 and over in nominal
door width

for L and T Series doors.
276
Exit devices
Special: Von Duprin inpact (94/9575) mortise lock device
Hinge Side
47-3/8
(1203 mm)
Mounting channel
(16 Gauge)
See Note #2
Mounting bracket
(8 Gauge)
38-7/8
(987 mm)
3/4 Undercut
See note #4
Notes:
1. Minimum nominal door width is 26
2. Cross bar (prep) width:
24-1/16 for doors under 210 in nominal door width.

30-1/16 for door 210 and over in nominal door width

for L and T Series doors.
5. Prep requires special strike location in frames.
277
Inactive leaves
ASA Prep without astragal

For 4-7/8 lip strike

Preparation for full inactive leaf with astragal
4-7/8
3-3/8
Lip
7 5/8
Confirm
39-9/16
(See Note 2)
ASA Strike Prep Detail

16 gauge reinforcement
3/4 Undercut
Elevation Detail with ASA Strike

Notes:
1. Prep is for fully mortised 4-7/8 ASA strike, commonly used
on a wide inactive leaf.
278
Inactive leaves
ASA Prep with astragal

For 4-7/8 lip strike

Preparation for full inactive leaf with astragal
ASA in astragal is at 39-9/16"

See Note #2
Astragal attachment Detail
Strike Prep Elevation Detail

Notes:
1. Z Astragal is required. Prep is for fully mortised
4-7/8 ASA strike.
Cut outs on the edge of the door are for clearance only.
4-7/8
Astragals are shipped loose for field attachment.

Attaching tabs for strike attachment are included on
the astragal.
3-3/8
Lip
2. Center line of bottom prep is located 39-9/16 above the

bottom edge of the door, unless otherwise specified
Final Assembly Detail
279
Inactive leaves
Flush bolts with astragal

Door leaf ordered as a separate inactive leaf not as a pair

Cutouts for Flush bolts in inactive leafs
For Flush Bolts (Manual or Automatic) conforming to ANSI A115.4
Hinge Side
Hinge Side
1-1/4 x 7-1/4
edge cutout
for flush bolts
Refer to page 281
39-3/16
1-1/4 x 8 edge
cutout for strike
Refer to page 279
for 86ED Prep
3/4 Undercut
Inactive leaf with astragal

Note: option does not have a strike preparation on the edge
Inactive leaf with astragal ASA

Prep options:
Strike for primary lock:
ASA = 4-7/8 strike @ 40-5/16 above bottom of frame
Notes:
CYL = 2-3/4 strike @ 40-5/16 above bottom of frame
1. Astragals are shipped loose for field attachment.
BLANK = no prep but deadlock above
2. Attaching tabs for flush bolts and strikes are included on

the astragal. Cut outs on the edge of the door are for
clearance only.
SPECIAL = Special strike per manufacturers template
3. Details above, address inactive leafs when ordered as

individual leafs.
4. When ordering double doors as pairs specify the primary
lock and auxiliary locks on the active leaf. Primary Strike
designations for the inactive leaf are not required, however
strikes for auxiliary locks must be specified.
Strike for deadlock lock:

ASA-48 = 4-7/8 strike @ 48 above bottom of frame
ASA-60 = 4-7/8 strike 60 above bottom of frame
CYL-48 = 2-3/4 strike @ 48 above bottom of frame
CYL-60 = 2-3/4 strike 60 above bottom of frame
SPECIAL-48 = 48 above bottom of frame
Strike for both primary lock and deadlock lock:
Specify nomenclature coded for both locks
Example: ASA x ASA-60 = primary strike @ 40-5/16
and deadlock strike @ 60 above bottom of the frame
280
Inactive leaves
Flush bolts with astragal (astragal attachment detail)


Preparation for Flush bolts and strikes in the inactive leaf and Astragal
(See Note 3)
1-1/4
Cutout
7-1/4
Cutout
(See Note 2)
6-3/4
Astragal attachment Detail
Flush bolt Elevation Detail

Notes:
1. Z Astragal is required. Prep is for fully mortised Flush Bolts
(manual or auto).
Cut outs on the edge of the door are for clearance only.
Astragals are shipped loose for field attachment
Attaching tabs for Flush bolts attachment are included
on the astragal.
2. Center line of bottom prep is located 12 above the bottom

edge of the door, unless otherwise specified
3. Top prep location varies as specified. Standard location
options are 12, 18, 24, 30 or 36 from the top edge of
the door.
Final Assembly Detail

Details are subject to change without prior notice.
281
Inactive leaves
Flush bolts without astragal


Cutouts for Flush bolts in inactive leafs
Flush bolt preps

with attaching
tabs typical
Refer to page 283
for details
39-9/16
Strike prep with

attaching tabs
Refer to page
278 for details
3/4 Undercut
Inactive leaf without astragal

Inactive leaf without astragal ASA

Prep options:
Notes:
1. Flush bolt and strike preparations are fully mortised into the
in active leaf door edge.

individual leafs.

282
Inactive leaves
Flush bolts without astragal (flush bolt prep detail)

Used in a wide inactive leaf

Preparation for Flush bolts and strikes in inactive leaves
(See Note 3)
6-3/4
9
1
(See Note 2)
Flush bolt Prep Detail
Flush bolt Elevation Detail
16 gauge reinforcement
Notes:
1. Prep is for fully mortised Flush Bolts (manual or auto)
2. Center line of bottom prep is located 12 above the bottom
edge of the door, unless otherwise specified.
3. Top prep location varies as specified. Standard location
options are 12, 18, 24, 30 or 36 from the top edge of
the door.
283
Inactive leaves
Surface bolts without astragal


Surface Bolt reinforcements in inactive leafs
4-3/4
8
Hinge Side
Hinge Side
39-9/16
3/4 Undercut
Inactive leaf without astragal

Inactive leaf without astragal ASA

Prep options:
Notes:
individual leafs.
3. Surface bolt reinforcement data:
Reinforcements are 14 gauge steel

Both faces are reinforced at the top and bottom on the
lock edge

284
Inactive leaves
Closer prep

For Surface Closers

Internally reinforced on both faces
20
(508mm)
3/4 (19mm)
6 (152mm)
Hinge Side
Hinge Side
Standard
Top & Bottom
Full Width
Top & Bottom Shown
Closer
Closer for surface closers
Prep options:
Prep options:
Hinge Side
SPECIAL = special size reinforcement
Notes:
1. All surface closer reinforcements are 14 gauge unless

otherwise specified.
TOP/BOTTOM = standard reinforcement at top

and bottom
FULL WIDTH = 14 gauge reinforcement full
door width
FULL WIDTH TB = 14 gauge reinforcement full door
width at top and bottom
2. Reinforcement heights are as follows:
6 = all door designs except doors with G, LG or

FG glass lights
4-7/8 = doors with G, LG or FG glass lights
20
Closer Reinforcement Detail

14 gauge steel
285
Hinges
Hinge prep

For templated mortise hinges
1/4
Backset
Internally reinforced with 7 gauge (.187)
1/4
Backset
4-1/2
4-1/2 Universal Hinge Detail
5 Universal Hinge Detail

1/4
Backset
4 Hinge Detail
L20 & CE 20 Series Only
Standard hinge prep elevation detail

Hinge options:

When no hinge prep is specified door is prepped

for 4-1/2 universal hinges:
5 HINGE = 5 Universal hinge: see below

4 HINGE = 4 standard duty template hinge

Note: L20 & CE 20 Series only
SPECIAL = Special hinge prep per template
BLANK HINGE = No hinge preps, standard
door width
9-3/16
10
1-1/4
4-1/2 & 5
Universal Hinge Detail
7 Gauge Reinforcement
.187 thick
286
1-1/8
4 Hinge Detail
Reinforcement
.125 thick
Strikes
ASA Strike prep

Typical Preparation
Reinforcement
4-7/8
General information
Template
The ANSI A115.1 and ANSI A115.2 strikes are designed to

function with the ANSI A115.1 and 115.2 locks and mortise exit
devices. Some mortise and bored-in deadlocks will function
with these strikes.
Lock manufacturers template should be reviewed carefully

to insure the strike being used will function in the preparation.
Although Steelcrafts preparation meets or exceeds the ANSI
standard, some manufacturers strikes may not fit properly in
the cutout or provide enough lip extension.
Description
ANSI A115.1 and ANSI A115.2 strikes are 4-78 (124mm) high
and 114 (32 mm) wide. The centerline of the strike is located
40-516 (1024 mm) from the bottom of the frame. This
location will function with the ANSI. A115.1 and A115.2 locks
and the mortise exit devices. The location for deadbolts must
be adjusted (normally 48 [1219 mm] from the bottom of the
frame) to match the deadlock being used. The centerline of the
strike is located 1516 (24 mm) from the stop of the
strike jamb.
The ANSI A115.1 and ANSI A115.2 strike preparation meets or
exceeds the requirements of the Steel Door Institute (SDI) and
the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI).
Fire ratings
The ANSI A115.1 and ANSI A115.2 strikes can be used in fire rated
frames with ratings from 20 minute to 3 hours.
The normal lip on the strike is 1-14 (32 mm). This allows the
strike lip to extend beyond the frame face providing a guide for
the latch bolt. The lip is omitted on deadlock strikes.
Reinforcement
The reinforcement used is a specially formed 16 gauge steel
part and is projection welded to the door rabbet of the strike
jamb. The reinforcement includes extruded attaching holes to
provide adequate threads for the strike plate screws.
The reinforcement includes a dust (mortar) box that is deep
enough to receive the 1 (25 mm) throw latch bolt or deadbolt.
287
Hinges
CYL Strike prep

Typical Preparation
Reinforcement
2-3/4
General information
Template
The ANSI A115.3 strike is designed to function with the

ANSI A115.2 and 115.3 locks and bored-in deadlocks.
Lock manufacturers template should be reviewed carefully

to insure the strike being used will function in the preparation.
Although Steelcrafts preparation meets or exceeds the
ANSI standard, some manufacturers strikes may not fit
properly in the cutout or provide enough lip extension.
Description
ANSI A115.3 strike is 2-34 (70mm) high and 1-18 (28 mm)
wide. The centerline of the strike is located 40-516
(1024 mm) from the bottom of the frame. This location will
function with the ANSI A115.2 and A115.3 locks. The location
must be adjusted (normally 48 [1219 mm] from the bottom
of the frame to match the deadlock being used. The centerline
of the strike is located 1516 (24 mm) from the stop of the
strike jamb
The normal lip on the strike is 1-14 (32 mm). This allows the
strike lip to extend beyond the frame face providing a guide for
the latch bolt. The lip is omitted on deadlock strikes.
The ANSI A115.3 strike preparation meets or exceeds the
requirements of the Steel Door Institute (SDI) and the Door and
Hardware Institute (DHI).
Fire ratings
The ANSI A115.1 and ANSI A115.2 strikes can be used in fire rated
frames with ratings from 20 minute to 3 hours.
Reinforcement
The reinforcement used is a 14 gauge steel part and is projection
welded to the frame rabbet. The reinforcement includes
extruded attaching holes to provides adequate threads for the
strike plate screws.
The reinforcement includes a dust (mortar) box welded to the
reinforcement that is deep enough to receive the 1 (25 mm)
throw latch bolt or deadbolt.
288
Hinges
Dead lock strike prep

Typical Preparation
Reinforcement
14 Gauge (1.7mm) Reinforcement
General information
Template
Deadlock strikes are normally rectangular shaped non-lip

type strikes that are designed to work with bored-in or mortise
deadlocks. A lip strike can be used if the cutout for the deadbolt
is located properly and is the correct size.
Deadlock strike manufacturers template should be reviewed

carefully for the preparation required in the frame.
Description
The deadlock strike preparation meets or exceeds the

requirements of the Steel Door Institute (SDI) and the Door
and Hardware Institute (DHI).
The deadlock strike preparation is a rectangular shaped cutout

in the door rabbet of the strike jamb. The centerline of the
deadlock strike is located 48 (1219 mm) from the bottom of
the frame and the door preparation adjusted to match
the strike.
Reinforcement
The reinforcement used is a formed 14 gauge steel plate that is
welded to the door rabbet of the strike jamb. The reinforcement
provides adequate threads for the strike plate screws.
In addition the reinforcement includes a dust (mortar) box that
is deep enough to receive the 1 (25 mm) throw deadbolt.
289
Hinges
RPD Rim panic strike prep

14 Gauge (1.7mm)
Reinforcement
8-1/2"
(216mm)
44-9/16"
(1312mm)
Bottom of frame
General information
Template
Steelcrafts rim exit device strike preparation is designed to

function with all rim exit devices.
Exit device manufacturers template should be reviewed.
Description
The preparation is designed to accept the surface mounted
strike supplied by the exit device manufacturer. The strike jamb
is reinforced only and all drilling and tapping is done in the field
by others.
The centerline of the preparation is located per the exit device
manufacturers template.
Reinforcement
The rim exit device strike preparation meets or exceeds the
requirements of the Steel Door Institute (SDI) and the Door
vand Hardware Institute (DHI).
Fire ratings
RPD strikes are used in fire rated frames in conjunction with
doors equipped with Rim Fire Exit Hardware, in ratings from
20 minute to 3 hours.
The preparation consists of a 14 gauge steel plate 8-12

(216 mm) long by minimum 2 (950 mm) wide, welded to the
soffit of the strike jamb. A dust (mortar) guard is not provided.
290
Hinges
Surface vertical rod strike prep

14 Gauge (1.7mm)
Reinforcement
Located in the
Frame Head
14" (356mm)
General information
Template
Steelcrafts vertical rod exit device strike preparation is

designed to function with all vertical rod exit devices.
Exit device manufacturers template should be reviewed

carefully to insure the strike being used will function in
the preparation.
Description
The preparation is designed to accept the surface mounted
strike supplied by the exit device manufacturer. The head of the
frame is reinforced only and all drilling and tapping is done in
the field by others. The preparation is located in the soffit area
and in the center of the frame head.
Reinforcement
The preparation consists of a 14 gauge steel plate
14 (356 mm) long by 2 (50 mm) wide, welded to the soffit of
the frame header. The plate is held to the door side of the jamb.
A dust (mortar) box is not provided.
The vertical rod exit device strike preparation meets or exceeds
the requirements of the Steel Door Institute (SDI) and the
Door and Hardware Institute (DHI).
Fire ratings
Vertical Rod strikes are used in fire rated frames in conjunction
with pairs of doors equipped with Surface Vertical Rod Fire Exit
Hardware, in ratings from 20 minute to 3 hours.
291
Hinges
Universal flush bolt strike prep

Universal Flush Bolt Strike Preparation
Lock Reinforcement
Strike Plate
14 Gauge (1.7mm)
Reinforcement
26 Gauge (0.0mm)
Dust Box
General information
Template
Steelcrafts Universal flush bolt strike preparation is designed

to be non-handed. The preparation includes a cutout,
reinforcement and strike plate that will function with all ANSI
flush bolts.
Flush bolt manufacturers template should be reviewed

carefully to insure the bolt being used will function in the
preparation.
Description
The preparation includes a cutout located in the door rabbet
of the frame header that is large enough to cover both right
hand and left hand active openings. A reinforcing plate that is
offset to accept a reversible strike/filler is welded into the door
rabbet of the frame header. A prime painted strike/filler plate
is supplied installed. To change hands it is necessary to remove
the strike/filler plate and reinstall for the other hand using the
same strike/filler plate and screws.
Reinforcement
Reinforcement: The preparation consists of a 14 gauge steel
plate of such design to function properly with the flush bolt.
The reinforcement is drilled and tapped at the factory. The
reinforcements are welded to the door rabbet of the frame
header.
The flush bolt strike preparation meets or exceeds the
requirements of the Steel Door Institute (SDI) and the
Door and Hardware Institute (DHI).
Fire ratings
Universal Flush Bolt strikes are used in fire rated frames in
conjunction with pairs of doors equipped with inactive leaf
flush bolts, in ratings from 20 minute to 3 hours.
Notes:
1. The flush bolt strike/filler plate is prime painted and
installed at the factory for right hand openings.
2. For left hand openings, remove the plate and reinstall
as required.
Strike Plate: Preparation includes a universal prime painted

strike plate with attaching screws. A dust (mortar) box is
provided.
292
Closers
Surface closer prep

Regular Arm (RA) Closer Reinforcement
14 Gauge
Parallel Arm (PA) Closer Reinforcement

14 Gauge
2" x 14"
(50mm x 356mm)
1-1/2" x 14"
(38mm x 356mm)
3"
(76mm)
3"
(76mm)
Door
Door
Top Jamb (TJ) Closer Reinforcement

14 Gauge
1-1/2" x 14"
(38mm x 356mm)
3"
(76mm)
Door
General information
The use of closer reinforcements allows for the surface
mounting of a closer or holder on a frame. The extra material
that is added to the inside of the frame head provides sufficient
material for drilling and taping for the closer or holder
mounting screws.
Description
Reinforcement
The reinforcement used in the frame is a 14 gauge (1.7mm)
steel plate 1-78 x 14 (48mm x 356mm) long.
The reinforcement is welded to the inside face or rabbet of the

frame (depends on the closer or holder mounting method).
The locations of the reinforcement for each mounting type are
as follows:
The location of the individual reinforcement is such that the

degree of opening or the size of the closer or holder does not
affect the preparation. Reinforcements for surface mounted
holders are similar to the PA mounting for a closer. The holder
feet are attached to the soffit of the frame head.
Regular arm closers are used on interior doors. The closer

is mounted on the face of the door on the pull side of the
opening. The closer arm is mounted to the face of the head
member. Steelcraft identification: RA.
Parallel arm closers are used on exterior and interior
openings. The closer is mounted on the door face on the
push side of the opening. The closer arm is mounted to the
1-916 rabbet or the soffit of the head member.
Steelcraft identification: PA.
The closer preparation in both frames and doors meets or
exceed the requirements of the Steel Door Institute (SDI) and
the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI).
Fire ratings
Closer reinforcements are required in all fire rated products.
If the reinforcement is omitted, a special marking is required
(see Fire Rated Section for information).
Note: Frames are not supplied with the closer or holder.
Top jamb mounted closers are used on interior and exterior

openings. The closer is mounted on the head of the frame
on the non-door head face on the push side of the opening.
The closer arm is mounted to the door face.
Steelcraft identification: TJ.
293
Hinges
Hinge prep
1-1/2"
(38mm)
9-3/16"
(233mm)
4-1/2"(114mm)
or 5" (127mm)
7 Gauge (4.7mm)
Universal Hinge Reinforcement
5/16" (8mm)
Backset
General information
Reinforcement
Standard 4-12 (114mm) and optional 5 (127mm) butt

hinges are normally used in 1-3/4 (45mm) doors. Either
hinge will support doors up to 40 (1219mm) wide and 100
(3048mm) high (quantity will vary, refer to pages 249-250).
The reinforcement used in the door and frame are 7 gauge

(4.7mm) steel and are projection welded to the rabbet of
the hinge jamb. The reinforcements include an auxiliary steel
spacer. Leave the spacer in place and the standard weight hinge
can be used. Remove the spacer and the heavy weight hinge
can be used. Refer to the appropriate frame series to insure the
patented universal hinge is available.
The preparation in the door and frame are described as the

Universal preparation. This means the preparation will
convert from a standard to a heavy weight hinge prep by
removing the break-off spacer in the field.
Description
Both the standard 4-1/2 (114mm) and the optional 5 (127mm)
hinges come in standard and heavy weight.
4-1/2 (114mm) = Standard .134 (3mm)

Heavy .180 (5mm )
5 (127mm) = Standard .140 (4mm) Heavy .190 (5mm)
Both the 4-1/2 (114mm) and 5 (127mm) hinge
preparations meet or exceed the requirements of the
Steel Door Institute (SDI).
Fire ratings
The 4-1/2 (114mm) or 5 (127mm) hinge can be used in fire
rated products with ratings from 20 minute to 3 hours.
Hinges used must be the TEMPLATED
294
Hinges
Continuous hinge prep
Full Mortise
Half Surface
Half Mortise
Full Surface
General information
Continuous hinges are generally used on large heavy doors.
They are also used when an opening is subjected to high
frequency usage.
Description
The type of attachment to the door identifies continuous
hinges. The attachment can be
Full mortise (attached to the door edge and frame rabbet)

Half surface (attached to the door face and frame rabbet)
Half mortise (attached to the door edge and frame face)
Full surface (attached to the door and frame faces)
Attachment to the door and frame can be by sheet metal

screws or machine screws. All holes are field drilled or field
drilled and tapped. The clearance on the hinge side of the door
is adjusted depending on the hinge template.
When machine screws are used or when specified additional

reinforcement for both the door and frame may be required.
The reinforcement is 14 gauge steel, welded to the inside of the
door or frame as required by the attachment. Using the hinge
as a template, or the template supplied, field drill and tap the
proper place on the door and frame for the machine screws and
attach the hinge.
Template
Hinge manufacturers information should be reviewed carefully
to insure the correct attachment and that the hinge is capable
of meeting the requirements of your opening.
Fire ratings
Fire rated continuous hinges are available for openings
with ratings from 20 minutes to 3 hours. Check the hinge
manufacturers information on this requirement.
Reinforcement
When sheet metal screws are used, a reinforcement in both
door and frame is not required. Using the hinge as a template
or the template supplied, field drill the proper place on the door
and frame for the screws and attach the hinge.
295
Miscellaneous
EPT Power transfer prep

Typical Frame Preparation
Junction Box
16 Gauge (2.5 mm)

Reinforcements
General information
Reinforcement
Power transfers are used to provide wiring to a swinging door

for electric locks, exit devices etc.
The reinforcements are 16 gauge steel plates welded to

the jamb. The plate is drilled and tapped for the necessary
mounting screws. A dust (mortar) box or junction box is
included with this preparation.
Description
Power Transfers are mortised into the door rabbet of the hinge
jamb and into the hinge edges of the door.
Junction boxes are provided for EPTs and most electrical

hardware reinforcements. Knockouts are designed to support
both 1/2 or 3/4 conduit.
Fire ratings
EPT Power Transfers are considered auxiliary hardware items
and can be used on in ratings from 20 minute to 3 hours.
296
Fire rated products

Three sided frames............................................ 307
Approvals............................................................... 308
Profile variations................................................ 315
Doors.....................................................................317
Approvals.................................................................319
Transom and side lights and/or panels....... 335
Approvals................................................................336
Fire window frames......................................... 341
Approvals................................................................342
Smoke and draft control.................................347
Main TOC
297
Fire rated products
298
Fire rated products
General information
Glossary of abbreviations and acronyms used in this section
Term
AHJ
- Authority Having Jurisdiction
ANSI
- American National Standards Institute
DHI
- Door and Hardware Institute
FEH
- Fire Exit Hardware (Exit devices which are listed for both fire and panic applications)
FM
- Factory Mutual
IBC
- International Building Code
ITS/WHI
- Intertek Testing Services / Warnock Hersey
MPD
- Mortise Panic Device
NFPA
- National Fire Protection Agency
NFPA 80
- Nationally accepted standard for the use and installation of fire frames and doors
RPD
- Rim Panic Device
SD
- Steel Door Institute
UL
- Underwriters Laboratories
VRPD
- Vertical Rod Panic Device
Hourly ratings
Steel fire doors are rated by time (hours or minutes) that a door assembly can withstand exposure to fire test conditions.
Hourly (minute) ratings are shown below:

Hourly Ratings
Door
Description
Wall
3 hour 4 hour
(180 minutes)
1-1/2 hour 2 hour

(90 minute)
Openings in enclosed or vertical communications through buildings.

These could be stairwells or elevator shafts.
1 hour 1 hour
(60 minute)
Openings in corridors and room partitions dividing building into areas of occupancy.
Opening in walls separating buildings or dividing a building into fire areas.
Historically, the 1 hour ratings have been wood door ratings.

Steel doors are starting to be used in these openings depending on the AHJ.
3/4 hour
(45 minute)
Openings in corridors and room partitions.
1-1/2 hour 2 hour

(90 minute)
Openings in walls where there is the potential of severe fire exposure from the exterior of the building.
3/4 hour 1 hour

(45 minute)
Openings in walls where there is the potential of moderate to light

fire exposure from the exterior of the building.
20 minute
1 hour
1 hour
Openings in corridors where smoke and draft control is required.
Fire door assemblies:

Steelcraft fire rated doors, three sided frames, transom and/or sidelight frames and fire window frames are required to comply with
building codes and the local AHJ. This section of the manual has been compiled as an aid to help understand the ratings of the door
and frame products, and to provide a broad overview of the products Steelcraft offers to meet the increasingly stringent needs of the
fire protection community.
299
Fire rated products
General information
Fire door assembly components
Care should be taken in the selection of the components used in a fire door assembly. If any of the listed components are omitted,
or if a non-rated component is substituted, the door assembly rating will be violated. Fire rated components (with the exception of
the wall) are listed in the UL Certifications Directory or the IT/WHI Directory of Listed Products.
Required Fire Door Assembly components are as follows:
Listed frames: Frames are required to be labeled with the appropriate fire door frame label. The frame label carries an hourly
rating, which is generally valid for any rating up to and including the rating on the label.
Listed doors: Doors are required to be labeled with the appropriate fire door label. The fire door label carries an hourly rating.
Doors can be labeled with a higher hourly rating than required, but, it is not acceptable to substitute a door with a lower hourly
rating than required.
Listed hardware: Most hardware components are also required to be labeled with the appropriate fire label. The location and type
of label will vary with the device being used. The required minimum hardware components for a fire door assembly are as follows:
Listed latch or locking device: may be single point locks, latches, fire exit devices or other listed devices.
Listed closing device: may be surface mounted or concealed attachment to the door and frame.
Approved hinge(s): may be butt hinges, pivots, continuous hinges or other approved hinge constructions. Hinges generally are not
labeled.
Fire rated wall: Wall construction must be fire rated as dictated by the building code and the AHJ.
The AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction)

The local AHJ must be the final authority in fire door assembly issues. Steelcraft Fire Doors and Fire Door Frames are produced under
the listing programs of Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated (UL) Warnock Hersey (IT/WHI) and FM Global (FM).
Installation
Installation of all Steelcraft doors and frames shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, and ANSI/SDI
A250.11 Recommended Installation Instructions for Steel Frames, ANSI A250.11 and HMMA 840. All fire rated frames must be
installed in accordance with NFPA 80, and/or the local AHJ.
Functions of fire door assemblies

Fire Doors must serve four main functions:
1. Serve as a regular door at all times.
2. Provide ready egress from a fire area during a fire.
3. Inhibit the spread of fire and smoke throughout the building or to an adjacent building.
4. Protect life and property by reducing smoke hazards.
When a fire starts, it is most important to evacuate the people safely from the building. After evacuation, the doors must serve as
a fire and smoke barrier. It is a well known fact, that in a fire more people are killed by either smoke asphyxiation or by panic, than
by the fire.
The same length of protection from the fire is not required of all openings in buildings. The location in the building determines the
length of time that the door must withstand a fire. It is the responsibility of the building code and the AHJ to indicate the type of
Fire Doors Assemblies that are to be used at the required locations in a building.
Fire rated steel frames and doors

Manufacturers of steel frames and doors choose from several methods of classifying their product as Fire Doors. Municipalities,
state governments, insurance regulations and building codes vary in the requirements for Fire Doors.
Users of fire doors can specify the type of label that offers the desired fire protection. Regardless of the label chosen, serious
consideration should be given to the company manufacturing the product and the performance expected.
The National Fire Protection Association publishes NFPA Pamphlet 80, which is the generally accepted standard throughout the
300
Fire rated products
General information
United States for the installation of fire doors and windows. This standard is generally accepted by state fire code officials and
municipal building officials.
Some of the topics covered in NFPA Pamphlet 80 are:
allowable glass area in doors for different locations and ratings

maximum sizes for various kinds of fire doors
latching device and hinge quantity
dimensional requirements, as they relate to different ratings, sizes and types of fire door classifies a door or a frame only if it meets
the following conditions
It is the responsibility of the architect and/or specification writer to specify the proper materials for complete safety. They should be
aware of the issues that constitute maximum safety in Fire Frames and Doors. All persons responsible for the design, installation and
operation of any building involving people or valued property should insist upon the type of labeled door and frame that will afford the
maximum fire protection.
Listing agencies
There are currently three (3) listing systems available from Steelcraft.
1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Fire Testing and Certification Program. UL is an independent agency with testing, listing, in-plant
inspection, and labeling capabilities.
The manufacturer's design has been accepted by UL (under their performance standard UL10C or UL9) which uses
NFPA Pamphlet 80 as the basis for their decision.
The door or frame is manufactured in accordance with the accepted design in the presence of a UL inspector.
The product passes the UL10C or UL9 fire test conducted by UL.
UL finds that the product meets the additional criteria (such as durability, stability, etc.) in addition to passing the fire test.
It is subject to a continual follow-up service, including unannounced, in-plant inspections during the manufacturing process to
be sure that the frames and doors continue to be made exactly the same as tested.
2. Intertek Testing Services / Warnock Hersey (ITS/WHI) Fire Testing and Certification Programs. ITS/WHI is an independent
agency with testing, listing, in-plant inspection, and labeling capabilities.
The manufacturer may, at their option, submit drawings of the product to be tested to ITS/WHI for review. If potential problem
areas are noted ITS/WHI will notify the manufacturer of these so that he may consider design changes.
IT/WHI personnel witness manufacturing of the product to be tested and verify components and assembly methods.
The product is then tested by ITS/WHI to determine if it meets the stringent requirements of the fire door test standards.
A factory follow-up inspection, listing and labeling agreement is issued. This agreement allows ITS/WHI to make unannounced
in-plant inspections.
3. FM Global/Approvals follow-up certification programs. FM Global is an independent underwriting agency with listing, in-plant
inspection, and labeling capabilities.
Examine and test production samples

Examine manufacturing facilities and audit quality control procedures.
A factory follow-up inspection, listing and labeling agreement is issued. This agreement allows FM to make unannounced
in-plant inspections.
Doors, frames, and walls

Frames and doors are normally rated at three-quarters of the rating of the walls. If the rating for the wall is 4 hours, the rating for the
door and frame is generally 3 hours. If the rating for the wall is 2 hours, the rating for the door and frame would be 1 1/2 hours, etc.
There are two current exceptions to this practice: 20 min. openings used for smoke control applications and 1-hour openings. Both
used in 1-hour walls.
The reason that door and frame assemblies are normally rated at 75% of the total ratings of the wall is that the actual fire testing
program for walls is completely different than that of frames and doors and the requirements and acceptance criteria vary. It should
also be noted that the severity of fire is generally considered to be less at a door opening than at a wall. Normally doorways are open
for passage of pedestrians and walls have a tendency to have furniture and other items stored against them.
301
Fire rated products
General information
Steps to follow
The following steps should be followed in specifying fire door requirements:
1. Investigate the appropriate building code(s).
2. Determine the fire resistance of the wall or partition in which the opening is to be located and select a door assembly (frame, door
and hardware) having a proper fire-protection rating. The effectiveness of the entire assembly as a fire barrier may be destroyed if
any component is omitted or one of substandard quality is used.
3. Make sure that fire doors, frames and hardware are produced under the auspices of a nationally recognized certification agency.
4. Insure products comply with the AHJ.
5. Insure products comply with NFPA 80. This pamphlet is the widely accepted standard for the use and installation of fire frames
and doors.
Fire testing
Steel frames and doors have historically been subjected to full scale fire tests as a standard method for evaluating their performance
and integrity relative to fire protection of property and life safety. Hollow metal doors were first submitted to Underwriters
Laboratories for investigation and fire exposure testing in 1904. The agencies now associated with the testing, listing and labeling of
products are two well known entities, Underwriters Laboratories and ITS/Warnock Hersey.
While the agencies have remained a constant in the industry, the standards against which products are evaluated are undergoing
significant changes. This document will provide an overview of the changes and describe how Steelcraft has positioned their product
line in compliance with NFPA 252 and UL10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies or NFPA 257 and UL9 Fire Tests of
Fire Window Assemblies..
Steelcraft frames and doors approved for positive pressure

The products that conform to the positive pressure criteria (UL10 C) or NFPA252 are shown on the following sheets. These products
also conform to the negative pressure test criteria (ASTM E152, UL10 B, etc.) and may be used in areas that do not require positive
pressure fire frames and doors.
Steelcraft products do not require the use of intumescent seals to comply with UL10 C or NFPA252.
Guidelines & requirements

All fire door applications are subject to product and component limitations and requirements. The following are general
guidelines in the use and selection of fire rated assemblies and their components
1. Listed or approved fire door components are published and listed in Underwriters Laboratories Certifications Directory, the
ITS/Warnock Hersey Directory of Listed Products or the online FM Approval Guide.
2. Only labeled doors and frames can be used in a fire rated opening.
3. Every labeled swing type fire door must include an approved self latching device, closing device and hinges.
4. Viewers must be listed in the Underwriters Laboratories Certifications Directory, the ITS/Warnock Hersey Directory of Listed
Products or the online FM Approval Guide.
5. The actual fire rating of a Fire Door Assembly is the rating of the least rated component (door, frame or hardware)
6. Approved electronic monitoring devices can be used on fire doors.
7. The local AHJ is the final authority in application acceptance.
Astragals
1. Astragals are required per the manufacturers published listings.
Astragals may not be required on double egress or other applications with 1-1/2 hour or less ratings. Refer to the appropriate
listing pages in this section.
2. Astragals must be steel overlapping type. Weather stripping astragals rated for 3 hours (180 minutes) do not satisfy the astragal
requirements for steel fire doors.
3. When astragals are used on pairs of doors equipped with fire exit hardware, a coordinator must be used to insure proper closing
and latching sequence.
4. An astragal may be used on a pair of doors equipped with a mortise exit device on the active leaf and a vertical rod on the
inactive leaf.
302
Fire rated products
General information
5. An astragal can not be used on pairs of doors swinging in the same direction equipped with double vertical rods, since the astragal
will prevent the operation of one of the door leaves. Since 3 hour (180 minute) rated openings require an astragal, double vertical
rod applications can not be used in pairs swinging in the same direction.
6. Astragals can be either screw attached or welded to the appropriate door.
7. Astragals are not used on pairs of doors with an open back strike.
Clearances
All clearances must be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet # 80.
Closing devices
1. An approved closing device must be installed on every swinging fire door. Exception:
The inactive leaf of mechanical equipment room doors may omit a closer. Verify acceptance with the local building code
and the AHJ.
2. Fire doors must be internally reinforced for closing devices. Exceptions:
Internal reinforcement is omitted if the closer is attached with sex bolts.

Internal reinforcement is omitted if spring hinges are used.
3. Overhead stops may be used if they do not inhibit the door from closing and latching.
4. Door holder/release devices are permitted when acceptable to the AHJ. These fail-safe devices release the door in the event of fire.
5. Labeled opening may incorporate concealed closers and stops.
Coordinators
1. A coordinator is required if an astragal or projecting latch bolt prevents the inactive door from closing before the active door.
2. A coordinator is not required if both leafs of a pair of doors closes and latches independently of each other.
3. When astragals are used on pairs of doors equipped with fire exit hardware, a coordinator must be used to insure proper closing
and latching sequence.
Dutch doors
1. The upper and lower leaf may latch into the frame or the upper leaf may latch into the lower leaf, which latches into the frame.
2. The opening must include a closing device located on the upper leaf, and a horizontal astragal which will coordinate the closing
and latching of the bottom leaf.
3. A label is required on each leaf of a dutch door and one on the frame.
Exit devices
1. Listed Fire Exit Hardware must be used. These exit devices are listed for both fire and panic applications.
2. The door size must not exceed the maximum listed size for the individual hardware manufacturers listing for the device
being used.
3. Doors which are reinforced for Fire Exit Hardware must bear a label which states Fire Door to be Equipped with
Fire Exit Hardware.
4. Vertical rod FEH may not be used on single doors. The exception would be a listed 3 point exit device.
5. Pairs of doors, swinging in the same direction, with vertical rod FEH on both leaves can not be used in 3 hour (180 minute)
applications.
6. Rim FEH can not be installed with blade strikes in double door applications.
7. Rim FEH in pairs must include the use of a listed hardware mullion.
Gasketing & edge seals

1. Only listed gasket material can be used. Refer to the UL Fire Resistive directory or the ITS/WHI Directory of Listed Products.
2. Smoke and draft control assemblies must include gaskets listed for smoke and draft control.
3. Steelcraft fire rated doors do not require the use of edge seal (intumescent) systems.
303
Fire rated products
General information
Glass & glazing
1. Only approved glass can be installed in a fire door assembly.
Hinges
1. The proper quantity of hinges must be used. Based on NFPA Pamphlet 80:
Doors up to 60 inches in height shall be provided with 2 hinges and an additional hinge for each additional 30 of door height
or fraction there of.
2. Steelcraft doors over 96 inches may be prepared for .134 standard weight hinges.
3. Listed continuous hinges, electric hinges and pivots can be used on Steelcraft fire rated doors.
4. Doors with 4 hinges are limited to 20 gauge and a maximum door size of 30 x 70.
Labels
1. Steelcraft doors and frames can be supplied with a variety of metal or Mylar fire labels, attached by permanent adhesive.
Other methods of attachment have been welding, rivets or drive screws.
2. Labels are attached only at the factory or at an authorized labeled distributors shop.
3. All jobsite labeling must include a field (jobsite) inspection by the labeling agency and may require involvement of the AHJ.
4. Fire rated doors with continuous hinges have the fire label attached in the top channel of the door.
Locks
1. The door size must not exceed the maximum listed size for the individual hardware manufacturers listing.
2. Dead locks may not be used on doors which are in a means of egress. Locks with deadbolts that are interconnected with latch
bolts are retracted simultaneously when the latch bolt is retracted may be used with in a means of egress.
3. Deadbolts may be used on doors in addition to an active latch bolt on doors not in the means of egress, or as otherwise permitted
by the AHJ.
Louvers
1. Any listed automatic fusible link louver can be used on a Steelcraft labeled door.
2. Glass lights are not permitted in doors equipped with louvers.
3. Fire Exit Hardware can be used on doors equipped with a louver, but only where approved by code.
4. Fire ratings for doors equipped with a louver can be either 1-1/2 hour (90 minutes) 1-hour (60 minutes) or 3/4 hour (45 minutes).
5. Maximum listed louver size 24 x 24 (one louver per door)
6. Location in the door:
Located in bottom half

Minimum 12 from door bottom
Minimum 5-1/2 from door edge to cutout.
7. Louvers cannot be installed in a means of egress and in:
The upper half of the door

20 minute doors
Smoke & draft opening
304
Fire rated products
General information
Latch throw
1. Single doors:
1/2 latch bolt throw for all door series, gauges and fire ratings.
2. Pairs of doors
A Series = 5/8
B Series
a. B18, B16 = 5/8
b. B14 = 5/8 For pairs of doors up to and including 1-1/2hour (90 minute) and 3/4 over 1-1/2 hour
L Series:
a. L20, L18, L16 = 5/8 up to 3 hours
b. L14 = 5/8 For pairs of doors up to and including 1-1/2 hour (90 minute). 3/4 over 1-1/2 hour
T Series = 3/4
Pairs of doors
1. The inactive leaf of doors must be provided with self-latching top and bottom bolts or automatic flush bolts or labeled two point
latches. Manual flush bolts either mortised or surface may be used on doors to rooms not normally occupied by humans.
2. Double egress doors can only be provided with concealed or surface vertical rod FEH.
3. Open back strikes can be used on pairs of doors (L18/16/14, CE18/16, B18/16/14). Maximum height of 80 and a maximum
1-1/2 hour (90 minute) ratings. Astragals can not be used in this application.
4. Two doors in the same frame separated by a hollow metal mullion are considered to be two single doors applications.
Protective plates & plant-ons

1. Protection plates or kick plates can be a maximum 48 x 48 in size and attached to both faces of a door (3 hour maximum
fire rating).
2. Plant-ons can be used if covered by a manufacturers listing service.
Smoke & draft

1. All components used in a Smoke and Draft Control assembly must pass a 20 minute without hose stream test.
2. Only gaskets listed for smoke and draft control may be used on smoke and draft control assemblies.
3. Gaskets must be listed for the appropriate door type (hollow metal, wood, etc.).
4. Wood doors which do not have an integral intumescent seal in the door edge, may require an intumescent edge seal and draft
control gasket attached to the frame. Review the wood door manufacturers listing and requirements.
Temperature rise doors

1. Steelcraft T Series doors prepared for single point latches, rim or mortise FEH are labeled for 250F temperature rise and may be
used in either 250F or 450F temperature rise location.
2. Doors prepared for vertical rod (CVR or SVR) or INPACT devices carry a 450F temperature rise label and can only be installed in
450F temperature rise location.
Vision light requirements

1. Glass cannot be installed in exterior locations subject to severe fire exposure.
2. Any listed fire door vision kit can be used in a Steelcraft door. Vision kits should be listed for the appropriate door construction
(hollow metal, wood, etc.) used.
3. Steelcraft vision kits are not approved for use in any other door manufacturers doors
305
Fire rated products
306
Fire rated products: Three sided frames
General information
Three sided frames

Typical Elevations
Single
Dutch
Pair
Removable Mullion
Double Egress
Multiple Opening
Fire rated three sided frame

The three sided frames covered in this section have been tested in accordance with UL10C and NFPA252-1999, and listed by either
Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Warnock Hersey (IT/WHI) and FM Global (FM). The ratings and sizes available are shown on the
following pages.
Three sided frames are designed to be set on the floor and anchored to the wall construction. All frame anchoring must be in
accordance with the installation instructions for the appropriate frame construction.
Three sided frames configurations

Labeled three (3) sided frames are available in the following configurations:
Single opening: hinge jamb, strike jamb and head.
Double egress: a unique contoured frame (profiles) with two hinge jambs and a head. This opening configuration is used in
corridor applications and consists of a pair of doors, each swinging in the opposite direction.
Dutch doors: hinge jamb, strike jamb and head, used in storeroom applications.
Double opening: two hinge jambs and a head. Commonly referred to as pairs swinging in the same direction.
Double swing with a mullion: two hinge jambs, a head and a mullion (stationary or removable). This opening configuration is
actually considered as two single door openings.
Multiple opening: a unique application having a combination of hinge and/or strike jambs, vertical mullions and head.
Communicating openings: an application including a door(s) mounted in both rabbets, usually used in the hospitality markets and
installed between adjoining rooms.
Approved frame series

Frames covered in this section are F, FN, FE, FP, FS, DE, DW, K, KS, MU and MS. Regardless of the frame series being used, all frames
must be installed into a fire rated wall.
Listing information covered

All listings covered in this section are for reference and assistance in developing overall parameters of approvals. Several variables
such as hardware, wall construction, installation and application will affect the fire ratings. Individual manufacturer s listings will
take precedence.
All listings shown in this section conform to the requirements of UL 10C & NFPA252 test requirements.
Installation
Installation of all Steelcraft framing systems shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI/SDI A250.11
Recommended Installation Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA-840. All fire rated frames must be installed in accordance
with NFPA Pamphlet 80, and/or the local AHJ.
307
Approvals
Three sided frames for single door

Maximum
Rating
Wall
Applications
Frame Series
Jamb Depth
Series
Min.
3 HR
Masonry
Max
Stud
1-1/2 HR
Stud
(90 Min)
Max
Double
Rabbet
F
Single
Rabbet
Corner
Max.
KD
Double
Rabbet
UL
ITS/WH
FM
20
40 x 100
40 x 100
40 x 80
FS16
12
N.A.
Not Listed
40 x 80
Not Listed
FN16, FN14
4-1/2
14
40 x 100
40 x 100
40 x 80
F12
4-3/4
14
N.A.
40 x 100
40 x 100
Not Listed
MU16, MU4
3-1/2
14
40 x 90
40 x 90
Not Listed
MS16
12
N.A.
Not Listed
40 x 80
Not Listed
FP14
5-3/4
10-3/4
40 x 80
Not Listed
Not Listed
F16, F14
14
40 x 80
40 x 80
Not Listed
FS16
12
N.A.
Not Listed
40 x 80
Not Listed
F12
4-3/4
14
N.A.
40 x 80
40 x 80
Not Listed
MU16, MU14
3-1/2
14
40 x 80
40 x 80
Not Listed
MS16
12
N.A.
Not Listed
40 x 80
Not Listed
F16, F14
14
40 x 100
40 x 100
40 x 80
FS16
12
N.A.
Not Listed
40 x 80
Not Listed
F12
4-3/4
14
N.A.
40 x 100
40 x 100
Not Listed
MU16, MU14
3-1/2
14
40 x 90
40 x 90
Not Listed
MS16
12
N.A.
Not Listed
40 x 80
Not Listed
DW16, DW14
3-1/2
14
N.A.
40 x 90
40 x 810
40 x 80
K16, K14
3-1/2
14
N.A.
40 x 90
40 x 810
40 x 80
KS16
12
N.A.
Not Listed
40 x 80
Not Listed
Notes: 1. Frames over 90 in height and installed in stud walls

require the jamb anchors to be welded to the frame.

2. 4 heads are approved for all applications.
FN
Double
Rabbet
MU Series Frame Construction

MU
Weld
F16, F14
F Series Frame Construction
Listings
Maximum Sizes
(Door Openings)
MU
Masonry
Wall
Applications
Stud Wall
(Drywall)
Applications
Narrow
Double
Rabbet
DW and K Series Frame Construction

DW
K
Double
Rabbet
308
DW
K
Narrow
Double
Rabbet
Minimum Hardware Requirements:

Strike for single point latch
Closer
Approved hinges
Approvals
Three sided frames for double doors

Maximum
Rating
Wall
Applications
Frame Series
Jamb Depth
Series
Min.
3 HR
Masonry
Max
Stud
1-1/2 HR
Stud
(90 Min)
Max
Listings
Maximum Sizes
Corner
Max.
KD
Weld
(Door Openings)
UL
ITS/WH
FM
F16, F14
20
80x 100
80x 100
80x 80
FS16
12
N.A.
Not Listed
80x 80
Not Listed
FN16, FN14
4-1/2
14
80x 100
80x 100
80x 80
F12
4-3/4
14
N.A.
80x 100
80x 100
Not Listed
MU16, MU4
3-1/2
14
80x 90
80x 90
Not Listed
MS16
12
N.A.
Not Listed
80x 80
Not Listed
FP14
5-3/4
10-3/4
80x 80
Not Listed
Not Listed
F16, F14
14
80x 80
80x 80
Not Listed
FS16
12
N.A.
Not Listed
80x 80
Not Listed
F12
4-3/4
14
N.A.
80x 80
80x 80
Not Listed
MU16, MU14
3-1/2
14
80x 80
80x 80
Not Listed
MS16
12
N.A.
Not Listed
80x 80
Not Listed
F16, F14
14
80x 100
80x 100
80x 80
FS16
12
N.A.
Not Listed
80x 80
Not Listed
F12
4-3/4
14
N.A.
80x 100
80x 100
Not Listed
MU16, MU14
3-1/2
14
80x 90
80x 90
Not Listed
MS16
12
N.A.
Not Listed
80x 80
Not Listed
DW16, DW14
3-1/2
14
N.A.
80x 90
80x 810
80x 80
K16, K14
3-1/2
14
N.A.
80x 90
80x 810
80x 80
KS16
12
N.A.
Not Listed
80x 80
Not Listed
F
Double
Rabbet
F
Single
Rabbet
FN
Double
Rabbet
Masonry
Wall
Applications
Stud Wall
(Drywall)
Applications

MU
Double
Rabbet
MU
Narrow
Double
Rabbet

DW
K
Double
Rabbet
DW
K
Narrow
Double
Rabbet

Strike(s) depending on application for either:
1. Flush, surface or automatic bolt in head
2. Vertical rod inactive or both leafs
Closer(s) depending on hardware applications
and AHJ
1. Active leaf
2. Both leafs
Approved hinges
309
Approvals
Three sided frames for double doors with mullions

Double doors with removable mullions are used at entrances to buildings, corridor and equipment room applications. There are
2 types of removable mullion applications:
Removable hardware mullion: for Rim FEH on each leaf application. Mullion must be fire rated
Removable hollow metal mullion: for either Rim or Mortise FEH or listed latching hardware applications (80 x 80 maximum).

Frame Series

Maximum
Rating
Listings
Wall
Series Jamb Depth
Corner Maximum Sizes
Applications
(Door Opening)
Max.
KD
Weld
UL
ITS/WHI
FM
20
80 x 100
80 x 100
80 x 80
FN16, FN14
4-1/2
14
80 x 100
80 x 100
80 x 80
MU16, MU14
3-1/2
14
80 x 90
80 x 90
Not Listed
FP14
5-3/4
10-3/4
N.A.
80 x 80
Not Listed
Not Listed
F16, F14
3 Hr
Masonry
Max

Min.
F16, F14
Stud
MU16, MU14
F16, F14
1-1/2 Hr
Stud
(90 min)

Max
MU16, MU14
14
80 x 80
80 x 80
Not Listed
3-1/2
14
N.A.
80 x 80
80 x 80
Not Listed
14
80 x 100
80 x 100
80 x 80
3-1/2
14
80 x 90
80 x 90
Not Listed
Notes:
1. Frames over 90 in height and installed in stud walls
require the jamb anchors to be welded to the frame.
3. Three sided frame options for double doors:
1. Removable hardware mullion
Maximum 3 hour rating.

Check hardware manufacturers listings for
maximum ratings & height.
2. Removable Steelcraft Hollow metal mullion
2 face: only
1-12 hour rating maximum, 80 maximum height
Application for either FEH or listed latching hardware
3. Frames with fixed (welded) Steelcraft mullions are
considered to be two (2) single door frames.
2 face minimum, 4 face maximum
Maximum 3 hr. rating
Removable Mullion
F
Double
Rabbet
F
Single
Rabbet
FN
Double
Rabbet
MU
Double
Rabbet
310
Stud Wall
(Drywall)
Applications
Masonry
Wall
Applications

Listed hardware mullion or Steelcraft hollow
metal mullion
Strike for both leafs
Closer for both leafs
Approved hinges
MU
Narrow
Double
Rabbet
Approvals
Three sided frames for double egress

Double Egress frames are designed to separate corridors into fire areas. The frame incorporates a pair of doors, which swing in opposite
directions, without the use of a center mullion. Once the door and frame are installed, the doors line up in the center of the frame.
FE Series Double Egress Frames: The jamb profile reduces the corridor width by 5-14 (133mm). Swing clear hinges cannot be
used with a standard FE Series frame. A special profile FE Series frame can accommodate swing clear hinges.
DE Series Double Egress Frames: The DE Series frame is designed to maximize corridor clear opening width. The jamb profile
accommodates the use of swing clear hinges which is a major consideration in areas where the code requires a minimum clear
opening width in corridor applications.
Maximum
Rating
Frame Series
Wall
Series Jamb Depth
Corner
Applications
Listings
Maximum Sizes
(Door Opening)
Min.
Max.
KD
Weld
UL
ITS/WHI
FM
5-3/4
14
80 x 100
80 x 100
Not Listed
5-3/4
14
N.A,
80 x 100
80 x 100
Not Listed

Stud
FE16, FE14

DE16, DE14

(Notes #3,4)
5-3/4
14
80 x 80
80 x 80
Not Listed
5-3/4
14
N.A.
80 x 80
80 x 80
Not Listed
5-3/4
14
80 x 100
80 x 100
Not Listed
5-3/4
14
N.A.
80 x 100
80 x 100
Not Listed
3 Hr
Masonry
FE16, FE14
Max

DE16, DE14
1-1/2 Hr
Masonry/Stud
(Notes #3,4)
FE16, FE14
(90 min)
DE16, DE14
Max
Notes:
Double Egress frame options
1. Frames over 90 in height and installed in stud walls require the jamb anchors to be welded to the frame.
2. Net head width is 1/8 narrower than standard double door frames.
3. Surface or concealed vertical rod FEH is the only approved latching hardware.
4. DE Series frame depth refers to the frame depth of the head section.
5. DE Series frames must be supplied welded
6. Mullions are not approved
Masonry
Wall
Applications
Stud Wall
(Drywall)
Applications
FE and DE Series Double Egress Frame Construction

Head
Jambs
FE Double Egress
Jambs
Head
DE Double Egress
Vertical rod on both leaves

Closers both leaves
Approved hinges
311
Approvals
Three sided frames for multiple door openings

Multiple opening frames include 3 or more doors in one frame and are usually used in corridor applications which lead to theater or
arena locations.
Maximum
Rating
Frame Series
Listings
Wall
Series Jamb Depth
Corner
Maximum Sizes
Applications (Overall frame Width & Height)
Min.
Max.
KD
Weld
UL
IT S/WHI
FM
4-3/4
14
N.A.
128 x 84
128 x 84
Not Listed
4-3/4
14
N.A.
128 x 84
128 x 84
Not Listed
4-3/4
14
N.A.
128 x 84
128 x 84
Not Listed
1-1/2 Hr
F16, F14
Masonry/Stud
(90 min)
MU16, MU14
Max

FN16, FN14
Masonry
Notes:
Three sided frame options for multiple door openings:
1. Frames must be welded
2. Hollow metal hinge mullions must be welded in place
3. Face dimensions:
Jambs & head 4 maximum
Mullion face dimensions = 2 minimum 4 maximum
4. Elevation options:
Single doors
40 x 80 max door size
Double doors (vertical mullion optional)
80 x 80 max door size
doors must swing in same direction
Frames can not include transoms or side lights or panels
F Series and FN Series Frame Construction

F
F
Double
Rabbet
Single
Rabbet
FN
Stud Wall
(Drywall)
Applications
Masonry
Wall
Applications
Strike for each leafs

Closer for each leafs
Approved hinges
Double
Rabbet

MU
MU
Double
Rabbet
Narrow
Double
Rabbet
Elevation Variations
Single Door Applications
312
Single and Double Door Applications
Double Door Applications
Approvals
Three sided frames for dutch door frames

Dutch door frames are designed for use with Steelcraft labeled dutch doors, and are used in storeroom areas.
Maximum
Rating
Wall
Applications
Frame Series
Listings
Jamb Depth
Corner
Maximum Sizes
(Door Openings)
Series
Min.
3 HR
Masonry
KD
Weld
UL
ITS/WH
FM
F16, F14
20
40 x 72 Single
40 x 72 Single
40 x 72 Single
FN16, FN14
4-1/2
14
40 x 72 Single
40 x 72 Single
40 x 72 Single
Stud
F16,F14
14
40 x 72 Single
40 x 72 Single
40 x 72 Single
Masonry/Stud
MU16, MU14
3-1/2
14
N.A.
40 x 72 Single
40 x 72 Single
Not Listed
Masonry/Stud
MU16, MU14
3-1/2
14
40 x 72
40 x 72
Not Listed
Max
1-1/2 HR
Max.
(90 Min)
Max
Notes:
Three sided frame options for dutch doors:
1. Strike preparations are required for both the top and bottom leafs,
unless the top leaf latches into the bottom leaf.
2. 4 Face heads are approved for all applications
F
Double
Rabbet
F
Single
Rabbet
FN
Double
Rabbet
Masonry
Wall
Applications
Stud Wall
(Drywall)
Applications

MU
Double
Rabbet
MU
Narrow
Double
Rabbet
Strike for top and bottom leaf (see note 1).

Closers (top leaf)
Approved hinges
313
Approvals
Three sided communicating frames

Communicating openings: an application including a door(s) mounted in both rabbets, usually used in the Hospitality markets and
installed between adjoining rooms.
Maximum
Rating
Wall
Applications
Frame Series
Series
Jamb Depth
Min.
3 HR
Masonry
Listings
Maximum Sizes
Corner
Max.
KD
Weld
(Door Openings)
UL
ITS/WH
FM
F16, F14
4-1/2
20
40 x 100
40 x 100
40 x 80
FN16, FN14
4-1/2
14
40 x 100
40 x 100
40 x 80
MU16, MU14
4-1/2
14
40 x 50
40 x 50
Not Listed
F16, F14
4-1/2
14
40 x 80
40 x 80
40 x 80
MU16, MU14
4-1/2
14
N.A.
40 x 80
40 x 80
Not Listed
F16, F14
4-1/2
14
40 x 100
40 x 100
40 x 80
(90 Min)
MU16, MU14
4-1/2
14
40 x 90
40 x 90
Not Listed
Max
DW16, DW14
4-1/2
14
N.A.
40 x 90
40 x 810
40 x 80
K16, K14
4-1/2
14
N.A.
40 x 90
40 x 810
40 x 80
Max
Stud
1-1/2 Hr
Stud
Notes:
Three sided frame options for single doors:
1. Frames over 90 in height and installed in stud walls require the jamb anchors to be welded to the frame.
3. The IBC currently allows for the omission of closers on communicating door assemblies in hotel/motel applications.
4. For DW & K Series, doors must be hung on opposite jambs.
F
Double
Rabbet
FN
Stud Wall
(Drywall)
Applications
Masonry
Wall
Applications
Double
Rabbet

MU
Double
Rabbet

1. Strike for single point latch
2. Closer (see note 2)
3. Approved hinges
DW
K
Double
Rabbet
314
Profile variations
Frame profile variations

The following frame profile variations or options may be specified on 3 sided frames and are approved as noted below by UL, ITS/WH
and FM. For hourly ratings and approved opening sizes, refer to the appropriate frame applications pages of this manual.
Frame Applications

Profile
Single swing
Pairs
Pairs with

Variation
Removable
Mullion
Double
Egress
Multiple
Opening
Hospital Stops

F, FN, MU,
DW, K
F, FN, MU,
N. A.
N. A.
F, MU
DW, K

Equal Rabbet

F, FN, MU,
DW, K
F, FN, MU,
DW, K,
Lead Lined*
F, MU
F, MU
Dutch
(Single swing)
F, MU
F, FN, MU,
N. A.
F, MU
F, MU
DW, K
N. A.
N. A.
N. A.
N. A.
*For masonry wire anchoring applications only with all others being subject to the authority having jurisdiction.
F
Double
Rabbet
F
Single
Rabbet
FN
Double
Rabbet

MU
Double
Rabbet
MU
Narrow
Double
Rabbet

DW
K
Double
Rabbet
DW
K
Narrow
Double
Rabbet
315
316
Fire rated products: Doors
General information
DOORS
Doors
Fire rated steel doors
Doors covered in this section have been tested in accordance with NFPA252 & UL10c, and listed by either Underwriters Laboratories
(UL), Warnock Hersey (IT/WHI) or FM (FM). The ratings and sizes available are shown on the following pages.
Listed Steelcraft doors are for all commercial building applications. Variations in hardware and glass lights must be considered in the
selection of the correct door construction.
Lights
Fire rated doors can be prepared for listed glass lights. The required hourly rating will dictate the approved glass lights available.
(NOTE: Glass manufacturers listings and local/project-specific code requirements should be confirmed for each project. Maximum
sizes will vary per rating/manufacturer.) Basic guidelines on glass are as follows:
3 hour
Standard listed wire glass cannot be used.
Firelite or other appropriately listed glass:
FM maintains no glass with 3-hour rating.
UL & ITS/WH allow one (1) light with 100 in2 (.06 m2) maximum visible glass. Maximum visible width of 12 (305 mm),
maximum height of 33 (838 mm).
1-1/2 hour
Standard listed wire glass: one (1) light with 100 in2 per door leaf max.
FM maintains one (1) light with 100 in2 per door leaf max.
UL & ITS/WH available up to 1850 in2 max visible glass per light, max width 36, max height 54 (Dezigner trim max area is
1296 in2). Multiple lights permitted:
UL: provided each light does not exceed the 1850 in2 maximum.
ITS/WH: provided each light does not exceed the 1850 in2 max: maximum combined glass area may not exceed the
published maximum glass area listing of the glass manufacturer.
1 hour (UL or ITS/WH only)
Standard listed wire glass: one (1) light with 100 in2 per door leaf max.
Available up to 2700 in2 max visible glass per light, max width 36, max height 78 (Dezigner trim max height 54,
max area 1296 in2)
Multiple lights permitted
3/4 hour
Standard listed wire glass:
1296 in2 max visible glass per light, max width 36, max height 54. Multiple lights permitted, provided each light does not
exceed the 1296 in2 maximum.
FM maintains 1296 in2 per door light max: multiple lights permitted, provided the 1296 in2 maximum per light is
not exceeded.
UL & ITS/WH available up to 2700 in2 max visible glass per light, max width 36, max height 78 (Dezigner trim max height
54, max area 1296 in2).
Multiple lights permitted.
20 minutes without hose stream test: (UL&ITS/WH only)
Standard listed wire glass:
2700 in2 max visible glass per light, max width 36, max height 78 (Dezigner trim max height 54, max area 1296 in2).
Louvers
Fire rated door can be prepared for one listed fire rated louver located in the bottom half of the door. Doors with louvers can only be
located in equipment and mechanical areas of the building. FM does not allow the use of louvers in fire rated doors. Basic guidelines
on louvers for UL & ITS/WH are as follows:
3/4 hour, 1 hour and 1-1/2 hour listings.
24 x 24 maximum louver size
Glass lights can not be used in conjunction with louvers
Door viewers

1-1/2 hour maximum fire listings.

3/4 maximum hole size.
2 viewer preps maximum per door, minimum 12 apart.
317
General information
Doors (continued)
Approved door series
Regardless of the door series being used, all doors must be installed with labeled hardware, and into labeled frames and firewalls.
Door constructions covered in this section are listed below:
A14 Series: full glass with beveled edges

B Series: welded steel stiffened core with beveled edges
CE Series: laminated core with beveled edges and panel embossed face sheets
H & HE Series: specifically designed for hurricane code applications
L Series: laminated core with beveled edges and either honeycomb or polystyrene cores
PW Series: specifically designed for tornado code applications. Glass lights not available.
SL Series: laminated core with square edges and either honeycomb or polystyrene cores
T Series: specially designed for maximum 250 F or 450 F temperature rise applications. 100 in2 max visible listed glass.
TH Series: 250F or 450F temperature rise for hurricane code applications - 100 in2 max visible listed glass
LS Series: laminated core with beveled edges and stainless steel face sheets
Door light designs

Fire rated doors are available in the following door designs:
F = Flush door with no glass cutout. 3 hour maximum listing.

V = Vision light with a nominal 100 in2 located in the upper half of the door. 3 hour maximum listing with appropriately listed glass
(UL & WH). 1-1/2 hour maximum listing (FM, or standard wire glass).
N3, N4, N5 = Narrow light variations, which are 100 in2 exposed glass area, and located at eye level, near the lock edge.
3 hour maximum listing with appropriately listed glass (UL & WH). 1-1/2 hour maximum listing (FM, or standard wire glass).
N = Narrow light varies with the door height, exceeds 100 in2 of exposed glass area, and is located near the lock edge. 1-1/2 hour
maximum listing with appropriately listed glass (UL & WH). 3/4 hour maximum listing (FM, or standard wire glass).
LNL = Long narrow light, exceeds 54 visible glass height. 1 hour maximum listing with appropriately listed glass (UL & WH).
Fire rating not available with standard wire glass, or with FM label.
G = Half glass light (size will vary with the door size) located in the upper half of the door. 1-1/2 hour maximum listing with
appropriately listed glass (UL & WH). 3/4 hour maximum listing (FM, or standard wire glass).
FG = Full glass light. 1 hour maximum listing on L, A14 & H Series doors.
Door viewers = Must be fire rated construction. 1-1/2 hour maximum. 3/4 diameter hole maximum.
FG2 / FG3 = Full glass with multiple lights (size will vary with the door size). 1-1/2 hour maximum listing with appropriately listed
glass (UL & WH: see notes on WH limitations on page 317). 3/4 hour maximum listing (FM, or standard wire glass).
Temperature rise ratings

The Steelcraft doors are rated for temperature rise as follows:
T & TH series: 250F or 450F temperature rise @ 30 minutes

All other series: > 650F @ 30 minutes

such as glass lights, hardware, wall construction and application will affect the fire ratings. Individual manufacturer listings will
take precedence.
Installation
Installation of all Steelcraft doors shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI/SDI A250.11
Recommended Installation Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA 840. All fire rated frames must be installed in accordance
with NFPA Pamphlet 80, and/or the local AHJ.
Note: When steel top caps (screw-in) are applied to a fire labeled door with a continuous hinge prep or pocket pivots, the fire
certification label is located underneath the cap. See other cap options and label locations in Top & bottom caps on page 156.
318
Approvals
Single doors with single point locks and latches

UL
L18, L16
40 x 100
40 x 100
40 x 80
L14
40 x 100
40 x 72
40 x 80
LS18, LS16
N/A
40 x 80
N/A
B18, B16
40 x 100
N/A
N/A
T18, T16, T14
40 x 90
N/A
40 x 80
T20
30 x 80
N/A
N/A
SL18
40 x 80
40 x 80
N/A
B14
40 x 80
N/A
N/A
TH16, TH14
40 x 80
N/A
N/A
H16, H14
40 x 80
N/A
N/A
HE16 (E6)
30 x 80
N/A
N/A
CE18, CE16 (E6)
30 x 80
N/A
N/A
L-20
30 x 72
30 x 72
N/A
SL-20
30 x 72
30 x 72
N/A
CE18, CE16
(HD2, HD2A)
38 x 70
N/A
N/A
CE18* (E6)
38 x 70
N/A
N/A
HE16 (E6)
30 x 70
N/A
N/A
CE20 (E6)
30 x 70
N/A
N/A
CE18, CE16 (E6)
30 x 70
N/A
N/A
Hr
1-1/2
L18, L16
40 x 100
40 x 100
40 x 80
(90 min)

Max

B14
40 x 100
N/A
N/A
L20
30 x 80
30 x 80
N/A
SL20
30 x 80
30 x 80
N/A
CE20 (E6)
30 x 80
N/A
N/A
A14 (FG2, FG3)
40 x 80
N/A
N/A
A14 (FG)
40 x 80
N/A
N/A
Maximum
Rating
Maximum Door Size

ITS/WHI
Door
Series
3 Hr
Max
1-1/2 Hr
(90 min) Max
1 Hr
(60 min) Max
FM
Single point lock/latch

Example: 161, 61L, 160, 160-4,
86, 86ED, 86 w/sectional trim
Closer
Approved hinges
Notes:
1. For maximum rating and glass size requirements refer to glass light
information
* 2. Embossed 6 panel CE18 series door design is available and listed up to and
including 38 x 70 door size. All other CE Series doors designs are available
as noted above.
319
Approvals
Single doors with fire exit hardware

Maximum
Rating
Maximum Door Size

ITS/WHI
Door
Series
UL
L18, L16
40 x 100
40 x 80
40 x 80
L14
40 x 100
40 x 72
40 x 80
B18, B16
40 x 100
N/A
N/A
T18, T16, T14
40 x 90
N/A
40 x 80
SL18
40 x 80
40 x 80
N/A
B14
40 x 80
N/A
N/A
TH16, TH14
40 x 80
N/A
N/A
H16, H14
40 x 80
N/A
N/A
T20
30 x 80
N/A
N/A
HE16 (E6)
30 x 80
N/A
N/A
CE18, CE16 (E6)
30 x 80
N/A
N/A
L20
30 x 72
30 x 72
N/A
SL20
30 x 72
30 x 72
N/A
HE16 (E6)
30 x 70
N/A
N/A
CE20
30 x 70
N/A
N/A
CE18, CE16 (E6)
30 x 70
N/A
N/A
CE18 (E6)
38 x 70
N/A
N/A
LS 18, LS16
N/A
40 x 80
N/A
CE18, CE16
(HD 2 & HD2A)
38 x 70
N/A
N/A
3 Hr Max

FM
1-1/2 Hr
L18, L16
40 x 100
40 x 100
40 x 80
(90 min) Max
B14
40 x 100
N/A
N/A
CE20 (E6)
30 x 80
N/A
N/A
A14, (FG2, FG3)
40 x 80
N/A
N/A
A14 (FG)
40 x 80
N/A
N/A
1-1/2 Hr
(90 min) Max
1 Hr
Minimum Hardware
Requirements:
RPD or MPD Fire Exit

Hardware
Closer
Approved hinges
(60 min) Max
Notes:
1. For maximum rating and glass size requirements refer to glass light information
320
Approvals
Pairs with astragal: Swing in the same direction

Active Leaf: single point lock or latch
Maximum
Rating
3 Hr
Max
Inactive leaf: closed back strike and surface or flush bolts

Coordinator required
Door
Series

UL
Maximum Door Size

ITS/WHI
L18, L16
80 x 80
80 x 80
80 x 80
L14
80 x 80
80 x 72
80 x 80
SL18
80 x 80
80 x 80
N/A
B18, B16, B14
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
T18, T16, T14
80 x 90
N/A
80 x 80
TH16, TH14
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
H16, H14
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
T20
60 x 80
N/A
N/A
HE16 (E6)
60 x 80
N/A
N/A
CE18, CE16 (E6)
60 x 80
N/A
N/A
HE16 (E6)
60 x 70
N/A
N/A
CE16 (E6)
60 x 70
N/A
N/A
CE18 (E6)
74 x 70
N/A
N/A
CE18, CE16
(HD2, HD2A)
74 x 70
N/A
N/A
LS18, LS16
N/A
80 x 80
N/A
B18, B16, B14
80 x 100
N/A
N/A
L18, L16
80 x 100
80 x 100
80 x 80
L14
80 x 90
80 x 72
80 x 80
L20
60 x 72
60 x 72
N/A
SL20
60 x 72
60 x 72
N/A
CE20 (E6)
60 x 70
N/A
N/A
A14 (FG2, FG3)
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
A14 (FG)
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
1-1/2 Hr
(90 minute)
Max
1-1/2 Hr
(90 min) Max
(60 min) Max
1 Hr
FM
ASTRAGAL
REQUIRED
Astragal Required
Active leaf

Example: 161, 61L, 160, 160-4, 86,
86ED, 86 w/sectional trim
Closer
Approved hinges
Inactive leaf
Closed back strike
Auto flush bolts
Approved hinges
Closer
Coordinator is required
Note: flush bolt sets omit bottom bolt,
using Fire Latch (pin), is acceptable per
hardware manufacturers listing approval.
Notes:
1. For maximum rating and glass size requirements refer to glass light information
321
Approvals
Pairs without astragal: Swing in the same direction

Active Leaf: single point lock or latch
Maximum
Rating
Door
Series

UL
Maximum Door Size

ITS/WHI
FM

1-1/2 Hr
B18, B16, B14
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
(90 min)
L18, L16
80 x 72
80 x 72
80 x 72
Max
SL18
80 x 72
80 x 72
N/A
CE18 (E6)
74 x 70
N/A
N/A
CE16 (E6)
60 x 70
N/A
N/A
LS18, LS16
N/A
80 x 72
N/A
CE18, CE16
(HD2, HD2A)
74 x 70
N/A
N/A
Inactive leaf: closed back strike and surface or flush bolts

Notes:
information
Astragal not required

Active leaf

Example: 161, 61L, 160, 160-4,
Closer
Approved hinges
Inactive leaf
Wide inactive leaf
Closer
Strike preparation
Auto flush bolts
Approved hinges
Note: flush bolt sets omit bottom bolt,
using Fire Latch (pin), is acceptable per
322
Approvals
Pairs with astragal: Swing in the same direction

Active Leaf: Mortise FEH
Maximum
Rating
Inactive leaf: Vertical Rod FEH, closed back strike

Door
Series

UL
Maximum Door Size

ITS/WHI
L18, L16
80 x 80
80 x 80
80 x 80
L14
80 x 80
80 x 72
80 x 80
LS18, LS16
N/A
80 x 80
N/A
B18, B16, B14
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
T18, T16, T14
80 x 90
N/A
80 x 80
CE18, CE16 (E6)
60 x 80
N/A
N/A
CE16 (E6)
60 x 70
N/A
N/A
CE18 (E6)
74 x 70
N/A
N/A
CE18, CE16
74 x 70
N/A
N/A
HD2, HD2A
3 Hr
Max

1-1/2 Hr
B18, B16, B14
80 x 100
N/A
N/A
(90 min)
L18, L16
80 x 100
80 x 100
80 x 80
L14
80 x 90
80 x 72
80 x 80
A14 (FG2, FG3)
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
A14 (FG)
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
Max
1-1/2 Hr
(90 min) Max

FM
1 Hr
(60 min) Max
Astragal Required
Minimum hardware requirements:
Active leaf
Mortise FEH
Closer
Approved hinges
Inactive leaf
Surface or concealed vertical rod FEH. (LBR)

Less Bottom Rod option is available based on
hardware manufacturers listing approval
(1-1/2 hour maximum)
Closer
Notes:
information
2. Pairs for 3 hour rating, the Inactive leaf with Surface or Concealed Vertical
rod must be top and bottom latching (NO LBR)
3. Pairs for 1-1/2 hour rating can be equipped with LBR devices if the hardware
manufacture is approved for that application.
4. Mortise Fire Exit Devices x Closed back strike, w/Surface or Flush Bolts.
Flush Bolts sets omit bottom bolt, using Fire Latch (pin), is acceptable per
hardware manufacturers listing approval
5. Open back strike not permitted on this application
Approved hinges
323
Approvals
Pairs without astragal: Swing in the same direction w/OBS

Maximum
Rating
Inactive leaf: Vertical Rod FEH, OBS (open back strike)
1-1/2 Hr
(90 min)
Max
Door
Series

UL
Maximum Door Size

ITS/WHI
FM
L18, L16, L14
80 x 72
80 x 72
80 x 72
LS18, LS16
N/A
80 x 72
N/A
SL18
80 x 72
80 x 72
N/A
B18, B16, B14
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
CE18 (E6)
74 x 70
N/A
N/A
CE18, CE16 (E6)
60 x 80
N/A
N/A
CE16 (E6)
60 x 70
N/A
N/A
74 x 70
N/A
N/A
OBS
Open Back
Strike
CE18, CE16
HD2, HD2A
Notes:
information
OBS
Without Astragal
Active leaf
Mortise FEH
Closer
Approved hinges
Inactive leaf (Wide Inactive Leaf)
Surface or concealed vertical rod FEH.

(LBR) Less Bottom Rod option is available
based on hardware manufacturers listing
approval
Open back strike preparation

Closer
Approved hinges
324
Approvals
Pairs without astragal: Swing in the same direction w/CBS

Maximum
Rating
1-1/2 Hr
Inactive leaf: Vertical Rod FEH, closed back strike (CBS)

Coordinator Required
(90 min)
Max
Door
Series

UL
Maximum Door Size

ITS/WHI
FM
L18, L16, L14
80 x 80
N/A
80 x 72
SL18
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
B18, B16, B14
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
CE18, CE16 (E6)
60 x 80
N/A
N/A
CE16 (E6)
60 x 70
N/A
N/A
CE18 (E6)
74 x 70
N/A
N/A
CE18, CE16
(HD2 & HD2A)
74 x 70
N/A
OBS
Closed Back
Strike
N/A
CBS
Without Astragal
Active leaf
Mortise FEH
Closer
Approved hinges
Surface or concealed vertical rod FEH.

Closed back strike preparation
Closer
Approved hinges
(LBR) Less Bottom Rod option is

available based on hardware
manufacturers listing approval
325
Approvals
Pairs without astragal: Swing in the same direction

Active Leaf: Vertical Rod FEH

Inactive leaf: Vertical Rod FEH
Maximum
Rating
1-1/2 Hr
Door
Series
Maximum Door Size

UL
ITS/WHI
B18, B16, B14
80 x 100
N/A
FM
N/A
(90 minute)
L18, L16
80 x 90
Max
L14
80 x 90
N/A
N/A
PW14
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
T18, T16
80 x 90
N/A
80 x 80
T14
80 x 90
N/A
N/A
SL18
80 x 80
80 x 80
N/A
TH16
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
H16
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
HE16 (E6)
60 x 80
N/A
N/A
CE18, CE16 (E6)
60 x 80
N/A
N/A
HE16 (E6)
60 x 70
N/A
N/A
CE16 (E6)
60 x 70
N/A
N/A
LS18, LS16
N/A
80 x 80
N/A
Active leaf
CE18, CE16
74 x 70
N/A
N/A
(HD2 & HD2A)
CE18 (E6)
74 x 70
N/A
N/A
A14 (FG2, FG3)
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
A14 (FG)
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
1-1/2 Hr
(90 min) Max
1 Hr
(60 min) Max
80 x 100 80 x 80
Astragal NOT allowed
Surface or concealed vertical rod FEH

Closer
Approved hinges
Notes:
1. Pairs of doors without an astragal are not listed or available for 3 hour
applications. Astragals can not be used in this hardware application.
information
3. Maximum 450F degree on all temperature rise doors.
4. Paladin (PW14-Series) tornado resistant doors require Von Duprin
WS9927(F) vertical rod FEH. LBR option is not available.

Closer
Approved hinges
(LBR) Less Bottom Rod option is available

based on hardware manufacturers listing
approval.
326
Approvals
Pairs with removable hardware mullion: Swing in the

same direction

Rim FEH x Rim FEH

Maximum
Rating
3 Hr
Door
Series
UL
Maximum Door Size

ITS/WHI
FM
L18, L16
80 x 100 80 x 80
80 x 80
80 x 100 80 x 72
80 x 80
Max
L14
SL18
80 x 80
80 x 80
N/A
B18, B16
80 x 100
N/A
N/A
B14
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
H16, H14
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
T18, T16, T14
80 x 90
N/A
80 x 80
T20
60 x 80
N/A
N/A
CE18, CE16 (E6)
60 x 80
N/A
N/A
L20
60 x 72
60 x 72
N/A
SL20
60 x 72
60 x 72
N/A
HE16 (E6)
60 x 80
N/A
N/A
CE20, CE16 (E6)
60 x 70
N/A
N/A
LS18, LS16
N/A
80 x 80
N/A
CE18, CE16
74 x 70
N/A
N/A
(HD2 & HD2A)
CE18 (E6)
74 x 70
N/A
N/A

1-1/2 Hr
(90 min)
Max
L18, L16
80 x 100 80 x 90
RHM
Removable
Hardware
Mullion
Removable Hardware Mullion

RPD, Rim FEH
Approved hinges
Closer
Fire rated and listed removable
hardware mullion
80 x 80
B14
80 x 100
N/A
N/A
A14, (FG2, FG3)
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
A14 (FG)
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
1-1/2 Hr
(90 min) Max
1 Hr
(60 min) Max
Notes:
1. Pairs of doors with removable mullions are treated and
listed as 2 single doors
2. For maximum rating and glass size requirements refer to
glass light information
3. Removable mullions must be listed. Maximum door size
depends on the hardware manufacturers approved and
listed mullion height.
327
Approvals
Pairs with Steelcraft removable mullion: Swing in the

same direction
Applications:
1. Single point lock or latch x single point lock or latch
2. Mortise or Rim FEH x Mortise or Rim FEH
Maximum
Rating
1-1/2 Hr
Maximum Door Size

ITS/WHI
RSM
Door
Series

UL
L18, L16
40 x 80
40 x 80
40 x 80
(90 minute)
LS18, LS16
N/A
40 x 80
N/A
Max
SL18
40 x 80
40 x 80
N/A
L14
40 x 80
40 x 72
40 x 80
B18, B16, B14
40 x 80
N/A
N/A
T20
30 x 80
N/A
N/A
T18, T16, T14
40 x 80
N/A
40 x 80
CE18, CE16 (E6)
30 x 80
N/A
N/A
CE20 (E6)
30 x 70
N/A
N/A
CE18 (E6)
38 x 70
N/A
N/A
CE18, CE16
HD2, HD2A
38 x 70
N/A
N/A
L20 Sgl. Pt. Lock
30 x 80
30 x 80
N/A
L20 Rim/Mort Panic
30 x 72
30 x 72
NzA
A14

(FG2, FG3)
40 x 80
N/A
N/A
A14 (FG)
40 x 80
N/A
N/A
1-1/2 Hr
(90 min) Max
1 Hr
Removable
Steelcraft
Mullion
FM
Removable Steelcraft Mullion
1. SINGLE POINT LATCH

Minimum Hardware requirements:
Example:161, 61L, 160, 160-4,
Closer
Approved hinges
(60 min) Max
RSM
Removable
Steelcraft
Mullion
Notes:
1. Pairs of doors with removable mullions are treated and listed as 2 single
doors.
2. Minimum rating and glass size requirements refer to glass light information
3. AN series available with Rim Fire Exit hardware only
4. Steelcraft single or double rabbet Hollow Metal Mullion
Removable Steelcraft Mullion
2. RIM or MORTISE FEH

Rim or Mortise FEH

Example: RPD, 86EDR
Listed FEH per manufacturers listings
Closer
Approved hinges
328
Approvals
Double egress pairs with astragal: Swing in opposite direction

1. Vertical Rod FEH: Both doors active
2. Non-latching, for cross-corridor smoke barrier. Both doors active.

UL
B18, B16
80 x 100
N/A
N/A
Max
L18, L16
80 x 80
80 x 72
80 x 80
LS18, LS16
N/A
80 x 72
N/A
SL18
80 x 80
80 x 72
N/A
B14
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
T18, T16, T14
80 x 90
N/A
N/A

1-1/2 Hr
B14
80 x 100
N/A
N/A
(90 min)
L18, L16
80 x 90
80 x 80
80 x 80
L14
80 x 90
N/A
N/A
A14
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
SL18
80 x 80
80 x 80
N/A
L18, L16
N/A
80 x 90
N/A
SL18
N/A
80 x 80
N/A
Maximum
Rating
Maximum Door Size

ITS/WHI
Door
Series
3 Hr
Max
Cross-corridor

smoke barrier

FM
Notes:
information
2. Less Bottom Rod (LBR) option is available based on MFG Hardware
listing approval
3. Refer to Technical Data Manual for cross-corridor smoke barrier
requirement and limitations.
ASTRAGAL
REQUIRED
With Astragal
Non-latching for cross-corridor

smoke barrier only
Closers
Approved hinges
329
Approvals
Double egress pairs without astragal: Swing in opposite direction

Vertical Rod FEH
Maximum
Rating
Vertical Rod FEH
1-1/2 Hr
(90 minute)
Max
Maximum Door Size

ITS/WHI
Door
Series

UL
L18, L16
80 x 80
80 x 80
80 x 80
LS18, LS16
N/A
80 x 80
N/A
SL18
80 x 80
80 x 80
N/A
B18, B16, B14
80 x 80
N/A
N/A
FM
Notes:
information
2. (Less Bottom Rod LBR) option is available base on MFG Hardware listing
approval
Without Astragal

Closers
Approved hinges
330
Approvals
Single dutch doors with single point locks & latches
Maximum Door Size

ITS/WHI
Maximum
Rating
Door
Series

UL
3 Hr
L18, L16
40 x 72
Max
40 x 72
FM
40 x 72
Horizontal
Astragal
on top leaf
Notes:
1. Door construction with honeycomb or polystyrene cores.
2. Maximum exposed glass light 100 square inches for doors 1-1/2 hour rated
or less. Limited to one light in top leaf.
3. Top leaf must have a listed cylindrical lock, latching into strike jamb or into
bottom leaf.
4. Bottom leaf must have a listed cylindrical lock or mortise lock design.
5. Dutch door shelf is optional, approved for 1/2 shelf only.
6. Dutch Door can only be used in single door applications. No double door
configurations.
Top leaf latches into either

strike jamb or bottom leaf
Top leaf
Listed cylindrical lock or latch

Closer
Approved hinges
Bottom leaf
Listed lock or latch
331
Approvals
Single doors with fire rated louvers

WITH SINGLE POINT LOCKS AND LATCHES

Maximum
Rating
1-1/2 Hr
OR
3/4 Hr

(45 minute)
FM
40 x 100 N/A
N/A
L18, L16
40 x 100
40 x 100
N/A
L14
40 x 100
40 x 72
N/A
SL18
40 x 80
40 x 80
N/A
L20
30 x 80
30 x 80
N/A
SL20
30 x 80
30 x 80
N/A
H16, H14
40 x 80
N/A
N/A
B18, B16, B14
(90 minute),
1 Hr (60 minute)
Maximum Door Size

ITS/WHI
Door
Series

UL
Notes:
1. L Door construction with honeycomb or polystyrene cores.
2. Louver must be a listed fusible link louver.
3. Louver must be located at the bottom of the door. Only one per door,
maximum size 24 x 24.
4. Louvers permitted in 1-1/2, 1 or 3/4 hour rated doors only.
5. Doors can not include glass lights.
6. Minimum 12 from bottom of door to cut out.

Single door

Example -161, 61L, 160, 160-4,
86, 86ED
Closer
Approved hinges
332
Approvals
Pairs with fire rated louvers & astragal: Swing in same direction
WITH SINGLE POINT LOCKS AND LATCHES
Maximum
Rating
1-1/2 Hr
(90 minute),
1 Hr
(60 minute)
OR
3/4 Hr

(45 minute)

Maximum Door Size

ITS/WHI
Door
Series

UL
B18, B16, B14
80 x 100
N/A
N/A
L18, L16
80 x 100
80 x 100
N/A
L14
80 x 90
80 x 72
N/A
SL18
80 x 80
80 x 80
N/A
L20
60 x 72
60 x 72
N/A
SL20
60 x 72
60 x 72
N/A
FM
NOTES:
1. L Door construction with honeycomb or polystyrene cores.
2. Louver must be a listed fusible link louver.
3. Louver must be located at the bottom of the door. Only one per door,
maximum size 24 x 24.
4. Pairs require an Astragal.
5. Louvers permitted in 1-1/2, 1 or 3/4 hour rated doors only.
6. Doors can not include glass lights.
7. Minimum 12 from bottom of door to cut out.
8. Flush Bolts sets omit bottom bolt, using Fire Latch (pin), is acceptable per
Astragal Required
Active leaf

Closer
Approved hinges
Inactive leaf
Strike preparation
Flush, surface auto bolts
Approved hinges
333
334
Fire rated products: Transom and side lights and/or panels
General information
Transom and sidelight frame

Typical Elevations
Sidelight Frame
Sidelight Frame
Transom/Sidelight Frame
Transom Frames with Bar
Fire rated transom and sidelights

The transom and sidelight frames covered in this section, have been tested in accordance with UL 10C, NFPA 252 - 1999 and listed by
either Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Warnock Hersey (ITS/WHI) and FM Global (FM). The ratings and sizes available are shown on
the following pages.
Labeled transom and sidelight frames are welded prior to arriving at the jobsite and are available in the following configurations:
Transom Light frame: A frame assembly which includes a fixed horizontal transom bar, and a light (window) directly above the
door. The transom bar separates the door opening from the transom light. The door opening can be for:
Single door latching into end jamb or window/panel mullion
Two single doors with a center mullion
Rim FEH latching into hardware manufacturers mullion
Lock/latch sets latching into hollow metal mullion
Double (pair) door without a mullion & swinging in same direction
Sidelight frame: A frame assembly which includes both a fixed vertical mullion bar, and a light (window) adjacent to one or both
sides of the door. The mullion bar separates the door opening from the side light. The door opening can be for:
Transom and Sidelight frame: A frame assembly which includes a fixed horizontal transom bar, and a light directly above the
door, and a fixed vertical mullion bar, and a light adjacent to one or both sides of the door. The door opening can be for:

Frames covered in this section are F and MU. Regardless of the frame series being used, all frames must be installed into a fire rated wall.
Size limitations
Transom and side light frames must be shipped as welded units. Frames may be field spliced. For splicing details, refer to the
Elevation Section of this manual. Maximum width, height and ratings shown on the following pages.

such as hardware, wall construction and application will affect the fire ratings. Individual manufacturers listings will take precedence.
All listings shown on this section conform to UL 10C and NFPA 252.
Installation
Recommended Installation Instructions for Steel Frames and ANSI A250.11 and HMMA 840. All fire rated frames and doors
must be installed in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80, and/or the local AHJ.
335
Approvals
Transom sidelight frame with glass and/or 12 Steelcraft

laminated steel panels

Maximum
Wall

Rating
Application
Series

1-1/2 Hr
(90 min)
Max
Frame Information
Min.
Max.
UL
ITS/WHI
FM
14
136 x 122
136 x 122
N/A
Masonry
F16, F14
Masonry
MU16, MU14
3-1/2
14
136 x 122
136 x 122
N/A
Stud
F16, F14
3-3/4
14
132 x 122
132 x 122
N/A
Stud
MU16, MU14
3-3/4
14
132 x 122
132 x 122
N/A
Notes:
1. All frames must be shipped as welded units. Frames can be field spliced.
2. Door opening:
All frames can be prepared for use with a single or double door.
Maximum single door size = 40 x 100.
Maximum double door size = Max. 80 x 100.
Double door can be with or without vertical mullion.
Frame can have up to two single door openings or one pair door opening.
Pair opening doors must swing in same direction.
3. Glazing requirements:
All glass must be listed glazing material.
1/2 thick laminated panels with mineral board core. Panel sizes are as
follows:
a. Transom panels = 96 wide x 38 high
b. Side panels = 38 wide x 96 high
Glazing stop/bead requirements:
a. Stop width minimum 7/16 or as required by glazing manufacturer.
b. Stop height minimum 5/8 or as required by glazing manufacturer.
c. Glazing bead minimum 18 gauge, or as required by glazing
manufacturer.
4. Special profile may be necessary due to special thickness of glazing.
5. Frame profile variations:
Perimeter (Head and Jambs) frame
a. Masonry walls = minimum face 1 (FN)
b. Stud walls = minimum face 1-1/4
c. Maximum face 4 masonry, steel or wood stud walls.
Interior dividing members
a. Members at door opening minimum face 1.
b. Vertical maximum face 4-1/2
c. Horizontal maximum 8.
Sill section Minimum Face 2, maximum 16-1/8
6. The use and installation of frames with 1-1/2 hour (90 minute) ratings are
subject to the approval of the local AHJ. These assemblies are tested and
listed in accordance with UL10C and NFPA 252. Fire-protection-rated glazing
materials must be installed in these assemblies. These assemblies are
not tested in accordance with ASTM E119 or UL 263 (Fire Tests of Building
Construction and Materials) and use of Fire-resistance-rated glazing materials
will not make the frame compliant with ASTM E119 or UL 263.
Transom Frame / Sidelite Frame assemblies are tested and listed for fire
protection in accordance with UL10C and NFPA 252. Where fire protection
ratings are required, fire protection rated glazing shall be installed. The
installation of fire resistance rated glazing does not qualify these assemblies
for compliance with ASTM E119 or UL 263. The use and installation of transom
sidelite frames are subject to approval of the AHJ.
336
Listings
Jamb Depth Maximum Overall Frame Width & Height
Typical Elevation
Glass or
Steel
Panel
Glass or
Steel
Panel
Glass or
Steel
Panel
Glass or
Steel
Panel
Glass or
Steel
Panel
Glass or
Steel
Panel
Glass or
Steel
Panel
Door Opening
Dimension
Masonry Walls
Glass or
Steel
Panel
Glass or
Steel
Panel
Glass or
Steel
Panel
Glass or
Steel
Panel
Glass or
Steel
Panel
Glass or
Steel
Panel
Glass or
Steel
Panel
Door Opening
Dimension
Drywall Partitions
Approvals
Transom sidelight frame with glass and/or 1 34 Rated wood panels

Maximum
Wall

Rating
Application
Series

1-1/2 Hr
(90 min)
Max
Frame Information
Listings

Min.
Max.
UL
ITS/WHI
FM
Masonry
F16, F14
4-3/4
12-3/4
136 x 122
136 x 122
N/A
Masonry
MU16, MU14
4-3/4
12-3/4
136 x 122
136 x 122
N/A

Stud
F16, F14
4-3/4
12-3/4
132 x 122
132 x 122
N/A
Stud
MU16, MU14
4-3/4
12-3/4
132 x 122
132 x 122
N/A
Notes:
1. All frames must be shipped as welded units. Frames can be field spliced.
2. Door opening:
All frames can be prepared for use with a single or double door.
Maximum single door size = 40 x 100.
Maximum double door size = Max. 80 x 100.
Double door can be with or without vertical mullion.
Frame can have up to two single door openings or one pair door opening.
Pair opening doors must swing in same direction.
3. Wood doors and panels:
Maximum width, height, and rating based on wood door manufacturers
listing.
c. Glazing bead minimum 18 gauge, or as required by glazing manufacturer.
Perimeter (Head and Jambs) frame.
a. Masonry walls = minimum face 1 (FN).
b. Stud walls = minimum face 1-1/4.
c. Maximum face 4 masonry, steel or wood stud walls.
Interior dividing members .
a. Members at door opening minimum face 1.
b. Vertical maximum face 4-1/2.
Sill section Minimum face 2, maximum 16-1/8.
7. Wood panels can be used in conjunction with metal panels or glass.
8. Maximum jamb depth:
14 if any glass is installed.
12-3/4 if all wood panels.
9. The use and installation of frames with 1-1/2 hour (90 minute) ratings are
subject to the approval of the local AHJ. These assemblies are tested and
listed in accordance with UL10C and NFPA 252. Fire-protection-rated glazing
materials must be installed in these assemblies. These assemblies are
not tested in accordance with ASTM E119 or UL 263 (Fire Tests of Building
Construction and Materials) and use of Fire-resistance-rated glazing materials
will not make the frame compliant with ASTM E119 or UL 263.
Transom Frame / Sidelite Frame assemblies are tested and listed for fire
protection in accordance with UL10C and NFPA 252. Where fire protection
ratings are required, fire protection rated glazing shall be installed. The
installation of fire resistance rated glazing does not qualify these assemblies
for compliance with ASTM E119 or UL 263. The use and installation of transom
sidelite frames are subject to approval of the AHJ.
Typical Elevation
Glass or
Wood
Panel
Glass or
Wood
Panel
Glass or
Wood
Panel
Glass or
Wood
Panel
Glass or
Wood
Panel
Glass or
Wood
Panel
Glass or
Wood
Panel
Door Opening
Dimension
Masonry Walls
Glass or
Wood
Panel
Glass or
Wood
Panel
Glass or
Wood
Panel
Glass or
Wood
Panel
Glass or
Wood
Panel
Glass or
Wood
Panel
Glass or
Wood
Panel
Door Opening
Dimension
Drywall Partitions
337
Approvals
Transom frame without transom bar (1 34 wood panel installations)

Maximum
Rating
1-1/2 Hr
(90 min)
Max
Frame Information
Wall
Application
Series
Jamb Depth
Min.
Listings
Maximum Door and Panel Opening Width & Height
Max.
UL
ITS/WHI
FM
Masonry
F16, F14
4-3/4 12-3/4
40 x 110
40 x 110
N/A
Masonry
FN16, FN14
4-3/4 12-3/4
40 x 110
40 x 110
N/A
MU16, MU14
4-3/4 12-3/4
40 x 110
40 x 110
N/A
Masonry

Stud
F16, F14
4-3/4 12-3/4
40 x 110
40 x 110
N/A
Stud
MU16, MU14
4-3/4 12-3/4
40 x 110
40 x 110
N/A
Notes:
1. Sizes may vary based on wood door manufacturers listings.
2. F Series frames can be knocked down (KD)
Typical Elevation
3. MU Series must be shipped as welded units.

4. Maximum door size:
Single doors = see wood door manufacturers listing.

Double doors = not approved
Wood Transom Panel

Without Transom Bar
5. Panel requirements:
1-3/4 thick wood panel.

Maximum panel size = 40 wide x 40 high.
Wood panel installed with spring bolts requires
reinforcing or frame preparations.

Masonry walls = minimum face 1 (FN)
Door Opening
Dimension
Masonry Walls
Stud walls = minimum face 1-1/4

Maximum face 4 masonry, steel or wood stud walls.
7. Hardware applications:
Single door: follow standard label requirements.
8. Refer to wood panel manufacturers listing for spring bolt

attachment into the frame.
Wood Transom Panel

Without Transom Bar
Door Opening
Dimension
Drywall Partitions
See Note # 8 For Panel Attachment
338
Approvals
Transom frame without transom bar (1 34

Maximum
Wall
Rating
3 Hr
Max
Application
1-1/2 Hr
(90 min)
Steelcraft steel panel installed)
Frame Information Listings: Maximum Door and Panel Opening Width and Height
Series
Jamb Depth
Min.
Max.
UL & ITS/WHI
Single Doors
Double Doors
FM
Masonry
F16, F14
4-3/4 12-3/4
40 x 112
80 x 112
N/A
Masonry
FN16, FN14
4-3/4 12-3/4
40 x 112
80 x 112
N/A

Masonry
MU16, MU14
4-3/4 12-3/4
40 x 112
80 x 112
N/A

Stud
F16, F14
4-3/4 12-3/4
40 x 100
80 x 100
N/A
Stud
MU16, MU14
4-3/4 12-3/4
40 x 100
80 x 100
N/A
Notes:
1. F Series frames can be knocked down(KD)
Typical Elevation
2. MU Series must be shipped as welded units.

3. Maximum door size:
Single doors = 4080i

Double doors = 8080 must swing in same direction
4. Panel requirements:
1-3/4 thick steel panel
1-3/4 Steelcraft
Steel Panel
Without Transom Bard
Flat Astragal
Required
Maximum panel size:

Single doors = 48 wide x 48 high
Double doors = 96 wide x 48 high
Door Opening
Dimension
Masonry walls = minimum face 1 (FN)
Masonry Walls
Stud walls = minimum face 1-1/4

Maximum face 4 masonry, steel or wood stud walls.
6. Hardware applications:
Single door: follow standard label requirements.

Double doors: limited to flush bolts x single point latch or
Mortise FEH.
1-3/4 Steelcraft
Steel Panel
Without Transom Bard
Flat Astragal
Required
Door Opening
Dimension
Drywall Partitions
339
340
Fire rated products: Fire window frames
General information
Window frames
Typical Elevations
Fire rated window frames
The fire window (borrowed light) frames covered in this section, have been tested in accordance with NFPA 257, and UL9 and listed
by either Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Warnock Hersey (IT/WHI) and FM Global (FM). The ratings and sizes available are shown on
the following pages.
Fire window frames are commonly referred to as Labeled Borrowed Light Frames, and can be installed in labeled masonry, wood and
steel stud wall constructions. They are available in both single and multiple lights and in the following applications:
Sitting on the floor: Frame is located on the floor and anchored to both the floor and adjacent wall structures
Above the floor: Frame is located above the floor line and is anchored into the surrounding wall structure.
The overall size of the fire window will vary with the type of wall construction it is installed in, and the location of the window in the
wall. Generally, fire windows that sit on the floor can be of a larger size than those located above the floor and in the wall.
Frames covered in this section are F, DW and MU Series. Regardless of the frame series being used, all frames must be installed into
fire rated walls.
Size limitations
F and MU Series Fire Window frames with multiple lights must be shipped as welded units. Single glass pane F, MU and DW Series
lights can be supplied KD (knock-down). Some frames may be field spliced. For splicing details, refer to the Elevation Section of this
manual. Maximum width, height and ratings shown on the following pages Width and height dimensions as shown in this manual can
not be reversed.
such as wall construction and application will affect the fire ratings. Individual manufacturers listings will take precedence.
Installation
Installation of all Steelcraft framing systems shall conform to the published Steelcraft installation instructions, ANSI/SDI A250.11 and
HMMA 840. All fire rated doors and frames must be installed in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 80, and/or the local AHJ.
All listings shown in this section conform to the requirements of NFPA 257, and UL9.
DW Series Frame Construction
F
Double
Rabbet
Single
Rabbet
FN
Double
Rabbet
DW
Double
Rabbet
DW
Single
Rabbet

MU
Double
Rabbet
MU
Single
Rabbet
341
Approvals
Masonry walls: Fire window located on or above the floor

Maximum
Rating
Frame Information
Wall
Application
Series

Masonry Wall
F16, F14,
1-1/2 Hr
FN16, FN14
(90 min)
Max
Masonry Wall
MU16, MU14
Listings

Min.
Max.
UL
ITS/WHI
FM
14
136 x 120
136 x 120
N/A
3-1/2
14
136 x 120
136 x 120
N/A
Notes:
1. All frames must be shipped as welded units, except single four sided frames
with one light opening the maximum size depends on the glazing being used.
Typical Elevation

manufacturer.
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Perimeter (Head and Jambs) frame.

a. Minimum face 1.
b. Maximum face 4.
Finished Floor
Interior dividing members .
Located on the floor
a. Minimum face 1.
b. Maximum face 4-1/2.
Sill section.
a. Minimum face 2.
NOTE: The use and installation of fire window frames with 1-1/2 hour (90 minute)
ratings are subject to the approval of the local AHJ. These assemblies are tested
and listed in accordance with UL9 and NFPA 257. Fire-protection-rated glazing
materials must be installed in these assemblies.
These assemblies are not tested in accordance with ASTM E119 or UL 263
(Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials) and use of Fire-resistancerated glazing materials will not make the frame compliant with ASTM E119 or
UL 263.
Bottom
of Frame
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Varies
Finished Floor
Located above finished floor
Fire Window assemblies are tested and listed for fire protection in accordance
with UL9, and NFPA 257. Where fire protection ratings are required, fire protection
rated glazing shall be installed. The installation of fire resistance rated glazing
does not qualify these assemblies for compliance with ASTM E119 or UL 263.
The use and installation of transom sidelite frames are subject to approval of
the AHJ.
342
Approvals
Stud walls: Fire window located on the floor

Maximum
Wall
Rating
Application
1-1/2 Hr
(90 min)
Max
Frame Information
Series
Listings

Min.
Max.
UL
ITS/WHI
FM
Stud
F16, F14
3-3/4
14
132 x 117
132 x 117
N/A
Stud
MU16, MU14
3-3/4
14
132 x 117
132 x 117
N/A
Notes:
1. All frames must be shipped as welded units, except single four sided frames
Typical Elevation

Drywall Partition Construction

manufacturer..
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass

a. Minimum face 1-1/4.
b. Maximum face 4.
Finished Floor
Located on the floor
a. Minimum face 1
b. Maximum face 4-1/2
c. Horizontal maximum 8
Sill section
a. Minimum face 2.
b. Maximum face 18.
and listed in accordance with UL9, and NFPA 257. Fire-protection-rated glazing
These assemblies are not tested in accordance with ASTM E119 or UL 263 (Fire
Tests of Building Construction and Materials) and use of Fire-resistance-rated
glazing materials will not make the frame compliant with ASTM E119 or UL 263.
Fire Window assemblies are tested and listed for fire protection in accordance
with UL9, and NFPA 257. Where fire protection ratings are required, fire protection
rated glazing shall be installed. The installation of fire resistance rated glazing
does not qualify these assemblies for compliance with ASTM E119 or UL 263. The
use and installation of transom sidelite frames are subject to approval of the AHJ.
343
Approvals
Masonry sill with stud walls: Fire window located off the floor

Maximum
Rating
1-1/2 Hr
(90 min)
Max
Frame Information
Wall
Application
Series
Listings

Min.
Max.
UL
ITS/WHI
FM
Stud
F16, F14
4-1/2
14
132 x 117
132 x 117
N/A
Stud
MU16, MU14
4-1/2
14
132 x 117
132 x 117
N/A
Notes:
1. All frames must be shipped as welded units, except for single four sided frames
Typical Elevation

manufacturer.
Bottom
of Frame

a. Minimum face 1
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass

b. Maximum face 4.
Glass
Varies
Masonry Half Wall Construction
Finished Floor

Drywall partition construction
With Masonry half wall
Sill section
a. Minimum face 2.
Fire Window assemblies are tested and listed for fire protection in accordance with
UL9, and NFPA 257. Where fire protection ratings are required, fire protection rated
glazing shall be installed. The installation of fire resistance rated glazing does not
qualify these assemblies for compliance with ASTM E119 or UL 263. The use and
installation of transom sidelite frames are subject to approval of the AHJ.
344
Approvals
Stud walls: Fire window located above the floor

Maximum
Rating

1-1/2 Hr
(90 min)
Frame Information
Listings
Wall
Application
Series
Min.
Max.
UL
ITS/WHI
FM
3-3/4
14
1210 x 114
1210 x 114
N/A
Stud
MU16, MU14
3-3/4
14
1210 x 114
1210 x 114
Max
N/A
Stud
F16, F14
Notes:
1. All frames must be shipped as welded units, except for single four sided frames
with one light Opening the maximum size depends on the glazing being used.
Typical Elevation

c. Glazing bead minimum 18 gauge, or as required by glazing manufacturer.
3. 3. Special profile may be necessary due to special thickness of glazing.
Bottom
of Frame
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
Glass
4. 4. Frame profile variations:
Varies
a. Minimum face 1-1/4 steel or wood stud walls.

b. Maximum face 4 steel or wood stud walls.
Finished Floor

Drywall partition construction
a. Minimum face 1
Sill section
b. Maximum face 4.
Fire Window assemblies are tested and listed for fire protection in accordance with
UL9, and NFPA 257. Where fire protection ratings are required, fire protection rated
glazing shall be installed. The installation of fire resistance rated glazing does not
qualify these assemblies for compliance with ASTM E119 or UL 263. The use and
installation of transom sidelite frames are subject to approval of the AHJ.
345
Approvals
Stud walls: Fire window located above the floor DW Series

Maximum
Rating
60 minutes or
45 Min. Stud
Frame Information
Wall
Application
Series
Listings UL, ITS/WHI and FM
Jamb Depth
Maximum Rabbet to Rabbet Dimension
Min.
Max.
Width
Height
Max Visible Area
FM
Stud
DW16, DW14
3-1/4
14
78-1/4
78-1/4
2721 squ. inches
N/A
Stud
DW16, DW14
3-1/4
14
55-1/4
55-1/4
1296 squ. inches
N/A
Stud
DW16, DW14
3-1/4
14
96
82
5268 squ. inches
N/A
(Std. listed glass)

45 min. (Std.
listed wire glass)

20 min.
without hose
(Any listed glass)

Notes:
1. All frames with one light opening (without mullion dividers) are with KD
corner connections.
Typical Elevation

manufacturer.
Bottom
of Frame
Glass
Varies
Frame profile variations:

a. Perimeter frame Minimum face 2
b. Perimeter frame Maximum face 2
Finished Floor
346
Fire rated products
Smoke and draft control
Smoke and draft rated products

Typical Frame Elevations
All three (3) sided frame series and elevations shown in the Fire Rated Products section of this manual are approved for Smoke and
Draft label applications.
Typical Door Elevations
Transom and Side Light Frames
Fire Window (Borrowed Light) Frames
Transom/Sidelight Frame elevations are listed for Smoke and

Draft Control applications.
Fire Window (Borrowed Light) Frame elevations are

not required to be listed for Smoke and Draft Control
applications.
Doors and frames covered in this section have been tested or evaluated in accordance with UL 10C, and UL 1784 listed by either
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or Warnock Hersey. FM Global (FM) does not offer listings for Smoke and Draft rated products.
The main components of a Smoke and Draft Rated assembly are:
1. Frame (steel fire rated)
2. Door (steel fire rated)
3. Hardware (fire rated and required)
4. Smoke Seals (fire/smoke control rated)
5. Fire Rated Wall
347
Fire rated products
Smoke and draft rated doors and frames

Frames (steel)
Smoke and Draft Rated Assemblies must include a Fire Rated Door Frame. Three sided frames are designed to be set on the floor
anchored to the wall construction. All frame anchoring must be in accordance with the installation instructions for the appropriate
frame construction.
Doors (steel)
Smoke and Draft Rated Assemblies must include a Fire Rated Door. Steelcraft doors are listed for most commercial building
applications. Variations in hardware and glass lights must be considered in the selection of the correct door construction. Smoke and
Draft Rated doors can be prepared for glass lights. The required hourly rating will dictate the approved glass lights available. All glass
used in fire rated doors must be listed glass, and be either 1/4 wire or other listed glazing material. Basic guidelines on glass are as
follows:
3 hour: flush door, no glass.
Exception: one (1) light with 100 square inches (.06 square meters) maximum of glass is permitted on 3 hour L, B, & T Series
doors if Fire Light or other 3 hour listed glazing material is used. Maximum width of 12 (305 mm) or height of 33 (838mm).
1-1/2 hour: 100 sq. in. per door leaf max.
1296 square inches (.84 square meters) maximum of glass is permitted on 1-1/2 hour L & B Series doors if Fire Light or other
appropriately listed glazing material is used. Maximum width of 36 (914 mm) or height of 54 (1372mm). UL listed doors may have
multiple lights, provided each light does not exceed 1296 square inches of exposed glass area.
3/4 hour: 1296 sq. in. per light with neither dimension exceeding 54, unless listed otherwise.
Exception: 3/4 hour doors may have multiple lights provided the limits of 1296 square inches per light and 54 inches are not
exceeded.
20 minute: 1296 sq. in. per light with neither dimension exceeding 54, unless listed otherwise.
Doors with louvers are not listed for use in areas requiring Smoke and Draft Ratings.
Hardware
Hardware used on Smoke and Draft rated assemblies conform to the same requirements as a conventional fire rated door assembly.
Gasketing
Smoke and Draft Rated Assemblies must include the appropriate Fire/Smoke Rated Seals.
Steelcraft frames: Must have a UL10C/UL1784 Listed/Classified gasketing applied to the frame head and jambs, installed in
accordance with the gasketing manufacturers installation instructions.
Steelcraft doors: Recommend a UL10C/UL1784 Listed/Classified gasketing applied to the meeting stile edges of pairs of doors which
do not include an astragal.
Door bottom gasketing is not required unless required by the local authority having jurisdiction.
Intumescent gasketing is not required for hollow metal doors installed in hollow metal frames.
The clearance between the door and frame, meeting edges of pairs of doors, and the floor and the bottom of the door must meet the
requirements specified in NFPA-80.
Wood doors in steel frames: Refer to the wood door manufacturers listing for gasketing required for their product to comply with
UL10C/UL1784 listings.
Fire rated wall

The wall requirements for Smoke and Draft Control Assemblies are the same as conventional Fire Door Assemblies.
Hourly ratings
Smoke and Draft Rated Assemblies are mainly intended for use in 20 minute with out hose stream applications. Depending on
building code requirements and the AHJ, they may be required in areas requiring 3/4, 1-1/2 or 3 hour listings.
Approved products
Frames: F, FN, DW, K, FE, DE, and MU Series
Doors: L, B, CE, H, HE, SL, TH, T, and A14 Series.
All listing covered in this section are for reference and assistance in developing overall parameters of approvals. Several variables
such as hardware, wall construction and application will affect the fire ratings. Individual manufacturers listing will take precedence.
Installation
Recommended Installation Instructions for Steel Frames and HMMA 840. All fire rated frames must be installed in accordance
with NFPA 80, and/or the Local AHJ.
348
Fire rated products
Smoke Barrier Doors and Frames

For use in cross corridor applications in healthcare occupancies
Intertek labeling only, strictly limited to non-latching, cross corridor, double egress applications in healthcare occupancies, and the
2006, 2009 and 2012 versions of the International Building Code as well as the NFPA Life Safety Code (2012) all allow for this special
smoke barrier door opening. Basic guidelines as follows:
Non-latching, double-egress application latching hardware is not permitted

No flush doors, louvers or view preps
Must be a glazed glass door, utilizing listed fire-rated glazing
Bottom of the visible glass must be 43 inches max from the floor
Requires the use of overlapping steel astragals
Max opening size is 8 foot x 9 foot (L18 / L16), 8 foot by 8 foot (SL18)
Fire-rated double egree (FE/DE) frame must be used
Must be automatic-closing by smoke detection
Use of this application, and any requirements for gasketing, to be determined and approved by the local AHJ.
349
Fire rated products
350
Performance

Physical endurance........................................... 354
Cycle tests..............................................................354
Twist tests..............................................................355
Insulation factors.............................................. 356
Air infiltration .....................................................357
Finishes............................................................... 358
Factory prime paint..............................................358
GRAINTECH stain.............................................359
Steelcraft finish paints........................................359
Field paint procedures....................................... 360
Air dry applications............................................. 360
Field baked-on finishes...................................... 360
Frame back coating..............................................361
Main TOC
351
Performance
352
Performance
General information
General information
Performance tests
The use of product specifications does not always give a true

comparison of the products that are used in today's market
place. As an example, one manufacturer may use a different
reinforcement in a product which is not included in the product
specification. The reinforcement although superior in design
and function may be deemed unacceptable using a product
specification.
The pages included in this section describe the tests that

have been conducted on the various Steelcraft products.
Copies of the test report are available upon request through
Steelcraft distributors.
Established and recognized industry performance tests provide

the truest method of comparing products. Performance test
results give an accurate evaluation of the products being
compared.
Manufacturers do not write performance tests. Industry
associations, testing laboratories and standard associations
write them. Included are:
Underwriters Laboratories Inc (UL)

Intertek Testing Services / Warnock Hersery (ITS/WHI)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
Every effort has been made to insure the accuracy and

completeness of the Steelcraft Spec Manual. This manual
is for use by qualified persons only. The information herein is
subject to some interpretation, and from time to time the Spec
sheets will be updated whenever it is deemed necessary as
new tests are conducted, new products are introduced and as
specifications are revised. For these reasons and because of the
nature and scope of the subject, the Steelcraft Manufacturing
Company and its employees can assume no responsibility or
liability for the absolute accuracy of the material contained
herein or its use. The information in this Spec Manual is subject
to change without notice and does not represent a commitment
on the part of Steelcraft.
Please contact the Steelcraft Technical Service Department if
you identify an error or an omission.
Steel Door Institute (SDI)

Door and Hardware Institute (DHI)
In most cases after the performance test is written many

people, groups and associations review the resulting
performance specification before it becomes a recognized
standard. As a result, the performance specification is accepted
as the true measuring tool for products.
Contact Information:
Phone: (877) 671-7011
E-Mail: [email protected]
353
Performance
Physical endurance
Cycle tests
Door strength and durability is determined by either ANSI
A250.4 or SDI 131-10 Accelerated Physical Test Procedure
for Steel Doors, Frames and Anchors (formerly ANSI A250.5
Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel
Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors). These performance
standards include both cycle and twist test requirements. In
both tests the door is subjected to stresses that exceed those
found in typical applications. During and at the end of the test,
the technician is looking for metal fatigue, weld breakage, panel
separation, delaminating, reinforcement failure and any other
failures that occur.
ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003 Recommended Specifications for
Standard Steel Doors and Frames specifies the minimum
number of cycles for doors:
20 gauge door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250,000 (Level C)

18 gauge door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500,000 (Level B)
16 and 14 gauge door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,000,000 (Level A)
ANSI A250.4
The door is mounted in a frame and is pushed to an open
position of 60 degrees. The door is then closed using a
conventional door closer.
SDI 131-10
(Previously ANSI A250.5)
The door is mounted in a test fixture and is rapidly cycled
(opened and closed) by an air cylinder, or by an arm connected
to an electric motor through a cam mechanism.
Cycle Test: The cycle is repeated a minimum of 60 cycles per
minute. The closing forces applied to the door.
Twist Test: At test intervals prescribed by the test procedure,
three corners of the door are clamped in place and the fourth
corner is twist tested.
Steelcraft doors tested in accordance with SDI 131-10 for
extended life cycle.
Door Series
Cycles Tested
L18
10 million
T18
250,000
This test simulates an actual door in operation. Steelcraft's L18

honeycomb core door was successfully tested in accordance
with SDI 131-10 for 10,000,000 cycles and 21 twist tests
conducted at different intervals throughout the cycle test.
Products tested: Door Model: L-18 3070
Cycle Test: The cycle is repeated approximately 15 times

per minute. The forces placed on the door in this test are
determined by adjusting the closer speed.
Test Results: After 10,000,000 cycles and 21 twist tests, the

L-18 door demonstrated the following:
Twist Test: At intervals prescribed by the test procedure, three

corners of the door are clamped in place and a prescribed load
applied to the fourth corner.
1. Edge Condition: no visible signs of metal fatigue, cracking, or

deformation along edges or channels
Steelcraft doors tested in accordance with A250.4 for

extended life cycle.
3. Core condition: no notable issues
Door Series
Cycles Tested
Frame Series
Twist Test:
L18
5 million
MU16
L16
5 million
MU16
L14
3 million
F16
B18
3 million
F16
B16
3 million
F16
CE18
2 million
DW16
Cycle Test:
2. Hardware Preparations: no visible issues

4. Panel condition: no de-lamination or weld damage
Initial deflection at 300 lbs = .132

Initial residual deflection (0 lbs) = .002
After 10 million cycles max. deflection at 300 lbs = .528
After 10 million cycles residual deflection (0 lbs) = .0045
This test simulates a door in actual operation. Steelcrafts

L Series door construction was successfully tested in
accordance With ANSI/SDI A250.4 for 5,000,000 cycles and
103 twist tests conducted at specified intervals throughout the
cycle test.
All tests are UL certified.
ANSI A 250.4
354
Performance
Physical endurance
Twist tests
ANSI A250.4 & SDI 131-10
The twist test evaluates the door structure and clearly

establishes the strength of the bonding or welding of the core
material to the panels and the connection of the panels. The
twist test is a required part of both ANSI 250.4 and SDI 131-10.
The door is placed into a structural steel opening and clamped
into place at three corners. The unclamped corner is subjected
to a force applied in 30 pound increments until a total of 300
pounds of force is applied. The force is removed in the same 30
pound increments until all of the force is off the door.
Measurements are taken at each 30 pound increment and at
the 300 pound force. Additional measurements are taken at
every 30 pound increment as the force is being removed. Five
minutes after the force has been removed, a final reading is
taken. This is the residual deflection the door has taken.
Twist Test Fixture
ANSI 250.4
Door opening
Cycles tested
Test standard
Average Deflection
in test
300 lbs load
1.25 max.
See note #2
Residual Deflection Total Number

at Completion
of twist test
of test (load
conducted
removed)
0.125" max.
See note #2
L18
10 million
SDI 131-10
.033"
0.01
.21
L16
5 million
ANSI 250.4
0.76"
0.05
103
L14
5 million
ANSI 250.4
0.62"
0.03
103
B18
3 million
ANSI 250.4
0.45"
0.01
63
B16
3 million
ANSI 250.4
0.75"
0.06
63
CE18
2 million
ANSI 250.4
1.02"
0.125"
43
Notes:
1. All tests are UL certified
2. Maximum deflection shown is the pass/fail criteria in accordance with ANSI A250.4 and SDI 131-10.
355
Performance
Insulation factors
General information
Thermal factors
Exterior doors are often used to block the transmission of

temperature from one side to the other. Energy lost through a
door opening is the result of both:
The following terms are used to describe thermal transmission

through building products:
Thermal transmission, through the door assembly, is stated

as either the U-Factor or the R-Factor. These factors are
covered on this page.
Air infiltration, around the perimeter of the door, is stated

as air leakage in CFM. This rating is covered on Page 2 of this
sheet.
U-Factor: Overall co-efficient of heat transmission passage

through a built-up panel section. Technically, it is heat
transmission in BTU per hour per square foot per degree
Fahrenheit of temperature difference from air to air for a
complete panel sectional (the lower the U-factor, the better
the insulation).
R-Factor: Thermal resistance is a measure of ability to

retard heat flow. R is an expression of the total resistance to
heat flow through a complete panel section or construction
assembly. R represents a value of the thermal resistance,
per hour per square foot of a typical panel section. R is the
numerical reciprocal of the U-factor (the higher the R, the
higher the insulating value).
K-Thermal: Conductivity (K) is the amount of heat that

passes through a homogenous material one inch thick and
one square foot in area per hour. Values of K are expressed
in BTU per hour (the lower the K, the higher the insulating
value). The K unit is for a single component material one
inch thick and one square foot in area. Therefore, it does
not apply to a 1-34 thick door panel consisting of several
materials. (Conductivity is not a method of measuring heat
transmission through built up panels.)
Thermal tests
Doors are tested in accordance with ASTM C1363 and SDI 113.
The door assembly (or door only) is subjected to heat with the
amount of loss measured.
Honeycomb core doors provide insulation through the small
air pockets created by the hexagonal cells. The insulation of
the honeycomb core is far better than a solid core wood door,
insulated glass and concrete block walls. Polystyrene and
polyurethane core doors are recommended where extreme
temperature variations are prevalent.
Thermal performance test results per SDI 113-01

Door series
Core
Tests per ASTM C1363 U-Factor
Tests per ASTM C1363 R-Factor
B18 Series
Steel Stiffeners
0.50
2.01
B16 Series
Steel Stiffeners
0.53
1.89
L18 Series
Honeycomb
0.56
1.80
L18 Series
Polystyrene
0.38
2.64
L18 Series
Polyurethane
0.36
2.81
L16 Series
Honeycomb
0.57
1.74
L16 Series
Polystyrene
0.39
2.54
L16 Series
Polyurethane
0.38
2.67
CE18 Series
Polystyrene
0.41
2.44
H16 Series
Honeycomb
0.60
1.67
H16 Series
Polystyrene
0.42
2.36
A14 Series
Honeycomb
0.78
1.28
Note: Corrected to ASHRAE winter design with 15 mph wind outside, still air inside.
Historical statement
Historically, SDI 113 required thermal transmission testing in accordance with ASTM C236-89(1993) Standard Test Method for
Steady-State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot Box. In 2001ASTM C236-89(1993) was
withdrawn as an ASTM standard. SDI 113-01 was subsequently revised to require testing in accordance with ASTM C1363-05
Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Materials and Envelope Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus.
This change in test methods results in significant changes in performance values which are not comparable between the current
standard ASTM C1363 and the old standard ASTM C236. Architectural specifications must be carefully reviewed for compliance with
the appropriate standard.
356
Performance
Air infiltration
General information
Air infiltration is one of the major factors in energy loss in a
building. Poorly weather-stripped doors will lose far more heat
and/or air conditioning due to infiltration of outside air than
those from transmission through the door.
Air infiltration testing

Tests were conducted in accordance with ASTM E 283-04 to
determine the air infiltration rate of a door and frame with and
without weather stripping and door bottoms.
Terminology
The following terms are used to describe air infiltration around a
door opening:
CFM = Cubic Feet per Minute

Air infiltration: a measurement of the air leakage around the
perimeter of a door opening.
Air infiltration test results per ASTM E 283-04

Door opening
Door series
Frame series
Tested door
opening
Air Infiltration
(cfm/sq.ft)
Weather stripping
Gasket
Door bottom
Astragal
N/A
Z Astragal
Single Swing
L, H, B, CE
F, MU
40 x 80
0.64
PS074
FAS-SEAL
Double Swing
L, H, B, CE
F, MU
80 x 80
0.34
PS074
FAS-SEAL
357
Performance
Finishes
General Information
Steelcraft primers
Commercial steel frames and doors are designed to meet the

requirements of ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003 (R2008) (previously
known as SDI 100), and must receive a factory applied primer.
The applied primer must be tested and meet the passing criteria
of A250.10-2011 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for
All Steelcraft Frames, Doors and Architectural Stick

components shall be cleaned, phosphatized and finished
standard with one coat of factory baked-on, rust-inhibited
primer in accordance with A250.10-2011 Test Procedure and
Prime Painted Steel Doors and Frames.
Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for

Steel Doors and Frames.
Factory pre-treatment
(surface preparation) prior to
prime paint
Omit prime paint is available for Steelcraft doors as cold

rolled or galvannealed material. Frames must be primed from
Blue Ash, OH, but can be omit prime paint from Chino, CA as
galvanealled material only. Doors and frames without prime
paint from the factory will limit the manufacturer's warranty.
Steel must be thoroughly cleaned and treated (phosphatized

[also known as bonderize]) and a rust inhibiting primer applied.
After fabrication the door panels or frame members are
washed and de-greased though an automatic washing system.
Phosphatizing is one of steps in this pretreatment process.
Primer paint testing
Phosphatizing
Salt spray testing in accordance with ASTM B117-09.
Impact test in accordance with ASTM D2794-93 (2010)e1.
Phosphatizing makes it possible for paint to give the

maximum protection to metal. There are two basic functions
of phosphatizing:
1. Phosphatizing etches the metal and thereby provides an
effective anchor for the paint. Bare metal surfaces allow
only the minimum of paint adhesion. Phosphatized metal
surface have an affinity for paint and keeps the paint from
lifting off or peeling.
2. The phosphate coating is non-metallic and acts to keep out
any moisture which might break the paint film and reach the
base metal.
A scratch on untreated metal breaks through the paint and
allows rust to work back from the scratch and lifts the paint
off. Phosphatizing prevents the creep of rust and restricts the
damage to the scratch itself.
When phosphatized metal is combined with Steelcraft's top
quality baked-on, rust-inhibiting, prime paint, the maximum
protection against rust has been achieved.
The industry standard ANSI A250.10-2011 Test Procedure and
Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Doors and

Frames is comprised of the following paint surface tests:
Condensation testing (humidity) in accordance with
ASTM D4585-99.
Film adhesion test in accordance with ASTM D3359-09e2.
Primer test results

Steelcraft factory applied baked-on primers conform
to the industry standard ANSI A250.10-1998 with the
following performance:
Test
Standard
Hours
Results
Salt Spray
ASTM B117-09
120
Passed
Condensation
ASTM D4585-99
480
Passed
Impact Test
Gardner Direct
20 in. lbs.
with 12 ball
N.A.
Passed
Adhesion
ASTM D3359-09e2
N.A.
See Note 1
Notes:
1. 4B adhesion, which exceeds the test acceptance level of 3B.
2. Test procedure ANSI A250.10 is for factory primed steel
doors and frames. To insure integrity of the prime painted
coating, jobsite storage must be in accordance with sections
2 and 3 of this manual, ANSI/SDI A250.10 and HMMA 840.
3. Test procedure ANSI A250.10 is a performance standard for
the factory prime applied to steel doors and frames. Film
thickness of the primer is not mandated by this standard.
358
Performance
Finishes
GRAINTECH stain
Steelcraft finish paints
All doors and frames shall be cleaned, phosphatized and prime

painted with one coat of baked-on prime paint capable of
accepting an oil-based stain.
All Steelcraft Doors are available as optional factory finish

products. These products are cleaned, phosphatized and
finished with a factory baked-on, rust-inhibitive finish paint
in accordance with ANSI/SDIA250.3-2007 (R2011) Test
The door shall be stained to simulate a ([specify one] Ash,

Birch, Mahogany, Maple, Oak or Walnut) wood door. The
finished stained product shall be protected with a clear top
coat incorporating UV inhibitors. After finishing, the door shall
be placed in a polybag and adequately wrapped to eliminate
marring the surface finish during shipment and installation.
The frame shall be field-stained to match the door after
installation. The finished stained product shall be protected
with a clear top coat incorporating UV inhibitors. Embossed
(CE) doors shall be field stained to match the color selected.
The finished product shall be protected with a clear top coat
incorporating UV inhibitors.
GRAINTECH stain testing
The industry standard ANSI A250.3-2007 (R2011) Test

Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied
Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Doors and Frames is
comprised of the following paint surface tests:
Salt spray testing in accordance with ASTM B117-03
Impact test ASTM D2794-93 (2004)

Film adhesion test in accordance with ASTM D3359-02
GRAINTECH stain test results
Steelcraft factory applied baked-on finishes conform to the

industry standard ANSI A250.3 with the following performance:
Test
Standard
Hours
Results
Salt Spray
ASTM B117-03
120
Passed
Condensation
ASTM D4585-99
480
Passed
Impact Test
ASTM D27 94-93

(2004)
N.A.
Passed
Adhesion
ASTM D3359-02
N.A.
GRAINTECH
Oak
Gloss shall be 20+/-5F in accordance with ASTM Method

Test D523
See Steelcraft Literature Downloads to reference the 16

available standard colors http://us.allegion.com/IRSTDocs/
DataSheet/105175.pdf
Special colors are available upon request
Available in CRS and Galvanealed A-60 Steel
Available for all door series and all standard door heights
(see Steelcraft Price Manual)
Frames not available with factory finish paint
Finish paint testing

The industry standard ANSI A250.3-2007 (R2011) Test
Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Doors and Frames is
Salt spray testing in accordance with ASTM B117-03
Impact test ASTM D2794-93 (2004)
Condensation testing (humidity) in accordance with ASTM

D4585-99
Film adhesion test in accordance with ASTM D3359-02
Finish paint test results

Steelcraft factory applied baked-on finishes conform to the
industry standard ANSI A250.3 with the following performance:
Test
Standard
Hours
Results
Salt Spray
ASTM B117-03
120
Passed
Condensation
ASTM D4585-99
480
Passed
Impact Test
ASTM D27 94-93

(2004)
N.A.
Passed
Adhesion
ASTM D3359-02
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
colors chart.
Ash
comprised of the following paint surface tests:
Condensation testing (humidity) in accordance with

ASTM D4585-99
Birch

Finish Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
Colors may vary

based on your
monitor, printer,
and settings.
Request a physical
GRAINTECH
swatch for color
matching.
Standard Factory finish colors chart:

http://us.allegion.com/IRSTDocs/DataSheet/105175.pdf
Custom colors are

available.
Maple
Mahogany
Walnut
359
Performance
Finishes
Field paint procedures
Field baked-on finishes
Steelcraft frames and doors are furnished with a high grade,

low gloss, baked-on prime paint that provides the best possible
protection against corrosion, abrasion and weather, and is an
excellent base for finish paint.
To obtain the best results, use the following procedures:
This is a primer and requires field finishing. If the primed surface

is removed or damaged, the exposed metal must be reprimed
with a suitable rust inhibitive primer before top coating with a
latex finish paint.
The application of the paint, using either a brush, roller or spray
equipment, shall be in accordance with the paint
manufacturer's recommendations. If spray equipment is used,
consult with the paint supplier on recommendations for correct
thinner or solvents. Do not use lacquer thinner or other solvents
that may react on the primer coat.
1. Avoid painting in extremely cold or damp weather.

Suggested temperature range 50F to 90F.
2. Sand door surfaces lightly with No. 300 or 320 emery cloth
or steel wool.
3. Clean door surfaces using a mild solvent such as mineral
spirits or a mild citrus cleaner. Do not use strong cleaning
agents, acids or lacquer thinner.
4. Dry door surfaces. Do not use oiled or tack rags to dry
door surfaces.
5. Apply finish paint following manufacturer's
recommendations.
6. Bake frames and doors as specified by paint manufacturer
and outlined below:
Air dry applications
Oven Temperatures:
To obtain the best results, use the following procedures:
Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 F
1. Avoid painting in extremely cold or damp weather.

Suggested temperature range 50F to 90F.
Doors
Or as specified by paint manufacturer
2. Sand door and frame surfaces lightly with No. 300 or 320
emery cloth or steel wool.
L (honeycomb), T, B, SL, and A14 Series. . . . . . . . . . . 300F
3. Clean door and frame surfaces using a mild solvent such as

mineral spirits or a mild citrus cleaner. Do not use strong
cleaning agents, acids or lacquer thinner.
CE doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160F
4. Dry door and frame surfaces. Do not use oiled or tack rags
to dry door and frame surfaces.
5. Apply finish paint following manufacturers
recommendations.
L (polyurethane), L, and SL (polystyrene). . . . . . . . . . 160F
Products
These field painting procedures apply to ALL Steelcraft
products.
Notes:
1. Latex paints may require, depending on atmospheric
conditions, up to 30 days before the paint is fully cured.
2. To avoid rusting with latex topcoat paints, it is
recommended to sand and re-prime with a rust inhibitive
primer any areas where the factory applied primer has been
removed or scratched through.
3. THE USE OF HIGH GLOSS PAINT IS NOT RECOMMENDED
ON B SERIES. All internal steel stiffeners are welded to
both face sheets. High gloss paint accentuates the visibility
of all welds.
4. Steelcraft hollow metal doors and frames are factory
painted providing finish integrity in accordance with test
procedures ANSI A250.10 or ANSI A250.3-1998. Jobsite
storage and handling is critical. To insure integrity of
the prime painted coating, jobsite storage must be in
accordance with sections 2 and 3 of this manual, ANSI/SDI
A250.10 and HMMA 840.
360
Performance
Finishes
Frame back coating
(bituminous alternative)
certification and benefits
Some of the common circumstances for grouting are

listed here:
Steelcraft Frame Back Coating is UL certified up to 3-hours

in fire rated masonry applications. The back coating is to
be applied by distributors in their shop or in the field for the
purpose of creating a secondary barrier to resist corrosion from
moisture on the interior of frames (frame throats) prior to
grouting masonry frames.
We offer this coating in an aerosol spray can as well as (1) onegallon and (5) five gallon pails which can be applied by spraying
or brushing.
Steelcrafts Frame Back Coating is a bituminous alternative.
It is a specially formulated, modified asphaltic emulsion with
significant advantages over traditional bituminous coatings
which can be hazardous, difficult to apply and messy.
Benefits include the following:
Non-flammable (UL certified up to 3-hours in fire-rated

masonry applications)
Virtually odorless
VOC & HAPS Free
Waterborne Safe
Dries Quickly
Excellent Adhesion
Wont easily rub off
Solids: 57-63%
Shelf life: 12 months
Odor: Minimal
Sound deadening
To increase frame anchorage strength
Industry guidelines recommend that the installer be responsible

for grouting and any barrier coating required.
Air dry application instructions

To obtain the best results, use the following information:
1. Steelcraft factory applied primer should be in place
(see page 358). Reapply as needed. Be sure primer is dry
before applying back coating (normally 15-30 minutes for
water-based primers in ambient conditions); Use the thumb
test (put full weight behind thumb against surface and
twist 90).
2. Avoid applying back coating in extremely cold or damp
weather: suggested temperature range is 50F to 90F.
Best practice is to allow back coating and frame to warm
to room temperature before applying. Agitate (shake/stir)
prior to use. Water may be added to thin as needed, but care
must be taken as this may change dry times, DFT (dry film
thickness) and/or ability of coating to provide the proper
corrosion resistance.
5. Mask off or protect areas from overspray, if necessary.

6. Apply frame back coating by spraying or brushing.
Finish: Black, semi-gloss

Flash Point: None (flash point is the lowest temperature at
which the emulsion can vaporize to for an ignitable mixture
in the air)
Storage: Suggested Storage temperature 50F to 130F.
DO NOT ALLOW BACK COATING EMULSION TO FREEZE.
VOCs: None
7. At installation, it is recommended to touch up areas of the

frame with Steelcraft Primer and Back Coating in order to
cover any bare metal on the inside of the frame to avoid
corrosion. Reference (1) above.
8. Recommended application of coating is to spray or brush at
5-6 mils WFT (wet film thickness) for a cure to 3 mils DFT
(dry film thickness). A minimum 2.5 mil DFT should be held
to avoid performance issues and a maximum 5 mil DFT to
avoid sagging. Results may vary depending upon specific
application and conditions.
9. Allow to dry to touch/non tacky (10 minutes in ambient
conditions) before applying a second coat, if necessary.
HAPS: None
US DOT: Not Regulated Usage
A quality corrosion-resistant coating should be applied to the
Usage
A quality corrosion-resistant coating should be applied to the
interior of metal frames (frame throats) in circumstances
where moisture might enter the frame, causing degradation of
the frame. This is a particularly good practice when grouting
frames with mortar in masonry applications. (Note grouting
frames in drywall applications and using plaster-based grout is
not recommended.)
Security to deter break-ins where the frame might be

compromised
4. Make sure the Surface is clean, dry and free of grease, rust
and wax. Do not use strong cleaning agents, acids or lacquer
thinner. Do not use oiled or tack rags to dry frame surfaces.
Technical information
Composition: Waterborne Asphaltic Emulsion Coating
(bituminous alternative)
Stability for heavy or frequent usage
3. No scuffing is recommended when applying back coating

over Steelcraft Primer.
Sprayable
10. See product packaging for further recommendations.

Technical support can be reached at 877-671-7011, option 2,
then option 5.
Note:
Information, recommendations and suggestions provided on
this page may differ based on specific material, conditions and
other variables.
361
Performance
362
Architectural

Specifications.................................................... 365
Section 08110 steel doors and frames......... 366
Part 1: General....................................................... 366
Part 2: Products................................................... 369
Part 3: Execution................................................... 373
Selection and usage...........................................374
SDI selection and usage guide.......................... 374
Cores........................................................................ 378
Wall construction................................................. 379
Green buildings construction:
LEED certification............................................... 381
Main TOC
363
Architectural
364
Architectural: Specifications
General information
Types of specifications
The published specifications most commonly used in the
Door and Hardware Industry fall into four broad categories:
Architectural specifications:
These specifications are prepared by specification

writers and published by individual architectural firms.
These specifications are based on either historical
preference or an Architectural and Industry Association
such as the Construction Specification Institute
(CSI), the Steel Door Institute (SDI) or the National
Association of Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM).
A Steelcraft reference guide specification, in the

CSI format, can be found in this manual starting on the
next page.
Manufacturers specifications:
These specifications are published by the manufacturer

of a product. The products construction and
performance levels are documented through tests
conducted either privately or independently.
Steelcraft product specifications are found in this

manual starting on the next page.
Specifications
Steelcraft doors, frames and stick systems are subject
to compliance with specifications and information published
by architects, specification writers, industry associations and
regulatory agencies. Compliance with the architects plans
and specifications is expected, however, the accuracy, content
and structure of the specification are critical to insure that the
product construction and expected performance levels
are achieved.
Utmost experience and care should be taken in the preparation
and submission of Architectural Specifications, to ensure that
the proper product construction and performance is supplied
to the purchaser. Privately written material specifications
sometimes combine selective attributes and performance
levels of various products. In the end, an improperly prepared
Hollow Metal Specification may compromise the intended
products construction and performance, and possibly
compromise the integrity, and complicate the enforcement of
the specifications and required products.
Industry/Trade association specifications:
(Reference Standard) These specifications are

developed and published by Industry Associations as
a result of the input of all member companies.
Steelcraft conforms to specification

ANSI A 250.8-1998, published by
the Steel Door Institute (SDI).
Performance and material specifications:
These specifications will specify required results

and will describe product life cycles with focus on
the design criteria, assembly and performance of the
components used in door and frame products,
such as steel and paint.
This section of the Technical Manual has been compiled to help

understand the content and intent of the specifications used
with the Steelcraft Steel Doors and Frames.
365
Section 08110 steel doors and frames

Part 1: General
1.01 Section includes
A. Steel doors
B. Steel frames
C. Steel architectural stick systems
1.02 Related sections

A. Section 08210: Wood Doors
B. Section 08220: Plastic Doors
C. Section 08710: Door Hardware
D. Section 08800: Glazing
E. Section 09900: Paints and Coatings
F. Section 13710: Intrusion Detection: Security system
G. Section 13800: Building Automation and Control: Building monitoring system
H. Section 16123: Building Wire and Cable: Power supply to electric hardware devices
1.03 References
It is the intent of this specification that all hollow metal and its application will comply or exceed the standards as listed. The latest
published edition of each reference applies.
A. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
1. ASTM A 653/A 653M: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
2. ASTM A 924: Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot Dip Process.
3. ASTM A 1008/A 1008M: Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, High Strength Low-Alloy, High Strength
Low Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.
4. ASTM E 90: Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions.
5. ASTM E 413: Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.
6. ASTM C1363: Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Materials and Envelope Assemblies by Means of
Hot Box Apparatus.
B. ANSI: American National Standards Institute
1. ANSI/DHI A 115: Specifications for Hardware Preparations in Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
2. ANSI A156.7: Hinge Template Dimensions.
3. ANSI A 250.3: Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and
Frames.
4. ANSI A250.4: Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcing.
5. ANSI A 250.8: SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
6. ANSI A 250.10: Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
7. ANSI/SDI 250.11: Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames
8. ANSI/DHI A 115.IG: Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware.
C. SDI: Steel Door Institute
1. SDI 105: Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel frames.
2. SDI 111: Recommended Details and Guidelines for Standard Steel Doors and Frames and Accessories.
3. SDI 111-H: High Frequency Hinge Preparation
366

4. SDI 112: Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
5. SDI 117: Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
6. SDI 118: Basic Fire Door Requirements.
7. SDI 122: Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
8. SDI 124: Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
D. NAAMM/HMMA: Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
1. HMMA 840: Guide Specification for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
2. HMMA 820 TN01-03: Grouting Hollow Metal Frames
Spec Writers Note: Delete the standards which are not applicable to your area.
E. Building Code references
1. NFPA 80: Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.
2. NFPA 105: Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies and Other Opening Protectives
3. NFPA 252: Standard Method of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
4. ANSI/UL 10C: Standard for Safety for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
5. UL 1784: Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies
6. UL: Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
7. WH: Certification Listings; Warnock Hersey International Inc.
8. Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) 361 Guidelines
9. MiamiDade County test protocols PA 201, PA 202 and PA 203.
10. Florida Building Code test protocols TAS 201, TAS 202 and TAS 203
1.04 Requirements of regulatory agencies

A. Doors and frames to conform to applicable codes for fire ratings. It is the intent of this specification that all hardware and its
application comply or exceed the standards for labeled openings. In case of conflict between types required for fire protection,
furnish type required by NFPA and UL.
1. Interior vertical stairwell doors will carry a minimum 250F (121C) temperature rise rating in addition to the required
fire rating.
1.05 Submittals
A. Submit for review six (6) complete copies of the hollow metal shop drawings covering complete identification of items required
for the project. Include manufacturers names and identification of product. Included six (6) complete copies of catalog cuts
and/or technical data sheets and any other data as may be required to show compliance with these specifications.
1. The data on the Shop Drawing will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance, and
design criteria, materials and similar data to enable the Architect to review the information as required.
B. Indicate frames configuration, anchor types and spacing, location of cutouts for hardware, reinforcement, to ensure doors and
frames are properly prepared and coordinated to receive hardware.
C. Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and cutouts for glass lights and louvers.
D. Submit manufacturers installation instructions, including a copy of ANSI A250.11-2001 as part of the shop drawing submittal.
E. Shop drawings, product data, and samples to bear the Contractors stamp verifying they have been coordinated and reviewed for
completeness and compliance with the contract documents.
F. Shop drawings submitted without the above requirements will be considered incomplete, will NOT be reviewed, and will be
returned directly to the Contractor.
G. Follow the same procedures for re-submittal as the initial submittal with the appropriate dates revised.
367

1.06 Quality assurance
A. Select a qualified hollow metal distributor, who is a direct account of the manufacturer of the products furnished. In addition that
distributor must have in their regular employment an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), a Certified Door Consultant (CDC)
or an Architectural Openings Consultant (AOC), who will be available to consult with the Architect and Contractor regarding any
matters affecting the door and frame opening.
B. Furnish materials and work performed in conformity with the contract documents.
C. Conform to requirements of the above reference standards. Submit test reports upon request by the Owner or Architect.
D. Underwriters Laboratories and Warnock Hersey, labeled fire doors and frames:
1. Label fire doors and frames listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories standard UL10C, Positive Pressure Fire Tests of
Door Assemblies and Uniform Building Code Standard 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
2. Construct and install doors and frames to comply with current issue of ANSI/NFPA 80.
3. Manufacture Underwriters Laboratories labeled doors and frames under the UL factory inspection program and in strict
compliance to UL procedures, and provide the degree of fire protection, heat transmission and panic loading capability
indicated by the opening class.
4. Manufacture Warnock Hersey labeled doors and frames to meet the specific requirements of that labeling agencys current
procedure for the tested hourly rating designated and inspected by representatives of the labeling agency.
5. Affixed physical label or approved marking to fire doors and/or fire door frames, at an authorized facility as evidence of
compliance with procedures of the labeling agency. Label embossment is not permitted.
6. Conform to applicable codes for fire ratings. It is the intent of this specification that hardware and its application comply or
exceed the standards for labeled openings. In case of conflict between types required for fire protection, furnish type required
by NFPA and UL.
7. Fire door assemblies in exit enclosures and exit passageways must have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not
more than 250F (121C) above ambient at the end of 30 minutes of the standard fire test exposure.
Spec Writers Note: Choose the appropriate Severe Storm Products where applicable. Delete this section if not applicable.
E. Severe Storm Products:
1. Tornado Doors: Door Systems for Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) community shelters and other areas
of refuge meeting the design wind pressures and missile impact loads as detailed in the National Performance Criteria for
Tornado Shelters as published by FEMA.
2. Hurricane Doors: Door systems required to comply with the Miami-Dade County Product Control Approval System or the
Florida Building Code Approval System meeting the requirements of Miami-Dade County test protocols PA 201, PA 202, PA 203
and Florida Building Code test protocols TAS 201, TAS 202 and TAS 203.
F. Manufacturer Qualifications: Member of the Steel Door Institute.
G. Installer: Minimum five years documented experience installing products specified in this Section.
1.07 Delivery, storage, and handling

A. Storage of Doors
1. Store doors vertically in a dry area, under proper cover. Place the units on at least 4 high wood sills on floors in a manner
that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which create a humidity chamber and
promote rusting. If the door becomes wet, or moisture appears, remove any protective wrapping immediately. Provide a 4
space between the doors to permit air circulation. Proper storage is required to meet the requirements of ANSI/SDI A250.10
and HMMA 840.
B. Storage of Frames
1. Store frames in an upright position with heads uppermost under cover on 4 wood sills on floors in a manner that will prevent
rust and damage. Do not use non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which create a humidity chamber and promote rusting.
Store assembled frames in a vertical position, five units maximum in a stack. Provide a 2 space between frames to permit air
circulation.
2. Provide proper storage for doors and frames, to maintain the quality and integrity of the factory applied paint, and maintain the
requirements of ANSI/SDI A250.10 and HMMA 840.
3. Sand, touch up and clean prime painted surfaces prior to finish painting in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
368

1.08 Coordination
1. Coordinate Work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of internal cutouts and reinforcement
for door hardware, electric devices and recessed items.
2. Coordinate work with frame opening construction, door and hardware installation.
3. Sequence installation to accommodate required door hardware.
4. Verify field dimensions for factory assembled frames prior to fabrication.
Part 2: Products
2.01 Doors
A. Construct exterior/interior doors to the designs and gauges as specified:
Spec Writers Note: Choose one of the appropriate steel thickness and type.
1. Exterior Doors: Hot-dip galvannealed steel, ASTM A 653, Class A60, 18 gauge [0.042 (1mm)], 16 gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)] or
4 gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)] hot dipped galvannealed steel, with closed tops.
a. Include galvannealed components and internal reinforcements with galvannealed doors.
b. Close tops of exterior swing-out doors to eliminate moisture penetration. Galvannealed steel top caps are permitted.
2. Interior Doors: Cold rolled steel, A 1008, 20 gauge [0.032 (.8mm)], 18 gauge [0.042 (1mm)], or 16 gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
cold rolled or galvannealed steel.
a. Include galvannealed components and internal reinforcements with galvannealed doors.
Spec Writers Note: GRAINTECH and finish paint are finish options. Delete these options when not applicable.
3. GRAINTECH factory finished doors indicated on door schedule as HMGT.
4. Factory prime painted doors indicated on door schedule as HM.
5. Hardware Reinforcements:
a. Hinge reinforcements for full mortise hinges: minimum 7 gauge [0.180 (4.7mm)].
b. Lock reinforcements: minimum 16 gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)].
c. Closer reinforcements: minimum 14 gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)], 20 long.
d. Galvannealed doors include galvanized hardware reinforcements.
e. Projection welded hinge and lock reinforcements to the edge of the door.
f. Provided adequate reinforcements for other hardware as required.
B. Full Flush Type Doors Construction
1. Doors construction conforming to ANSI-A250.4 criteria and tested to 5,000,000 operating cycles.
2. Approved door core constructions:
Spec Writers Note: Choose one of the appropriate door core types.
a. Honeycomb: Reinforced, stiffened, sound deadened and insulated with impregnated Kraft honeycomb core completely
filling the inside of the doors and laminated to inside faces of both panels using contact adhesive applied to both panels
and honeycomb core.
b. Polystyrene: Reinforced, stiffened, sound deadened and insulated with a rigid polystyrene core bonded to the inside faces
of both panels with contact adhesive. All Polystyrene doors are full width and height polystyrene core filled.
c. Steel Stiffened: Vertically steel stiffeners and sound deadened with fiberglass batt insulation. Fabricate hat shaped
stiffeners from 20 gauge [0.026 (0.6mm)] steel. Vertical interior webs located 6 (152mm) apart, welded to the inside of
one face sheet and bonded to opposite face at 5 (127mm) on center. Fill areas between stiffeners with fiberglass.
d. Temperature Rise Doors: Mineral fiber core material to comply with the 250 F (121 C) maximum temperature
rise rating.
369

Spec Writers Note: GRAINTECH is a finish options. Delete this section when not applicable.
e. GRAINTECH Doors: Fabricated from steel that has an embossed wood grain pattern extending the full height and width
of the door. Provide doors with continuous vertical mechanical inter-locking joints at lock and hinge edges with visible edge
seams. The wood grain embossment minimum .005 deep. The wood grain face sheets must be cleaned, phosphatized
and prime painted with a stain absorbing primer. Vertical edges must be stained using conventional stains to achieve a
(select 1) [ash, birch, mahogany, maple, oak, walnut,] color. After staining, the door must be clear coated with UV inhibitors.
Applied grain pattern or material will not be permitted
3. Vertical edge seams: Provide doors with continuous vertical mechanical inter-locking joints at lock and hinge edges with
visible edge seams, or a one piece full height 14 gauge channel. Apply a continuous bead of structural epoxy in the internal
vertical connection.
Spec Writers Note: Choose one of the appropriate door edges.
Edges seam options:
a. Filled Vertical Edges (F): Continuous vertical mechanical interlocking joint with internal epoxy seal; edge seams epoxy
filled and ground smooth.
b. Welded Vertical Edges (W): Continuous vertical mechanical interlocking joint; edge seams welded, epoxy filled, and
ground smooth.
4. Bevel hinge and lock door edges 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 2 inches (50 mm). Square edges on hinge and/or lock stiles are not
acceptable.
5. Reinforce top and bottom of doors with galvannealed 14 gauge, welded to both panels.
Spec Writers Note: Choose the appropriate Severe Storm Products where applicable. Delete this section when not applicable.
C. Tornado Door Systems must comply with Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) 361 Guidelines and provides the
highest level of security and safety for tornado shelters and severe storm areas of refuge.
1. Face sheets: 14 gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)] hot-dipped galvannealed steel having an A60 zinc-iron alloy coating conforming to
ASTM designations A653 and A924.
2. Hinge and lock edges: include continuous vertical mechanical joints with edge seams welded, filled and ground smooth.
3. Bevel all hinge and lock door edges 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 2 inches (50 mm). Square edges on hinge and/or lock stiles are not
acceptable
4. Galvannealed 14 gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)] top and bottom steel reinforcement channels projection welded to both face sheets
on 4 inches (102 mm) centers.
5. Hinge reinforcements: minimum 7 gauge [0.167 (4.4mm)] galvanized steel, projection welded to the edge of the door.
6. Reinforce door faces with 18 gauge [0.042 (1.0mm)] vertical stiffeners manufactured from steel conforming to
ASTM A653 and A924 and welded to each face sheet.
7. Reinforce lock stiles with full-height 12 gauge [0.093 (2.5mm)] channels.
8. Fire Rated doors: Provide door units bearing Labels for fire ratings required in locations indicated.
D. Hurricane Doors: Designed to resist the cyclic pressures, static pressures and missile impact loads as detailed in the
Miami-Dade County Product Control Approval System of the Florida Building Code Approval System and meets the requirements
of Miami-Dade County test protocols PA 201, PA 202, PA 203 and Florida Building Code test protocols TAS 201, TAS 202
and TAS 203.
E. Electrical Requirements:
1. General: Coordinate electrical requirements for doors and frames. Make provisions for installation of electrical items arranged
so that wiring can be readily removed and replaced.
2. Doors with Electric Hinges:
a. General: Furnish conduit raceway to permit wiring from electric door hardware.
b. Hinge Locations: Provide electric hinge at intermediate or center location. Top or bottom electric hinge locations are
not acceptable.
c. Refer to 08710 for electrified hardware items.
370

2.02 Door frames
A. Construct exterior and metal door frames to the profiles, designs and gauges as specified.
1. Exterior Frames: Hot-dip galvannealed steel, ASTM A 653, Class A60, 16 gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)] or
14 gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)] hot dipped galvannealed steel.
a. Include galvannealed components and internal reinforcements with galvannealed frames.
2. Interior Frames in Masonry: 16 gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)] cold rolled or galvannealed steel.
a. Include galvannealed components and internal reinforcements with galvannealed.
3. Interior Frames in Drywall: 16 gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)] cold rolled frames.
B. Flush Frames: knocked down for field assembly or set-up and arc-welded with temporary shipping bars. Factory die-mitered
corner connections reinforced with four integral tabs to secure and interlock at jambs to head. Unless otherwise indicated, frame
will have 2 faces and 5/8 stops. Frame depths per the architectural door schedule
1. Provide frames with a minimum of six wall anchors and two adjustable base anchors of manufacturers standard design.
C. Drywall Frames: same as flush frames, 16 gauge except:
1. Form frames with double return backbends to prevent cutting into drywall surface. Design knock down frames to be securely
installed in the rough opening after wallboard is applied.
a. Drywall frames: knocked down for field assembly. Factory die-mitered corner connections reinforced at miters, including
soffit tabs to secure and interlock at jambs to head
2. Locate adjustable anchors in each jamb 4 from the top of the door opening to hold frame in rigid alignment.
a. Provide security anchor at strike jambs on all frames 76 high and over.
3. Base anchor options:
Spec Writers Note: Choose one of the appropriate base anchoring systems.
a. Weld-in base anchor attaching plate in each jamb for field installation of loose base anchors to allow proper anchoring at
base of frame.
b. Dimpled holes and face screw application.
D. Thermal Break Frames: Provide true thermally-broken hollow metal frames in accordance with ASTM C1363.
1. Provide in either 14 gauge or 16 gauge galvannealed steel.
2. Door and non-door side of frame shall not be bridged by thermally conductive materials, including steel anchors,
reinforcements, hardware, or concrete (no grouted frames).
3. Jamb and Head components shall be factory assembled, with 3-sided frames supplied KD or Factory welded.
4. Use with thermal break threshold for external openings.
E. Prepare all frames to receive inserted type door silencers (3) per strike jamb on single doors, and (2) per head for pair of doors.
Stick on silencers are not permitted.
F. Frame Hardware Reinforcements:
1. Mortise hinge reinforcement: minimum 7 gauge [0.180 (4.7mm)].
a. Provide high frequency hinge reinforcement for top hinge on all exterior, cross corridor, and stairwell frames, in accordance
with SDI 111-H, Example A Application, where full mortise hinges are specified.
2. Strike reinforcements: minimum 16 gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)] and prepared for an ANSI-A115.1-2 strike.
3. Closer reinforcement: minimum 14 gauge [0.067 (1.7mm)] steel.
4. Projection weld hinge and strike reinforcements to the door frame.
5. Provide metal plaster guards for all mortised cutouts.
6. Provide adequate reinforcements for other hardware as required.
7. Include galvanized hardware reinforcements in all galvannealed frames.
G. Electrical Requirements:
1. General: Coordination all electrical requirements for doors and frames. Make provisions for installation of electrical items
arranged so that wiring can be readily removed and replaced.
a. Provide cutouts and reinforcements required for metal door frame to accept electric components.
371

b. Frame with Electrical Hinges: Weld UL listed grout guard cover box welded over center hinge reinforcing. Top or bottom
hinge locations are not permitted. Contractor to reference 3.01.D, for continuous hinges.
c. Provide cutouts and reinforcements required to accept security system components.
d. Refer to 08710 for electrified hardware items.
Spec Writers Note: Insert paragraph #2 when applicable monitoring switch may be required.
2. Provide mortar box, welded in head of door frame at exterior frames for future door contact switch provided by owner.
Size, type, location and conduit requirements to be provided by owner.
2.03 Construction of architectural stick components

A. Fabricate architectural stick frame assemblies from standard frame components, fabricated from 14 gauge galvanized steel A60
for exterior, and 16 gauge cold rolled steel for interior.
B. Construct architectural stick frame assemblies of standard frame components, fabricated as specified.
1. Exterior Frames: Hot-dip galvannealed steel, ASTM A 653, Class A60, 16 gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)] or 14 gauge [0.067
(1.7mm)] hot dipped galvannealed steel, with closed tops.
a. Include galvannealed components and internal reinforcements with all galvannealed frames.
2. Interior Frames in Masonry: 16 gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)] cold rolled or galvannealed steel.
a. Include galvannealed components and internal reinforcements with all galvannealed frames.
C. Frame component requirements:
1. Prepare required sticks at door openings and frame assemblies for hardware as specified.
2. Fabricate frame assemblies from three basic components:
a. Open Sections (perimeter members) identical in configuration to standard frames
b. Closed sections (intermediate members) with identical jamb depth, face dimensions, and stops as open sections.
c. Sill sections: Fabricated from galvanized steel, flush with both faces of adjacent vertical members. Cut individual
components to length and notched to assure square joints and corners.
3. Welded and ground smooth joints and corners of the frame assembly at the intersecting faces of the sections.
Externally welded face joints at meeting mullions or between mullions and other frame members on the face surfaces only.
4. Ship frame assemblies to the jobsite completely welded. Field joints will be permitted only with the size of the total assembly
exceeds shipping limitations.
5. Field splice joins will be permitted when the fabricated frame assemblies if large openings are subject to shipping limitations.
Oversized frames will be fabricated in sections designated for splicing in the field. Frames to be provided with joint
reinforcements 14 gauge, 8 long. Field weld joint reinforcement inside and tack weld outside joint at both faces, grind, and
finish smooth and uniform in appearance, after installation.
6. Pierced and dimpled glazing beads for use with manufacturers standard fasteners.
7. Provide necessary anchors for jambs, heads, and sills of assemblies.
D. Verification of field dimensions as required. Frame fabrication will not begin until these dimensions have been verified, submitted,
and approved.
2.04 Fabrication
A. Face Welded Frames:
1. Continuous face weld the joint between the head and jamb faces along their length either internally or externally.
Grind, prime paint, and finish smooth face joints with no visible face seams.
2. Externally weld, grind, prime paint, and finish smooth face joints at meeting mullions or between mullions and other
frame members as per ANSI/SDI A250.8 2003.
3. Provide two temporary steel spreaders (welded to the jambs at each rabbet of door openings) on welded frames
during shipment. Remove temporary steel spreaders prior to installation of the frame.
372

2.05 Finish
A. Doors, frames and frame components are required to be cleaned, phosphatized, and finished with one coat of baked-on rust
inhibiting prime paint in accordance with the ANSI/SDI A250.10 Test Procedures and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted
Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
Part 3: Execution
3.1 Examination
3.01 Installation
A. Install doors and frames in accordance with Steel Door Institutes recommended erection instructions for steel frames
ANSI A250.11.
B. Install label doors and frames in accordance with NFPA-80.
C. Remove temporary steel spreaders prior to installation of frames.
D. Set frames accurately in position; plumb, align and brace until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete,
remove temporary wood spreaders.
1. Field splice only at approved locations indicated on the shop drawings. Weld, grind, and finish as required to conceal evidence
of splicing on exposed faces.
E. Provide full height 3/8 to 1-1/2 strip of polystyrene insulation at frames requiring grouting where continuous hinges are specified.
Apply the strip to the back of the frame, where the hinge is to be installed, to allow for field drilling or tapping.
F. Where grouting is required in masonry, provide and install temporary bottom and intermediate wood spreaders to maintain proper
width and avoid bowing or deforming of frame members. Refer to ANSI A250.11-2001, Standard.
1. Hollow Metal Frames to receive grouting comply with ANSI/SDI Standard A250.8.2003, 4.2.2, whereby grout will be mixed
to provide a 4 maximum slump consistency and hand troweled into place. Do not use grout mixed to a thinner, pumpable
consistency is not recommended and not be used. Refer to HMMA 820 TN01-03 Grouting Hollow Metal Frames
G. Provide a vertical wood brace during grouting of frame at openings over 40 wider, to prevent sagging of frame header.
H. Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturers instructions and Section 08710 FINISH HARDWARE of these
Specifications. Install all hardware with only factory provided fasteners. Adjust door installation to provide uniform clearance at
head and jambs, to achieve maximum operational effectiveness and appearance.
3.02 Adjusting
A. Final Adjustments: Adjust operating doors and hardware items just prior to final inspection and acceptance by the Owner and
Architect. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames
that are damaged, bowed or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Prime Coat Touch-Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat, and apply touch-up
of compatible air-drying primer.
3.03 Protection
A. Provide protective measures required throughout the construction period to ensure that door and frame units will be without
damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance.
373
Architectural: Selections and usage
SDI levels and models

SDI selection and usage guide
Steelcraft product selection and usage guides have been compiled as tools for preparing architectural specifications for Hollow Metal
doors, frames and stick systems.
The tables that follow show recommended Steelcraft doors and frames for a variety of entry locations and wall construction. Locate
the entry way or wall requirements on the tables, then find the doors and frames most suitable to the application. Please refer to the
appropriate catalogue section for detailed information about each door and frame.
Recommended door usage

Core/Construction
Honeycomb,
Polystyrene, or
Polyurethane
Door style
Honeycomb
Polystyrene
Vertical
steel
stiffeners
Mineral
board
Embossed
Full
glass
entrance
Recommended gauge of frame
Level 1: Light commercial

Model 1 full flush
L20
Model 2 seamless
LF20
SL20
SL20
T20
CE20
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)] or
TF20
CF20
18 Gauge [0.042 (1.0mm)]
B18
T18
CE18
BF18 or
BW18
TF18 or
TW18
CF18
Level 2: Heavy duty commercial

Model 1 full flush
L18
Model 2 seamless
LF18 or LW18
SL18
SL18
16 Gauge [0.053 (1.3mm)]
Level 3: Extra heavy duty commercial

Model 1 full flush
L16
B16
T16
CF16
Model 2 seamless
LF16 or LW16
BF16 or
BW16
TF16 or
TW16
CF16
Model 3 stile & rail
14 Gauge or 16 Gauge [0.053"

(1.3mm)]
A14
Level 4: Maximum duty commercial

Model 1 full flush
L14
B14
B14
Model 2 seamless
LF14 or LW14
BF14 or
BW14
TF14 or
TW14
14 Gauge [0.067 (1.7mm]
This table is based on ANSI A250.8-2003 (SDI100). Recommended Specification for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
374
Door construction and design

The following tables show recommended Steelcraft doors for a variety of entry locations. Simply locate the entry way requirements
on the tables that follow, then find the doors most suitable for the specified usage. Please refer to the codes listed at right for a
description of Door Construction Level and Door Design Nomenclature.
1. Door Construction Level:
1 = Light Commercial
20 F Series [0.032
(0.8mm)]
2 = Heavy Duty
18 F Series [0.042
(1.0mm)]
3 = Extra Heavy Duty
16 F Series [0.053
(1.3mm)]
4 = Maximum Duty
14 F Series [0.067
(1.7mm)]
2. Door Design
Nomenclature:
3. Recommended Fire Ratings are based on nationally

published ratings The local Authority Having Jurisdiction
must be suited with, to insure compliance with local building
codes.
F = Flush
G = Half Glass
4. 3 Hour Fire Door Assemblies are limited to use in locations

separating two buildings. Depending on the size of any
building covered in this selection guide, a 3 hour door may
be required.
V = Vision Light
FG = Full Glass
N = Narrow Lit
5. Temperature Rise Ratings may be required on stair tower

doors. Consult the AHJ.
Apartment buildings
Door construction level 1
1
Door design nomenclature 2

4
FG
Recommended fire rating 3

N
3Hr 4
1-1/2 Hr
3/4 Hr
20 Min
Main entrance
Unit entrance
Stairwell 5
Bathroom
Bedroom
Interior rooms
Closet
Storage
Laundry/Utility
Garage/Parking
Hotels / Motels
1

4
FG

N
3Hr 4
1-1/2 Hr
3/4 Hr
20 Min
Main entrance
Unit entrance
Secondary
entrance/Exit
Stairwell 5
Fire Exit
Smoke Barrier
(Double Egress)
Bathroom
Connecting rooms
Closet
Kitchen
Office
Storage/Utility
Laundry
375
Door construction and design (continued)

Health care facilities
1

4
FG

N
3Hr 4
1-1/2 Hr
3/4 Hr
20 Min
Main entrance
Service entrance
Stairwell 5
Corridor
Bathroom
Patient room
Operating
& Exam room
Pharmacy
Recreation
& Lounges
Closet
Kitchen
Apartment buildings
1

4
FG

N
3Hr 4
1-1/2 Hr
3/4 Hr
20 Min
Main entrance
Unit entrance
Stairwell 5
Bathroom
Bedroom
Closet
Schools
1

4
FG

N
3Hr 4
1-1/2 Hr
3/4 Hr
20 Min
Main entrance
Secondary
entrance/Exit
Stairwell 5
Restroom
Classroom
Locker room
Closet
Cafeteria/Kitchen
376
Door construction and design tables (continued)

Industrial/Offices
1

4
FG

N
3Hr 4
1-1/2 Hr
3/4 Hr
20 Min
Main entrance
Secondary
entrance
Stairwell 5
Restroom
Individual office
Closet
Industrial/Manufacturing
1

4
FG

N
3Hr 4
1-1/2 Hr
3/4 Hr
20 Min
Main entrance
Secondary
entrance
Restroom
Cafeteria
Equipment
room
Boiler room
Parts crib
Tool room
Industrial/Manufacturing
1

4
FG

N
3Hr 4
1-1/2 Hr
3/4 Hr
20 Min
Main entrance
Secondary
entrance
Restroom
Cafeteria
Equipment
room
Boiler room
Parts crib
Tool room
377
Cores
Cores
4. Steel Stiffened: 20 gauge [0.032 (0.8mm)] hat shaped
steel stiffeners are welded to the inside face sheets
as internal reinforcement. The stiffeners are located a
maximum of 6 (152.4mm) on center and are welded to the
face sheet on 4 (101.6mm) centers. The areas between the
stiffeners are filled with fiberglass insulation.
1. Honeycomb: 1 (25.4mm) Kraft honeycomb core is

laminated to both face sheets with contact adhesive.
The honeycomb is phenolic resin impregnated with edges
sanded to insure ultimate lamination and performance.
To further enhance the structural ability of the door, the
honeycomb core material is subjected to several unique
operations prior to assembly. If any of these operations
are eliminated, the strength and durability of the door is
compromised.
5. Mineral Fiber: The mineral fiber core material is laminated

to both face sheets with contact adhesive. This core
provides a 250F (121C) Temperature Rise rating or 450F
(232C) depending on hardware application. See Fire Rated
products section for additional information.
2. Polystyrene: for exterior applications in extreme weather

conditions.
3. Polyurethane: for exterior applications in arctic weather
conditions. This core is not available Fire Rated.
Door cores
Standard/Optional core
Series
Honeycomb
Polystyrene
Polyurethane
Steel
stiffened
Edge construction
Mineral
fiber
Visible
seam
Epoxy
filled
Welded
Edge features
Lock
1/8 in 2
bevel
Hinge
Square
1/8 in 2
bevel
Square
A14
B
CE
H
L
PW
SL
T
Standard
378
Optional
Wall construction
F, FN, MU, FE, and DE Series flush frames

The following table shows recommended Steelcraft frames for a variety of wall constructions. Locate the wall requirements on the
table that follows, then find the frame most suitable for the specified usage.
Flush (F, FN, MU, FE, and DE Series) frames

Frame depth (size of frame to specify)
Wall detail and type
4-3/4
(121mm)
5-3/4
(146mm)
6-3/4
(171mm)
7-3/4
(197mm)
8-3/4
(222mm)
Wrap around concrete block

4 (101.6mm) masonry unit
Butted masonry
Cavity wall, 4 (101.6mm) masonry units
Concrete block and tile
4 (101.6mm) masonry unit, brick veneer plater inside
4 (101.6mm) masonry unit, brick veneer
Cavity wall, 4 (101.6mm) masonry unit, brick veneer
Exisiting wall
Poured concrete or contrete block
Wood/steel stud walls
2 x 3 (50.8mm x 76.2mm) wood stud, 1/2 (12.7mm) wallboard ea.
Closed steel stud, gypsum
2 x 4 (50.8mm x 76.2mm) wood stud gypsum
2 x 4 (50.8mm x 76.2mm) wood stud, brick veneer
2 x 4 (50.8mm x 76.2mm) wood stud, 5/8 (15.8mm) gypsum
2 x 4 (50.8mm x 76.2mm) wood stud,
1/2 (12.7mm) & 5/8 (15.8mm) gypsum both sides
Notes:
1. Size of frame to specify will vary with stud size.
2. Frames can also be used in wall conditions other than those shown above.
3. Frames for these walls can be KD (knock-down) or SUA (set-up and welded).
379
Wall construction
DW and K Series drywall frames

The following table shows recommended Steelcraft frames for a variety of steel and wood stud drywall wall constructions. Locate
the wall requirements on the table that follows, then find the frame most suitable for the specified usage.
Drywall (DW and K Series) frames

Stud size
Stud type
Thickness Drywall
Thickness wall
Frame depth
Size of frame to specify
1 Layer of gypsum board each side of the wall

1-5/8 (41.2mm)
Steel
1/2 (12.7mm)
2-5/8 (66.6mm)
3-5/8 (92.0mm)
1-5/8 (41.2mm)
Steel
5/8 (15.8mm)
2-7/8 (73.0mm)
3-7/8 (98.4mm)
2-1/2 (63.5mm)
Wood or steel
1/2 (12.7mm)
3-1/2 (88.9mm)
4-1/2 (114.3mm)
2-1/2 (63.5mm)
Wood or steel
5/8 (15.8mm)
3-3/4 (95.2mm)
4-3/4 (120.6mm)
2-1/2 (63.5mm)
Wood or steel
3/4 (19.0mm)
4 (101.6mm)
5 (127.0mm)
3-1/2 (88.9mm)
Wood
1/2 (12.7mm)
4-1/2 (114.3mm)
5-1/2 (139.7mm)
3-1/2 (88.9mm)
Wood
5/8 (15.8mm)
4-3/4 (120.6mm)
5-3/4 (146.0mm)
3-5/8 (92.0mm)
Steel
5/8 (15.8mm)
4-7/8 (123.8mm)
5-7/8 (149.2mm)
1 Layer of gypsum board one side of the wall

2-1/2 (63.5mm)
Wood or steel
1/2 (12.7mm)
4 (101.6mm)
5 (127.0mm)
3-1/2 (88.9mm)
Wood
1/2 (12.7mm)
5 (127.0mm)
6 (152.4mm)
5/8 (15.8mm)
5 (127.0mm)
6 (152.4mm)
2 Layers of gypsum board each side of the wall

2-1/2 (63.5mm)
Wood or steel
3 Layers of gypsum board each side of the wall

3-5/8 (92.0mm)
Steel
5/8 (15.8mm)
6-1/8 (155.5mm)
7-1/8 (180.9mm)
1-5/8 (41.2mm)
Steel
1/2 (12.7mm)
4-5/8 (117.4mm)
5/8 (15.8mm)
Notes:
1. Size of frame to specify will vary with stud size.
2. Frames can also be used in wall conditions other than those shown above.
3. Frames for these walls can be KD (knock-down) or SUA (set-up and welded).
380
Architectural: Green buildings construction
LEED certification
LEED program compliance:
U.S. Green building council
LEED-NC rating system version
2.2 Statement
Recycled content
MR Credit 4.1: Recycled content: 10% (post-consumer + 1/2
pre-consumer) 1 Point.
Intent: increase demand for building products that incorporate
recycled content materials, thereby reducing impacts resulting
from extraction and processing of virgin materials.
Requirements: use materials with recycled content such that
the sum of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of
the pre-consumer content constitutes at least 10% (based
on cost) of the total value of the materials in the project.
The recycled content value of a material assembly shall be
determined by weight. The recycled fraction of the assembly
is then multiplied by the cost of assembly to determine the
recycled content value.
* Recycled content shall be defined in accordance with the
international organization of standards document, ISO
14021environmental labels and declarationsself-declared
environmental claims (type ii environmental labeling).
Post-consumer material is defined as waste material generated
by households or by commercial, industrial and institutional
facilities in their role as end-users of the product, which can no
longer be used for its intended purpose.
Pre-consumer material is defined as material diverted from
the waste stream during the manufacturing process. Excluded
is reutilization of materials such as rework, regrind or scrap
generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within
the same process that generated it.
MR Credit 4.2: Recycled content: 20% (post-consumer + 1/2
pre-consumer). 1 Point in addition to MR Credit 4.1.
Requirements: use materials with recycled content such that
the sum of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half
of the pre-consumer content constitutes an additional 10%
beyond MR Credit 4.1 (Total of 20%, based on cost) of the total
value of the materials in the project.
U.S. Green building council:

LEED-NC rating system version
2.2 Statement
Regional material
MR Credit 5.1: Regional materials: 10% extracted, processed,
and manufactured regionally 1 Point.
Intent: increase demand for building materials and products
that are extracted and manufactured within the region, thereby
supporting the use of indigenous resources and reducing the
environmental impacts resulting from transportation.
Requirements: use building materials or products that
have been extracted, harvested or recovered, as well as
manufactured, within 500 miles of the project site for a
minimum of 10% (based on cost) of the total materials value.
If only a fraction of a product or material is extracted/
harvested/recovered and manufactured locally, then only that
percentage (by weight) shall contribute to the regional value.
MR Credit 5.2: Regional materials: 20% extracted, processed
& manufactured regionally. 1 Point in addition to MR Credit 5.1.
Intent: increase demand for building materials and products
that are extracted and manufactured within the region, thereby
supporting the use of indigenous resources and reducing the
environmental impacts resulting from transportation.
Requirements: use building materials or products that
have been extracted, harvested or recovered, as well as
manufactured, within 500 miles of the project site for an
additional 10% beyond MR Credit 5.1 (Total of 20%, based
on cost) of the total materials value. If only a fraction of the
material is extracted/harvested/recovered and manufactured
locally, then only that percentage (by weight) shall contribute
to the regional value.
Information found in our LEED brochure outlines the Allegion
brands and products that may support MR Credit 5.1 and MR
Credit 5.2 depending on the location of the specific project
being certified.
Note: For our LEED brochure, go to http://us.allegion.com,
search LEED to find current Recycle Content and Regional
Material for LEED program compliance.
Note: For our LEED brochure, go to http://us.allegion.com,

search LEED to find current Recycle Content and Regional
Material for LEED program compliance.
381
Architectural: Green buildings construction
382
About Allegion
Allegion (NYSE: ALLE) creates peace of mind by pioneering safety and security.
As a $2 billion provider of security solutions for homes and businesses, Allegion
employs more than 8,000 people and sells products in more than 120 countries
across the world. Allegion comprises 27 global brands, including strategic brands
CISA, Interflex, LCN, Schlage and Von Duprin.
For more, visit www.allegion.com
2016 Allegion
005001 Book Rev. 08/16/16
allegion.com/us

Door and Frame - Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Door and Frame - Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Door and Frame - Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Doors

Technical data manual

Main table of contents

Steelcraft frame and door nomenclature......... 12

Storm resistant opening.................................... 201

Hurricane resistant opening............................. 203

A14 Series Full glass entrance doors...............125

Fire rated products.............................................297

Variations and options incl.

Three sided frames..............................................307

Lights and louvers.............................................. 159

Transom and side lights and/or panels.........335

Flush door glass lights.........................................163

Fire window frames..............................................341

Embossed door glass lights................................ 171

Smoke and draft control..................................... 347

A14 Series full glass entrance doors................ 172

Performance and finishes................................. 351

Louver prep.............................................................. 175

Errors and omissions

Technical data manual

This page intentionally left blank

Table of contents (click below or use bookmarks)

This page intentionally left blank

Section TOC Main TOC

supported by a clearly stated metric dimensional standard. All

ANSI A250.7 Nomenclature for: Standard Steel

Doors and Steel Frames

Doors and Frames

American National Standards Institute

American Society for Testing and Materials

Construction Specifications Institute

Door and Hardware Institute

Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association

National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

National Fire Protection Association

Steelcraft is a long-standing and very involved member of several

Steel Door Institute

Steel Door Institute

Warnock Hersey (Intertek ETL SEMKO)

Errors and omissions

Steelcraft Metric Policy

Main TOC Section TOC

Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy and

General information: Technical publications

Recommended Standard Door Type Nomenclature

SDI Technical publications

Free downloads of these documents are available from

Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Standard Steel

Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames

Standard Steel Doors and Frames for Modular Masonry

Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Standard Steel

Recommended Standard Steel Door Frame Details

Recommended Standard Details for Dutch Doors

Recommended Louver Details for Standard Steel Doors

Recommended Door, Frame and Hardware Schedule for

Recommended Guidelines for The Use of Gasketing and

Listed here, and on the following page, are the current

SDI in respect to weather-stripping of standard steel doors and

Recommended Existing Wall Anchors for Standard Steel Doors